FCC ID: TX2-RTL8822BE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac RTL8822BE Combo module

 

User Guide Copyright 2019 HP Development Company, L.P. AMD is a trademark of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license. Windows is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: March 2019 Document Part Number: L51955-001 Product notice Software terms By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a full refund subject to the refund policy of your seller. For any further information or to request a full refund of the price of the computer, please contact your seller. This guide describes features that are common to most products. Some features may not be available on your computer. Not all features are available in all editions or versions of Windows. Systems may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers, software or BIOS update to take full advantage of Windows functionality. Windows 10 is automatically updated, which is always enabled. ISP fees may apply and additional requirements may apply over time for updates. Go to http://www.microsoft.com for details. To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select User Guides. Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to come into contact with the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950-1). iii iv Safety warning notice Table of contents 1 Getting started ............................................................................................................................................. 1 Best practices ......................................................................................................................................................... 1 More HP resources ................................................................................................................................................. 2 2 Getting to know your computer ...................................................................................................................... 3 Locating hardware ................................................................................................................................................. 3 Locating software .................................................................................................................................................. 3 Right side ............................................................................................................................................................... 4 Left side ................................................................................................................................................................. 5 Display .................................................................................................................................................................... 6 Keyboard area ........................................................................................................................................................ 7 TouchPad ............................................................................................................................................. 7 Lights ................................................................................................................................................... 8 Buttons, speakers, and fingerprint reader .......................................................................................... 9 Special keys ....................................................................................................................................... 10 Action keys ........................................................................................................................................ 11 Bottom ................................................................................................................................................................. 12 Labels ................................................................................................................................................................... 13 3 Connecting to a network .............................................................................................................................. 15 Connecting to a wireless network ....................................................................................................................... 15 Using the wireless controls ............................................................................................................... 15 Airplane mode key .......................................................................................................... 15 Operating system controls ............................................................................................. 15 Connecting to a WLAN ....................................................................................................................... 16 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) .......................................................................... 17 Using GPS (select products only) ...................................................................................................... 17 Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) ................................................................. 17 Connecting Bluetooth devices ........................................................................................ 17 Connecting to a wired networkLAN (select products only) ............................................................................. 18 4 Enjoying entertainment features .................................................................................................................. 19 Using the camera ................................................................................................................................................. 19 Using audio .......................................................................................................................................................... 19 Connecting speakers ......................................................................................................................... 19 Connecting headphones .................................................................................................................... 19 v Connecting headsets ......................................................................................................................... 20 Using sound settings ......................................................................................................................... 20 Using video .......................................................................................................................................................... 20 Using data transfer .............................................................................................................................................. 20 Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port ......................................................................................... 21 5 Navigating the screen .................................................................................................................................. 22 Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures ........................................................................................................ 22 Tap ..................................................................................................................................................... 22 Two-finger pinch zoom ..................................................................................................................... 23 Two-finger slide (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) ...................................................................... 23 Two-finger tap (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) ........................................................................ 23 Three-finger tap (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) ..................................................................... 24 Four-finger tap (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) ....................................................................... 24 Three-finger swipe (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) ................................................................. 25 Four-finger swipe (Precision TouchPad) ........................................................................................... 25 One-finger slide (touch screen) ......................................................................................................... 26 Using an optional keyboard or mouse ................................................................................................................. 26 Using an on-screen keyboard (select products only) .......................................................................................... 26 6 Managing power .......................................................................................................................................... 27 Using Sleep and Hibernation ............................................................................................................................... 27 Initiating and exiting Sleep ............................................................................................................... 27 Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) ................................................................. 28 Shutting down (turning off) the computer .......................................................................................................... 28 Using the Power icon and Power Options ............................................................................................................ 29 Running on battery power ................................................................................................................................... 29 Using HP Fast Charge (select products only) .................................................................................... 29 Displaying battery charge ................................................................................................................. 30 Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only) .................................. 30 Conserving battery power ................................................................................................................. 30 Identifying low battery levels ........................................................................................................... 30 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................................................ 31 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ................................... 31 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ................................. 31 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation .................. 31 Factory-sealed battery ...................................................................................................................... 31 Running on external power ................................................................................................................................. 31 vi 7 Maintaining your computer .......................................................................................................................... 33 Improving performance ....................................................................................................................................... 33 Using Disk Defragmenter .................................................................................................................. 33 Using Disk Cleanup ............................................................................................................................ 33 Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) ................................................................................ 33 Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status .............................................................................. 34 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................................... 34 Cleaning your computer ...................................................................................................................................... 34 Cleaning procedures .......................................................................................................................... 34 Cleaning the display ........................................................................................................ 35 Cleaning the sides or cover ............................................................................................. 35 Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse (select products only) ............................. 35 Traveling with or shipping your computer .......................................................................................................... 35 8 Securing your computer and information ...................................................................................................... 37 Using passwords .................................................................................................................................................. 37 Setting Windows passwords ............................................................................................................. 37 Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords ............................................................................................. 38 Using Windows Hello (select products only) ....................................................................................................... 39 Using Internet security software ......................................................................................................................... 39 Using antivirus software ................................................................................................................... 39 Using firewall software ..................................................................................................................... 39 Installing software updates ................................................................................................................................. 40 Using HP Device as a Service (select products only) ........................................................................................... 40 Securing your wireless network .......................................................................................................................... 40 Backing up your software applications and information .................................................................................... 40 Using an optional security cable (select products only) ..................................................................................... 40 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) ............................................................................................................................. 41 Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) ................................................................................................................................ 41 Updating Setup Utility (BIOS) .............................................................................................................................. 41 Determining the BIOS version ........................................................................................................... 41 Downloading a BIOS update .............................................................................................................. 42 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics .............................................................................................................. 43 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) ................................................................. 43 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows ....................................................................... 43 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows version ....................... 44 Downloading HP Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number

(select products only) ..................................................................................................... 44 vii Installing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows ............................................................................. 44 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ............................................................................................................. 44 Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ....................................................................................... 45 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive .............................................. 45 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version .............................. 45 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number

(select products only) ..................................................................................................... 45 Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) ............................................. 46 Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ................................................................. 46 Downloading the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version ................. 46 Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number ............................................................................................................................ 46 Customizing Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings .................................................... 46 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering ......................................................................................................... 48 Backing up information and creating recovery media ........................................................................................ 48 Using Windows tools ......................................................................................................................... 48 Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only) ..... 48 Restoring and recovery ........................................................................................................................................ 49 Restoring, resetting, and refreshing using Windows tools .............................................................. 49 Recovering using HP Recovery media ............................................................................................... 49 Changing the computer boot order ................................................................................................... 49 12 Specifications ............................................................................................................................................ 50 Input power .......................................................................................................................................................... 50 Operating environment ....................................................................................................................................... 51 13 Electrostatic discharge .............................................................................................................................. 52 14 Accessibility .............................................................................................................................................. 53 Accessibility ......................................................................................................................................................... 53 Finding the technology tools you need ............................................................................................ 53 Our commitment ............................................................................................................................... 53 International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) ....................................................... 53 Finding the best assistive technology .............................................................................................. 54 Assessing your needs ..................................................................................................... 54 Accessibility for HP products .......................................................................................... 54 Standards and legislation .................................................................................................................................... 55 Standards .......................................................................................................................................... 55 Mandate 376 EN 301 549 ............................................................................................ 55 viii Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) ................................................................ 55 Legislation and regulations .............................................................................................................. 55 United States ................................................................................................................... 56 21st Century Communications and Video Accessibility Act (CVAA) ............................... 56 Canada ............................................................................................................................. 56 Europe ............................................................................................................................. 57 United Kingdom .............................................................................................................. 57 Australia .......................................................................................................................... 57 Worldwide ....................................................................................................................... 57 Useful accessibility resources and links .............................................................................................................. 58 Organizations .................................................................................................................................... 58 Educational institutions .................................................................................................................... 58 Other disability resources ................................................................................................................. 58 HP links .............................................................................................................................................. 58 Contacting support .............................................................................................................................................. 59 Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 60 ix x 1 Getting started This computer is a powerful tool designed to enhance your work and entertainment. Read this chapter to learn about best practices after you set up your computer, fun things to do with your computer, and where to find additional HP resources. Best practices After you set up and register the computer, we recommend the following steps to get the most out of your smart investment:

Back up your hard drive by creating recovery media. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 48. If you havent already done so, connect to a wired or wireless network. See details in Connecting to a network on page 15. Become familiar with the computer hardware and software. For more information, see Getting to know your computer on page 3 and Enjoying entertainment features on page 19. Update or purchase antivirus software. See Using antivirus software on page 39. Best practices 1 More HP resources To locate resources that provide product details, how-to information, and more, use this table. Contents Overview of computer setup and features Online chat with an HP technician Support telephone numbers Replacement parts videos (select products only) Maintenance and service guides HP service center locations Proper workstation setup Guidelines for posture and work habits that increase your comfort and decrease your risk of injury Electrical and mechanical safety information Important regulatory notices, including information about proper battery disposal, if needed. Specific warranty information about this computer Table 1-1 Additional information Resource Setup Instructions HP support For HP support, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Safety & Comfort Guide To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. or Go to http://www.hp.com/ergo. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the Internet to access the latest version of the user guide. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices To access this document:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. Limited Warranty*

To access this document:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. or Go to http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the Internet to access the latest version of the user guide.

*You can find your HP Limited Warranty located with the user guides on your product and/or on the CD or DVD provided in the box. In some countries or regions, HP may provide a printed warranty in the box. For countries or regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you can request a copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. For products purchased in Asia Pacific, you can write to HP at POD, PO Box 161, Kitchener Road Post Office, Singapore 912006. Include your product name, and your name, phone number, and postal address. 2 Chapter 1 Getting started 2 Getting to know your computer Your computer features top-rated components. This chapter provides details about your components, where they are located, and how they work. Locating hardware To find out what hardware is installed on your computer:

Type device manager in the taskbar search box, and then select the Device Manager app. A list displays all the devices installed on your computer. For information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number, press fn+esc

(select products only). Locating software To find out what software is installed on your computer:

Right-click the Start button, and then select Apps and Features. Locating hardware 3 Right side Component Description

(1)

(2) Camera privacy switch Turns the camera off and on. For more information, see Using the camera NOTE:

on page 19. Memory card reader Reads optional memory cards that enable you to store, manage, share, or access information.

(3) USB Type-C port with HP Sleep and Charge

(4) USB SuperSpeed port with HP Sleep and Charge

(5) AC adapter and battery light To insert a card:

1. 2. Hold the card label-side up, with connectors facing the computer. Insert the card into the memory card reader, and then press in on the card until it is firmly seated. To remove a card:

Press in on the card, and then remove it from the memory card reader. Connects a USB device that has a Type-C connector, provides data transfer, and even when the computer is off, charges most products such as a cell phone, camera, activity tracker, or smartwatch. and Connects a display device that has a USB Type-C connector, providing DisplayPort output. NOTE: Cables and/or adapters (purchased separately) may be required. Connects a USB device, provides high-speed data transfer, and even when the computer is off, charges most products such as a cell phone, camera, activity tracker, or smartwatch. White: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is fully charged. Blinking white: The AC adapter is disconnected and the battery has reached a low battery level. Amber: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is charging. 4 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Component Description Off: The battery is not charging.

(6) Power connector Connects an AC adapter. Left side Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) USB SuperSpeed port Connects a USB device, such as a cell phone, camera, activity tracker, or smartwatch, and provides high-speed data transfer. Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in (microphone) combo jack Power button light Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional standalone microphones. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state, a power-

saving state. The computer shuts off power to the display and other unneeded components. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Hibernation is a power-saving state that uses the least amount of power. Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Left side 5 Display Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) WLAN antennas*

Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs). Internal microphones Record sound. Camera light Camera On: The camera is in use. Allows you to video chat, record video, and record still images. To use your camera, see Using the camera on page 19. Some cameras also allow a facial recognition logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. For more information, see Using Windows Hello (select products only) on page 39. NOTE: Camera functions vary depending on the camera hardware and software installed on your product.

*The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. 6 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Keyboard area TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3) TouchPad zone Description Reads your finger gestures to move the pointer or activate items on the screen. For more information, see Using TouchPad and touch NOTE:

screen gestures on page 22. Left TouchPad button Right TouchPad button Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Keyboard area 7 Lights Component Description

(1) Caps lock light

(2) Mute light On: Caps lock is on, which switches the key input to all capital letters. On: Computer sound is off. Off: Computer sound is on. 8 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Buttons, speakers, and fingerprint reader Component

(1)

(2) Speakers Fingerprint reader Description Produce sound. Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. To use the fingerprint reader, place your finger on the fingerprint reader until it reads your fingerprint. See Using Windows Hello (select products only) on page 39 for details. IMPORTANT: To prevent fingerprint logon issues, make sure when you register your fingerprint that all sides of your finger are registered by the fingerprint reader. Keyboard area 9 Special keys Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes specific functions when pressed in combination with another key. Windows key Opens the Start menu. NOTE: Pressing the Windows key again will close the Start menu. Action keys Execute frequently used system functions. NOTE: On select products, the f5 action key turns the keyboard backlight feature off or on. 10 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Action keys An action key performs the function indicated by the icon on the key. To determine which keys are on your product, see Special keys on page 10. To use an action key, press and hold the key. Icon Description Helps prevent side-angle viewing from onlookers. If needed, decrease or increase brightness for well-lit or darker environments. Press the key again to turn off the privacy screen. Decreases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Opens the How to get help in Windows 10 webpage. Switches the screen image between display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, repeatedly pressing this key alternates the screen image from the computer display to the monitor display to a simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. Turns the keyboard backlight off or on. On select products, you can adjust the brightness of the keyboard backlight. Press the key repeatedly to adjust the brightness from high (when you first start up the computer), to low, to off. After you adjust the keyboard backlight setting, the backlight will revert to your previous setting each time you turn on the computer. The keyboard backlight will turn off after 30 seconds of inactivity. To turn the keyboard backlight back on, press any key or tap the TouchPad (select products only). To conserve battery power, turn off this feature. Plays the previous track of an audio CD or the previous section of a DVD or a Blu-ray Disc (BD). Starts, pauses, or resumes playback of an audio CD, a DVD, or a BD. Plays the next track of an audio CD or the next section of a DVD or a BD. Stops audio or video playback of a CD, a DVD, or a BD. Decreases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Increases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Keyboard area 11 Icon Description Mutes or restores speaker sound. Turns the airplane mode and wireless feature on or off. NOTE: The airplane mode key is also referred to as the wireless button. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up before a wireless connection is possible. Bottom Component

(1)

(2) Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components. Description NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Speakers Produce sound. 12 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Labels may be in paper form or imprinted on the product. IMPORTANT: Check the following locations for the labels described in this section: the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, on the back of the display, or on the bottom of a tablet kickstand. Service labelProvides important information to identify your computer. When contacting support, you may be asked for the serial number, the product number, or the model number. Locate this information before you contact support. Your service label will resemble one of the examples shown below. Refer to the illustration that most closely matches the service label on your computer. Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) HP product name Model number Product ID Serial number Warranty period Component

(1)

(2) HP product name Product ID Labels 13 Component

(3)

(4) Serial number Warranty period Regulatory label(s)Provide(s) regulatory information about the computer. Wireless certification label(s)Provide(s) information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings for the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. 14 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer 3 Connecting to a network Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter will help you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

WLAN deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, the mobile wireless device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband ModuleGives you wireless connectivity over a wireless wide area network

(WWAN), a much larger area. Mobile network operators install base stations (similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close togethertypically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using one or more of these features:

Airplane mode key (also called wireless button or wireless key) (referred to in this chapter as airplane mode key) Operating system controls Airplane mode key The computer may have an airplane mode key, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights. All the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. Operating system controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, and diagnose and repair network problems. To use operating system controls:

On the taskbar, right-click the network status icon, and then select Open Network & Internet settings. or On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then select Network & Internet settings. Connecting to a wireless network 15 Connecting to a WLAN NOTE: When you are setting up Internet access in your home, you must establish an account with an Internet service provider (ISP). To purchase Internet service and a modem, contact a local ISP. The ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless router to the modem, and test the Internet service. To connect to a WLAN, follow these steps:

1. 2. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then connect to one of the available networks. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Enter the code, and then select Next to complete the connection. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you may be out of range of a wireless router or access point. NOTE:

If you do not see the WLAN you want to connect to:

1. 2. 3. On the taskbar, right-click the network status icon, and then select Open Network & Internet settings. or On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then select Network & Internet settings. Under the Change your network settings section, select Network and Sharing Center. Select Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed, allowing you to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the connection. After the connection is made, right-click the network status icon at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. 16 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) Your HP Mobile Broadband computer has built-in support for mobile broadband service. Your new computer, when used with a mobile operators network, gives you the freedom to connect to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network without the need for Wi-Fi hotspots. You might need the HP Mobile Broadband Module IMEI and/or MEID number to activate mobile broadband service. The number may be printed on a label located on the bottom of your computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, or on the back of the display. or 1. 2. 3. On the taskbar, select the network status icon. Select Network & Internet settings. Under the Network & Internet section, select Cellular, and then select Advanced Options. Some mobile network operators require the use of a subscriber identity module (SIM) card. A SIM card contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some computers include a SIM card that is preinstalled. If the SIM card is not preinstalled, it may be included with the HP Mobile Broadband documents provided with your computer, or the mobile network operator may provide it separately from the computer. For information about HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, see the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. Using GPS (select products only) Your computer may be equipped with a Global Positioning System (GPS) device. GPS satellites deliver location, speed, and direction information to GPS-equipped systems. To enable GPS, make sure location is enabled under the Location setting. Type location in the taskbar search box, select Location privacy settings, and then select a setting. Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) Computers (desktop, notebook) Phones (cellular, cordless, smartphone) A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:

Audio devices (headset, speakers) Imaging devices (printer, camera) External keyboard Mouse Connecting Bluetooth devices Before you can use a Bluetooth device, you must establish a Bluetooth connection. 1. 2. Type bluetooth in the taskbar search box, and then select Bluetooth and other devices settings. Enable Bluetooth, if it is not already enabled. Connecting to a wireless network 17 3. 4. Select Add Bluetooth or other device, and then in the Add a device dialog box, select Bluetooth. Select your device from the list, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE:

If the device requires verification, a pairing code is displayed. On the device you are adding, follow the on-screen instructions to verify that the code on your device matches the pairing code. For more information, refer to the documentation provided with the device. NOTE:

devices may have additional requirements; refer to the documentation provided with the device. If your device does not appear in the list, be sure that Bluetooth on that device is turned on. Some Connecting to a wired networkLAN (select products only) Use a LAN connection if you want to connect the computer directly to a router in your home (instead of working wirelessly), or if you want to connect to an existing network at your office. Connecting to a LAN requires an RJ-45 (network) cable and a network jack or an optional docking device or expansion port, if there is no RJ-45 jack on the computer. To connect the network cable, follow these steps:

1. 2. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer. Plug the other end of the network cable into a network wall jack (2) or router. If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (3), which prevents interference from NOTE:

TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable toward the computer. 18 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network 4 Enjoying entertainment features Use your HP computer as an entertainment hub to socialize via the camera, enjoy and manage your music, and download and watch movies. Or, to make your computer an even more powerful entertainment center, connect external devices like a monitor, projector, TV, speakers, or headphones. Using the camera Your computer has one or more cameras that enable you to connect with others for work or play. Cameras may be front facing, rear facing, or pop up. To determine which camera(s) are on your product, see Getting to know your computer on page 3. Most cameras allow you to video chat, record video, and record still images. Some also provide HD (high-

definition) capability, apps for gaming, or facial recognition software like Windows Hello. See Securing your computer and information on page 37 for details about using Windows Hello. On select products, you can also enhance your camera privacy by turning the camera off. By default, the camera is turned on. To turn off your camera, slide the camera privacy switch toward the icon next to the switch. To turn the camera back on, slide the switch away from the icon. To use your camera, type camera in the taskbar search box, and then select Camera from the list of applications. Using audio You can download and listen to music, stream audio content (including radio) from the web, record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. You can also play music CDs on the computer (on select products) or attach an external optical drive to play CDs. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach external audio devices such as speakers or headphones. Connecting speakers You can attach wired speakers to your computer by connecting them to a USB port or to the audio-out

(headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer or on a docking station. To connect wireless speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Before connecting speakers, lower the volume setting. Connecting headphones WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this document:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. You can connect wired headphones to the headphone jack or to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) combo jack on your computer. To connect wireless headphones to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Using the camera 19 Connecting headsets WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this document:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. Headphones combined with a microphone are called headsets. You can connect wired headsets to the audio-

out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer. To connect wireless headsets to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Using sound settings Use sound settings to adjust system volume, change system sounds, or manage audio devices. To view or change sound settings:

Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. Your computer may include an enhanced sound system by Bang & Olufsen, B&O Play, or another provider. As a result, your computer may include advanced audio features that can be controlled through an audio control panel specific to your sound system. Use the audio control panel to view and control audio settings. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select the audio control panel specific to your system. Using video Your computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer when you are not connected to a network. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the computer to connect an external monitor, projector, or TV. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. For information about using your USB Type-C features, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Using data transfer Your computer is a powerful entertainment device that enables you to transfer photos, videos, and movies from your USB devices to view on your computer. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the USB Type-C ports on the computer to connect a USB device, such as a cell phone, camera, activity tracker, or smartwatch, and transfer the files to your computer. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. 20 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features For information about using your USB Type-C features, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port NOTE: To connect a USB Type-C device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable, purchased separately. 1. Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB Type-C port on the computer. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the external device. Using data transfer 21 5 Navigating the screen Use touch gestures on the TouchPad. Use touch gestures directly on the computer screen. You can navigate the computer screen using one or more of the following methods:

Use an optional mouse or keyboard (purchased separately). Use an on-screen keyboard. Use a pointing stick. Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures The TouchPad helps you navigate the computer screen and control the pointer using simple touch gestures. You can also use the left and right TouchPad buttons as you would use the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. To navigate a touch screen (select products only), touch the screen directly using gestures described in this chapter. To customize gestures and see videos of how they work, type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, and then select Hardware and Sound. Under Devices and Printers, select Mouse. Some products include a Precision TouchPad, which provides enhanced gesture functionality. To determine if you have a Precision TouchPad and find additional information, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. NOTE: Unless noted, gestures can be used on both the TouchPad and a touch screen. Tap Point to an item on the screen, and then tap one finger on the TouchPad zone or touch screen to select the item. Double-tap an item to open it. 22 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Two-finger pinch zoom Use the two-finger pinch zoom to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the TouchPad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers together. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the TouchPad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers apart. Two-finger slide (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) Place two fingers slightly apart on the TouchPad zone and then drag them up, down, left, or right to move up, down, or sideways on a page or image. Two-finger tap (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) Tap two fingers on the TouchPad zone to open the options menu for the selected object. NOTE: The two-finger tap performs the same function as right-clicking with a mouse. Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures 23 Three-finger tap (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) By default, the three-finger tap opens Cortana, a voice-activated virtual assistant. Tap three fingers on the TouchPad zone to perform the gesture. To change the function of this gesture on a Precision TouchPad, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Three-finger gestures, in the Taps box, select a gesture setting. Four-finger tap (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) By default, the four-finger tap opens the Action Center. Tap four fingers on the TouchPad zone to perform the gesture. To change the function of this gesture on a Precision TouchPad, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Four-finger gestures, in the Taps box, select a gesture setting. 24 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Three-finger swipe (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) Swipe 3 fingers away from you to see all open windows. By default, the three-finger swipe switches between open apps and the desktop. Swipe 3 fingers left or right to switch between open windows. Swipe 3 fingers toward you to show the desktop. To change the function of this gesture on a Precision TouchPad, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Three-finger gestures, in the Swipes box, select a gesture setting. Four-finger swipe (Precision TouchPad) Swipe 4 fingers away from you to see all open windows. By default, the four-finger swipe switches between open desktops. Swipe 4 fingers left or right to switch between desktops. Swipe 4 fingers toward you to show the desktop. To change the function of this gesture, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Four-finger gestures, in the Swipes box, select a gesture setting. Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures 25 One-finger slide (touch screen) Use the one-finger slide to pan or scroll through lists and pages, or to move an object. To scroll across the screen, lightly slide one finger across the screen in the direction you want to move. To move an object, press and hold your finger on an object, and then drag your finger to move the object. Using an optional keyboard or mouse An optional keyboard or mouse allows you to type, select items, scroll, and perform the same functions as you do using touch gestures. The keyboard also allows you to use action keys and hot keys to perform specific functions. Using an on-screen keyboard (select products only) 1. 2. To display an on-screen keyboard, tap the keyboard icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Begin typing. NOTE: Suggested words may be displayed above the on-screen keyboard. Tap a word to select it. NOTE: Action keys and hot keys do not display or function on the on-screen keyboard. 26 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen 6 Managing power Your computer can operate on either battery power or external power. When the computer is running on battery power and an external power source is not available to charge the battery, it is important to monitor and conserve the battery charge. Some power management features described in this chapter may not be available on your computer. Using Sleep and Hibernation CAUTION: Several well-known vulnerabilities exist when a computer is in the Sleep state. To prevent an unauthorized user from accessing data on your computer, even encrypted data, HP recommends that you always initiate Hibernation instead of Sleep anytime the computer will be out of your physical possession. This practice is particularly important when you travel with your computer. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. Windows has two power-saving states, Sleep and Hibernation. SleepThe Sleep state is automatically initiated after a period of inactivity. Your work is saved to memory, allowing you to resume your work very quickly. You can also initiate Sleep manually. For more information, see Initiating and exiting Sleep on page 27. HibernationThe Hibernation state is automatically initiated if the battery reaches a critical level or the computer has been in the Sleep state for an extended period of time. In the Hibernation state, your work is saved to a hibernation file and the computer powers down. You can also initiate Hibernation manually. For more information, see Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) on page 28. Initiating and exiting Sleep Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Sleep. You can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:

Close the display (select products only). Briefly press the power button (select products only). Press the Sleep hot key (select products only); for example, fn+f1or fn+f12. Briefly press the power button. You can exit Sleep in any of the following ways:

Tap the TouchPad (select products only). Press a key on the keyboard (select products only). If the computer is closed, raise the display (select products only). When the computer exits Sleep, your work returns to the screen. NOTE:

before your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Sleep, you must enter your Windows password Using Sleep and Hibernation 27 Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) You can enable user-initiated Hibernation and change other power settings and timeouts using Power Options. 1. 2. 3. Right-click the Power icon

, and then select Power Options. In the left pane, select Choose what the power buttons do (wording may vary by product). Depending on your product, you can enable Hibernation for battery power or external power in any of the following ways:

Power buttonUnder Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording may vary by product), select When I press the power button, and then select Hibernate. Sleep button (select products only)Under Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording may vary by product), select When I press the sleep button, and then select Hibernate. Lid (select products only)Under Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording may vary by product), select When I close the lid, and then select Hibernate. Power menuSelect Change Settings that are currently unavailable, and then, under Shutdown settings, select the Hibernate check box. The Power menu can be accessed by selecting the Start button. Select Save changes. 4. To initiate Hibernation, use the method that you enabled in step 3. To exit Hibernation, briefly press the power button. NOTE:

password before your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Hibernation, you must enter your Windows Shutting down (turning off) the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. Be sure to save your work before shutting down the computer. The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and the computer. Shut down the computer when it will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period. The recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command. NOTE:

pressing the power button. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, first exit Sleep or Hibernation by briefly 1. 2. Save your work and close all open programs. Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. 28 Chapter 6 Managing power If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. If your computer has a user-replaceable battery (select products only), disconnect the computer from external power, and then remove the battery. Press and hold the power button for at least 10 seconds. Using the Power icon and Power Options The Power icon is located on the Windows taskbar. The Power icon allows you to quickly access power settings and view the remaining battery charge. To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon

. To use Power Options, right-click the Power icon

, and then select Power Options. Different Power icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. Placing the mouse pointer over the icon reveals a message if the battery has reached a low or critical battery level. Running on battery power WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is off and unplugged from external power, the battery in the computer slowly discharges. The computer displays a message when the battery reaches a low or critical battery level. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, screen brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. NOTE: When you disconnect external power, the display brightness is automatically decreased to conserve battery charge. Select computer products can switch between graphic controllers to conserve battery charge. Using HP Fast Charge (select products only) The HP Fast Charge feature allows you to quickly charge your computer battery. Charging time may vary by

+/- 10%. Depending on your computer model and the HP AC adapter provided with your computer, HP Fast Charge operates in one or more of the following ways:

When the remaining battery charge is between zero and 50%, the battery will charge to 50% of full capacity in no more than 30 to 45 minutes, depending on your computer model. When the remaining battery charge is between zero and 90%, the battery will charge to 90% of full capacity in no more than 90 minutes. To use HP Fast Charge, shut down your computer, and then connect the AC adapter to your computer and to external power. Using the Power icon and Power Options 29 Displaying battery charge To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon

. Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only) To access battery information:

1. 2. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select Troubleshooting and fixes, and then in the Diagnostics section, select HP Battery Check. If HP Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. HP Support Assistant provides the following tools and information about the battery:

Information about battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity HP Battery Check Conserving battery power Lower the brightness of the display. To conserve battery power and maximize battery life:

Turn off wireless devices when you are not using them. Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, such as an external hard drive connected to a USB port. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Before you leave your work, initiate Sleep or shut down the computer. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low or critical battery level, the following behavior occurs:

The battery light (select products only) indicates a low or critical battery level. or The Power icon shows a low or critical battery notification. NOTE:

on page 29. For additional information about the Power icon, see Using the Power icon and Power Options The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. 30 Chapter 6 Managing power Resolving a low battery level Resolving a low battery level when external power is available AC adapter Connect one of the following to the computer and to external power:

Optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP Optional docking device or expansion product Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation 1. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the computer and to external power. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. Factory-sealed battery To monitor the status of the battery, or if the battery is no longer holding a charge, run HP Battery Check in the HP Support Assistant app (select products only). 1. 2. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select Troubleshooting and fixes, and then in the Diagnostics section, select HP Battery Check. If HP Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. Running on external power For information about connecting to external power, refer to the Setup Instructions poster provided in the computer box. The computer does not use battery power when the computer is connected to external power with an approved AC adapter or an optional docking device or expansion product. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are aboard aircraft. When charging or calibrating a battery Connect the computer to external power under any of the following conditions:

When writing information to a disc (select products only) When installing or updating system software When updating the system BIOS Running on external power 31 When running Disk Defragmenter on computers with internal hard drives When performing a backup or recovery The battery begins to charge. When you connect the computer to external power:

The screen brightness increases. The Power icon changes appearance. The computer switches to battery power. When you disconnect external power:

The Power icon changes appearance. The screen brightness automatically decreases to conserve battery charge. 32 Chapter 6 Managing power 7 Maintaining your computer It is important to perform regular maintenance to keep your computer in optimal condition. This chapter explains how to use tools like Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. It also provides instructions for updating programs and drivers, steps to clean the computer, and tips for traveling with (or shipping) the computer. Improving performance You can improve the performance of your computer by performing regular maintenance tasks with tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. Using Disk Defragmenter HP recommends using Disk Defragmenter to defragment your hard drive at least once a month. NOTE:

It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives. To run Disk Defragmenter:

1. 2. 3. Connect the computer to AC power. Type defragment in the taskbar search box, and then select Defragment and Optimize Drives. Follow the on-screen instructions. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Use Disk Cleanup to search the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. 2. Type disk in the taskbar search box, and then select Disk Cleanup. Follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) HP 3D DriveGuard protects a hard drive by parking the drive and halting data requests under either of the following conditions:

You move the computer with the display closed while the computer is running on battery power. You drop the computer. A short time after the end of one of these events, HP 3D DriveGuard returns the hard drive to normal operation. NOTE: Only internal hard drives are protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. A hard drive installed in an optional docking device or connected to a USB port is not protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. NOTE: Because solid-state drives (SSDs) lack moving parts, HP 3D DriveGuard is unnecessary for these drives. Improving performance 33 Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status The hard drive light on the computer changes color to show that the drive in a primary hard drive bay and/or the drive in a secondary hard drive bay (select products only) is parked. Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers on a regular basis. Updates can resolve issues and bring new features and options to your computer. For example, older graphics components might not work well with the most recent gaming software. Without the latest driver, you would not be getting the most out of your equipment. Go to http://www.hp.com/support to download the latest versions of HP programs and drivers. In addition, register to receive automatic notifications when updates become available. If you would like to update your programs and drivers, follow these instructions:

1. 2. 3. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select My notebook, select the Updates tab, and then select Check for updates and messages. Follow the on-screen instructions. Cleaning your computer Alcohol-free glass-cleaning fluid Use the following products to safely clean your computer:

Solution of water and mild soap Static-free cloth wipes Dry microfiber cleaning cloth or a chamois (static-free cloth without oil) CAUTION: Avoid strong cleaning solvents or germicidal wipes that can permanently damage your computer. If you are not sure that a cleaning product is safe for your computer, check the product contents to make sure that ingredients such as alcohol, acetone, ammonium chloride, methylene chloride, hydrogen peroxide, naphtha, and hydrocarbon solvents are not included in the product. Fibrous materials, such as paper towels, can scratch the computer. Over time, dirt particles and cleaning agents can get trapped in the scratches. Cleaning procedures Follow the procedures in this section to safely clean your computer. WARNING! To prevent electric shock or damage to components, do not attempt to clean your computer while it is on. 1. 2. 3. Turn off the computer. Disconnect AC power. Disconnect all powered external devices. 34 Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not spray cleaning agents or liquids directly on any computer surface. Liquids dripped on the surface can permanently damage internal components. Cleaning the display Gently wipe the display using a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with an alcohol-free glass cleaner. Be sure that a display is dry before you close the computer. Cleaning the sides or cover To clean the sides or cover, use a soft microfiber cloth or chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously, or use an acceptable disposable wipe. NOTE: When cleaning the cover of the computer, use a circular motion to aid in removing dirt and debris. Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse (select products only) WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not allow liquids to drip between the keys. To clean the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse, use a soft microfiber cloth or a chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously. To prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles from the keyboard, use a can of compressed air with a straw extension. Traveling with or shipping your computer If you have to travel with or ship your computer, follow these tips to keep your equipment safe. Back up your information to an external drive. Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Shut down the computer. Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as memory cards. Take along a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it in with the rest of your luggage. CAUTION: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, listen for the in-flight announcement that tells you when you are allowed to use your computer. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. The use of wireless devices may be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions may apply aboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that Traveling with or shipping your computer 35 applies to the use of a wireless device in your computer, ask for authorization to use your computer before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. 36 Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer 8 Securing your computer and information Computer security is essential for protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of your information. Standard security solutions provided by the Windows operating system, HP applications, the Setup Utility (BIOS), and other third-party software can help protect your computer from a variety of risks, such as viruses, worms, and other types of malicious code. NOTE: Some security features listed in this chapter may not be available on your computer. Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information and to protect online transactions. Several types of passwords can be set. For example, when you set up your computer for the first time, you were asked to create a user password to secure your computer. Additional passwords can be set in Windows or in HP Setup Utility (BIOS), which is preinstalled on your computer. You may find it helpful to use the same password for a Setup Utility (BIOS) feature and for a Windows security feature. To create and save passwords, use the following tips:

To reduce the risk of being locked out of the computer, record each password and store it in a secure place away from the computer. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Change your passwords at least every 3 months. An ideal password is long and has letters, punctuation, symbols, and numbers. Before you send your computer for service, back up your files, delete confidential files, and then remove all password settings. For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords:

Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Setting Windows passwords Table 8-1 Types of Windows passwords and their functions Password User password Function Protects access to a Windows user account. Administrator password Protects administrator-level access to computer contents. NOTE: This password cannot be used to access Setup Utility

(BIOS) contents. Using passwords 37 Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords Table 8-2 Types of BIOS passwords and their functions Password Administrator password Power-on password Function Must be entered each time you access Setup Utility (BIOS). If you forget your administrator password, you cannot access Setup Utility (BIOS). Must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer. If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the computer. To set, change, or delete an administrator or power-on password in Setup Utility (BIOS):

IMPORTANT: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. 1. Start Setup Utility (BIOS):

Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10. Tablets without keyboards:

1. Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume up button.

- or -

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button.

- or -

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the Windows button. 2. Tap f10. 2. Select Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To save your changes, select Exit, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. 38 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information Using Windows Hello (select products only) On products equipped with a fingerprint reader or an infrared camera, you can use Windows Hello to sign in by swiping your finger or looking at the camera. To set up Windows Hello:

1. 2. 3. Select the Start button, select Settings, select Accounts, and then select Sign-in options. To add a password, select Add. Select Get Started, and then follow the on-screen instructions enroll your fingerprint or facial ID and set up a PIN. NOTE: The PIN is not limited in length. The default setting is for numbers only. To include alphabetic or special characters, select the include letters and symbols check box. Using Internet security software When you use your computer to access email, a network, or the Internet, you potentially expose your computer to computer viruses, spyware, and other online threats. To help protect your computer, Internet security software that includes antivirus and firewall features may be preinstalled on your computer as a trial offer. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses and other security risks, security software must be kept up to date. It is strongly recommended that you upgrade the security software trial offer or purchase the software of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. Using antivirus software Computer viruses can disable programs, utilities, or the operating system, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. An antivirus program may be preinstalled on your computer. It is strongly recommended that you use the antivirus program of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. For more information about computer viruses, type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Using firewall software Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be software you install on your computer and/or network, or it can be a combination of both hardware and software. There are two types of firewalls to consider:

Host-based firewallsSoftware that protects only the computer it is installed on. Network-based firewallsInstalled between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to protect all the computers on the network. When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked. Using Windows Hello (select products only) 39 Installing software updates HP, Windows, and third-party software installed on your computer should be regularly updated to correct security problems and improve software performance. IMPORTANT: Microsoft sends out alerts regarding Windows updates, which may include security updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. You can install these updates automatically. To view or change the settings:

1. 2. 3. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select Update & Security. Select Windows Update, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To schedule a time for installing updates, select Advanced options, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP Device as a Service (select products only) HP DaaS is a cloud-based IT solution that enables businesses to effectively manage and secure their company assets. HP DaaS helps protect devices against malware and other attacks, monitors device health, and helps reduce time spent solving device and security issues. You can quickly download and install the software, which is highly cost effective relative to traditional in-house solutions. For more information, go to https://www.hptouchpointmanager.com/. Securing your wireless network When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. WLANs in public areas (hotspots) like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. Backing up your software applications and information Regularly back up your software applications and information to protect them from being permanently lost or damaged through a virus attack or a software or hardware failure. Using an optional security cable (select products only) A security cable (purchased separately) is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. To connect a security cable to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. 40 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) Setup Utility, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Setup Utility (BIOS) includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of system and extended memory. NOTE: To start Setup Utility on convertible computers, your computer must be in notebook mode and you must use the keyboard attached to your notebook. Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) CAUTION: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Turn on or restart the computer and quickly press f10. or Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10 when the Start menu is displayed. Updating Setup Utility (BIOS) Updated versions of Setup Utility (BIOS) may be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Determining the BIOS version To decide whether you need to update Setup Utility (BIOS), first determine the BIOS version on your computer. To reveal the BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS), use one of these options. HP Support Assistant 1. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. 2. Select My notebook, and then select Specifications. Setup Utility (BIOS) 1. 2. 3. Start Setup Utility (BIOS) (see Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) on page 41). Select Main, and then make note of the BIOS version. Select Exit, select one of the options, and then follow the on-screen instructions. In Windows, press CTRL+Alt+S. Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) 41 To check for later BIOS versions, see Downloading a BIOS update on page 42. Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep. NOTE:

software updates, especially system BIOS updates. If your computer is connected to a network, consult the network administrator before installing any 1. 2. 3. 4. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select Updates, and then select Check for updates and messages. Follow the on-screen instructions. At the download area, follow these steps:

a. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. If the update is more recent than your BIOS version, make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that appear on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions appear, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Type file in the taskbar search box, and then select File Explorer. Select your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder that contains the update. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. 42 Chapter 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is a Windows-based utility that allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs within the Windows operating system in order to diagnose hardware failures. If HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is not installed on your computer, first you must download and install it. To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows on page 43. After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, follow these steps to access it from HP Help and Support or HP Support Assistant. 1. To access HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Help and Support:

a. b. Select the Start button, and then select HP Help and Support. Right-click HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, select More, and then select Run as administrator. or To access HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Support Assistant:

a. b. c. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select Troubleshooting and fixes. Select Diagnostics, and then select HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows. 2. When the tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test at any time, select Cancel. When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit Failure ID code is generated. The screen displays one of the following options:

A Quick Response (QR) code is displayed. With a mobile device, scan the code and then follow the on-

screen instructions. A Failure ID link is displayed. Select the link and follow the on-screen instructions. Instructions for calling support are displayed. Follow those instructions. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows download instructions are provided in English only. You must use a Windows computer to download this tool because only .exe files are provided. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) 43 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows version To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, follow these steps:

1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. Select Download HP Diagnostics Windows, and then select a location on your computer or a USB flash drive. The tool is downloaded to the selected location. Downloading HP Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number (select products only) NOTE:

product name or number. For some products, it may be necessary to download the software to a USB flash drive by using the To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Get software and drivers, select your type of product, and then enter the product name or number in the search box that is displayed. In the Diagnostics section, select Download, and then follow the on-screen instructions to select the specific Windows diagnostics version to be downloaded to your computer or USB flash drive. The tool is downloaded to the selected location. Installing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows To install HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, follow these steps:

Navigate to the folder on your computer or the USB flash drive where the .exe file was downloaded, double-click the .exe file, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI NOTE:

For Windows 10 S computers, you must use a Windows computer and a USB flash drive to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. For more information, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive on page 45. HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside the operating system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system or other software components. If your PC will not boot into Windows, you can use HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to diagnose hardware issues. When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit Failure ID code is generated. For assistance in solving the problem:

Select Get Support, and then use a mobile device to scan the QR code that displays on the next screen. The HP Customer Support - Service Center page displays, with your Failure ID and product number automatically filled in. Follow the on-screen instructions. or Contact support, and provide the Failure ID code. 44 Chapter 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics NOTE: To start diagnostics on a convertible computer, your computer must be in notebook mode, and you must use the attached keyboard. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test, press esc. Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and quickly press esc. Press f2. The BIOS searches three places for the diagnostic tools, in the following order:

a. Connected USB flash drive NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI tool to a USB flash drive, see Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version on page 45. b. c. Hard drive BIOS 3. When the diagnostic tool opens, select a language, select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the preinstall image. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive can be useful in the following situations:

HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the HP Tool partition. The hard drive is damaged. NOTE: The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI download instructions are provided in English only, and you must use a Windows computer to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version To download the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version to a USB flash drive:

1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. Select Download HP Diagnostics UEFI, and then select Run. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only) NOTE:

product name or number. For some products, it may be necessary to download the software to a USB flash drive by using the To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only) to a USB flash drive:

Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI 45 1. 2. 3. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Enter the product name or number, select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostics section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the specific UEFI Diagnostics version for your computer. Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is a firmware (BIOS) feature that downloads HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to your computer. It can then execute the diagnostics on your computer, and it may upload results to a preconfigured server. For more information about Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags, and then select Find out more. Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI NOTE: HP Remote PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is also available as a Softpaq that can be downloaded to a server. Downloading the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version To download the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version, follow these steps:

1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. Select Download Remote Diagnostics, and then select Run. Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number NOTE:

number. For some products, it may be necessary to download the software by using the product name or To download HP Remote PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Get software and drivers, select your type of product, enter the product name or number in the search box that is displayed, select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostics section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the Remote UEFI version for the product. Customizing Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings Using the Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics setting in Computer Setup (BIOS), you can perform the following customizations:

Set a schedule for running diagnostics unattended. You can also start diagnostics immediately in interactive mode by selecting Execute Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics. Set the location for downloading the diagnostic tools. This feature provides access to the tools from the HP website or from a server that has been preconfigured for use. Your computer does not require the traditional local storage (such as a disk drive or USB flash drive) to run remote diagnostics. Set a location for storing the test results. You can also set the user name and password settings used for uploads. Display status information about the diagnostics run previously. 46 Chapter 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics To customize Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Advanced, and then select Settings. 3. Make your customization selections. 4. Select Main, and then Save Changes and Exit to save your settings. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) 47 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering This chapter provides information about the following processes, which are standard procedure for most products:

Backing up your personal informationYou can use Windows tools to back up your personal information (see Using Windows tools on page 48). Creating a restore pointYou can use Windows tools to create a restore point (see Using Windows tools on page 48). Creating recovery media (select products only)You can use the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool

(select products only) to create recovery media (see Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only) on page 48). Restoring and recoveryWindows offers several options for restoring from backup, refreshing the computer, and resetting the computer to its original state (see Using Windows tools on page 48). IMPORTANT:

70% charged before you start the recovery process. If you will be performing recovery procedures on a tablet, the tablet battery must be at least IMPORTANT:

beginning any recovery process. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before Backing up information and creating recovery media Using Windows tools IMPORTANT: Windows is the only option that allows you to back up your personal information. Schedule regular backups to avoid information loss. You can use Windows tools to back up personal information and create system restore points and recovery media. NOTE:

If computer storage is 32 GB or less, Microsoft System Restore is disabled by default. For more information and steps, see the Get Help app. 1. 2. Select the Start button, and then select the Get Help app. Enter the task you want to perform. NOTE: You must be connected to the Internet to access the Get Help app. Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only) You can use the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create HP Recovery media on a bootable USB flash drive. To download the tool:

Go to the Microsoft Store and search for HP Cloud Recovery. For details, go to http://www.hp.com/

support, search for HP Cloud Recovery, and then select HP PCs -- Using the Cloud Recovery Tool

(Windows 10,7). 48 Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering NOTE:

If you cannot create recovery media yourself, contact support to obtain recovery discs. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Restoring and recovery Restoring, resetting, and refreshing using Windows tools Windows offers several options for restoring, resetting, and refreshing the computer. For details, see Using Windows tools on page 48. Recovering using HP Recovery media HP Recovery media is used to recover the original operating system and software programs that were installed at the factory. On select products, it can be created on a bootable USB flash drive using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool. For details, see Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only) on page 48. NOTE:

If you cannot create recovery media yourself, contact support to obtain recovery discs. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To recover your system:

Insert the HP Recovery media, and then restart the computer. Changing the computer boot order If your computer does not restart using the HP Recovery media, you can change the computer boot order. This is the order of devices listed in BIOS where the computer looks for startup information. You can change the selection to an optical drive or a USB flash drive, depending on the location of your HP Recovery media. To change the boot order:

IMPORTANT:

beginning these steps. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before 1. 2. Insert the HP Recovery media. Access the system Startup menu. For computers or tablets with keyboards attached:

Turn on or restart the computer or tablet, quickly press esc, and then press f9 for boot options. For tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the tablet, quickly hold down the volume up button, and then select f9. or Turn on or restart the tablet, quickly hold down the volume down button, and then select f9. 3. Select the optical drive or USB flash drive from which you want to boot, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Restoring and recovery 49 12 Specifications Input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100240 V, 5060 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source that is supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within the following specifications. Operating voltage and current varies by platform. The voltage and current for your computer is located on the regulatory label. Table 12-1 DC power specifications Input power Rating Operating voltage and current 5 V dc @ 2 A / 12 V dc @ 3 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 3.75 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A / 15 V dc @ 3 A / 20 V dc @ 2.25 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc @ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc @ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc @ 5 A / 20 V dc @ 4.5 A 90 W USB-C 19.5 V dc @ 2.31 A 45 W 19.5 V dc @ 3.33 A 65 W 19.5 V dc @ 4.62 A 90 W 19.5 V dc @ 6.15 A 120 W 19.5 V dc @ 6.9 A 135 W 19.5 V dc @ 7.70 A 150 W 19.5 V dc @ 10.3 A 200 W 19.5 V dc @ 11.8 A 230 W 19.5 V dc @ 16.92 A 330 W DC plug of external HP power supply (select products only) NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. 50 Chapter 12 Specifications Operating environment Table 12-2 Operating environment specifications Factor Temperature Operating Nonoperating Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Metric U.S. 5C to 35C

-20C to 60C 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

41F to 95F

-4F to 140F 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Operating Nonoperating

-15 m to 3,048 m

-15 m to 12,192 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft

-50 ft to 40,000 ft Operating environment 51 13 Electrostatic discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. IMPORTANT: To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, first be sure that it is properly grounded. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 52 Chapter 13 Electrostatic discharge 14 Accessibility Accessibility HP is working to weave diversity, inclusion and work/life into the fabric of our company, so it is reflected in everything we do. Here are some examples of how we are putting differences to work to create an inclusive environment focused on connecting people to the power of technology throughout the world. Finding the technology tools you need Technology can unleash your human potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology helps increase, maintain, and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology. For more information, see Finding the best assistive technology on page 54. Our commitment HP is committed to providing products and services that are accessible for people with disabilities. This commitment supports our company's diversity objectives and helps us ensure that the benefits of technology are available to all. Our accessibility goal is to design, produce, and market products and services that can be effectively used by everyone, including people with disabilities, either on a stand-alone basis or with appropriate assistive devices. To achieve our goal, this Accessibility Policy establishes seven key objectives to guide our actions as a company. All HP managers and employees are expected to support these objectives and their implementation in accordance with their roles and responsibilities:

Raise the level of awareness of accessibility issues within our company, and provide our employees with the training they need to design, produce, market, and deliver accessible products and services. Develop accessibility guidelines for products and services, and hold product development groups accountable for implementing these guidelines where competitively, technically, and economically feasible. Involve people with disabilities in the development of accessibility guidelines, and in the design and testing of products and services. Document accessibility features and make information about our products and services publicly available in an accessible form. Establish relationships with leading assistive technology and solution providers. Support internal and external research and development that will improve assistive technology relevant to our products and services. Support and contribute to industry standards and guidelines for accessibility. International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) IAAP is a not-for-profit association focused on advancing the accessibility profession through networking, education, and certification. The objective is to help accessibility professionals develop and advance their careers and to better enable organizations to integrate accessibility into their products and infrastructure. Accessibility 53 HP is a founding member, and we joined to participate with other organizations to advance the field of accessibility. This commitment supports our companys accessibility goal of designing, producing, and marketing products and services that can be effectively used by people with disabilities. IAAP will make our profession strong by globally connecting individuals, students, and organizations to learn from one another. If you are interested in learning more, go to http://www.accessibilityassociation.org to join the online community, sign up for newsletters, and learn about membership options. Finding the best assistive technology Everyone, including people with disabilities or age-related limitations, should be able to communicate, express themselves, and connect with the world using technology. HP is committed to increasing accessibility awareness within HP and with our customers and partners. Whether its large fonts that are easy on the eyes, voice recognition that lets you give your hands a rest, or any other assistive technology to help with your specific situationa variety of assistive technologies make HP products easier to use. How do you choose?

Assessing your needs Technology can unleash your potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology (AT) helps increase, maintain, and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology. You may choose from many AT products. Your AT assessment should allow you to evaluate several products, answer your questions, and facilitate your selection of the best solution for your situation. You will find that professionals qualified to do AT assessments come from many fields, including those licensed or certified in physical therapy, occupational therapy, speech/language pathology, and other areas of expertise. Others, while not certified or licensed, may also provide evaluation information. You will want to ask about the individual's experience, expertise, and fees to determine if they are appropriate for your needs. Accessibility for HP products HP PCsWindows 7 Accessibility Options HP Elite x3Accessibility Options (Windows 10 Mobile) The following links provide information about accessibility features and assistive technology, if applicable, included in various HP products. These resources will help you select the specific assistive technology features and product(s) most appropriate for your situation. HP Slate 7 TabletsEnabling Accessibility Features on Your HP Tablet (Android 4.1/Jelly Bean) HP Chromebook PCsEnabling Accessibility Features on Your HP Chromebook or Chromebox (Chrome OS) HP SlateBook PCsEnabling Accessibility Features (Android 4.3,4.2/Jelly Bean) HP PCsWindows 10 Accessibility Options HP PCsWindows 8 Accessibility Options HP Shoppingperipherals for HP products If you need additional support with the accessibility features on your HP product, see Contacting support on page 59. Additional links to external partners and suppliers that may provide additional assistance:

Google Products accessibility information (Android, Chrome, Google Apps) Microsoft Accessibility information (Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, Microsoft Office) 54 Chapter 14 Accessibility Assistive Technologies sorted by impairment type Assistive Technologies sorted by product type Assistive Technology vendors with product descriptions Assistive Technology Industry Association (ATIA) Standards and legislation Standards Section 508 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) standards was created by the US Access Board to address access to information and communication technology (ICT) for people with physical, sensory, or cognitive disabilities. The standards contain technical criteria specific to various types of technologies, as well as performance-based requirements which focus on functional capabilities of covered products. Specific criteria cover software applications and operating systems, web-based information and applications, computers, telecommunications products, video and multi-media, and self-contained closed products. Mandate 376 EN 301 549 The EN 301 549 standard was created by the European Union within Mandate 376 as the basis for an online toolkit for public procurement of ICT products. The standard specifies the functional accessibility requirements applicable to ICT products and services, together with a description of the test procedures and evaluation methodology for each accessibility requirement. Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) from the W3C's Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) helps web designers and developers create sites that better meet the needs of people with disabilities or age-related limitations. WCAG advances accessibility across the full range of web content (text, images, audio, and video) and web applications. WCAG can be precisely tested, is easy to understand and use, and allows web developers flexibility for innovation. WCAG 2.0 has also been approved as ISO/IEC 40500:2012. WCAG specifically addresses barriers to accessing the web experienced by people with visual, auditory, physical, cognitive, and neurological disabilities, and by older web users with accessibility needs. WCAG 2.0 provides characteristics of accessible content:

Perceivable (for instance, by addressing text alternatives for images, captions for audio, adaptability of presentation, and color contrast) Operable (by addressing keyboard access, color contrast, timing of input, seizure avoidance, and navigability) Understandable (by addressing readability, predictability, and input assistance) Robust (for instance, by addressing compatibility with assistive technologies) Legislation and regulations Accessibility of IT and information has become an area of increasing legislative importance. This section provides links to information about key legislation, regulations, and standards. United States Canada Europe Standards and legislation 55 United Kingdom Australia Worldwide United States Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act specifies that agencies must identify which standards apply to the procurement of ICT, perform market research to determine the availability of accessible products and services, and document the results of their market research. The following resources provide assistance in meeting Section 508 requirements:

www.section508.gov Buy Accessible The U.S. Access Board is currently updating the Section 508 standards. This effort will address new technologies and other areas where the standards need to be modified. For more information, go to Section 508 Refresh. Section 255 of the Telecommunications Act requires telecommunications products and services to be accessible to people with disabilities. FCC rules cover all hardware and software telephone network equipment and telecommunications equipment used in the home or office. Such equipment includes telephones, wireless handsets, fax machines, answering machines, and pagers. FCC rules also cover basic and special telecommunications services, including regular telephone calls, call waiting, speed dialing, call forwarding, computer-provided directory assistance, call monitoring, caller identification, call tracing, and repeat dialing, as well as voice mail and interactive voice response systems that provide callers with menus of choices. For more information, go to Federal Communication Commission Section 255 information. 21st Century Communications and Video Accessibility Act (CVAA) The CVAA updates federal communications law to increase the access of persons with disabilities to modern communications, updating accessibility laws enacted in the 1980s and 1990s to include new digital, broadband, and mobile innovations. Regulations are enforced by the FCC and documented as 47 CFR Part 14 and Part 79. FCC Guide on the CVAA Other U.S. legislation and initiatives Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Telecommunications Act, the Rehabilitation Act and others Canada The Accessibility for Ontarians with Disabilities Act was established to develop and implement accessibility standards to make goods, services, and facilities accessible to Ontarians with disabilities and to provide for the involvement of persons with disabilities in the development of the accessibility standards. The first standard of the AODA is the customer service standard; however, standards for transportation, employment, and information and communication are also being developed. The AODA applies to the Government of Ontario, the Legislative Assembly, every designated public sector organization, and to every other person or organization that provides goods, services, or facilities to the public or other third parties and that has at least one employee in Ontario; and accessibility measures must be implemented on or before January 1, 2025. For more information, go to Accessibility for Ontarians with Disability Act (AODA) . 56 Chapter 14 Accessibility Europe EU Mandate 376 ETSI Technical Report ETSI DTR 102 612: "Human Factors (HF); European accessibility requirements for public procurement of products and services in the ICT domain (European Commission Mandate M 376, Phase 1)" has been released. Background: The three European Standardization Organizations have set up two parallel project teams to carry out the work specified in the European Commission "Mandate 376 to CEN, CENELEC and ETSI, in Support of Accessibility Requirements for Public Procurement of Products and Services in the ICT Domain."

ETSI TC Human Factors Specialist Task Force 333 has developed ETSI DTR 102 612. Further details about the work performed by STF333 (e.g., Terms of Reference, specification of the detailed work tasks, time plan for the work, previous drafts, listing of comments received and means to contact the task force) can be found at the Special Task Force 333. The parts relating to the assessment of suitable testing and conformity schemes were carried out by a parallel project, detailed in CEN BT/WG185/PT. For further information, go to the CEN project team website. The two projects are closely coordinated. European Commission mandate for e-accessibility (PDF 46KB) CEN project team United Kingdom The Disability Discrimination Act of 1995 (DDA) was enacted to ensure that websites are accessible to blind and disabled users in the United Kingdom. W3C UK Policies Australia The Australian government has announced their plan to implement Web Content Accessibility Guidelines 2.0. All Australian government websites will require Level A compliance by 2012, and Double A by 2015. The new standard replaces WCAG 1.0, which was introduced as a mandated requirement for agencies in 2000. Worldwide JTC1 Special Working Group on Accessibility (SWG-A) G3ict: The Global Initiative for Inclusive ICT Italian accessibility legislation W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) Standards and legislation 57 Useful accessibility resources and links The following organizations may be good resources for information about disabilities and age-related limitations. NOTE: This is not an exhaustive list. These organizations are provided for informational purposes only. HP assumes no responsibility for information or contacts you may encounter on the Internet. Listing on this page does not imply endorsement by HP. Organizations American Association of People with Disabilities (AAPD) The Association of Assistive Technology Act Programs (ATAP) Hearing Loss Association of America (HLAA) Information Technology Technical Assistance and Training Center (ITTATC) Lighthouse International National Association of the Deaf National Federation of the Blind Rehabilitation Engineering & Assistive Technology Society of North America (RESNA) Telecommunications for the Deaf and Hard of Hearing, Inc. (TDI) W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) Educational institutions California State University, Northridge, Center on Disabilities (CSUN) University of Wisconsin - Madison, Trace Center University of Minnesota computer accommodations program Other disability resources ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) Technical Assistance Program Business & Disability network EnableMart European Disability Forum Job Accommodation Network Microsoft Enable U.S. Department of Justice - A Guide to disability rights Laws HP links Our contact webform HP comfort and safety guide HP public sector sales 58 Chapter 14 Accessibility Contacting support NOTE: Support is in English only. Customers who are deaf or hard of hearing that have questions about technical support or accessibility of HP products:

Use TRS/VRS/WebCapTel to call (877) 656-7058 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time. Customers with other disabilities or age-related limitations who have questions about technical support or accessibility of HP products, choose one of the following options:

Complete the Contact form for people with disabilities or age-related limitations. Call (888) 259-5707 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time. Contacting support 59 Index A AC adapter and battery light, identifying 4 accessibility 53 accessibility needs assessment 54 action keys airplane mode 12 help 11 identifying 10, 11 keyboard backlight 11 mute 12 next track 11 pause 11 play 11 privacy screen 11 screen brightness 11 speaker volume 11 stop 11 switch screen image 11 using 11 airplane mode 15 airplane mode key 12, 15 antivirus software, using 39 assistive technology (AT) finding 54 purpose 53 AT (assistive technology) finding 54 purpose 53 audio 19 adjusting volume 11 headphones 19 headsets 20 sound settings 20 speakers 19 audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) combo jack, identifying 5 B backing up software and information 40 backup, creating 48 backups 48 60 Index battery conserving power 30 discharging 30 factory-sealed 31 finding information 30 low battery levels 30 resolving low battery level 31 battery charge 30 battery information, finding 30 battery power 29 best practices 1 BIOS determining version 41 downloading an update 42 starting the Setup Utility 41 updating 41 Bluetooth device 15, 17 Bluetooth label 14 boot order, changing 49 bottom components 12 buttons left TouchPad 7 right TouchPad 7 C camera identifying 6 using 19 camera light, identifying 6 camera privacy switch, identifying 4 caps lock light, identifying 8 caring for your computer 34 cleaning your computer 34 components bottom 12 display 6 keyboard area 7 left side 5 right side 4 connecting to a network 15 connecting to a wireless network 15 connecting to a WLAN 16 connecting to LAN 18 connectors power 5 corporate WLAN connection 16 critical battery level 30 customer support, accessibility 59 D data transfer 20 Disk Cleanup software 33 Disk Defragmenter software 33 display components 6 E electrostatic discharge 52 esc key, identifying 10 external power, using 31 F factory-sealed battery 31 fingerprint reader, identifying 9 fingerprints, registering 39 firewall software 39 fn key, identifying 10 four-finger tap TouchPad gesture 24 G Get Help in Windows 10 action key 11 GPS 17 H hardware, locating 3 headphones, connecting 19 headsets, connecting 20 Hibernation exiting 28 initiated during critical battery level 30 initiating 28 HP 3D DriveGuard 33 HP Assistive Policy 53 HP Device as a Service (HP DaaS) 40 HP Fast Charge 29 HP Mobile Broadband activating 17 IMEI number 17 MEID number 17 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI downloading 45 starting 45 using 44 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows downloading 43 installing 44 using 43 HP Recovery Manager correcting boot problems 49 HP Recovery media recovery 49 HP resources 2 HP Touchpoint Manager 40 I IMEI number 17 initiating Sleep and Hibernation 27 input power 50 installing optional security cable 40 wireless certification 14 WLAN 14 left side components 5 lights AC adapter and battery 4 camera 6 caps lock 8 mute 8 power 5 low battery level 30 M maintenance Disk Cleanup 33 Disk Defragmenter 33 updating programs and drivers 34 managing power 27 MEID number 17 mobile broadband activating 17 IMEI number 17 MEID number 17 internal microphones, identifying 6 International Association of mute light, identifying 8 mute volume action key 12 Accessibility Professionals 53 Internet security software, using 39 J jacks audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) 5 K keyboard and optional mouse using 26 keyboard backlight action key 11 keys action 10 airplane mode 12 esc 10 fn 10 Windows 10 L labels Bluetooth 14 regulatory 14 serial number 13 service 13 N next track action key 11 O one-finger slide touch screen gesture 26 operating environment 51 operating system controls 15 P passwords Setup Utility (BIOS) 38 Windows 37 pause action key 11 play action key 11 ports USB SuperSpeed 5 USB SuperSpeed port with HP Sleep and Charge 4 USB Type-C 21 USB Type-C with HP Sleep and Charge 4 power battery 29 external 31 power connector identifying 5 Power icon, using 29 power lights, identifying 5 power settings, using 29 Precision TouchPad using 22 Precision TouchPad gestures four-finger tap 24 three-finger swipe 25 three-finger tap 24 two-finger slide 23 two-finger tap 23 privacy screen action key 11 privacy screen action key, identifying 11 product name and number, computer 13 public WLAN connection 16 R recovery 48 discs 49 HP Recovery partition 49 media 49 USB flash drive 49 recovery media creating using HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool 48 creating using Windows tools 48 regulatory information regulatory label 14 wireless certification labels 14 Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings customizing 46 using 46 resources, accessibility 58 restoring 48 right side components 4 S screen brightness action keys 11 Section 508 accessibility standards 55, 56 security cable, installing 40 serial number, computer 13 service labels, locating 13 Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords 38 shipping the computer 35 Index 61 shutdown 28 Sleep exiting 27 initiating 27 transfer data 20 traveling with the computer 14, 35 turning off the computer 28 two-finger pinch zoom TouchPad and Sleep and Hibernation, initiating 27 slots touch screen gesture 23 two-finger slide TouchPad gesture memory card reader 4 23 software two-finger tap TouchPad gesture 23 corporate WLAN connection 16 functional range 16 public WLAN connection 16 wireless network, securing 40 WLAN antennas, identifying 6 WLAN device 14 WLAN label 14 WWAN device 17 Disk Cleanup 33 Disk Defragmenter 33 locating 3 software installed locating 3 software updates, installing 40 sound. See audio sound settings, using 20 speaker volume action keys 11 speakers connecting 19 identifying 9, 12 special keys, using 10 standards and legislation, accessibility 55 stop action key 11 switch screen image action key 11 system restore point, creating 48 T tap TouchPad and touch screen gesture 22 three-finger swipe TouchPad gesture 25 three-finger tap TouchPad gesture 24 touch screen gestures one-finger slide 26 TouchPad using 22 TouchPad and touch screen gestures tap 22 two-finger pinch zoom 23 TouchPad buttons identifying 7 TouchPad gestures four-finger tap 24 three-finger swipe 25 three-finger tap 24 two-finger slide 23 two-finger tap 23 TouchPad zone, identifying 7 62 Index U unresponsive system 28 updating programs and drivers 34 USB SuperSpeed port with HP Sleep and Charge, identifying 4 USB SuperSpeed port, identifying 5 USB Type-C port with HP Sleep and Charge, identifying 4 USB Type-C port, connecting 21 using passwords 37 using the keyboard and optional mouse 26 using the TouchPad 22 V vents, identifying 5, 12 video USB Type-C 21 video, using 20 volume adjusting 11 mute 12 W Windows backup 48 recovery media 48 system restore point 48 Windows Hello 19 using 39 Windows key, identifying 10 Windows passwords 37 Windows tools, using 48 wired network (LAN) 18 wireless button 15 wireless certification label 14 wireless controls button 15 operating system 15 wireless light 15 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 16

 

 

Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices User Guide Copyright 2018 HP Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks. Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Second Edition: July 2018 First Edition: March 2018 Document Part Number: L25269-002 About This Guide This guide provides regulatory, safety, and environmental information that is compliant with U.S., Canadian, and international regulations for notebook computers, tablets, desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals. To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select User Guides. WARNING! Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily harm or loss of life. CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or loss of information. NOTE: Text set off in this manner provides important supplemental information. iii iv About This Guide Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices ........................................................................................................................................ 1 Accessing regulatory labels ................................................................................................................................... 1 Federal Communications Commission notice ....................................................................................................... 1 Modifications ....................................................................................................................................... 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................................. 2 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ............................................. 2 Brazil notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 3 Canada notices ....................................................................................................................................................... 3 European Union regulatory notices ....................................................................................................................... 4 Declaration of Conformity ................................................................................................................... 4 Products with radio functionality (EMF) ........................................................................... 4 Restrictions for products with radio functionality (select products only) ....................... 4 Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products only) ................... 4 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................. 5 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ................................................. 5 Australia and New Zealand notice ......................................................................................................................... 5 China WWAN notice ................................................................................................................................................ 6 Japan notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 6 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings ................................................ 6 Mexico notice ......................................................................................................................................................... 6 Singapore wireless notice ...................................................................................................................................... 7 South Korea notices ............................................................................................................................................... 7 Thailand wireless notice ........................................................................................................................................ 7 Taiwan NCC notices ................................................................................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ............................................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices .............................................. 8 Airline travel notice ................................................................................................................................................ 8 User-replaceable battery notices .......................................................................................................................... 8 Factory-sealed battery notices ............................................................................................................................. 8 Laser compliance ................................................................................................................................................... 8 Telecommunications device approvals ................................................................................................................. 9 Modem notices ....................................................................................................................................................... 9 U.S. modem statements ...................................................................................................................... 9 U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................................. 10 Canada modem statements .............................................................................................................. 12 Japan modem statements ................................................................................................................ 12 v New Zealand modem statements ..................................................................................................... 12 Voice support .................................................................................................................. 13 Macrovision Corporation notice ........................................................................................................................... 13 2 Safety notices ............................................................................................................................................. 14 Important safety information ............................................................................................................................. 14 Heat-related safety warning notice .................................................................................................................... 15 Potential safety conditions notice ....................................................................................................................... 15 Installation conditions ......................................................................................................................................... 15 Acoustics notice ................................................................................................................................................... 15 Battery notices ..................................................................................................................................................... 15 Fan notices ........................................................................................................................................................... 16 Headset and earphone volume level notice ........................................................................................................ 16 Laser safety ......................................................................................................................................................... 16 Power supply and power cord set requirements ................................................................................................ 17 Power supply class I grounding requirements .................................................................................. 17 Brazil notice .................................................................................................................... 17 Denmark .......................................................................................................................... 17 Finland ............................................................................................................................. 17 Norway ............................................................................................................................ 17 Sweden ............................................................................................................................ 17 Power supply requirements .............................................................................................................. 17 For use in Norway ........................................................................................................... 18 Power cord set requirements ............................................................................................................ 18 Power cord notice .............................................................................................................................. 18 DC plug of external HP power supply ............................................................................. 19 Japan power cord notice ................................................................................................................... 19 Japan power cord requirements ....................................................................................................... 19 Pinch hazard ........................................................................................................................................................ 19 TV antenna connectors protection ...................................................................................................................... 19 External television antenna grounding ............................................................................................ 19 Lightning protection .......................................................................................................................... 19 Note to CATV system installer ........................................................................................................... 20 Travel notice ........................................................................................................................................................ 20 China safety notices ............................................................................................................................................. 21 China: Altitude notice ........................................................................................................................ 21 China: Tropical warning notice .......................................................................................................... 21 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ...................................................... 22

......................................................................................................................................... 22 vi 3 Environmental notices ................................................................................................................................. 23 Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling ....................................................................................... 23 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................................... 23 Brazil alkaline battery disposal ........................................................................................................................... 23 Brazil hardware recycling information ................................................................................................................ 23 Taiwan battery recycling information ................................................................................................................. 24 ENERGY STAR Certification (select products only) ............................................................................................ 24 Chemical substances ........................................................................................................................................... 25 Mercury statement .............................................................................................................................................. 25 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ............................................................................................. 25 China environmental notices ............................................................................................................................... 26 China PC energy label .......................................................................................................................................... 26 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) for notebook and tablet computers ................................... 29 The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content ................................................... 29

..................................................................... 30 China restriction of hazard substances (ROHS) for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-

ones, and point-of-sale terminals ....................................................................................................................... 31 The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content ................................................... 31

(ROHS) .................................................................................................................................................................. 33

(RoHS) ..................................................... 35

....................................................................................................... 35

(RoHS) ......................................................................................................................................... 36

....................................................................................................... 36 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) .............................................................................................. 37 Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 .............................................................. 37 IT ECO declarations .............................................................................................................................................. 37 Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................ 37 Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico .................................................................. 37 Turkey WEEE regulation ...................................................................................................................................... 38 TCO Certified ........................................................................................................................................................ 39 TCO Certified Edge ................................................................................................................................................ 40 Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 41 vii viii 1 Regulatory notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Accessing regulatory labels Regulatory labels, which provide country or regional regulatory information (for example, FCC ID), may be physically located on the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay (select products only), under the removable service door (select products only), on the back of the display, or on the wireless or modem module. Some products may also provide electronic regulatory labels (e-labels) that can be accessed through the system BIOS. NOTE: Electronic labels are not available on all products. NOTE: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not contain a FCC ID. To view electronic regulatory labels:

1. 2. 3. Turn on or restart the computer. Press esc or f10 to enter Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Advanced, select Electronic Labels, and then press enter. To view an electronic label, use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select one of the listed items, and then press OK. NOTE: The list of available electronic label items varies depending on the computer model and installed devices. To exit Computer Setup menus without making any changes:

Select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter. 4. 5. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. Accessing regulatory labels 1 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference, and This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. For questions regarding this product:

Write to:

HP Inc. 1501 Page Mill Road Palo Alto, CA 94304 Call HP at 650-857-1501 or Email techregshelp@hp.com To identify this product, refer to the part, series, or model number found on the product. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 30.5 cm

(12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Ao operar o dispositivo a uma distncia muito prxima do seu corpo, utilize um acessrio de armazenamento no metlico para posicionar o dispositivo a uma distncia mnima de 1,5 cm do corpo. CAUTION: A alimentao de energia predefinida para 220/230Vv. Se voc possuir tomada eltrica de 110/115Vv, por favor, altere a chave na parte traseira do seu computador para a tenso correta. Canada notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, the device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation: The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 30.5 cm

(12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. Brazil notice 3 CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a, n, or ac wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-

channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. European Union regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking have been constructed so that they can operate in at least one EU Member State and comply with one or more of the following EU Directives as may be applicable:

RED 2014/53/EU; Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU; EMC Directive 2014/30/EU; Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC; RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU. Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonised Standards. The full Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following website: http://www.hp.eu/certificates

(Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) The point of contact for regulatory matters is HP Deutschland GmbH, HQ-TRE, 71025, Boeblingen, Germany. Email techregshelp@hp.com Products with radio functionality (EMF) This product incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. For notebook computers in normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with EU requirements. Products designed to be operated at closer proximities, such as tablet computers, comply with applicable EU requirements in typical operating positions. Products can be operated without maintaining a separation distance unless otherwise indicated in instructions specific to the product. Restrictions for products with radio functionality (select products only) CAUTION: IEEE 802.11x wireless LAN with 5.155.35 GHz frequency band is restricted for indoor use only in all countries reflected in the matrix. Using this WLAN application outdoors might lead to interference issues with existing radio services. CAUTION: Fixed outdoor installations for WiGig application (5766 GHz frequency band) are excluded in all countries reflected in the matrix. Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products only) Radio Technology Bluetooth; 2,4 GHz NFC; 13,56 MHz 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Maximum Transmit Power EIRP (mW) 100 10 Radio Technology RFID; 125 kHz/13,56 MHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x; 2,4 GHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x; 5 GHz WWAN 4G LTE; 700/800/900/1800/2100/2600 MHz WWAN 3G UTMS; 900/2100 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE; 900 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE; 1800 MHz WiGig 802.11ad; 60 GHz Maximum Transmit Power EIRP (mW) Less than 1 100 200 200 250 2000 1000 316 NOTE: Use only HP-supported software drivers and correct country settings to ensure compliance. Ergonomics notice When a mobile computer is used at the office workstation for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit

(VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions comparable to a workstation setup. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (voluntary GS certification) Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements. Without external keyboards, they are suitable only for short-time use for VDU tasks. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sunlight) reflections may occur, which result in reduced readability. A computer system comprising HP brand products meets the applicable ergonomic requirements if all affected constituent products bear the "GS" approval mark, for example Business Desktop PC, keyboard, PC-

mouse and monitor. European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the applicable Directive and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/

regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. Australia and New Zealand notice This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. The computer must be connected to the Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the requirements of AS/CA S008. WARNING! Modems without integral RJ11 connector that are shipped with this computer should not be installed in any other device. Australia and New Zealand notice 5 China WWAN notice Japan notice V-2 VCCI32-1 5GHz Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings This product contains certified radio equipment. Some products may use electronic regulatory labels (e-labels). To view the certification mark and numbers on an e-label, please refer to the previous Accessing regulatory labels section. e e Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. The regulatory model number for this product is on the regulatory label. If your product is provided with wireless accessories such as a keyboard or mouse and you need to identify the model of the accessory, refer to the label included on that accessory. The regulatory model number for this product is on the regulatory label. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Singapore wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are aboard aircraft. The use of these devices aboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. South Korea notices Thailand wireless notice

.

(This telecommunication equipment conforms to the requirements of NBTC.) This radio communication equipment has the electromagnetic field strength in compliance with the Safety Standard for the Use of Radio communication Equipment on Human Health announced by the National Telecommunications Commission. Taiwan NCC notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Singapore wireless notice 7 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. User-replaceable battery notices When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, refer to the HP website at http://www.hp.com/

recycle. For information about removing a user-replaceable battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. Factory-sealed battery notices The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. Laser compliance WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. 8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC/EN 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007. Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. Modem notices U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. Telecommunications device approvals 9 The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-

distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Modem notices 11 Canada modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japan modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:

If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the LSI Corporation PCI-SV92EX Soft modem is below:

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). d. Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Macrovision Corporation notice 13 2 Safety notices Important safety information WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. The computer may be heavy; be sure to use ergonomically correct lifting procedures when moving it. Install the computer near an AC outlet. The AC power cord is your computers main AC disconnecting device and must be easily accessible at all times. For your safety, the power cord provided with your computer has a grounded plug. Always use the power cord with a properly grounded wall outlet, to avoid the risk of electrical shock. To reduce the possibility of an electric shock from the telephone network, plug your computer into the AC outlet before connecting it to the telephone line. Also, disconnect the telephone line before unplugging your computer from the AC power outlet. Always disconnect the modem cord from the telephone system before installing or removing your computer cover. Do not operate the computer with the cover removed. For your safety, always unplug the computer from its power source and from any telecommunications systems (such as telephone lines), networks, or modems before performing any service procedures. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage. Hazardous voltage levels are inside the power supply and modem of this product. As a safety precaution, if the system power load exceeds the specific configurations capacities, the system may temporarily disable some USB ports. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. CAUTION:

the voltage select switch has been pre-set to the correct voltage setting for use in the particular country/

region where it was initially sold. Changing the voltage select switch to the incorrect position can damage your computer and void any implied warranty. If your computer is provided with a voltage select switch for use in a 115 or 230 V power system, 14 Chapter 2 Safety notices This product has not been evaluated for connection to an IT power system (an AC distribution system with no direct connection to earth, according to IEC/EN 60950-1). Heat-related safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the mobile computer, do not place the mobile computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the mobile computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The mobile computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC/EN 60950-1). Potential safety conditions notice If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer:

crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner. However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance. Installation conditions See installation instructions before connecting this equipment to the input supply. WARNING! Energized and moving parts may be inside the computer. Disconnect power to the equipment before removing the enclosure. Replace and secure the enclosure before re-energizing the equipment. Acoustics notice Sound pressure level (LpA) is far below 70dB(A) (operator position, normal operation, according to ISO 7779). To display product noise emission data, go to IT ECO Declarations at http://www.hp.com/go/ted, and then select a product category from the drop-down menu. Battery notices WARNING! The product may contain an internal lithium manganese dioxide, vanadium pentoxide, or alkaline battery or battery pack. There is risk of fire and burns if the battery pack is not handled properly. WARNING! Do not attempt to recharge the battery. WARNING! Do not expose to temperatures higher than 60 C (140 F). WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Fast charging may not be available for non-compatible or non-HP batteries. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. Heat-related safety warning notice 15 WARNING! Replace only with the HP spare designated for this product. WARNING! Do not ingest battery, a Chemical Burn Hazard. WARNING! This product contains a coin/button cell battery. If the coin/button cell battery is swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns in just 2 hours and can lead to death. WARNING! Keep new and used batteries away from children. WARNING!

from children. WARNING!

immediate medical attention. WARNING!

explosion or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas. WARNING! A battery subjected to extremely low air pressure may result in an explosion or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas. Leaving a battery in an extremely high temperature surrounding environment can result in an If the battery compartment does not close securely, stop using the product and keep it away If you think batteries might have been swallowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek Icon Description Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public collection system or return them to HP, an authorized HP partner, or their agents. Fan notices WARNING!

Keep body parts away from moving parts. WARNING! Keep body parts away from fan blades. WARNING! Keep body parts out of the motion path. Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING!

To prevent possible hearing damage, do not listen at high volume levels for long periods. Adjustment of the volume control as well as the equalizer to other settings than the center position may increase the ear-/headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. The use of factors influencing the ear-/headphones output other than those specified by the manufacturer (e.g. operating system, equalizer software, firmware, driver) may increase the ear-/headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. Laser safety For products equipped with optical drives or fiber optic transceivers. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (i.e., CD or DVD drive) and/or fiber optic transceiver. These contain lasers and are classified as Class 1 Laser Products in accordance with the standard IEC/EN 60825-1 and comply with its requirements. 16 Chapter 2 Safety notices Each laser product complies with US FDA Regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser products installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified herein. Allow only HP Authorized Service technicians to repair the unit. Power supply and power cord set requirements Power supply class I grounding requirements For protection from fault currents, the equipment shall be connected to a grounding terminal. Plug the system power cord into an AC outlet that provides a ground connection. Substitute cords may not provide adequate fault protection. Only use the power cord supplied with this product or an HP Inc. authorized replacement. Brazil notice Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Denmark Apparatets stikprop skal tilsluttes en stikkontakt med jord, som giver forbindelse til stikproppens jord. Finland Norway Sweden Laite on liitettv suojakoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan. Apparatet m tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag. Power supply requirements The power supplies on some products have external power switches. The voltage select switch feature on the product permits it to operate from any line voltage between 100-127 or 200-240 volts AC. Power supplies on those products that do not have external power switches are equipped with internal circuits that sense the incoming voltage and automatically switch to the proper voltage. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Power supply and power cord set requirements 17 For use in Norway This product is also designed for an IT power system with phase-to-phase voltage 230V. Power cord set requirements WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. The power cord set received with the product meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment was originally purchased. Use only the power cord provided with the unit or an authorized replacement power cord from HP Inc. or an approved HP Inc. source. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/support. Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you use the product. For more information on power cord set requirements, contact your authorized HP dealer, reseller, or service provider. WARNING! Do not use power cords from other products. Mismatched power cords may result in a shock and fire hazard. The requirements listed below are applicable to all countries:

1. 2. The power cord must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for evaluation in the country where the power cord set will be installed. The length of the power cord must be between 1.8 m (6 feet) and 3.6 m (12 feet). For a power cord 2.0 m

(6.56 feet) or less, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm2 or 18AWG. If the power cord is longer than 2.0 m (6.56 feet), the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 1.0 mm2 or 16AWG. The power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. WARNING! Do not operate this product with a damaged power cord set. If the power cord set is damaged in any manner, replace it immediately. Damaged cords may result in user exposure to hazards. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/

18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.0 m (3.2 ft) and 2 m (6.56 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. 18 Chapter 2 Safety notices DC plug of external HP power supply Japan power cord notice Japan power cord requirements For use in Japan, use only the power cord received with this product. CAUTION: Do not use the power cord received with this product on any other products. Pinch hazard WARNING! Observe pinch hazard areas. Keep fingers away from closing parts. TV antenna connectors protection External television antenna grounding If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is electrically grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper electrical grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna-

discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. Lightning protection For added protection of any product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug the product from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product from lightning and power line surges. Pinch hazard 19 Table 2-1 Antenna Grounding Reference Grounding Component 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Electric Service Equipment Power Service Grounding Electrode System (NEC Art 250, Part III) Ground Clamps Grounding Conductors (NEC Section 810.21) Antenna Discharge Unit (NEC Section 810.20) Ground Clamp Antenna Lead-in Wire Note to CATV system installer This reminder is provided to call the CATV systems installers attention to section 820.93 of the National Electric Code, which provides guidelines for proper grounding and in particular, specify that the Coaxial cable shield shall be connected to grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. 20 Chapter 2 Safety notices China safety notices China: Altitude notice 2000m Icon Description 2000m China: Tropical warning notice Icon Description China safety notices 21 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system.

:

(1) 30 10

(2) 2 2 1 22 Chapter 2 Safety notices 3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges packaging, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about recycling the product in Japan, refer to http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Disposal of waste equipment by users Icon Description This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Brazil alkaline battery disposal Icon Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Brazil hardware recycling information Icon Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling 23 Taiwan battery recycling information Icon Description The Taiwan EPA requires dry battery manufacturing or importing firms, in accordance with Article 15 of the Waste Disposal Act, to indicate the recovery marks on the batteries used in sales, giveaways, or promotions. Contact a qualified Taiwanese recycler for proper battery disposal. ENERGY STAR Certification (select products only) ENERGY STAR is a U.S. Environmental Protection Agency voluntary program that helps businesses and individuals save money and protect our climate through superior energy efficiency. Products that earn the ENERGY STAR prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency criteria or requirements set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, HP Inc. has followed the U.S. EPAs enhanced product certification process to ensure that products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR certified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-certified computers:

A key ENERGY STAR requirement for computer products is power management features that significantly reduce energy consumption when the product is not in use. Power management allows a computer to automatically enter a low power sleep mode, or other low power mode, after a defined period of inactivity. The power management features have been preset as follows when the computer is operating on AC power:

Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode Notebooks, Mobile Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Product will exit sleep mode when the power/sleep button is pressed. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. Tablets/Slates Less than or equal to 1 minute Not applicable Not applicable Desktops, Integrated Desktops, Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Thin clients Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes when sleep mode is supported by the operating system (varies by model) Product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. When sleep mode is supported by operating system product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. 24 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. For computers that support an always-on, always-connected use profile where internet access is available

(such as tablets and slates), alternative low power modes - such as Short or Long Idle modes (as defined in the ENERGY STAR Computer Program Requirements) are provided that consume very little power (</= 10 Watts) and when applicable, maximize product battery life. These alternative low power modes are dynamic, with the display sleep mode activated within 1 minute of user inactivity. The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management website at http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR website at http://www.energystar.gov. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered trademarks owned by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No. 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Mercury statement This statement applies to all-in-one computers with built-in display panels that do not use LED backlighting. This HP product may contain the following material that might require special handling at end-of-life:

Mercury in the fluorescent lamp in the display LCD Disposal of mercury can be regulated because of environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)

(http://www.eiae.org). Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply The computers real-time clock battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/. Chemical substances 25 China environmental notices China PC energy label In accordance with The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers, this microcomputer has an Energy Efficiency Label. The energy efficiency grade, TEC (Typical Energy Consumption), and product category presented on the label are determined and calculated according to the standard GB28380-2012. 1. Energy Efficiency Grades The grade is determined by the standard with the calculation of base consumption level with the sum of all the allowances for additional components such as main memory and graphics card. For products of any grade, the TEC should not exceed the value specified in the following table:

Product Type Desktop microcomputer, AIO Category A Portable Computer Category B Category C Category D Category A Category B Category C TEC (kilowatt hour) Grade 1 98.0+Efa 125.0+Efa 159.0+Efa 184.0+Efa 20.0+Efa 26.0+Efa 54.5+Efa Grade 2 148.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 75.0+Efa Grade 3 198.0+Efa 225.0+Efa 259.0+Efa 284.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa 123.5+Efa NOTE: Efa is the sum of power factor of product additional functions. 2. 3. Typical Energy Consumption The energy consumption figure presented on the label is the data measured with the representative configuration that covers all the configurations in the registration unit which is selected according to The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers". Thus, actual energy consumption of this specific microcomputer may not be the same as the TEC data presented in the label. Product Category The product category is determined by the standard according to the microcomputers configuration. The categorization of products complies with the regulations in the following table:

Product Type Configuration Description Desktop microcomputer, AIO Portable Computer 26 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Product Type Category A Category B Category C Category D Configuration Description The desktop microcomputer and AIO whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B, C, and D The portable computer whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B and C CPU physical core number of 2, and system memory of not less than 2 GB A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of over 2, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 2 GB A Discrete GPU The product that has a CPU physical core number of not less than 2, system memory of not less than 2GB, A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit. CPU physical core number of not less than 4, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 4 GB A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit For more details on the specification, please refer to the standard GB28380-2012. China PC energy label 27 28 Chapter 3 Environmental notices China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) for notebook and tablet computers The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by Chinas Management Methods for Restricted Use of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Products Part Name Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Flash memory card reader Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones I/O PCAs Keyboard Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel Media (CD/DVD/floppy) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking device Power adapter Power pack Power supply Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Speakers, external Hazardous Substances Lead (Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) for notebook and tablet computers 29 Part Name TV tuner USB flash memory drive USB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards Hazardous Substances Lead (Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O This form has been prepared in compliance with the provisions of SJ/T 11364. O: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance in all of the homogenous materials in the component is within the limits required by GB/T 26572. X: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance exceeds the limits required by GB/T 26572 in at least one homogenous material in the component. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Unions RoHS Legislation. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity.

/

I/O PCA

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB)

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

(LCD) CD/DVD/

30 Chapter 3 Environmental notices

/Java USB USB

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB)

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572 X RoHS China restriction of hazard substances (ROHS) for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by Chinas Management Methods for Restricted Use of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Products China restriction of hazard substances (ROHS) for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-

ones, and point-of-sale terminals 31 Part Name Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Fan Flash memory card reader Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones Heat sink I/O PCAs Keyboard Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel Media (CD/DVD/floppy) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking device Power adapter Power supply Projector Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Solid-state drives Speakers, external Stylus Touch mat TV tuner USB flash memory drive Hazardous Substances Lead (Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 32 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Part Name USB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards 3D Capture Stage/

Turntable Hazardous Substances Lead (Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O This form has been prepared in compliance with the provisions of SJ/T 11364. O: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance in all of the homogenous materials in the component is within the limits required by GB/T 26572. X: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance exceeds the limits required by GB/T 26572 in at least one homogenous material in the component. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Unions RoHS Legislation. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity.

(ROHS)

/

I/O PCA

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB)

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

(ROHS) 33

(LCD) CD/DVD/

/Java USB USB 3D /

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB)

(PBDE) X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572 X RoHS 34 Chapter 3 Environmental notices

(RoHS) Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Lead (Pb) Mercury (Hg) Cadmium (Cd) Hexavalent chromium (Cr+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Unit Cables

/

Chassis/Other

/

I/O PCAs

(LCD) Liquid crystal display (LCD) panel Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Power pack Power supply Storage Devices Wireless Devices 1 0.1 % 0.01 %

Note 1: "Exceeding 0.1 wt %" and "exceeding 0.01 wt %" indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the reference percentage value of presence condition. 2 Note 2: "" indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of presence. 3 Note 3: The "" indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption.

(RoHS) 35 http://www.hp.com/support To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select User Guides.

(RoHS) Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent chromium (Cr

+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Unit Cables

/ Chassis/Other

/

I/O PCAs

(LCD) Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel (for AIO only) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Power supply Storage Devices Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) 1 0.1 % 0.01 %

Note 1: "Exceeding 0.1 wt %" and "exceeding 0.01 wt %" indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the reference percentage value of presence condition. 2 Note 2: "" indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of presence. 3 Note 3: The "" indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption. http://www.hp.com/support To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select User Guides. 36 Chapter 3 Environmental notices India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) This product, as well as its related consumables and spares, complies with the reduction in hazardous substances provisions of the "India E-waste Rule 2016." It does not contain lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except where allowed pursuant to the exemptions set in Schedule 2 of the Rule. Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 To locate product power consumption data, including when the product is in networked standby with all wired network ports connected and wireless devices connected, refer to section P14 Additional information of the product IT ECO Declaration at http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/

itecodesktop-pc.html. Where applicable, activate and deactivate a wireless network using the instructions included in the product user guide or the operating system. Information is also available at http://www.hp.com/support. IT ECO declarations Notebook or tablet PCs http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/iteconotebook-o.html Desktop PCs and Thin Clients http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html?

jumpid=reg_R1002_USEN Workstations http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecoworkstatio.html Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 37 Se ha etiquetado este producto en conformidad con la Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico, que requiere la divulgacin del consumo de energa del modo de uso normal (modo inactivo) y del modo de espera. Su producto es una de las muchas configuraciones de esta familia de modelos; el consumo de energa del modo inactivo de su configuracin especfica puede diferir de la informacin de la etiqueta. El consumo real de energa de su producto puede ser mayor o menor que el valor informado en la etiqueta de energa de producto para Mxico a causa de factores como la configuracin (componentes y mdulos seleccionados) y el uso (tareas que se estn efectuando, software instalado y en ejecucin, etc.). NOTE: Esta ley no es aplicable a las estaciones de trabajo. Turkey WEEE regulation Trkiye Cumhuriyeti: AEEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur 38 Chapter 3 Environmental notices TCO Certified This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified logo. TCO Certified 39 TCO Certified Edge This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified Edge logo. 40 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Index Symbols/Numerics 35, 36 Federal Communications Commission notices notebook computers cables 2 notebook computers modifications 2 35, 36 notebook computers notice 1 A airline travel notice 8 altitude notice 21 B battery 15 battery notice 8, 23 battery recycling 23 Brazil notice 3, 17 C cable grounding notice 22 Canada modem statement 12 Canada notices 3 China environmental notices 26 China PC energy label 26 China restriction of hazardous substances notice 29, 31 D disposal notices battery 23 battery, user replacement 8 equipment 23 factory sealed battery 8 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 23 ENERGY STAR certification 24 environmental notices 23 equipment disposal notice 23 ergonomics notice 5 European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 37 F fan notice 16 G GS Notice 5 H headset and earphone volume level notice 16 I India restriction of hazardous substances notice 37 J Japan modem statement 12 Japan notice 6 Japan power cord notice 19 Japan restriction of hazardous substances notice 37 L labels, regulatory 1 laser safety notice 9, 16 M Macrovision Corporation notice 13 maximum power levels 4 Mexico wireless notice 6 modem notices 9 modem statements Canada 12 Japan 12 New Zealand 12 U.S. 9, 10 modifications, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 2 N New Zealand modem statement 12 airline travel 8 battery 8, 15, 23 Brazil 3, 17 Canada 3 China restriction of hazardous substances 29, 31 environmental 23 equipment disposal 23 ergonomics 5 fan 16 headset and earphone volume level 16 India restriction of hazardous substances 37 Japan 6 Japan power cord 19 Japan restriction of hazardous substances 37 laser safety 9, 16 Macrovision Corporation 13 Mexico 6 modem 9 perchlorate material 25 power cords 18 Singapore 7 South Korea 7 Taiwan 7 Thailand wireless notice 7 travel 20 notices, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 1 P power cord notice 18 R radio frequency bands 4 recycling, electronic hardware and battery 23 S Singapore wireless notice 7 South Korea notice 7 Index 41 T Taiwan notice 7 TCO Certified Certification 39 TCO Certified Edge Certification 40 Thailand wireless notice 7 travel notice 20 tropical warning notice 21 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 22 U U.S. modem statement 9, 10 V voice support 13 volume level notice, headset and earphone 16 W wireless LAN devices 3 42 Index

 

 

User Guide Copyright 2019 HP Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license. Intel, Celeron, and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Windows is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: February 2019 Document Part Number: L52091-001 Product notice Software terms By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a full refund subject to the refund policy of your seller. For any further information or to request a full refund of the price of the computer, please contact your seller. This guide describes features that are common to most products. Some features may not be available on your computer. Not all features are available in all editions or versions of Windows. Systems may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers, software or BIOS update to take full advantage of Windows functionality. Windows 10 is automatically updated, which is always enabled. ISP fees may apply and additional requirements may apply over time for updates. Go to http://www.microsoft.com for details. To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select User Guides. Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to come into contact with the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950-1). iii iv Safety warning notice Processor configuration setting (select products only) IMPORTANT: Select products are configured with an Intel Pentium N35xx/N37xx series or a Celeron N28xx/N29xx/N30xx/N31xx series processor and a Windows operating system. If your computer is configured as described, do not change the processor configuration setting in msconfig.exe from 4 or 2 processors to 1 processor. If you do so, your computer will not restart. You will have to perform a factory reset to restore the original settings. v vi Processor configuration setting (select products only) Table of contents 1 Getting started ............................................................................................................................................. 1 Best practices ......................................................................................................................................................... 1 More HP resources ................................................................................................................................................. 2 2 Getting to know your computer ...................................................................................................................... 3 Locating hardware ................................................................................................................................................. 3 Locating software .................................................................................................................................................. 3 Right side ............................................................................................................................................................... 4 Left side ................................................................................................................................................................. 5 Display .................................................................................................................................................................... 7 Keyboard area ........................................................................................................................................................ 8 TouchPad ............................................................................................................................................. 8 Lights ................................................................................................................................................... 9 Speakers and fingerprint reader ....................................................................................................... 10 Special keys ....................................................................................................................................... 11 Action keys ........................................................................................................................................ 12 Bottom ................................................................................................................................................................. 13 Labels ................................................................................................................................................................... 13 3 Connecting to a network .............................................................................................................................. 15 Connecting to a wireless network ....................................................................................................................... 15 Using the wireless controls ............................................................................................................... 15 Airplane mode key .......................................................................................................... 15 Operating system controls ............................................................................................. 15 Connecting to a WLAN ....................................................................................................................... 16 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) .......................................................................... 17 Using GPS (select products only) ...................................................................................................... 17 Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) ................................................................. 17 Connecting Bluetooth devices ........................................................................................ 17 Connecting to a wired networkLAN (select products only) ............................................................................. 18 4 Enjoying entertainment features .................................................................................................................. 19 Using the camera ................................................................................................................................................. 19 Using audio .......................................................................................................................................................... 19 Connecting speakers ......................................................................................................................... 19 Connecting headphones .................................................................................................................... 19 vii Connecting headsets ......................................................................................................................... 20 Using sound settings ......................................................................................................................... 20 Using video .......................................................................................................................................................... 20 Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable (select products only) ............................................ 20 Setting up HDMI audio .................................................................................................... 21 Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select products only) ...... 22 Using data transfer .............................................................................................................................................. 22 Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only) ..................................................... 22 5 Navigating the screen .................................................................................................................................. 23 Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures ........................................................................................................ 23 Tap ..................................................................................................................................................... 23 Two-finger pinch zoom ..................................................................................................................... 24 Two-finger slide (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) ...................................................................... 24 Two-finger tap (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) ........................................................................ 24 Three-finger tap (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) ..................................................................... 25 Four-finger tap (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) ........................................................................ 25 Three-finger swipe (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) ................................................................. 26 Four-finger swipe (Precision TouchPad) ........................................................................................... 26 One-finger slide (touch screen) ......................................................................................................... 27 Using an optional keyboard or mouse ................................................................................................................. 27 Using an on-screen keyboard (select products only) .......................................................................................... 27 6 Managing power .......................................................................................................................................... 28 Using Sleep and Hibernation ............................................................................................................................... 28 Initiating and exiting Sleep ............................................................................................................... 28 Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) ................................................................. 29 Shutting down (turning off) the computer .......................................................................................................... 29 Using the Power icon and Power Options ............................................................................................................ 30 Running on battery power ................................................................................................................................... 30 Using HP Fast Charge (select products only) .................................................................................... 30 Displaying battery charge ................................................................................................................. 31 Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only) .................................. 31 Conserving battery power ................................................................................................................. 31 Identifying low battery levels ........................................................................................................... 31 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................................................ 32 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ................................... 32 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ................................. 32 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation .................. 32 Factory-sealed battery ...................................................................................................................... 32 Running on external power ................................................................................................................................. 32 viii 7 Maintaining your computer .......................................................................................................................... 34 Improving performance ....................................................................................................................................... 34 Using Disk Defragmenter .................................................................................................................. 34 Using Disk Cleanup ............................................................................................................................ 34 Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) ................................................................................ 34 Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status .............................................................................. 35 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................................... 35 Cleaning your computer ...................................................................................................................................... 35 Cleaning procedures .......................................................................................................................... 35 Cleaning the display ........................................................................................................ 36 Cleaning the sides or cover ............................................................................................. 36 Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse (select products only) ............................. 36 Traveling with or shipping your computer .......................................................................................................... 36 8 Securing your computer and information ....................................................................................................... 38 Using passwords .................................................................................................................................................. 38 Setting Windows passwords ............................................................................................................. 38 Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords ............................................................................................. 39 Using Windows Hello (select products only) ....................................................................................................... 40 Using Internet security software ......................................................................................................................... 40 Using antivirus software ................................................................................................................... 40 Using firewall software ..................................................................................................................... 40 Installing software updates ................................................................................................................................. 41 Using HP Device as a Service (select products only) ........................................................................................... 41 Securing your wireless network .......................................................................................................................... 41 Backing up your software applications and information .................................................................................... 41 Using an optional security cable (select products only) ..................................................................................... 41 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) ............................................................................................................................. 42 Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) ................................................................................................................................ 42 Updating Setup Utility (BIOS) .............................................................................................................................. 42 Determining the BIOS version ........................................................................................................... 42 Downloading a BIOS update .............................................................................................................. 43 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics .............................................................................................................. 44 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) ................................................................. 44 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows ....................................................................... 44 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows version ....................... 45 ix Downloading HP Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number

(select products only) ..................................................................................................... 45 Installing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows ............................................................................. 45 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ............................................................................................................. 45 Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ....................................................................................... 46 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive .............................................. 46 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version .............................. 46 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number

(select products only) ..................................................................................................... 46 Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) ............................................. 47 Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ................................................................. 47 Downloading the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version ................. 47 Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number ............................................................................................................................ 47 Customizing Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings .................................................... 47 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering .......................................................................................................... 49 Backing up information and creating recovery media ........................................................................................ 49 Using Windows tools ......................................................................................................................... 49 Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only) ..... 49 Restoring and recovery ........................................................................................................................................ 50 Restoring, resetting, and refreshing using Windows tools .............................................................. 50 Recovering using HP Recovery media ............................................................................................... 50 Changing the computer boot order ................................................................................................... 50 12 Specifications ............................................................................................................................................ 51 Input power .......................................................................................................................................................... 51 Operating environment ....................................................................................................................................... 52 13 Electrostatic discharge ............................................................................................................................... 53 14 Accessibility .............................................................................................................................................. 54 Accessibility ......................................................................................................................................................... 54 Finding the technology tools you need ............................................................................................ 54 Our commitment ............................................................................................................................... 54 International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) ....................................................... 54 Finding the best assistive technology .............................................................................................. 55 Assessing your needs ..................................................................................................... 55 Accessibility for HP products .......................................................................................... 55 Standards and legislation .................................................................................................................................... 56 Standards .......................................................................................................................................... 56 x Mandate 376 EN 301 549 ............................................................................................ 56 Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) ................................................................ 56 Legislation and regulations .............................................................................................................. 56 United States ................................................................................................................... 57 21st Century Communications and Video Accessibility Act (CVAA) ............................... 57 Canada ............................................................................................................................. 57 Europe ............................................................................................................................. 58 United Kingdom .............................................................................................................. 58 Australia .......................................................................................................................... 58 Worldwide ....................................................................................................................... 58 Useful accessibility resources and links .............................................................................................................. 59 Organizations .................................................................................................................................... 59 Educational institutions .................................................................................................................... 59 Other disability resources ................................................................................................................. 59 HP links .............................................................................................................................................. 59 Contacting support .............................................................................................................................................. 60 Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 61 xi xii 1 Getting started This computer is a powerful tool designed to enhance your work and entertainment. Read this chapter to learn about best practices after you set up your computer, fun things to do with your computer, and where to find additional HP resources. Best practices After you set up and register the computer, we recommend the following steps to get the most out of your smart investment:

Back up your hard drive by creating recovery media. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 49. If you havent already done so, connect to a wired or wireless network. See details in Connecting to a network on page 15. Become familiar with the computer hardware and software. For more information, see Getting to know your computer on page 3 and Enjoying entertainment features on page 19. Update or purchase antivirus software. See Using antivirus software on page 40. Best practices 1 More HP resources To locate resources that provide product details, how-to information, and more, use this table. Contents Overview of computer setup and features Online chat with an HP technician Support telephone numbers Replacement parts videos (select products only) Maintenance and service guides HP service center locations Proper workstation setup Guidelines for posture and work habits that increase your comfort and decrease your risk of injury Electrical and mechanical safety information Important regulatory notices, including information about proper battery disposal, if needed. Specific warranty information about this computer Table 1-1 Additional information Resource Setup Instructions HP support For HP support, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Safety & Comfort Guide To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. or Go to http://www.hp.com/ergo. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the Internet to access the latest version of the user guide. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices To access this document:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. Limited Warranty*

To access this document:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. or Go to http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the Internet to access the latest version of the user guide.

*You can find your HP Limited Warranty located with the user guides on your product and/or on the CD or DVD provided in the box. In some countries or regions, HP may provide a printed warranty in the box. For countries or regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you can request a copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. For products purchased in Asia Pacific, you can write to HP at POD, PO Box 161, Kitchener Road Post Office, Singapore 912006. Include your product name, and your name, phone number, and postal address. 2 Chapter 1 Getting started 2 Getting to know your computer Your computer features top-rated components. This chapter provides details about your components, where they are located, and how they work. Locating hardware To find out what hardware is installed on your computer:

Type device manager in the taskbar search box, and then select the Device Manager app. A list displays all the devices installed on your computer. For information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number, press fn+esc

(select products only). Locating software To find out what software is installed on your computer:

Right-click the Start button, and then select Apps and Features. Locating hardware 3 Right side Component

(1) Drive light

(2) Memory card reader

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) USB Type-C port USB SuperSpeed port HDMI port AC adapter and battery light Description Blinking white: The hard drive is being accessed. Amber: HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the hard drive. For information about HP 3D DriveGuard, see Using HP NOTE:

3D DriveGuard (select products only) on page 34. Reads optional memory cards that enable you to store, manage, share, or access information. To insert a card:

1. 2. Hold the card label-side up, with connectors facing the computer. Insert the card into the memory card reader, and then press in on the card until it is firmly seated. To remove a card:

Press in on the card, and then remove it from the memory card reader. Connects a USB device, such as a cell phone, camera, activity tracker, or smartwatch, and provides data transfer. NOTE: Cables and/or adapters (purchased separately) may be required. Connects a USB device, such as a cell phone, camera, activity tracker, or smartwatch, and provides high-speed data transfer. Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-

definition television, any compatible digital or audio component, or a high-speed High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) device. White: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is fully charged. Blinking white: The AC adapter is disconnected and the battery has reached a low battery level. Amber: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is charging. 4 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Component Description Off: The battery is not charging.

(7) Power connector Connects an AC adapter. Left side Component

(1)

(2) USB SuperSpeed port Connects a USB device, such as a cell phone, camera, activity tracker, or smartwatch, and provides high-speed data transfer. Description Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in (microphone) combo jack Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional standalone microphones. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled.

(3) Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components.

(4) Power button NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep (select products only). When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. CAUTION: Pressing and holding down the power button results in the loss of unsaved information. Left side 5 Component Description

(5) Power light If the computer has stopped responding and shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button down for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, see your power options:

Right-click the Power icon

, and then select Power Options. On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state, a power-

saving state. The computer shuts off power to the display and other unneeded components. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Hibernation is a power-saving state that uses the least amount of power.

(6) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. 6 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Display Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Internal microphones Camera Camera light WLAN antenna(s)*

Description Record sound. Allows you to video chat, record video, and record still images. To use your camera, see Using the camera on page 19. Some cameras also allow a facial recognition logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. For more information, see Using Windows Hello (select products only) on page 40. NOTE: Camera functions vary depending on the camera hardware and software installed on your product. On: The camera is in use. Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs). NOTE: Depending on the model, your computer may have one or two wireless antennas.

*The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. Display 7 Keyboard area TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3) TouchPad zone Description Reads your finger gestures to move the pointer or activate items on the screen. For more information, see Using TouchPad and touch NOTE:

screen gestures on page 23. Left TouchPad button Right TouchPad button Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. 8 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Lights Component Description

(1)

(2) Caps lock light Mute light On: Caps lock is on, which switches the key input to all capital letters. On: Computer sound is off. Off: Computer sound is on. Keyboard area 9 Speakers and fingerprint reader Component

(1)

(2) Speakers Fingerprint reader (select products only) Description Produce sound. Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. To use the fingerprint reader, place your finger on the fingerprint reader until it reads your fingerprint. See Using Windows Hello (select products only) on page 40 for details. 10 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Special keys Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) esc key fn key Description Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes specific functions when pressed in combination with another key. Windows key Opens the Start menu. NOTE: Pressing the Windows key again will close the Start menu. Action keys Execute frequently used system functions. NOTE: On select products, the f5 action key turns the keyboard backlight feature off or on. Keyboard area 11 Action keys An action key performs the function indicated by the icon on the key. To determine which keys are on your product, see Special keys on page 11. To use an action key, press and hold the key. Icon Description Helps prevent side-angle viewing from onlookers. If needed, decrease or increase brightness for well-lit or darker environments. Press the key again to turn off the privacy screen. Decreases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Opens the How to get help in Windows 10 webpage. Switches the screen image between display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, repeatedly pressing this key alternates the screen image from the computer display to the monitor display to a simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. Turns the keyboard backlight off or on. On select products, you can adjust the brightness of the keyboard backlight. Press the key repeatedly to adjust the brightness from high (when you first start up the computer), to low, to off. After you adjust the keyboard backlight setting, the backlight will revert to your previous setting each time you turn on the computer. The keyboard backlight will turn off after 30 seconds of inactivity. To turn the keyboard backlight back on, press any key or tap the TouchPad (select products only). To conserve battery power, turn off this feature. Plays the previous track of an audio CD or the previous section of a DVD or a Blu-ray Disc (BD). Starts, pauses, or resumes playback of an audio CD, a DVD, or a BD. Plays the next track of an audio CD or the next section of a DVD or a BD. Stops audio or video playback of a CD, a DVD, or a BD. Decreases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Increases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. 12 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Icon Description Mutes or restores speaker sound. Turns the airplane mode and wireless feature on or off. NOTE: The airplane mode key is also referred to as the wireless button. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up before a wireless connection is possible. Bottom Component Vent Description Enables airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Labels may be in paper form or imprinted on the product. IMPORTANT: Check the following locations for the labels described in this section: the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, on the back of the display, or on the bottom of a tablet kickstand. Service labelProvides important information to identify your computer. When contacting support, you may be asked for the serial number, the product number, or the model number. Locate this information before you contact support. Your service label will resemble one of the examples shown below. Refer to the illustration that most closely matches the service label on your computer. Bottom 13 Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) HP product name Model number Product ID Serial number Warranty period Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) HP product name Product ID Serial number Warranty period Regulatory label(s)Provide(s) regulatory information about the computer. Wireless certification label(s)Provide(s) information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings for the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. 14 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer 3 Connecting to a network Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter will help you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

WLAN deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, the mobile wireless device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband ModuleGives you wireless connectivity over a wireless wide area network

(WWAN), a much larger area. Mobile network operators install base stations (similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close togethertypically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using one or more of these features:

Airplane mode key (also called wireless button or wireless key) (referred to in this chapter as airplane mode key) Operating system controls Airplane mode key The computer may have an airplane mode key, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights. All the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. Operating system controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, and diagnose and repair network problems. To use operating system controls:

On the taskbar, right-click the network status icon, and then select Open Network & Internet settings. or On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then select Network & Internet settings. Connecting to a wireless network 15 Connecting to a WLAN NOTE: When you are setting up Internet access in your home, you must establish an account with an Internet service provider (ISP). To purchase Internet service and a modem, contact a local ISP. The ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless router to the modem, and test the Internet service. To connect to a WLAN, follow these steps:

1. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. 2. On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then connect to one of the available networks. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Enter the code, and then select Next to complete the connection. NOTE:

NOTE:

1. 2. 3. If no WLANs are listed, you may be out of range of a wireless router or access point. If you do not see the WLAN you want to connect to:

On the taskbar, right-click the network status icon, and then select Open Network & Internet settings. or On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then select Network & Internet settings. Under the Change your network settings section, select Network and Sharing Center. Select Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed, allowing you to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the connection. 3. After the connection is made, right-click the network status icon at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. 16 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) Your HP Mobile Broadband computer has built-in support for mobile broadband service. Your new computer, when used with a mobile operators network, gives you the freedom to connect to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network without the need for Wi-Fi hotspots. You might need the HP Mobile Broadband Module IMEI and/or MEID number to activate mobile broadband service. The number may be printed on a label located on the bottom of your computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, or on the back of the display. or 1. 2. 3. Some mobile network operators require the use of a subscriber identity module (SIM) card. A SIM card contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some computers include a SIM card that is preinstalled. If the SIM card is not preinstalled, it may be included with the HP Mobile Broadband documents provided with your computer, or the mobile network operator may provide it separately from the computer. For information about HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, see the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. On the taskbar, select the network status icon. Select Network & Internet settings. Under the Network & Internet section, select Cellular, and then select Advanced Options. Using GPS (select products only) Your computer may be equipped with a Global Positioning System (GPS) device. GPS satellites deliver location, speed, and direction information to GPS-equipped systems. To enable GPS, make sure location is enabled under the Location setting. Type location in the taskbar search box, select Location privacy settings, and then select a setting. Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) Computers (desktop, notebook) Phones (cellular, cordless, smartphone) A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:

Audio devices (headset, speakers) Imaging devices (printer, camera) External keyboard Mouse Connecting Bluetooth devices Before you can use a Bluetooth device, you must establish a Bluetooth connection. 1. Type bluetooth in the taskbar search box, and then select Bluetooth and other devices settings. Enable Bluetooth, if it is not already enabled. 2. Connecting to a wireless network 17 3. 4. Select Add Bluetooth or other device, and then in the Add a device dialog box, select Bluetooth. Select your device from the list, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE:

If the device requires verification, a pairing code is displayed. On the device you are adding, follow the on-screen instructions to verify that the code on your device matches the pairing code. For more information, refer to the documentation provided with the device. NOTE:

devices may have additional requirements; refer to the documentation provided with the device. If your device does not appear in the list, be sure that Bluetooth on that device is turned on. Some Connecting to a wired networkLAN (select products only) Use a LAN connection if you want to connect the computer directly to a router in your home (instead of working wirelessly), or if you want to connect to an existing network at your office. Connecting to a LAN requires an RJ-45 (network) cable and a network jack or an optional docking device or expansion port, if there is no RJ-45 jack on the computer. To connect the network cable, follow these steps:

1. 2. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer. Plug the other end of the network cable into a network wall jack (2) or router. If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (3), which prevents interference from NOTE:

TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable toward the computer. 18 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network 4 Enjoying entertainment features Use your HP computer as an entertainment hub to socialize via the camera, enjoy and manage your music, and download and watch movies. Or, to make your computer an even more powerful entertainment center, connect external devices like a monitor, projector, TV, speakers, or headphones. Using the camera Your computer has one or more cameras that enable you to connect with others for work or play. Cameras may be front facing, rear facing, or pop up. To determine which camera(s) are on your product, see Getting to know your computer on page 3. Most cameras allow you to video chat, record video, and record still images. Some also provide HD (high-

definition) capability, apps for gaming, or facial recognition software like Windows Hello. See Securing your computer and information on page 38 for details about using Windows Hello. On select products, you can also enhance your camera privacy by turning the camera off. By default, the camera is turned on. To turn off your camera, slide the camera privacy switch toward the icon next to the switch. To turn the camera back on, slide the switch away from the icon. To use your camera, type camera in the taskbar search box, and then select Camera from the list of applications. Using audio You can download and listen to music, stream audio content (including radio) from the web, record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. You can also play music CDs on the computer (on select products) or attach an external optical drive to play CDs. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach external audio devices such as speakers or headphones. Connecting speakers You can attach wired speakers to your computer by connecting them to a USB port or to the audio-out

(headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer or on a docking station. To connect wireless speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. To connect high-definition speakers to the computer, see Setting up HDMI audio on page 21. Before connecting speakers, lower the volume setting. Connecting headphones WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this document:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. You can connect wired headphones to the headphone jack or to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) combo jack on your computer. To connect wireless headphones to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Using the camera 19 Connecting headsets WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this document:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. Headphones combined with a microphone are called headsets. You can connect wired headsets to the audio-

out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer. To connect wireless headsets to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Using sound settings Use sound settings to adjust system volume, change system sounds, or manage audio devices. To view or change sound settings:

Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. Your computer may include an enhanced sound system by Bang & Olufsen, B&O Play, or another provider. As a result, your computer may include advanced audio features that can be controlled through an audio control panel specific to your sound system. Use the audio control panel to view and control audio settings. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select the audio control panel specific to your system. Using video Your computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer when you are not connected to a network. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the computer to connect an external monitor, projector, or TV. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. For information about using your USB Type-C features, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable (select products only) NOTE: To connect an HDMI device to your computer, you need an HDMI cable, purchased separately. To see the computer screen image on a high-definition TV or monitor, connect the high-definition device according to the following instructions:

1. Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the computer. 20 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the high-definition TV or monitor. Press f4 to cycle through four display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and the external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of NOTE:

the external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select the Settings icon System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes.

, and then select Setting up HDMI audio HDMI is the only video interface that supports high-definition video and audio. After you connect an HDMI TV to the computer, you can then turn on HDMI audio by following these steps:

1. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then select Playback devices. On the Playback tab, select the name of the digital output device. Select Set Default, and then select OK. 2. 3. To return the audio stream to the computer speakers:

1. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then select Playback devices. On the Playback tab, select Speakers. Select Set Default, and then select OK. 2. 3. Using video 21 Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select products only) To discover and connect to Miracast-compatible wireless displays without leaving your current apps, follow the steps below. To open Miracast:

Type project in the taskbar search box, and then select Project to a second screen. Select Connect to a wireless display, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using data transfer Your computer is a powerful entertainment device that enables you to transfer photos, videos, and movies from your USB devices to view on your computer. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the USB Type-C ports on the computer to connect a USB device, such as a cell phone, camera, activity tracker, or smartwatch, and transfer the files to your computer. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. For information about using your USB Type-C features, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only) NOTE: To connect a USB Type-C device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable, purchased separately. 1. Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB Type-C port on the computer. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the external device. 22 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features 5 Navigating the screen Use touch gestures on the TouchPad. Use touch gestures directly on the computer screen. You can navigate the computer screen using one or more of the following methods:

Use an optional mouse or keyboard (purchased separately). Use an on-screen keyboard. Use a pointing stick. Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures The TouchPad helps you navigate the computer screen and control the pointer using simple touch gestures. You can also use the left and right TouchPad buttons as you would use the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. To navigate a touch screen (select products only), touch the screen directly using gestures described in this chapter. To customize gestures and see videos of how they work, type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, and then select Hardware and Sound. Under Devices and Printers, select Mouse. Some products include a Precision TouchPad, which provides enhanced gesture functionality. To determine if you have a Precision TouchPad and find additional information, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. NOTE: Unless noted, gestures can be used on both the TouchPad and a touch screen. Tap Point to an item on the screen, and then tap one finger on the TouchPad zone or touch screen to select the item. Double-tap an item to open it. Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures 23 Two-finger pinch zoom Use the two-finger pinch zoom to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the TouchPad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers together. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the TouchPad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers apart. Two-finger slide (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) Place two fingers slightly apart on the TouchPad zone and then drag them up, down, left, or right to move up, down, or sideways on a page or image. Two-finger tap (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) Tap two fingers on the TouchPad zone to open the options menu for the selected object. NOTE: The two-finger tap performs the same function as right-clicking with a mouse. 24 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Three-finger tap (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) By default, the three-finger tap opens Cortana, a voice-activated virtual assistant. Tap three fingers on the TouchPad zone to perform the gesture. To change the function of this gesture on a Precision TouchPad, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Three-finger gestures, in the Taps box, select a gesture setting. Four-finger tap (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) By default, the four-finger tap opens the Action Center. Tap four fingers on the TouchPad zone to perform the gesture. To change the function of this gesture on a Precision TouchPad, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Four-finger gestures, in the Taps box, select a gesture setting. Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures 25 Three-finger swipe (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) Swipe 3 fingers away from you to see all open windows. By default, the three-finger swipe switches between open apps and the desktop. Swipe 3 fingers left or right to switch between open windows. Swipe 3 fingers toward you to show the desktop. To change the function of this gesture on a Precision TouchPad, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Three-finger gestures, in the Swipes box, select a gesture setting. Four-finger swipe (Precision TouchPad) Swipe 4 fingers away from you to see all open windows. By default, the four-finger swipe switches between open desktops. Swipe 4 fingers left or right to switch between desktops. Swipe 4 fingers toward you to show the desktop. To change the function of this gesture, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Four-finger gestures, in the Swipes box, select a gesture setting. 26 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen One-finger slide (touch screen) Use the one-finger slide to pan or scroll through lists and pages, or to move an object. To scroll across the screen, lightly slide one finger across the screen in the direction you want to move. To move an object, press and hold your finger on an object, and then drag your finger to move the object. Using an optional keyboard or mouse An optional keyboard or mouse allows you to type, select items, scroll, and perform the same functions as you do using touch gestures. The keyboard also allows you to use action keys and hot keys to perform specific functions. Using an on-screen keyboard (select products only) 1. 2. To display an on-screen keyboard, tap the keyboard icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Begin typing. NOTE: Suggested words may be displayed above the on-screen keyboard. Tap a word to select it. NOTE: Action keys and hot keys do not display or function on the on-screen keyboard. Using an optional keyboard or mouse 27 6 Managing power Your computer can operate on either battery power or external power. When the computer is running on battery power and an external power source is not available to charge the battery, it is important to monitor and conserve the battery charge. Some power management features described in this chapter may not be available on your computer. Using Sleep and Hibernation CAUTION: Several well-known vulnerabilities exist when a computer is in the Sleep state. To prevent an unauthorized user from accessing data on your computer, even encrypted data, HP recommends that you always initiate Hibernation instead of Sleep anytime the computer will be out of your physical possession. This practice is particularly important when you travel with your computer. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. Windows has two power-saving states, Sleep and Hibernation. SleepThe Sleep state is automatically initiated after a period of inactivity. Your work is saved to memory, allowing you to resume your work very quickly. You can also initiate Sleep manually. For more information, see Initiating and exiting Sleep on page 28. HibernationThe Hibernation state is automatically initiated if the battery reaches a critical level or the computer has been in the Sleep state for an extended period of time. In the Hibernation state, your work is saved to a hibernation file and the computer powers down. You can also initiate Hibernation manually. For more information, see Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) on page 29. Initiating and exiting Sleep Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Sleep. Close the display (select products only). You can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:

Briefly press the power button (select products only). Press the Sleep hot key (select products only); for example, fn+f1or fn+f12. Briefly press the power button. You can exit Sleep in any of the following ways:

Tap the TouchPad (select products only). Press a key on the keyboard (select products only). If the computer is closed, raise the display (select products only). When the computer exits Sleep, your work returns to the screen. NOTE:

before your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Sleep, you must enter your Windows password 28 Chapter 6 Managing power Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) You can enable user-initiated Hibernation and change other power settings and timeouts using Power Options. 1. 2. 3. Right-click the Power icon

, and then select Power Options. In the left pane, select Choose what the power buttons do (wording may vary by product). Depending on your product, you can enable Hibernation for battery power or external power in any of the following ways:

Power buttonUnder Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording may vary by product), select When I press the power button, and then select Hibernate. Sleep button (select products only)Under Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording may vary by product), select When I press the sleep button, and then select Hibernate. Lid (select products only)Under Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording may vary by product), select When I close the lid, and then select Hibernate. Power menuSelect Change Settings that are currently unavailable, and then, under Shutdown settings, select the Hibernate check box. The Power menu can be accessed by selecting the Start button. Select Save changes. 4. To initiate Hibernation, use the method that you enabled in step 3. To exit Hibernation, briefly press the power button. NOTE:

password before your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Hibernation, you must enter your Windows Shutting down (turning off) the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. Be sure to save your work before shutting down the computer. The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and the computer. Shut down the computer when it will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period. The recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command. NOTE:

pressing the power button. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, first exit Sleep or Hibernation by briefly 1. 2. Save your work and close all open programs. Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. Shutting down (turning off) the computer 29 If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. Press and hold the power button for at least 10 seconds. If your computer has a user-replaceable battery (select products only), disconnect the computer from external power, and then remove the battery. Using the Power icon and Power Options The Power icon is located on the Windows taskbar. The Power icon allows you to quickly access power settings and view the remaining battery charge. To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon

. To use Power Options, right-click the Power icon

, and then select Power Options. Different Power icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. Placing the mouse pointer over the icon reveals a message if the battery has reached a low or critical battery level. Running on battery power WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is off and unplugged from external power, the battery in the computer slowly discharges. The computer displays a message when the battery reaches a low or critical battery level. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, screen brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. NOTE: When you disconnect external power, the display brightness is automatically decreased to conserve battery charge. Select computer products can switch between graphic controllers to conserve battery charge. Using HP Fast Charge (select products only) The HP Fast Charge feature allows you to quickly charge your computer battery. Charging time may vary by

+/- 10%. Depending on your computer model and the HP AC adapter provided with your computer, HP Fast Charge operates in one or more of the following ways:

When the remaining battery charge is between zero and 50%, the battery will charge to 50% of full capacity in no more than 30 to 45 minutes, depending on your computer model. When the remaining battery charge is between zero and 90%, the battery will charge to 90% of full capacity in no more than 90 minutes. To use HP Fast Charge, shut down your computer, and then connect the AC adapter to your computer and to external power. 30 Chapter 6 Managing power Displaying battery charge To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon

. Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only) To access battery information:

1. 2. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select Troubleshooting and fixes, and then in the Diagnostics section, select HP Battery Check. If HP Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. HP Support Assistant provides the following tools and information about the battery:

Information about battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity HP Battery Check Conserving battery power Lower the brightness of the display. To conserve battery power and maximize battery life:

Turn off wireless devices when you are not using them. Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, such as an external hard drive connected to a USB port. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Before you leave your work, initiate Sleep or shut down the computer. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low or critical battery level, the following behavior occurs:

The battery light (select products only) indicates a low or critical battery level. or The Power icon shows a low or critical battery notification. NOTE:

on page 30. For additional information about the Power icon, see Using the Power icon and Power Options The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. Running on battery power 31 Resolving a low battery level Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect one of the following to the computer and to external power:

Optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP Optional docking device or expansion product AC adapter Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation 1. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the computer and to external power. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. Factory-sealed battery To monitor the status of the battery, or if the battery is no longer holding a charge, run HP Battery Check in the HP Support Assistant app (select products only). 1. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select Troubleshooting and fixes, and then in the Diagnostics section, select HP Battery Check. If HP Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. 2. The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. Running on external power For information about connecting to external power, refer to the Setup Instructions poster provided in the computer box. The computer does not use battery power when the computer is connected to external power with an approved AC adapter or an optional docking device or expansion product. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are aboard aircraft. When charging or calibrating a battery Connect the computer to external power under any of the following conditions:

When writing information to a disc (select products only) When installing or updating system software When updating the system BIOS 32 Chapter 6 Managing power When running Disk Defragmenter on computers with internal hard drives When performing a backup or recovery When you connect the computer to external power:

The battery begins to charge. The screen brightness increases. The Power icon changes appearance. When you disconnect external power:

The computer switches to battery power. The screen brightness automatically decreases to conserve battery charge. The Power icon changes appearance. Running on external power 33 7 Maintaining your computer It is important to perform regular maintenance to keep your computer in optimal condition. This chapter explains how to use tools like Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. It also provides instructions for updating programs and drivers, steps to clean the computer, and tips for traveling with (or shipping) the computer. Improving performance You can improve the performance of your computer by performing regular maintenance tasks with tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. Using Disk Defragmenter HP recommends using Disk Defragmenter to defragment your hard drive at least once a month. NOTE:

It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives. To run Disk Defragmenter:

1. 2. Connect the computer to AC power. Type defragment in the taskbar search box, and then select Defragment and Optimize Drives. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Use Disk Cleanup to search the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. Type disk in the taskbar search box, and then select Disk Cleanup. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) HP 3D DriveGuard protects a hard drive by parking the drive and halting data requests under either of the following conditions:

You move the computer with the display closed while the computer is running on battery power. You drop the computer. A short time after the end of one of these events, HP 3D DriveGuard returns the hard drive to normal operation. NOTE: Only internal hard drives are protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. A hard drive installed in an optional docking device or connected to a USB port is not protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. NOTE: Because solid-state drives (SSDs) lack moving parts, HP 3D DriveGuard is unnecessary for these drives. 34 Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status The hard drive light on the computer changes color to show that the drive in a primary hard drive bay and/or the drive in a secondary hard drive bay (select products only) is parked. Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers on a regular basis. Updates can resolve issues and bring new features and options to your computer. For example, older graphics components might not work well with the most recent gaming software. Without the latest driver, you would not be getting the most out of your equipment. Go to http://www.hp.com/support to download the latest versions of HP programs and drivers. In addition, register to receive automatic notifications when updates become available. If you would like to update your programs and drivers, follow these instructions:

1. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select My notebook, select the Updates tab, and then select Check for updates and messages. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 3. Cleaning your computer Alcohol-free glass-cleaning fluid Use the following products to safely clean your computer:

Solution of water and mild soap Static-free cloth wipes Dry microfiber cleaning cloth or a chamois (static-free cloth without oil) CAUTION: Avoid strong cleaning solvents or germicidal wipes that can permanently damage your computer. If you are not sure that a cleaning product is safe for your computer, check the product contents to make sure that ingredients such as alcohol, acetone, ammonium chloride, methylene chloride, hydrogen peroxide, naphtha, and hydrocarbon solvents are not included in the product. Fibrous materials, such as paper towels, can scratch the computer. Over time, dirt particles and cleaning agents can get trapped in the scratches. Cleaning procedures Follow the procedures in this section to safely clean your computer. WARNING! To prevent electric shock or damage to components, do not attempt to clean your computer while it is on. 1. 2. 3. Turn off the computer. Disconnect AC power. Disconnect all powered external devices. Updating programs and drivers 35 CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not spray cleaning agents or liquids directly on any computer surface. Liquids dripped on the surface can permanently damage internal components. Cleaning the display Gently wipe the display using a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with an alcohol-free glass cleaner. Be sure that a display is dry before you close the computer. Cleaning the sides or cover To clean the sides or cover, use a soft microfiber cloth or chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously, or use an acceptable disposable wipe. NOTE: When cleaning the cover of the computer, use a circular motion to aid in removing dirt and debris. Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse (select products only) WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not allow liquids to drip between the keys. To clean the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse, use a soft microfiber cloth or a chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously. To prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles from the keyboard, use a can of compressed air with a straw extension. Traveling with or shipping your computer If you have to travel with or ship your computer, follow these tips to keep your equipment safe. Back up your information to an external drive. Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Shut down the computer. Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as memory cards. Take along a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it in with the rest of your luggage. CAUTION: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, listen for the in-flight announcement that tells you when you are allowed to use your computer. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. The use of wireless devices may be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions may apply aboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that 36 Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer applies to the use of a wireless device in your computer, ask for authorization to use your computer before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Traveling with or shipping your computer 37 8 Securing your computer and information Computer security is essential for protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of your information. Standard security solutions provided by the Windows operating system, HP applications, the Setup Utility

(BIOS), and other third-party software can help protect your computer from a variety of risks, such as viruses, worms, and other types of malicious code. NOTE: Some security features listed in this chapter may not be available on your computer. Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information and to protect online transactions. Several types of passwords can be set. For example, when you set up your computer for the first time, you were asked to create a user password to secure your computer. Additional passwords can be set in Windows or in HP Setup Utility (BIOS), which is preinstalled on your computer. You may find it helpful to use the same password for a Setup Utility (BIOS) feature and for a Windows security feature. To create and save passwords, use the following tips:

To reduce the risk of being locked out of the computer, record each password and store it in a secure place away from the computer. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Change your passwords at least every 3 months. An ideal password is long and has letters, punctuation, symbols, and numbers. Before you send your computer for service, back up your files, delete confidential files, and then remove all password settings. For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords:

Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Setting Windows passwords Table 8-1 Types of Windows passwords and their functions Password User password Administrator password Function Protects access to a Windows user account. Protects administrator-level access to computer contents. NOTE: This password cannot be used to access Setup Utility

(BIOS) contents. 38 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords Table 8-2 Types of BIOS passwords and their functions Password Administrator password Power-on password Function Must be entered each time you access Setup Utility (BIOS). If you forget your administrator password, you cannot access Setup Utility (BIOS). Must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer. If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the computer. To set, change, or delete an administrator or power-on password in Setup Utility (BIOS):

IMPORTANT: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. 1. Start Setup Utility (BIOS):

Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10. Tablets without keyboards:

1. Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume up button.

- or -

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button.

- or -

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the Windows button. Tap f10. 2. Select Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 2. To save your changes, select Exit, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. Using passwords 39 Using Windows Hello (select products only) On products equipped with a fingerprint reader or an infrared camera, you can use Windows Hello to sign in by swiping your finger or looking at the camera. To set up Windows Hello:

1. 2. 3. Select the Start button, select Settings, select Accounts, and then select Sign-in options. To add a password, select Add. Select Get Started, and then follow the on-screen instructions enroll your fingerprint or facial ID and set up a PIN. NOTE: The PIN is not limited in length. The default setting is for numbers only. To include alphabetic or special characters, select the include letters and symbols check box. Using Internet security software When you use your computer to access email, a network, or the Internet, you potentially expose your computer to computer viruses, spyware, and other online threats. To help protect your computer, Internet security software that includes antivirus and firewall features may be preinstalled on your computer as a trial offer. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses and other security risks, security software must be kept up to date. It is strongly recommended that you upgrade the security software trial offer or purchase the software of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. Using antivirus software Computer viruses can disable programs, utilities, or the operating system, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. An antivirus program may be preinstalled on your computer. It is strongly recommended that you use the antivirus program of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. For more information about computer viruses, type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Using firewall software Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be software you install on your computer and/or network, or it can be a combination of both hardware and software. There are two types of firewalls to consider:

Host-based firewallsSoftware that protects only the computer it is installed on. Network-based firewallsInstalled between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to protect all the computers on the network. When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked. 40 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information Installing software updates HP, Windows, and third-party software installed on your computer should be regularly updated to correct security problems and improve software performance. IMPORTANT: Microsoft sends out alerts regarding Windows updates, which may include security updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. You can install these updates automatically. To view or change the settings:

1. 2. 3. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select Update & Security. Select Windows Update, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To schedule a time for installing updates, select Advanced options, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP Device as a Service (select products only) HP DaaS is a cloud-based IT solution that enables businesses to effectively manage and secure their company assets. HP DaaS helps protect devices against malware and other attacks, monitors device health, and helps reduce time spent solving device and security issues. You can quickly download and install the software, which is highly cost effective relative to traditional in-house solutions. For more information, go to https://www.hptouchpointmanager.com/. Securing your wireless network When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. WLANs in public areas (hotspots) like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. Backing up your software applications and information Regularly back up your software applications and information to protect them from being permanently lost or damaged through a virus attack or a software or hardware failure. Using an optional security cable (select products only) A security cable (purchased separately) is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. To connect a security cable to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Installing software updates 41 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) Setup Utility, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Setup Utility (BIOS) includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of system and extended memory. NOTE: To start Setup Utility on convertible computers, your computer must be in notebook mode and you must use the keyboard attached to your notebook. Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) CAUTION: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Turn on or restart the computer and quickly press f10. or Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10 when the Start menu is displayed. Updating Setup Utility (BIOS) Updated versions of Setup Utility (BIOS) may be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Determining the BIOS version To decide whether you need to update Setup Utility (BIOS), first determine the BIOS version on your computer. To reveal the BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS), use one of these options. HP Support Assistant 1. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select My notebook, and then select Specifications. 2. Setup Utility (BIOS) 1. 2. 3. In Windows, press CTRL+Alt+S. Start Setup Utility (BIOS) (see Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) on page 42). Select Main, and then make note of the BIOS version. Select Exit, select one of the options, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 42 Chapter 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) To check for later BIOS versions, see Downloading a BIOS update on page 43. Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. NOTE:

software updates, especially system BIOS updates. If your computer is connected to a network, consult the network administrator before installing any 1. 2. 3. 4. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select Updates, and then select Check for updates and messages. Follow the on-screen instructions. At the download area, follow these steps:

a. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. If the update is more recent than your BIOS version, make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. b. BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that appear on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions appear, follow these steps:

1. Type file in the taskbar search box, and then select File Explorer. Select your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder that contains the update. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. 2. 3. 4. 5. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Updating Setup Utility (BIOS) 43 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is a Windows-based utility that allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs within the Windows operating system in order to diagnose hardware failures. If HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is not installed on your computer, first you must download and install it. To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows on page 44. After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, follow these steps to access it from HP Help and Support or HP Support Assistant. 1. To access HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Help and Support:

a. b. Select the Start button, and then select HP Help and Support. Right-click HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, select More, and then select Run as administrator. or To access HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Support Assistant:

a. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select Troubleshooting and fixes. Select Diagnostics, and then select HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows. b. c. 2. When the tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test at any time, select Cancel. When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit Failure ID code is generated. The screen displays one of the following options:

A Failure ID link is displayed. Select the link and follow the on-screen instructions. A Quick Response (QR) code is displayed. With a mobile device, scan the code and then follow the on-

screen instructions. Instructions for calling support are displayed. Follow those instructions. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows download instructions are provided in English only. You must use a Windows computer to download this tool because only .exe files are provided. 44 Chapter 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows version To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, follow these steps:

1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. Select Download HP Diagnostics Windows, and then select a location on your computer or a USB flash drive. The tool is downloaded to the selected location. Downloading HP Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number (select products only) NOTE:

product name or number. For some products, it may be necessary to download the software to a USB flash drive by using the To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number, follow these steps:

1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Get software and drivers, select your type of product, and then enter the product name or number in the search box that is displayed. In the Diagnostics section, select Download, and then follow the on-screen instructions to select the specific Windows diagnostics version to be downloaded to your computer or USB flash drive. 3. The tool is downloaded to the selected location. Installing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows To install HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, follow these steps:

Navigate to the folder on your computer or the USB flash drive where the .exe file was downloaded, double-click the .exe file, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI NOTE:

For Windows 10 S computers, you must use a Windows computer and a USB flash drive to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. For more information, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive on page 46. HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside the operating system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system or other software components. If your PC will not boot into Windows, you can use HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to diagnose hardware issues. When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit Failure ID code is generated. For assistance in solving the problem:

Select Get Support, and then use a mobile device to scan the QR code that displays on the next screen. The HP Customer Support - Service Center page displays, with your Failure ID and product number automatically filled in. Follow the on-screen instructions. or Contact support, and provide the Failure ID code. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI 45 NOTE: To start diagnostics on a convertible computer, your computer must be in notebook mode, and you must use the attached keyboard. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test, press esc. Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and quickly press esc. Press f2. The BIOS searches three places for the diagnostic tools, in the following order:

a. Connected USB flash drive NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI tool to a USB flash drive, see Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version on page 46. b. c. Hard drive BIOS 3. When the diagnostic tool opens, select a language, select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the preinstall image. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive can be useful in the following situations:

HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the HP Tool partition. The hard drive is damaged. NOTE: The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI download instructions are provided in English only, and you must use a Windows computer to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version To download the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version to a USB flash drive:

1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. Select Download HP Diagnostics UEFI, and then select Run. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only) NOTE:

product name or number. For some products, it may be necessary to download the software to a USB flash drive by using the To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only) to a USB flash drive:

46 Chapter 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics 1. 2. 3. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Enter the product name or number, select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostics section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the specific UEFI Diagnostics version for your computer. Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is a firmware (BIOS) feature that downloads HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to your computer. It can then execute the diagnostics on your computer, and it may upload results to a preconfigured server. For more information about Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags, and then select Find out more. Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI NOTE: HP Remote PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is also available as a Softpaq that can be downloaded to a server. Downloading the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version To download the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version, follow these steps:

1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. Select Download Remote Diagnostics, and then select Run. Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number NOTE:

number. For some products, it may be necessary to download the software by using the product name or To download HP Remote PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number, follow these steps:

1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Get software and drivers, select your type of product, enter the product name or number in the search box that is displayed, select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostics section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the Remote UEFI version for the product. 3. Customizing Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings Using the Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics setting in Computer Setup (BIOS), you can perform the following customizations:

Set a schedule for running diagnostics unattended. You can also start diagnostics immediately in interactive mode by selecting Execute Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics. Set the location for downloading the diagnostic tools. This feature provides access to the tools from the HP website or from a server that has been preconfigured for use. Your computer does not require the traditional local storage (such as a disk drive or USB flash drive) to run remote diagnostics. Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) 47 Set a location for storing the test results. You can also set the user name and password settings used for uploads. Display status information about the diagnostics run previously. Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Advanced, and then select Settings. To customize Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Make your customization selections. 4. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. Select Main, and then Save Changes and Exit to save your settings. 48 Chapter 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering This chapter provides information about the following processes, which are standard procedure for most products:

Backing up your personal informationYou can use Windows tools to back up your personal information (see Using Windows tools on page 49). Creating a restore pointYou can use Windows tools to create a restore point (see Using Windows tools on page 49). Creating recovery media (select products only)You can use the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool

(select products only) to create recovery media (see Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only) on page 49). Restoring and recoveryWindows offers several options for restoring from backup, refreshing the computer, and resetting the computer to its original state (see Using Windows tools on page 49). IMPORTANT:

70% charged before you start the recovery process. IMPORTANT:

beginning any recovery process. If you will be performing recovery procedures on a tablet, the tablet battery must be at least For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before Backing up information and creating recovery media Using Windows tools IMPORTANT: Windows is the only option that allows you to back up your personal information. Schedule regular backups to avoid information loss. You can use Windows tools to back up personal information and create system restore points and recovery media. NOTE:

If computer storage is 32 GB or less, Microsoft System Restore is disabled by default. For more information and steps, see the Get Help app. 1. 2. Select the Start button, and then select the Get Help app. Enter the task you want to perform. NOTE: You must be connected to the Internet to access the Get Help app. Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only) You can use the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create HP Recovery media on a bootable USB flash drive, as follows:

1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Software and Drivers, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Backing up information and creating recovery media 49 NOTE:

http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you cannot create recovery media yourself, contact support to obtain recovery discs. Go to Restoring and recovery Restoring, resetting, and refreshing using Windows tools Windows offers several options for restoring, resetting, and refreshing the computer. For details, see Using Windows tools on page 49. Recovering using HP Recovery media HP Recovery media is used to recover the original operating system and software programs that were installed at the factory. On select products, it can be created on a bootable USB flash drive using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool. For details, see Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only) on page 49. NOTE:

http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you cannot create recovery media yourself, contact support to obtain recovery discs. Go to To recover your system:

Insert the HP Recovery media, and then restart the computer. Changing the computer boot order If your computer does not restart using the HP Recovery media, you can change the computer boot order. This is the order of devices listed in BIOS where the computer looks for startup information. You can change the selection to an optical drive or a USB flash drive, depending on the location of your HP Recovery media. To change the boot order:

IMPORTANT:

beginning these steps. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before 1. 2. Insert the HP Recovery media. Access the system Startup menu. For computers or tablets with keyboards attached:

Turn on or restart the computer or tablet, quickly press esc, and then press f9 for boot options. For tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the tablet, quickly hold down the volume up button, and then select f9. or Turn on or restart the tablet, quickly hold down the volume down button, and then select f9. 3. Select the optical drive or USB flash drive from which you want to boot, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 50 Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering 12 Specifications Input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100240 V, 5060 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source that is supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within the following specifications. Operating voltage and current varies by platform. The voltage and current for your computer is located on the regulatory label. Table 12-1 DC power specifications Input power Rating Operating voltage and current 5 V dc @ 2 A / 12 V dc @ 3 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 3.75 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A / 15 V dc @ 3 A / 20 V dc @ 2.25 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc @ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc @ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc @ 5 A / 20 V dc @ 4.5 A 90 W USB-C 19.5 V dc @ 2.31 A 45 W 19.5 V dc @ 3.33 A 65 W 19.5 V dc @ 4.62 A 90 W 19.5 V dc @ 6.15 A 120 W 19.5 V dc @ 6.9 A 135 W 19.5 V dc @ 7.70 A 150 W 19.5 V dc @ 10.3 A 200 W 19.5 V dc @ 11.8 A 230 W 19.5 V dc @ 16.92 A 330 W DC plug of external HP power supply (select products only) NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. Input power 51 Operating environment Table 12-2 Operating environment specifications Factor Temperature Operating Nonoperating Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Metric U.S. 5C to 35C

-20C to 60C 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

41F to 95F

-4F to 140F 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Operating Nonoperating

-15 m to 3,048 m

-15 m to 12,192 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft

-50 ft to 40,000 ft 52 Chapter 12 Specifications 13 Electrostatic discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. IMPORTANT: To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, first be sure that it is properly grounded. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 53 14 Accessibility Accessibility HP is working to weave diversity, inclusion and work/life into the fabric of our company, so it is reflected in everything we do. Here are some examples of how we are putting differences to work to create an inclusive environment focused on connecting people to the power of technology throughout the world. Finding the technology tools you need Technology can unleash your human potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology helps increase, maintain, and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology. For more information, see Finding the best assistive technology on page 55. Our commitment HP is committed to providing products and services that are accessible for people with disabilities. This commitment supports our company's diversity objectives and helps us ensure that the benefits of technology are available to all. Our accessibility goal is to design, produce, and market products and services that can be effectively used by everyone, including people with disabilities, either on a stand-alone basis or with appropriate assistive devices. To achieve our goal, this Accessibility Policy establishes seven key objectives to guide our actions as a company. All HP managers and employees are expected to support these objectives and their implementation in accordance with their roles and responsibilities:

Raise the level of awareness of accessibility issues within our company, and provide our employees with the training they need to design, produce, market, and deliver accessible products and services. Develop accessibility guidelines for products and services, and hold product development groups accountable for implementing these guidelines where competitively, technically, and economically feasible. Involve people with disabilities in the development of accessibility guidelines, and in the design and testing of products and services. Document accessibility features and make information about our products and services publicly available in an accessible form. Establish relationships with leading assistive technology and solution providers. Support internal and external research and development that will improve assistive technology relevant to our products and services. Support and contribute to industry standards and guidelines for accessibility. International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) IAAP is a not-for-profit association focused on advancing the accessibility profession through networking, education, and certification. The objective is to help accessibility professionals develop and advance their careers and to better enable organizations to integrate accessibility into their products and infrastructure. 54 Chapter 14 Accessibility HP is a founding member, and we joined to participate with other organizations to advance the field of accessibility. This commitment supports our companys accessibility goal of designing, producing, and marketing products and services that can be effectively used by people with disabilities. IAAP will make our profession strong by globally connecting individuals, students, and organizations to learn from one another. If you are interested in learning more, go to http://www.accessibilityassociation.org to join the online community, sign up for newsletters, and learn about membership options. Finding the best assistive technology Everyone, including people with disabilities or age-related limitations, should be able to communicate, express themselves, and connect with the world using technology. HP is committed to increasing accessibility awareness within HP and with our customers and partners. Whether its large fonts that are easy on the eyes, voice recognition that lets you give your hands a rest, or any other assistive technology to help with your specific situationa variety of assistive technologies make HP products easier to use. How do you choose?

Assessing your needs Technology can unleash your potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology (AT) helps increase, maintain, and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology. You may choose from many AT products. Your AT assessment should allow you to evaluate several products, answer your questions, and facilitate your selection of the best solution for your situation. You will find that professionals qualified to do AT assessments come from many fields, including those licensed or certified in physical therapy, occupational therapy, speech/language pathology, and other areas of expertise. Others, while not certified or licensed, may also provide evaluation information. You will want to ask about the individual's experience, expertise, and fees to determine if they are appropriate for your needs. Accessibility for HP products HP PCsWindows 8 Accessibility Options HP PCsWindows 7 Accessibility Options The following links provide information about accessibility features and assistive technology, if applicable, included in various HP products. These resources will help you select the specific assistive technology features and product(s) most appropriate for your situation. HP Elite x3Accessibility Options (Windows 10 Mobile) HP Slate 7 TabletsEnabling Accessibility Features on Your HP Tablet (Android 4.1/Jelly Bean) HP Chromebook PCsEnabling Accessibility Features on Your HP Chromebook or Chromebox (Chrome OS) HP Shoppingperipherals for HP products HP SlateBook PCsEnabling Accessibility Features (Android 4.3,4.2/Jelly Bean) HP PCsWindows 10 Accessibility Options If you need additional support with the accessibility features on your HP product, see Contacting support on page 60. Additional links to external partners and suppliers that may provide additional assistance:

Microsoft Accessibility information (Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, Microsoft Office) Google Products accessibility information (Android, Chrome, Google Apps) Accessibility 55 Assistive Technologies sorted by impairment type Assistive Technologies sorted by product type Assistive Technology vendors with product descriptions Assistive Technology Industry Association (ATIA) Standards and legislation Standards Section 508 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) standards was created by the US Access Board to address access to information and communication technology (ICT) for people with physical, sensory, or cognitive disabilities. The standards contain technical criteria specific to various types of technologies, as well as performance-based requirements which focus on functional capabilities of covered products. Specific criteria cover software applications and operating systems, web-based information and applications, computers, telecommunications products, video and multi-media, and self-contained closed products. Mandate 376 EN 301 549 The EN 301 549 standard was created by the European Union within Mandate 376 as the basis for an online toolkit for public procurement of ICT products. The standard specifies the functional accessibility requirements applicable to ICT products and services, together with a description of the test procedures and evaluation methodology for each accessibility requirement. Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) from the W3C's Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) helps web designers and developers create sites that better meet the needs of people with disabilities or age-related limitations. WCAG advances accessibility across the full range of web content (text, images, audio, and video) and web applications. WCAG can be precisely tested, is easy to understand and use, and allows web developers flexibility for innovation. WCAG 2.0 has also been approved as ISO/IEC 40500:2012. WCAG specifically addresses barriers to accessing the web experienced by people with visual, auditory, physical, cognitive, and neurological disabilities, and by older web users with accessibility needs. WCAG 2.0 provides characteristics of accessible content:

Perceivable (for instance, by addressing text alternatives for images, captions for audio, adaptability of presentation, and color contrast) Operable (by addressing keyboard access, color contrast, timing of input, seizure avoidance, and navigability) Understandable (by addressing readability, predictability, and input assistance) Robust (for instance, by addressing compatibility with assistive technologies) Legislation and regulations Accessibility of IT and information has become an area of increasing legislative importance. This section provides links to information about key legislation, regulations, and standards. United States Canada Europe 56 Chapter 14 Accessibility United Kingdom Australia Worldwide United States Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act specifies that agencies must identify which standards apply to the procurement of ICT, perform market research to determine the availability of accessible products and services, and document the results of their market research. The following resources provide assistance in meeting Section 508 requirements:

www.section508.gov Buy Accessible The U.S. Access Board is currently updating the Section 508 standards. This effort will address new technologies and other areas where the standards need to be modified. For more information, go to Section 508 Refresh. Section 255 of the Telecommunications Act requires telecommunications products and services to be accessible to people with disabilities. FCC rules cover all hardware and software telephone network equipment and telecommunications equipment used in the home or office. Such equipment includes telephones, wireless handsets, fax machines, answering machines, and pagers. FCC rules also cover basic and special telecommunications services, including regular telephone calls, call waiting, speed dialing, call forwarding, computer-provided directory assistance, call monitoring, caller identification, call tracing, and repeat dialing, as well as voice mail and interactive voice response systems that provide callers with menus of choices. For more information, go to Federal Communication Commission Section 255 information. 21st Century Communications and Video Accessibility Act (CVAA) The CVAA updates federal communications law to increase the access of persons with disabilities to modern communications, updating accessibility laws enacted in the 1980s and 1990s to include new digital, broadband, and mobile innovations. Regulations are enforced by the FCC and documented as 47 CFR Part 14 and Part 79. FCC Guide on the CVAA Other U.S. legislation and initiatives Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Telecommunications Act, the Rehabilitation Act and others Canada The Accessibility for Ontarians with Disabilities Act was established to develop and implement accessibility standards to make goods, services, and facilities accessible to Ontarians with disabilities and to provide for the involvement of persons with disabilities in the development of the accessibility standards. The first standard of the AODA is the customer service standard; however, standards for transportation, employment, and information and communication are also being developed. The AODA applies to the Government of Ontario, the Legislative Assembly, every designated public sector organization, and to every other person or organization that provides goods, services, or facilities to the public or other third parties and that has at least one employee in Ontario; and accessibility measures must be implemented on or before January 1, 2025. For more information, go to Accessibility for Ontarians with Disability Act (AODA) . Standards and legislation 57 Europe EU Mandate 376 ETSI Technical Report ETSI DTR 102 612: "Human Factors (HF); European accessibility requirements for public procurement of products and services in the ICT domain (European Commission Mandate M 376, Phase 1)" has been released. Background: The three European Standardization Organizations have set up two parallel project teams to carry out the work specified in the European Commission "Mandate 376 to CEN, CENELEC and ETSI, in Support of Accessibility Requirements for Public Procurement of Products and Services in the ICT Domain."

ETSI TC Human Factors Specialist Task Force 333 has developed ETSI DTR 102 612. Further details about the work performed by STF333 (e.g., Terms of Reference, specification of the detailed work tasks, time plan for the work, previous drafts, listing of comments received and means to contact the task force) can be found at the Special Task Force 333. The parts relating to the assessment of suitable testing and conformity schemes were carried out by a parallel project, detailed in CEN BT/WG185/PT. For further information, go to the CEN project team website. The two projects are closely coordinated. European Commission mandate for e-accessibility (PDF 46KB) CEN project team United Kingdom The Disability Discrimination Act of 1995 (DDA) was enacted to ensure that websites are accessible to blind and disabled users in the United Kingdom. W3C UK Policies Australia The Australian government has announced their plan to implement Web Content Accessibility Guidelines 2.0. All Australian government websites will require Level A compliance by 2012, and Double A by 2015. The new standard replaces WCAG 1.0, which was introduced as a mandated requirement for agencies in 2000. Worldwide JTC1 Special Working Group on Accessibility (SWG-A) G3ict: The Global Initiative for Inclusive ICT Italian accessibility legislation W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) 58 Chapter 14 Accessibility Useful accessibility resources and links The following organizations may be good resources for information about disabilities and age-related limitations. NOTE: This is not an exhaustive list. These organizations are provided for informational purposes only. HP assumes no responsibility for information or contacts you may encounter on the Internet. Listing on this page does not imply endorsement by HP. Organizations American Association of People with Disabilities (AAPD) The Association of Assistive Technology Act Programs (ATAP) Hearing Loss Association of America (HLAA) Information Technology Technical Assistance and Training Center (ITTATC) Lighthouse International National Association of the Deaf National Federation of the Blind Rehabilitation Engineering & Assistive Technology Society of North America (RESNA) Telecommunications for the Deaf and Hard of Hearing, Inc. (TDI) W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) Educational institutions California State University, Northridge, Center on Disabilities (CSUN) University of Wisconsin - Madison, Trace Center University of Minnesota computer accommodations program Other disability resources ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) Technical Assistance Program Business & Disability network EnableMart European Disability Forum Job Accommodation Network Microsoft Enable U.S. Department of Justice - A Guide to disability rights Laws HP links Our contact webform HP comfort and safety guide HP public sector sales Useful accessibility resources and links 59 Contacting support NOTE: Support is in English only. Customers who are deaf or hard of hearing that have questions about technical support or accessibility of HP products:

Use TRS/VRS/WebCapTel to call (877) 656-7058 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time. Customers with other disabilities or age-related limitations who have questions about technical support or accessibility of HP products, choose one of the following options:

Call (888) 259-5707 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time. Complete the Contact form for people with disabilities or age-related limitations. 60 Chapter 14 Accessibility Index A AC adapter and battery light, identifying 4 accessibility 54 accessibility needs assessment 55 action keys airplane mode 13 help 12 identifying 11, 12 keyboard backlight 12 mute 13 next track 12 pause 12 play 12 privacy screen 12 screen brightness 12 speaker volume 12 stop 12 switch screen image 12 using 12 airplane mode 15 airplane mode key 13, 15 antivirus software, using 40 assistive technology (AT) finding 55 purpose 54 AT (assistive technology) finding 55 purpose 54 audio 19 adjusting volume 12 HDMI audio 21 headphones 19 headsets 20 sound settings 20 speakers 19 audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) combo jack, identifying 5 B backing up software and information 41 backup, creating 49 backups 49 battery conserving power 31 discharging 31 factory-sealed 32 finding information 31 low battery levels 31 resolving low battery level 32 battery charge 31 battery information, finding 31 battery power 30 best practices 1 BIOS determining version 42 downloading an update 43 starting the Setup Utility 42 updating 42 Bluetooth device 15, 17 Bluetooth label 14 boot order, changing 50 bottom components 13 buttons left TouchPad 8 power 5 right TouchPad 8 C camera identifying 7 using 19 camera light, identifying 7 caps lock light, identifying 9 caring for your computer 35 cleaning your computer 35 components bottom 13 display 7 keyboard area 8 left side 5 right side 4 connecting to a network 15 connecting to a wireless network 15 connecting to a WLAN 16 connecting to LAN 18 connectors power 5 corporate WLAN connection 16 critical battery level 31 customer support, accessibility 60 D data transfer 22 Disk Cleanup software 34 Disk Defragmenter software 34 display components 7 drive light, identifying 4 E electrostatic discharge 53 esc key, identifying 11 external power, using 32 F factory-sealed battery 32 fingerprint reader, identifying 10 fingerprints, registering 40 firewall software 40 fn key, identifying 11 four-finger tap TouchPad gesture 25 G Get Help in Windows 10 action key 12 GPS 17 H hardware, locating 3 HDMI port connecting 20 identifying 4 headphones, connecting 19 headsets, connecting 20 Hibernation exiting 29 initiated during critical battery level 31 initiating 29 high-definition devices, connecting 20, 22 HP 3D DriveGuard 34 Index 61 HP Assistive Policy 54 HP Device as a Service (HP DaaS) 41 HP Fast Charge 30 HP Mobile Broadband activating 17 IMEI number 17 MEID number 17 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI downloading 46 starting 46 using 45 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows downloading 44 installing 45 using 44 HP Recovery Manager L labels Bluetooth 14 regulatory 14 serial number 13 service 13 wireless certification 14 WLAN 14 left side components 5 lights AC adapter and battery 4 camera 7 caps lock 9 drive 4 mute 9 power 6 correcting boot problems 50 low battery level 31 HP Recovery media recovery 50 HP resources 2 HP Touchpoint Manager 41 I IMEI number 17 initiating Sleep and Hibernation 28 input power 51 installing optional security cable 41 internal microphones, identifying 7 International Association of Accessibility Professionals 54 Internet security software, using 40 J jacks audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) 5 K keyboard and optional mouse using 27 keyboard backlight action key 12 keys action 11 airplane mode 13 esc 11 fn 11 Windows 11 M maintenance Disk Cleanup 34 Disk Defragmenter 34 updating programs and drivers 35 managing power 28 MEID number 17 Miracast 22 mobile broadband activating 17 IMEI number 17 MEID number 17 mute light, identifying 9 mute volume action key 13 N next track action key 12 O one-finger slide touch screen gesture 27 operating environment 52 operating system controls 15 P passwords Setup Utility (BIOS) 39 Windows 38 pause action key 12 play action key 12 ports HDMI 4, 20 62 Index USB SuperSpeed 4, 5 USB Type-C 4, 22 power battery 30 external 32 power button, identifying 5 power connector identifying 5 Power icon, using 30 power lights, identifying 6 power settings, using 30 Precision TouchPad using 23 Precision TouchPad gestures four-finger tap 25 three-finger swipe 26 three-finger tap 25 two-finger slide 24 two-finger tap 24 privacy screen action key 12 privacy screen action key, identifying 12 product name and number, computer 13 public WLAN connection 16 R recovery 49 discs 50 HP Recovery partition 50 media 50 USB flash drive 50 recovery media creating using HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool 49 creating using Windows tools 49 regulatory information regulatory label 14 wireless certification labels 14 Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings customizing 47 using 47 resources, accessibility 59 restoring 49 right side components 4 S screen brightness action keys 12 wired network (LAN) 18 wireless button 15 wireless certification label 14 wireless controls button 15 operating system 15 wireless light 15 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 16 corporate WLAN connection 16 functional range 16 public WLAN connection 16 wireless network, securing 41 WLAN antennas, identifying 7 WLAN device 14 WLAN label 14 WWAN device 17 Section 508 accessibility standards 56, 57 security cable slot, identifying 6 security cable, installing 41 serial number, computer 13 service labels, locating 13 Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords 39 shipping the computer 36 shutdown 29 Sleep exiting 28 initiating 28 Sleep and Hibernation, initiating 28 slots memory card reader 4 security cable 6 software Disk Cleanup 34 Disk Defragmenter 34 locating 3 software installed locating 3 software updates, installing 41 sound. See audio sound settings, using 20 speaker volume action keys 12 speakers connecting 19 identifying 10 special keys, using 11 standards and legislation, accessibility 56 stop action key 12 switch screen image action key 12 system restore point, creating 49 T tap TouchPad and touch screen gesture 23 three-finger swipe TouchPad gesture 26 three-finger tap TouchPad gesture 25 touch screen gestures one-finger slide 27 TouchPad using 23 TouchPad and touch screen gestures tap 23 two-finger pinch zoom 24 TouchPad buttons identifying 8 TouchPad gestures four-finger tap 25 three-finger swipe 26 three-finger tap 25 two-finger slide 24 two-finger tap 24 TouchPad zone, identifying 8 transfer data 22 traveling with the computer 14, 36 turning off the computer 29 two-finger pinch zoom TouchPad and touch screen gesture 24 two-finger slide TouchPad gesture 24 two-finger tap TouchPad gesture 24 U unresponsive system 29 updating programs and drivers 35 USB SuperSpeed port, identifying 4, 5 USB Type-C port, connecting 22 USB Type-C port, identifying 4 using passwords 38 using the keyboard and optional mouse 27 using the TouchPad 23 V vent, identifying 5, 13 video HDMI port 20 USB Type-C 22 wireless displays 22 video, using 20 volume adjusting 12 mute 13 W Windows backup 49 recovery media 49 system restore point 49 Windows Hello 19 using 40 Windows key, identifying 11 Windows passwords 38 Windows tools, using 49 Index 63

 

 

Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide Read this first Before using this documentation and the product it supports, ensure that you read and understand the following:

Appendix A Important safety information on page 33 Safety and Warranty Guide Setup Guide First Edition (December 2018) Copyright Lenovo 2018. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If data or software is delivered pursuant to a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-

35F-05925. Contents About this documentation . . . . . . . . iii Chapter 1. Meet your computer . . . . . 1

. . 1 Front . . Base . 2

. 3

. . Left

. 4 Right . . Features and specifications . . 5

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 2. Get started with your computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

. 7 Get started with Windows 10 . . 7 Windows account . 8 Windows user interface . . 9 Windows label

. . Connect to Wi-Fi networks . . 9 Use Lenovo Vantage . . 10

. 11 Interact with your computer . . . 11

. Hotkeys . Use the multi-touch screen (for selected models)

. . . . . Use multimedia . . Use audio . . Use the camera . . Connect to an external display . . . . . . . 12

. 13

. 13

. 13

. 14

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check the battery status Charge the battery . . Check the battery temperature . . . Maximize the battery life

. Set power button behaviors . . . Set the power plan . . Chapter 3. Explore your computer . . 17

. 17 Manage power . 17

. 17

. 17

. 17

. 17

. 18

. 18

. 18

. 18

. 19

. Connect a Bluetooth-enabled device. Use an SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . Airplane mode . Transfer data . . . . . . . . Chapter 4. Secure your computer and information . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

. 21 Use passwords . 21

. 21

. 21

. 22

. . . . Password types . Set administrator password . . Change or remove administrator password . . Set user password . . . . . . . . . Enable power-on password . Set hard disk password . . . Change or remove hard disk password . Use the fingerprint reader (for selected models) Use firewalls and antivirus programs. . 22

. 22

. 23

. 23

. 23

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 5. Configure advanced settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 UEFI/BIOS . 25

. 25

. 25

. 25

. 25

. 26

. 26

. 26

. 26

. 26

. What is UEFI/BIOS setup utility . Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility . Navigate in the BIOS interface . Change the startup sequence . Set the system date and time. Enable/Disable hotkey mode . Enable/Disable always-on . . Update UEFI/BIOS . . . . Recovery information . . Restore system files and settings to an earlier

. . point

. . Restore your files from a backup . . . Reset your computer . . Use advanced options . . Windows automatic recovery. . Create and use a recovery USB device . 27

. 27

. 27

. 27

. 27

. 27

. . . . Chapter 6. Help and support

. Frequently asked questions . . Self-help resources . . Call Lenovo . . . Before you contact Lenovo . Lenovo Customer Support Center . Purchase additional services. . . . . . . . 29

. 29

. . . 30

. 31

. . 31

. . 31

. . . 32

. Appendix A. Important safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Appendix B. Accessibility and ergonomic information . . . . . . . . 47 Appendix C. Compliance information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Appendix D. Notices and trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Copyright Lenovo 2018 i ii Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide About this documentation Illustrations in this documentation might look different from your product. This documentation applies to models listed in the following table. Depending on the model, some optional accessories, features, and software programs might not be available on your computer. Depending on the version of operating systems, some user interface instructions might not be applicable to your computer. Documentation content is subject to change without notice. Lenovo makes constant improvements on the documentation of your computer, including this User Guide. To get the latest documentation, go to https://

support.lenovo.com. Microsoft makes periodic feature changes to the Windows operating system through Windows Update. As a result, some information in this documentation might become outdated. Refer to Microsoft resources for the latest information. Model name Lenovo IdeaPad S540-14IWL Lenovo IdeaPad S540-14API Lenovo IdeaPad S540-14IWL Touch Machine type 81ND 81NH 81QX Copyright Lenovo 2018 iii iv Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide Chapter 1. Meet your computer Front 1. Microphones Capture or record sound and voice. 2. Camera 3. Shutter Take pictures or record videos by clicking Camera from the Start menu. If you use other apps that support photographing, video chatting, and video conference, the camera starts automatically when you enable the camera-required feature from the app. Slide the shutter to cover or uncover the camera lens. It is designed to protect your privacy. 4. Camera light If the light is on, the camera is in use. 5. Screen Displays text, graphics, and videos. Selected models support multi-touch function. See Use the multi-touch screen (for selected models) on page 12. 6. Wireless LAN/Bluetooth antennas Send and receive radio waves for the wireless LAN/Bluetooth module. Note: The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. Copyright Lenovo 2018 1 1145623 Base 1.Power button (with power indicator) Press to turn on the computer or put the computer to sleep mode. To turn off the computer, open the Start menu, click Power, and then select Shut down. The indicator on the power button shows the system status of your computer. Solid white/Solid amber: The computer is on. Off: The computer is off or in hibernation mode. Blinking slowly: The computer is in sleep mode. 2. Speakers Produce sound. 3. Fingerprint reader*

Log in to your computer with enrolled fingerprints. See Use the fingerprint reader (for selected models) on page 23. 4. Touchpad Performs finger touch and all the functions of a traditional mouse.

* for selected models 2 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide 32124 Left 1. Power connector Connects to ac power through an ac power adapter. 2. Battery/Charging indicator This indicator shows whether the ac power is connected to the computer. White: connected to ac power (battery power 91% -100%) Amber: connected to ac power (battery power 0% -90%) Off: not connected to ac power 3. HDMI connector Connects to a compatible digital audio device or video monitor, such as an HDTV. 4. USB-C connector 5. Audio connector Transfers data at USB 3.1 speed, up to 5 Gbps. Connects to USB-C accessories to expand computer functionality. To purchase USB-C accessories, go to https://www.lenovo.com/accessories. Note: When the battery power is below 10%, the connected USB-C accessories might not work correctly. Connects headphones or a headset with a 3.5-mm (0.14-inch) and 4-pole plug to listen to the sound from the computer. Note: The conventional microphone is not supported. Chapter 1. Meet your computer 3 13245 Right 1. Power indicator 2. Novo button 3. SD-card slot The indicator shows the system status of your computer. Solid white/Solid amber: The computer is on. Off: The computer is off or in hibernation mode. Blinking slowly: The computer is in sleep mode. When the computer is off, press this button to open Novo Button Menu. Supported cards:

Secure Digital (SD) card Secure Digital eXtended-Capacity (SDXC) USH-1 card Secure Digital High-Capacity (SDHC) USH-1 card Note: Your computer does not support the content protection for recordable media

(CPRM) feature for the SD card. See Use an SD card on page 18. 4. USB 3.0 connector 5. Always On USB 3.0 connector Connect USB-compatible devices, such as a USB keyboard, USB mouse, USB storage device, or USB printer. To charge the USB-compatible devices when your computer is off, in sleep mode, or in hibernation mode, enable the Always On USB feature on your computer. See Enable/

Disable always-on on page 26. 4 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide 21345 Features and specifications Dimensions Width: 323 mm (12.72 inches) Depth: 227 mm (8.94 inches) Thickness: 15.9 mm (0.63 inches) Power source (ac power adapter) Sine-wave input at 50 Hz to 60 Hz Input rating of the ac power adapter: 100 V to 240 V ac, 50 Hz to 60 Hz Battery pack Microprocessor Memory Storage device Display Keyboard Connectors and slots Security features Wireless features Others

* for selected models 45 Wh/50 Wh 4 cells To view the microprocessor information of your computer, right-click the Start button and then click System. Double data rate 4 (DDR4) M.2 PCIE solid-state drive Display size: 355.6 mm (14.0 inches) Display resolution: 1920 x 1080 pixels Multi-touch technology*

Function keys Six-row keyboard (with backlight*) ac power connector Audio connector Two USB 3.0 connectors (including one Always On USB 3.0) USB-C connector HDMI connector SD-card slot Fingerprint reader*

Password Bluetooth Wireless LAN Camera Microphones Note: The battery capacity is the typical or average capacity as measured in a specific test environment. Capacities measured in other environments may differ but are no lower than the rated capacity (see product label). Chapter 1. Meet your computer 5 6 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide Chapter 2. Get started with your computer Get started with Windows 10 Learn the basics of Windows 10 and start working with it right away. For more information about Windows 10, see the Windows help information. Windows account To use the Windows operating system, a user account is required. It can either be a Windows user account or a Microsoft account. Windows user account When you start Windows for the first time, you are prompted to create a Windows user account. This first account you created is of the Administrator type. With an Administrator account, you can create additional user accounts or change account types by doing the following:

1. Open the Start menu and select Settings Accounts Family & other people. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions. Microsoft account You can also log in to the Windows operating system with a Microsoft account. To create a Microsoft account, go to the Microsoft sign-up page at https://signup.live.com and follow the on-

screen instructions. With a Microsoft account, you can:

Enjoy one-time signing in if you are using other Microsoft services, such as OneDrive, Skype, and Outlook. com. Sync personalized settings across other Windows-based devices. Copyright Lenovo 2018 7 Windows user interface 1. Account 2. Settings 3. Power 4. Start button 5. Windows Search 6. Task View Changes account settings, locks the computer, or signs out from the current account. Launch Settings. Shuts down, restarts, or puts the computer into sleep. Opens the Start menu. Type what you are looking for in the search box and get search results from your computer and the Web. Displays all opened apps and switches among them. 7. Windows notification area Displays notifications and status of some features. 8. Battery status icon 9. Network icon 10. Action center Displays power status and changes battery or power settings. When your computer is not connected to ac power, the icon changes to

. Connects to an available wireless network and displays the network status. Displays the latest notifications from apps and provides quick access to some features. Open the Start menu Click the Start button. Press the Windows logo key on the keyboard. Access Control Panel Open the Start menu and click Windows System Control Panel. 8 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide 12345687910 Use Windows Search. Launch an app Open the Start menu and select the app you want to launch. Use Windows Search. Windows label Your computer might have a Windows 10 Genuine Microsoft label affixed to its cover depending on the following factors:

Your geographic location Edition of Windows 10 that is preinstalled Go to https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/howtotell/Hardware.aspx for illustrations of the various types of Genuine Microsoft labels. In the Peoples Republic of China, the Genuine Microsoft label is required on all computer models preinstalled with any version of Windows 10. In other countries and regions, the Genuine Microsoft label is required only on computer models licensed for Windows 10 Pro. The absence of a Genuine Microsoft label does not indicate that the preinstalled Windows version is not genuine. For details on how to tell whether your preinstalled Windows product is genuine, refer to the information provided by Microsoft at:

https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/howtotell/default.aspx There are no external, visual indicators of the Product ID or Windows version for which the computer is licensed. Instead, the Product ID is recorded in the computer firmware. Whenever a Windows 10 product is installed, the installation program checks the computer firmware for a valid, matching Product ID to complete the activation. In some cases, an earlier Windows version might be preinstalled under the terms of the Windows 10 Pro license downgrade rights. Connect to Wi-Fi networks Your computer helps you connect to the world through a wireless network. 1. Click the network icon in the Windows notification area. A list of available wireless networks is displayed. 2. Select a network to connect to. Provide required information if needed. Chapter 2. Get started with your computer 9 Use Lenovo Vantage The preinstalled Lenovo Vantage is a customized one-stop solution to help you maintain your computer with automated updates and fixes, configure hardware settings, and get personalized support. Access Lenovo Vantage Open the Start menu and click Lenovo Vantage. You also can type Lenovo Vantage in the search box. To download the latest version of Lenovo Vantage, go to Microsoft Store and search by the app name. Key features Lenovo Vantage makes periodic updates of the features to keep improving your experience with your computer. Note: The available features vary depending on the computer model. System Update Download and install firmware and driver updates to keep your computer up-to-date. You can configure the options to install updates automatically when available. Hardware Settings Configure intelligent settings of the following hardware to make your computer smarter to use:

Always On USB Battery Camera Computer display Keyboard Microphones Speakers Touchpad Health & Support Monitor your computer health and get personalized support of your computer. You can:

Scan the computer hardware and diagnose hardware problems. Look up computer warranty status (online). Access User Guide. Read tips and tricks articles customized for your computer. Security Advisor Make sure that your computer is always staying protected and safe. 10 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide Interact with your computer Your computer provides you various ways to navigate the screen. Hotkeys Some keys on the keyboard are printed with icons. These keys are called hotkeys and can be pressed alone or in combination with the Fn key to access certain Windows functions or settings quickly. The functions of hotkeys are symbolized by the icons printed on them. Hotkey Function Mutes/Unmutes the computer. If you mute the computer and turn off your computer, the speakers remain muted when you turn on your computer.

/

/

Decreases/Increases volume. Enables/Disables the microphones. Refreshes the current window. Enables/Disables the touchpad. Turns on/off airplane mode. Enables/Disables the camera. Locks the current user account. Manages external displays. Decreases/Increases display brightness. Turns on/off or adjusts the brightness of the keyboard backlight. Note: This hotkey must be used with the Fn key. Hotkey mode Some hotkeys share keys with functions keys (F1 to F12). The hotkey mode is a UEFI/BIOS setting that changes how hotkeys (or function keys) are used. Hotkey mode setting How to use hotkeys How to use function keys Disabled Enabled Hold down the Fn key and press one of the hotkeys. Press the hotkeys directly. Press the function keys directly. Hold down the Fn key and press one of the function keys. Note: Hotkeys that do not share keys with function keys are not affected by the hotkey mode setting. They should always be used with the Fn key. Chapter 2. Get started with your computer 11 Use the multi-touch screen (for selected models) If your computer display supports the multi-touch function, you can navigate the screen with simple touch gestures. Note: Some gestures might not be available depending on the app you use. Tap once From the Start menu: Open an app or item. From the desktop: Select an app or item. In an open app: Perform an action such as Copy, Save, and Delete, depending on the app. Tap and hold Open a shortcut menu. Drag an item to the location you want Move an object. Tap twice quickly Open an app or item from the desktop. Slide Scroll through items, such as lists, pages, and photos. Move two fingers closer together Zoom out. Move two fingers farther apart Swipe in from the right edge Zoom in. Open the action center to see your notifications and quick actions. Swipe in from the left edge View all your open windows in task view. Swipe downwards shortly from the top edge (for full-

screened app ) Show a hidden title bar. Tips Turn off the computer before cleaning the multi-touch screen. Use a dry, soft, and lint-free cloth or a piece of absorbent cotton to remove fingerprints or dust from the multi-touch screen. Do not apply solvents to the cloth. The multi-touch screen is a glass panel covered with a plastic film. Do not apply pressure or place any metallic object on the screen, which might damage the touch panel or cause it to malfunction. 12 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide Do not use fingernails, gloved fingers, or inanimate objects for input on the screen. Regularly calibrate the accuracy of the finger input to avoid a discrepancy. Use multimedia Use your computer for business or entertainment with the built-in components (camera, speakers, and audio features) or connected external devices (an external projector, monitor, and HDTV). Use audio To enhance your listening experience, connect speakers, headphones, or a headset with a 3.5-mm (0.14-

inch) and 4-pole plug to the audio connector. Change the sound settings 1. Go to Control Panel and view by category. 2. Click Hardware and Sound Sound. 3. Change the settings as you prefer. Use the camera You can use the built-in camera to take photos or record videos. The indicator next to the camera turns on when the camera is activated. To take photos or record a video:

1. Open the Start menu and click Camera. 2. To take a photo, click the camera icon

. If you want to record video, click the video icon

. If you use other programs that provide features such as photographing, video capturing, and video conference, the camera starts automatically when you enable the camera-required feature. To configure the camera settings:

1. Open the Start menu and then click Lenovo Vantage Hardware Settings Audio/Visual. 2. Locate the Camera section and then follow the on-screen instructions. Chapter 2. Get started with your computer 13 Connect to an external display Connect your computer to a projector or a monitor to give presentations or expand your workspace. Connect to a wired display 1. Connect the external display to an appropriate video connector on your computer, such as the HDMI connector. 2. Connect the external display to an electrical outlet. 3. Turn on the external display. If your computer cannot detect the external display, right-click a blank area on the desktop, and then click Display settings Detect. Supported resolution The following table lists the supported maximum resolution of the external display. Connect the external display to the HDMI connector Supported resolution Up to 3840 x 2160 pixels / 30 Hz Connect a wireless display To use a wireless display, ensure that both your computer and the external display support the Miracast) Open the Start menu, and then click Settings Devices Bluetooth & other devices Add Bluetooth or other device. In the Add a device window, click Wireless display or dock. Then follow the on-screen instructions. Click the action center icon in the Windows notification area and click Connect. Select the wireless display and follow the on-screen instructions. Set the display mode Press and then select a display mode of your preference. PC screen only: Displays the video output only on your computer screen. Note: Depending on the situation, you might see Disconnect, PC screen only, Computer only, or Disconnect projector. Duplicate: Displays the same video output on both your computer screen and an external display. Extend: Extends the video output from your computer display to an external display. You can drag and move items between the two displays. Second screen only: Displays the video output only on an external display. Note: Depending on the situation, you might see Projector only or Second screen only. If you show programs using DirectDraw or Direct3D in full-screen mode, only the main display shows the video output. Change display settings 1. Right-click a blank area on the desktop and select Display settings. 2. Select the display that you want to configure. 3. Change display settings of your preference. 14 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide You can change the settings for both the computer display and the external display. For example, you can define which one is the main display and which one is the secondary display. You also can change the resolution and orientation. Note: If you set a higher resolution for the computer display than the external display, only part of the screen can be displayed on the external display. Chapter 2. Get started with your computer 15 16 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide Chapter 3. Explore your computer Manage power Use the information in this section to achieve the best balance between performance and power efficiency. Check the battery status You can check the battery status as follows. When the computer is on, click the battery status icon or in the Windows notification area. You can check the battery power remaining, view the current power plan, and access battery settings quickly. A warning message is displayed when the battery is low. When the computer is off, press any key on the keyboard (except the power button) to check the battery power remaining. Note: A battery icon will display for 3 seconds and then disappear. Charge the battery When the battery power is low, charge your battery by connecting your computer to ac power. The battery is fully charged in about two hours. The actual charging time depends on the battery size, the physical environment, and whether you are using the computer. If the power adapter shipped with your computer supports the rapid charge function, the battery is 80% charged in about one hour. Battery charging is also affected by its temperature. The recommended battery temperature range for charging the battery is between 10C (50F) and 35C (95F). Note: To maximize the life of the battery, the computer does not start recharging the battery if the remaining power is greater than 95%. Check the battery temperature 1. Open the Start menu and click Lenovo Vantage. 2. Click Hardware Settings Power. 3. Locate the Power Status section and then click Show Details to view the battery temperature. Maximize the battery life Lower the brightness of the computer display. Turn off the wireless features when not in use. Use the battery until the charge is depleted. Recharge the battery completely before using it. Set power button behaviors You can define what the power button does according to your preference. For example, by pressing the power button, you can turn off the computer or put the computer to sleep or hibernation mode. To change what the power button does:

1. Right-click the battery status icon in the Windows notification area. Copyright Lenovo 2018 17 2. Click Power Options Choose what the power button does. 3. Change the settings as you prefer. Set the power plan For ENERGY STAR compliant computers, the following power plan takes effect when your computers have been idle for a specified duration:

Table 1. Default power plan (when plugged into ac power) Turn off the display: After 10 minutes Put the computer to sleep: After 30 minutes To reset the power plan to achieve the best balance between performance and power saving:

1. Right-click the battery status icon and select Power Options. 2. Choose or customize a power plan of your preference. Transfer data Quickly share your files using the built-in Bluetooth among devices with the same features. You also can insert an SD card to transfer data. Connect a Bluetooth-enabled device You can connect all types of Bluetooth device to your computer, such as a keyboard, a mouse, a smartphone, or speakers. The devices must be within a short distance, usually 10 meters (33 feet), from the computer. 1. Open the Start menu, and then click Settings Devices Bluetooth & other devices. Turn on the Bluetooth switch. 2. Click Add Bluetooth or other device Bluetooth. 3. Select a Bluetooth device, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Your Bluetooth-enabled device and computer will automatically connect the next time if the two devices are in range of each other with Bluetooth turned on. You can use Bluetooth for data transfer or remote control and communication. Use an SD card If your computer has an SD-card slot, read the following information. Install the card 1. Locate the card slot. See Right on page 4. 2. Ensure that the metal contacts are facing upward and pointing toward the card slot. 3. Insert the card firmly into the card slot. Remove the card Attention: Before removing a card, eject the card from the Windows operating system first. Otherwise, data on the card might get corrupted or lost. 18 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide 1. Click the triangular icon in the Windows notification area to show hidden icons. Then, right-click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon. 2. Select the corresponding item to eject the card from the Windows operating system. 3. Press the card and remove it from your computer. Store the card safely for future use. Airplane mode When the Airplane mode is enabled, all wireless features are disabled. To enable or disable the Airplane mode:

1. Open the Start menu. 2. Click Settings Network & Internet Airplane mode. 3. Turn on or turn off the Airplane mode switch. Chapter 3. Explore your computer 19 20 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide Chapter 4. Secure your computer and information Use passwords This section introduces types of passwords in UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) or BIOS (Basic Input/Output System) and how to set, change, and remove a password. Password types You can set various passwords in the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. Password type Pre-requisite When set Administrator password No You must enter it to start the setup utility. User password The administrator password must be set. You can use the user password to start the setup utility. Master hard disk password No User hard disk password The master hard disk password must be set. You must enter it to start the operating system. You can use the user hard disk password to start the operating system. Notes:

All passwords set in the setup utility consist of alphanumeric characters only. If you start the setup utility using the user password, you can only change a few settings. Set administrator password You set the administrator password to prevent unauthorized access to the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. Attention: If you forget the administrator password, a Lenovo authorized service personnel cannot reset your password. You must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized service personnel or a marketing representative to have the system board replaced. Proof of purchase is required and a fee will be charged for parts and service. Step 1. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. Step 2. Select Security Set Administrator Password and press Enter. Step 3. Enter a password string that contains only letters and numbers. Then press Enter. Step 4. Enter the password again and press Enter. Step 5. Select Exit Exit Saving Changes. Next time you start the computer, you must enter the administrator password to start the setup utility. If Power on Password is enabled, you must enter the administrator password or the user password to start the computer. Change or remove administrator password Only the administrator can change or remove the administrator password. Copyright Lenovo 2018 21 Step 1. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility using the administrator password. Step 2. Select Security Set Administrator Password and press Enter. Step 3. Enter the current password. Step 4. Step 5. In the Enter New Password text box, enter the new password. In the Confirm New Password text box, enter the new password again. Note: If you want to remove the password, press Enter in both text boxes and do not enter any character. Step 6. Select Exit Exit Saving Changes. If you remove the administrator password, the user password is also removed. Set user password Before you can set up user password, the administrator password must be set. The administrator of the setup utility might need to set up a user password for use by others. Step 1. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility using the administrator password. Step 2. Select Security Set User Password and press Enter. Step 3. Enter a password string that contains only letters and numbers; press Enter. Note: The user password must be different from the administrator password. Step 4. Enter the password again and press Enter. Step 5. Select Exit Exit Saving Changes. Enable power-on password If the administrator password has been set, you can enable power-on password to enforce greater security. Step 1. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. Step 2. Select Security Power on Password and press Enter. Note: The administrator password must be set in advance. Step 3. Change the setting to Enabled. Step 4. Select Exit Exit Saving Changes. If power-on password is enabled, a prompt appears on the screen every time you turn on the computer. You must enter the administrator or user password to start the computer. Set hard disk password You can set a hard disk password in the setup utility to prevent unauthorized access to your data. Attention: Be extremely careful when setting a hard disk password. If you forget the hard disk password, a Lenovo authorized service personnel cannot reset your password or recover data from the hard disk. You must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized service personnel or a marketing representative to have the hard disk drive replaced. Proof of purchase is required and a fee will be charged for parts and service. Step 1. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. Step 2. Select Security Set Hard Disk Password and press Enter. 22 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide Note: If you start the setup utility using the user password, you cannot set hard disk password. Step 3. Follow on-screen instructions to set both the master and the user passwords. Note: The master and user hard disk passwords must be set at the same time. Step 4. Select Exit Exit Saving Changes. If the hard disk password is set, you must enter the correct password to start the operating system. Change or remove hard disk password Step 1. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. Step 2. Select Security. Step 3. Change or remove the hard disk password. To change or remove master password, select Change Master Password and press Enter. Note: If you remove the master hard disk password, the user hard disk password is also removed. To change user password, select Change User Password and press Enter. Note: The user hard disk password cannot be removed separately. Step 4. Select Exit Exit Saving Changes. Use the fingerprint reader (for selected models) If your computer includes a fingerprint reader, you can use it to enroll your fingerprints. After enrollment, you can tap your finger on the fingerprint reader to sign in to Windows. Enroll your fingerprints Open the Start menu and then click Settings Accounts Sign-in options. Then, follow the on-screen instructions to finish the enrollment. Notes:

You need to add a password before setting fingerprints. It is recommended to enroll more than one fingerprint in case of any injuries to your fingers. Maintain the fingerprint reader To ensure that the fingerprint reader works correctly, do not:

Scratch the surface of the reader with anything hard. Use or touch the reader with a wet, dirty, wrinkled, or injured finger. Use firewalls and antivirus programs Your computer might be preinstalled with a firewall program. The firewall protects against computer Internet security threats, unauthorized access, intrusions, and Internet attacks. It also protects your privacy. A full version of antivirus program is provided with a free 30-day subscription. After 30 days, you must renew the license to continue receiving the antivirus program updates. For more information, see the help system of the program. Chapter 4. Secure your computer and information 23 24 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide Chapter 5. Configure advanced settings This chapter provides information about UEFI/BIOS and system recovery. UEFI/BIOS This section introduces what is UEFI/BIOS and the operations you can perform in UEFI/BIOS. What is UEFI/BIOS setup utility UEFI/BIOS is the first program that the computer runs when the computer is turned on. UEFI/BIOS initializes the hardware components and loads the operating system and other programs. Your computer may include a setup program (setup utility) with which you can change UEFI/BIOS settings. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility Step 1. Press the Novo button with an expanded paper clip (or similar slender object) when your computer is off. Step 2. Select BIOS Setup from Novo Button Menu. Navigate in the BIOS interface You can navigate in the BIOS interface by pressing the following keys:

F1 F9 F10 F5 F6 Esc Displays the General Help screen. Restores to the default settings. Saves your configuration and exits. Changes to a lower value. Changes to a higher value. Locates an item. Selects a tab. Exits the submenu and returns to the parent menu. Enter Enters the selected tab or submenu. Change the startup sequence 1. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. 2. Select Boot. The default device order list is displayed. Note: The Boot menu is displayed if the computer cannot start from any devices or the operating system cannot be found. 3. Set the startup sequence as desired. 4. Press F10 to save the changes and restart the computer. To change the startup sequence temporarily:

1. Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F12. Copyright Lenovo 2018 25 Note: For computers with Hotkey mode enabled, press Fn+F12. 2. Select the device that you want the computer to start from and press Enter. Set the system date and time 1. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. 2. Select Configuration System Time/System Date and set the system date and time as desired. 3. Press F10 to save changes and exit. Enable/Disable hotkey mode Step 1. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. Step 2. Select Configuration Hotkey Mode and press Enter. Change the setting to Disabled or Enabled. Step 3. Select Exit Exit Saving Changes. Enable/Disable always-on For some Lenovo computers with always-on connectors, the always-on function can be enabled/disabled in the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. Step 1. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. Step 2. Select Configuration Always On USB and press Enter; change the setting to Disabled or Enabled. Step 3. Select Exit Exit Saving Changes. Note: If Lenovo Vantage (software) is pre-installed on your computer, you can also enable/disable always-on in it. Update UEFI/BIOS When you install a new program, device driver, or hardware component, you might need to update UEFI/

BIOS. Download and install the latest UEFI/BIOS update package by one of the following methods:

From Lenovo Vantage:

1. Open the Start menu and click Lenovo Vantage. 2. Click System Update. In the Lenovo System Update section, click Check for updates. The available update packages are displayed and categorized by critical, recommended, or optional. 3. If the latest UEFI/BIOS update package is available, select the package and click Install selected. Then, the update package will be downloaded and installed automatically. From the Lenovo Support Web site:

Go to https://support.lenovo.com and select the entry for your computer. Then, follow the on-screen instructions to download and install the latest UEFI/BIOS update package. Recovery information This section introduces the recovery information of the Windows 10 operating system. Ensure that you read and follow the on-screen recovery instructions. The data on your computer might be deleted during the recovery process. To avoid data loss, make a backup copy of all the data that you want to keep. 26 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide Restore system files and settings to an earlier point 1. Go to Control Panel and view by Large icons or Small icons. 2. Click Recovery Open System Restore. Then follow the on-screen instructions. Restore your files from a backup If you use the File History tool to restore your files from a backup, ensure that you backed up your data earlier with the tool. 1. Go to Control Panel and view by Large icons or Small icons. 2. Click File History Restore personal files.Then follow the on-screen instructions. Reset your computer In the resetting process, you can choose to keep your files or remove them when you reinstall the operating system. Note: The items in the graphical user interface (GUI) might change without notice. 1. Open the Start menu, and then click Settings Update & Security Recovery. 2. In the Reset this PC section, click Get started. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to reset your computer. Use advanced options Note: The items in the graphical user interface (GUI) might change without notice. 1. Open the Start menu, and then click Settings Update & security Recovery. 2. In the Advanced startup section, click Restart now Troubleshoot Advanced options. 3. Select a preferred option from the following list, and then follow the on-screen instructions. System Restore: Use a restore point recorded on your PC to restore Windows. Go back to the previous version System Image Recovery: Recover Windows using a specific system image file. Startup Repair: Fix problems that keep Windows from loading. Command Prompt: Use the Command Prompt for advanced troubleshooting. UEFI Firmware Settings: Change settings in your PCs UEFI firmware. Startup Settings: Change Windows startup behavior. Windows automatic recovery Note: Ensure that your computer is connected to ac power during the recovery process. The Windows recovery environment on your computer operates independently from the Windows 10 operating system. It enables you to recover or repair the operating system even if the Windows 10 operating system fails to start. After two consecutive failed boot attempts, the Windows recovery environment starts automatically. Then you can choose repair and recovery options by following the on-screen instructions. Create and use a recovery USB device It is recommended that you create a recovery USB drive as early as possible as a backup for the Windows recovery programs. With the recovery USB drive, you can troubleshoot and fix the problems even if the Chapter 5. Configure advanced settings 27 preinstalled Windows recovery programs are damaged. If you did not create a recovery USB drive as a precautionary measure, you can contact Lenovo Customer Support Center and purchase one from Lenovo. For a list of the Lenovo Support phone numbers for your country or region, go to https://

pcsupport.lenovo.com/supportphonelist. Create a recovery USB drive Attention: The creation process deletes anything stored on the USB drive. To avoid data loss, make a backup copy of all the data that you want to keep. 1. Ensure that your computer is connected to ac power. 2. Prepare a USB drive with at least 16 GB of storage capacity. The actual USB capacity required depends on the size of the recovery image. 3. Connect the prepared USB drive to the computer. 4. Type recovery in the search box. Then click Create a recovery drive. 5. Click Yes in the User Account Control window to allow the Recovery Media Creator program to start. 6. In the Recovery Drive window, follow the on-screen instructions to create a recovery USB drive. Use the recovery USB drive 1. Ensure that your computer is connected to ac power. 2. Connect the recovery USB drive to the computer. 3. Turn on or restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F12. The Boot Menu window opens. 4. Select the recovery USB drive as the boot device. 5. Click Troubleshoot to display optional recovery solutions. 6. Select a recovery solution as desired. Then follow the on-screen instructions to complete the process. 28 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide Chapter 6. Help and support Frequently asked questions How do I access Control Panel?

Open the Start menu and click Windows System Control Panel. Use Windows Search. How do I turn off my computer?

Open the Start menu and click Power. Then click Shut down. How do I partition my storage drive?

https://support.lenovo.com/solutions/ht503851 What do I do if my computer stops responding. Press and hold the power button until the computer turns off. Then restart the computer. What do I do if I spill liquid on the computer?

1. Carefully unplug the ac power adapter and turn off the computer immediately. The more quickly you stop the current from passing through the computer the more likely you will reduce damage from short circuits. Attention: Although you might lose some data or work by turning off the computer immediately, leaving the computer on might make your computer unusable. 2. Do not try to drain out the liquid by turning over the computer. If your computer has keyboard drainage holes on the bottom, the liquid will be drained out through the holes. 3. Wait until you are certain that all the liquid is dry before turning on your computer. Where can I get the latest device drivers and UEFI/BIOS?

From Lenovo Vantage. See Update UEFI/BIOS on page 26. Download from Lenovo Support Web site at https://support.lenovo.com. Copyright Lenovo 2018 29 Self-help resources Use the following self-help resources to learn more about the computer and troubleshoot problems. Resources How to access?

Use Lenovo Vantage to:

Download and install the latest drivers and firmware. Configure hardware settings. Diagnose computer hardware problems. Check the computer warranty status. Protect you computer from malicious Wi-Fi networks. Product documentation:

Safety and Warranty Guide Setup Guide This User Guide Regulatory Notice Lenovo Support Web site with the latest support information of the following:

Drivers and software Diagnostic solutions Product and service warranty Product and parts details Knowledge base and frequently asked questions Windows help information Open the Start menu and click Lenovo Vantage. Use Windows Search. 1. Go to https://support.lenovo.com. 2. Detect your computer or select computer model manually. 3. Select Documentation and filter out the documentation you want. https://support.lenovo.com Open the Start menu and click Get Help or Tips. Use Windows Search or the Cortana personal assistant. Microsoft support Web site: https://

support.microsoft.com 30 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide Call Lenovo If you have tried to correct the problem yourself and still need help, you can call Lenovo Customer Support Center. Before you contact Lenovo Prepare the following before you contact Lenovo:

1. Record the problem symptoms and details:

What is the problem? Is it continuous or intermittent?

Any error message or error code?

What operating system are you using? Which version?

Which software applications were running at the time of the problem?

Can the problem be reproduced? If so, how?

2. Record the system information:

Product name Machine type and serial number The following illustration shows where to find the machine type and serial number of your computer. Lenovo Customer Support Center During the warranty period, you can call Lenovo Customer Support Center for help. Telephone numbers For a list of the Lenovo Support phone numbers for your country or region:

Go to https://pcsupport.lenovo.com/supportphonelist for the latest phone numbers. Refer to the Safety and Warranty Guide that comes with your computer. Note: Phone numbers are subject to change without notice. If the number for your country or region is not provided, contact your Lenovo reseller or Lenovo marketing representative. Services available during the warranty period Problem determination - Trained personnel are available to assist you with determining if you have a hardware problem and deciding what action is necessary to fix the problem. Chapter 6. Help and support 31 Lenovo hardware repair - If the problem is determined to be caused by Lenovo hardware under warranty, trained service personnel are available to provide the applicable level of service. Engineering change management - Occasionally, there might be changes that are required after a product has been sold. Lenovo or your reseller, if authorized by Lenovo, will make selected Engineering Changes

(ECs) that apply to your hardware available. Services not covered Replacement or use of parts not manufactured for or by Lenovo or nonwarranted parts Identification of software problem sources Configuration of UEFI/BIOS as part of an installation or upgrade Changes, modifications, or upgrades to device drivers Installation and maintenance of network operating systems (NOS) Installation and maintenance of programs For the terms and conditions of the Lenovo Limited Warranty that apply to your Lenovo hardware product, see Warranty information in the Safety and Warranty Guide that comes with your computer. Purchase additional services During and after the warranty period, you can purchase additional services from Lenovo at https://

www.lenovo.com/services. Service availability and service name might vary by country or region. 32 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide Appendix A. Important safety information Safety notices This information can help you safely use your computer. Follow and retain all information included with your computer. The information in this document does not alter the terms of your purchase agreement or the Limited Warranty. For more information, see "Warranty Information" in the Safety and Warranty Guide that comes with your computer. Customer safety is important. Our products are developed to be safe and effective. However, personal computers are electronic devices. Power cords, power adapters, and other features can create potential safety risks that can result in physical injury or property damage, especially if misused. To reduce these risks, follow the instructions included with your product, observe all warnings on the product and in the operating instructions, and review the information included in this document carefully. By carefully following the information contained in this document and provided with your product, you can help protect yourself from hazards and create a safer computer work environment. Note: This information includes references to power adapters and batteries. In addition, some products

(such as speakers and monitors) ship with external power adapters. If you have such a product, this information applies to your product. In addition, computer products contain a coin-sized internal battery that provides power to the system clock even when the computer is unplugged, so the battery safety information applies to all computer products. Important information about using your computer Ensure that you follow the important tips given here to get the most use and enjoyment out of your computer. Failure to do so might lead to discomfort or injury, or cause the computer to fail. Protect yourself from the heat that your computer generates. When your computer is turned on or the battery is charging, the base, the palm rest, and some other parts may become hot. The temperature they reach depends on the amount of system activity and the level of charge in the battery. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, could cause discomfort or even a skin burn. Avoid keeping your hands, your lap, or any other part of your body in contact with a hot section of the computer for any extended time. Periodically take hands from using the keyboard by lifting your hands from the palm rest. Copyright Lenovo 2018 33 Protect yourself from the heat generated by the ac power adapter. When the ac power adapter is connected to an electrical outlet and your computer, it generates heat. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, may cause a skin burn. Do not place the ac power adapter in contact with any part of your body while it is in use. Never use it to warm your body. Do not wrap the cords around the ac power adapter while in use. Prevent your computer from getting wet. To avoid spills and the danger of electrical shock, keep liquids away from your computer. Protect the cables from being damaged. Applying strong force to cables may damage or break them. Route communication lines, or the cables of an ac power adapter, a mouse, a keyboard, a printer, or any other electronic device, so that they cannot be walked on, tripped over, pinched by your computer or other objects, or in any way subject to treatment that could interfere with the operation of your computer. Protect your computer and data when moving it. Before moving a computer equipped with a hard disk drive, do one of the following:

Turn it off. Put it in sleep mode. Put it in hibernation mode. This helps to prevent damage to the computer, and possible loss of data. 34 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide Handle your computer gently. Carry your computer carefully. Do not drop, bump, scratch, twist, hit, vibrate, push, or place heavy objects on your computer, display, or external devices. Use a quality carrying case that provides adequate cushioning and protection. Do not pack your computer in a tightly packed suitcase or bag. Before putting your computer in a carrying case, make sure that it is off, in sleep mode, or in hibernation mode. Do not put a computer in a carrying case while it is turned on. Conditions that require immediate action Products can become damaged due to misuse or neglect. Some product damage is serious enough that the product should not be used again until it has been inspected and, if necessary, repaired by an authorized servicer. As with any electronic device, pay close attention to the product when it is turned on. On very rare occasions, you might notice an odor or see a puff of smoke or sparks vent from your product. Or you might hear sounds like popping, cracking, or hissing. These might merely mean that an internal electronic component has failed in a safe and controlled manner. Or, they might indicate a potential safety issue. Do not take risks or attempt to diagnose the situation yourself. Contact the Customer Support Center for further guidance. For a list of Service and Support phone numbers, see the following Web site:

https://pcsupport.lenovo.com/supportphonelist Frequently inspect your computer and its components for damage or wear or signs of danger. If you have any question about the condition of a component, do not use the product. Contact the Customer Support Center or the product manufacturer for instructions on how to inspect the product and have it repaired, if necessary. In the unlikely event that you notice any of the following conditions, or if you have any safety concerns with your product, stop using the product and unplug it from the power source and telecommunication lines until you can speak to the Customer Support Center for further guidance. Appendix A. Important safety information 35 Power cords, plugs, power adapters, extension cords, surge protectors, or power supplies that are cracked, broken, or damaged. Signs of overheating, smoke, sparks, or fire. Damage to a battery (such as cracks, dents, or creases), discharge from a battery, or a buildup of foreign substances on the battery. A cracking, hissing, or popping sound, or strong odor that comes from the product. Signs that liquid has been spilled or an object has fallen onto the computer product, the power cord, or power adapter. The computer product, power cord, or power adapter has been exposed to water. The product has been dropped or damaged in any way. The product does not operate normally when you follow the operating instructions. Note: If you notice these conditions with a product (such as an extension cord) that is not manufactured for or by Lenovo, stop using that product until you can contact the product manufacturer for further instructions, or until you get a suitable replacement. Service and upgrades Do not attempt to service a product yourself unless instructed to do so by the Customer Support Center or your documentation. Only use a Service Provider who is approved to repair your particular product. Note: Some computer parts can be upgraded or replaced by the customer. Upgrades typically are referred to as options. Replacement parts approved for customer installation are referred to as Customer Replaceable Units, or CRUs. Lenovo provides documentation with instructions when it is appropriate for customers to install options or replace CRUs. You must closely follow all instructions when installing or replacing parts. The Off state of a power indicator does not necessarily mean that voltage levels inside a product are zero. Before you remove the covers from a product equipped with a power cord, always ensure that the power is turned off and that the product is unplugged from any power source. If you have any questions or concerns, contact the Customer Support Center. Although there are no moving parts in your computer after the power cord has been disconnected, the following warnings are required for your safety. Keep fingers and other parts of your body away from hazardous, moving parts. If you suffer an injury, seek medical care immediately. Avoid contact with hot components inside the computer. During operation, some components become hot enough to burn the skin. Before you open the computer cover, turn off the computer, disconnect power, and wait approximately 10 minutes for the components to cool. After replacing a CRU, reinstall all protective covers, including the computer cover, before connecting power and operating the computer. This action is important to help prevent unexpected electrical shock and help ensure the containment of an unexpected fire that could happen under extremely rare conditions. 36 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide When replacing CRUs, be cautious of sharp edges or corners that might cause injury. If you suffer an injury, seek medical care immediately. Power cords and power adapters DANGER Use only the power cords and power adapters supplied by the product manufacturer. The power cords shall be safety approved. For Germany, it shall be H03VV-F, 3G, 0.75 mm2, or better. For other countries, the suitable types shall be used accordingly. Never wrap a power cord around a power adapter or other object. Doing so can stress the cord in ways that can cause the cord to fray, crack, or crimp. This can present a safety hazard. Always route power cords so that they will not be walked on, tripped over, or pinched by objects. Protect power cords and power adapters from liquids. For instance, do not leave your power cord or power adapter near sinks, tubs, toilets, or on floors that are cleaned with liquid cleansers. Liquids can cause a short circuit, particularly if the power cord or power adapter has been stressed by misuse. Liquids also can cause gradual corrosion of power cord terminals and/or the connector terminals on a power adapter, which can eventually result in overheating. Ensure that all power cord connectors are securely and completely plugged into receptacles. Do not use any power adapter that shows corrosion at the ac input pins or shows signs of overheating (such as deformed plastic) at the ac input pins or anywhere on the power adapter. Do not use any power cords where the electrical contacts on either end show signs of corrosion or overheating or where the power cord appears to have been damaged in any way. To prevent possible overheating, do not cover the power adapter with clothing or other objects when the power adapter is plugged into an electrical outlet. Extension cords and related devices Ensure that extension cords, surge protectors, uninterruptible power supplies, and power strips that you use are rated to handle the electrical requirements of the product. Never overload these devices. If power strips are used, the load should not exceed the power strip input rating. Consult an electrician for more information if you have questions about power loads, power requirements, and input ratings. Appendix A. Important safety information 37 Plugs and outlets DANGER If a receptacle (power outlet) that you intend to use with your computer equipment appears to be damaged or corroded, do not use the outlet until it is replaced by a qualified electrician. Do not bend or modify the plug. If the plug is damaged, contact the manufacturer to obtain a replacement. Do not share an electrical outlet with other home or commercial appliances that draw large amounts of electricity; otherwise, unstable voltage might damage your computer, data, or attached devices. Some products are equipped with a three-pronged plug. This plug fits only into a grounded electrical outlet. This is a safety feature. Do not defeat this safety feature by trying to insert it into a non-grounded outlet. If you cannot insert the plug into the outlet, contact an electrician for an approved outlet adapter or to replace the outlet with one that enables this safety feature. Never overload an electrical outlet. The overall system load should not exceed 80 percent of the branch circuit rating. Consult an electrician for more information if you have questions about power loads and branch circuit ratings. Be sure that the power outlet you are using is properly wired, easily accessible, and located close to the equipment. Do not fully extend power cords in a way that will stress the cords. Be sure that the power outlet provides the correct voltage and current for the product you are installing. Carefully connect and disconnect the equipment from the electrical outlet. Power supply statement Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following label attached. Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact a service technician. External devices CAUTION:

Do not connect or disconnect any external device cables other than Universal Serial Bus (USB) and 1394 cables while the computer power is on; otherwise, you might damage your computer. To avoid possible damage to attached devices, wait at least five seconds after the computer is shut down to disconnect external devices. 38 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide General battery notice DANGER Batteries supplied by Lenovo for use with your product have been tested for compatibility and should only be replaced with approved parts. A battery other than the one specified by Lenovo, or a disassembled or modified battery is not covered by the warranty. Battery abuse or mishandling can cause overheat, liquid leakage, or an explosion. To avoid possible injury, do the following:

Do not open, dissemble, or service any battery. Do not crush or puncture the battery. Do not short-circuit the battery, or expose it to water or other liquids. Keep the battery away from children. Keep the battery away from fire. Stop using the battery if it is damaged, or if you notice any discharge or the buildup of foreign materials on the battery leads. Store the rechargeable batteries or products containing the rechargeable batteries at room temperature, charged to approximately 30 to 50% of capacity. We recommend that the batteries be charged about once per year to prevent overdischarge. Do not put the battery in trash that is disposed of in landfills. When disposing of the battery, comply with local ordinances or regulations. Notice for removable rechargeable battery DANGER Only recharge the battery strictly according to instructions included in the product documentation. If the battery is incorrectly replaced, there is danger of an explosion. The battery contains a small amount of harmful substances. Notice for built-in rechargeable battery DANGER Do not attempt to remove or replace the built-in rechargeable battery. Replacement of the battery must be done by a Lenovo-authorized repair facility or technician. Only recharge the battery strictly according to instructions included in the product documentation. The Lenovo-authorized repair facilities or technicians recycle Lenovo batteries according to local laws and regulations. Appendix A. Important safety information 39 Lithium coin-cell battery notice DANGER Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. If the coin-cell battery is not a CRU, do not attempt to replace the coin-cell battery. Replacement of the battery must be done by a Lenovo-authorized repair facility or technician. The Lenovo-authorized repair facilities or technicians recycle Lenovo batteries according to local laws and regulations. When replacing the lithium coin-cell battery, use only the same type or equivalent type that is recommended by the manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can explode if not properly used, handled, or disposed of. Swallowing the lithium coin-cell battery will cause chocking or severe internal burns in just two hours and might even result in death. Keep batteries away from children. If the lithium coin-cell battery is swallowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek medical care immediately. Do not:

Throw or immerse into water Heat to more than 100 C (212F). Repair or disassemble Leave in an extremely low air pressure environment Leave in an extremely high-temperature environment Crush, puncture, cut, or incinerate Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations. The following statement applies to users in the state of California, U.S.A. California Perchlorate Information:

Products containing manganese dioxide lithium coin-cell batteries may contain perchlorate. Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply, see https://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/

perchlorate/. 40 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide Heat and product ventilation DANGER Computers, ac power adapters, and many accessories can generate heat when turned on and when batteries are charging. Notebook computers can generate a significant amount of heat due to their compact size. Always follow these basic precautions:

When your computer is turned on or the battery is charging, the base, the palm rest, and some other parts may become hot. Avoid keeping your hands, your lap, or any other part of your body in contact with a hot section of the computer for any extended length of time. When you use the keyboard, avoid keeping your palms on the palm rest for a prolonged period of time. Your computer generates some heat during normal operation. The amount of heat depends on the amount of system activity and the battery charge level. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, could cause discomfort or even a skin burn. Periodically take breaks from using the keyboard by lifting your hands from the palm rest; and be careful not to use the keyboard for any extended length of time. Do not operate your computer or charge the battery near flammable materials or in explosive environments. Ventilation slots, fans and/or heat sinks are provided with the product for safety, comfort, and reliable operation. These features might inadvertently become blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, carpet, or other flexible surface. Never block, cover, or disable these features. When the ac power adapter is connected to an electrical outlet and your computer, it generates heat. Do not place the adapter in contact with any part of your body while using it. Never use the ac power adapter to warm your body. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, may cause a skin burn. For your safety, always follow these basic precautions with your computer:

Keep the cover closed whenever the computer is plugged in. Regularly inspect the outside of the computer for dust accumulation. Remove dust from vents and any perforations in the bezel. More frequent cleanings might be required for computers in dusty or high-traffic areas. Do not restrict or block any ventilation openings. Do not operate your computer inside furniture, as this might increase the risk of overheating. Airflow temperatures into the computer should not exceed 35C (95F). Appendix A. Important safety information 41 Electrical current safety information DANGER Electric current from power, telephone, and communication cables is hazardous. To avoid a shock hazard:

Do not use your computer during a lightning storm. Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet. Connect properly wired outlets to any equipment that will be attached to this product. Whenever possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables. Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage. Disconnect the attached power cords, battery, and all the cables before you open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures. Do not use your computer until all internal parts enclosures are fastened into place. Never use the computer when internal parts and circuits are exposed. DANGER Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following procedures when installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices. To connect:

To disconnect:

1. Turn everything OFF. 2. First, attach all cables to devices. 3. Attach signal cables to connectors. 4. Attach power cords to outlets. 5. Turn devices ON. 1. Turn everything OFF. 2. First, remove power cords from outlets. 3. Remove signal cables from connectors. 4. Remove all cables from devices. The power cord must be disconnected from the wall outlet or receptacle before installing all other electrical cables connected to the computer. The power cord may be reconnected to the wall outlet or receptacle only after all other electrical cables have been connected to the computer. DANGER During electrical storms, do not perform any replacement and do not connect the telephone cable to or disconnect it from the telephone outlet on the wall. 42 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide Laser safety information CAUTION:

When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber optic devices, or transmitters) are installed, note the following:

Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable parts inside the device. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation exposure. DANGER Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3B laser diode. Note the following:

Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view directly with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam. Liquid crystal display (LCD) notice CAUTION:

The liquid crystal display (LCD) is made of glass, and rough handling or dropping the computer can cause the LCD to break. If the LCD breaks and the internal fluid gets into your eyes or on your hands, immediately wash the affected areas with water for at least 15 minutes; if any symptoms are present after washing, get medical care. Note: For products with mercury-containing fluorescent lamps (for example, non-LED), the fluorescent lamp in the liquid crystal display (LCD) contains mercury; dispose of according to local, state, or federal laws. Using headphones or earphones Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss. Adjustment of the equalizer to maximum increases the earphone and headphone output voltage and the sound pressure level. Therefore, to protect your hearing, adjust the equalizer to an appropriate level. Excessive use of headphones or earphones for a long period of time at high volume can be dangerous if the output of the headphone or earphone connectors do not comply with specifications of EN 50332-2. The headphone output connector of your computer complies with EN 50332-2 Sub clause 7. This specification limits the computers maximum wide band true RMS output voltage to 150 mV. To help protect against hearing loss, ensure that the headphones or earphones you use also comply with EN 50332-2 (Clause 7 limits) for a wide band characteristic voltage of 75 mV. Using headphones that do not comply with EN 50332-

2 can be dangerous due to excessive sound pressure levels. If your Lenovo computer came with headphones or earphones in the package, as a set, the combination of the headphones or earphones and the computer already complies with the specifications of EN 50332-1. If different headphones or earphones are used, ensure that they comply with EN 50332-1 (Clause 6.5 Limitation Values). Using headphones that do not comply with EN 50332-1 can be dangerous due to excessive sound pressure levels. Appendix A. Important safety information 43 Choking hazard notice CHOKING HAZARD Product contains small parts. Keep away from children under three years. Plastic bag notice DANGER Plastic bags can be dangerous. Keep plastic bags away from babies and children to avoid danger of suffocation. Glass parts notice CAUTION:

Some parts of your product may be made of glass. This glass could break if the product is dropped on a hard surface or receives a substantial impact. If glass breaks, do not touch or attempt to remove it. Stop using your product until the glass is replaced by trained service personnel. Static electricity prevention Static electricity, although harmless to you, can seriously damage computer components and options. Improper handling of static-sensitive parts can damage the part. When you unpack an option or CRU, do not open the static-protective package containing the part until the instructions direct you to install it. When you handle options or CRUs, or perform any work inside the computer, take the following precautions to avoid static-electricity damage:

Limit your movement. Movement can cause static electricity to build up around you. Always handle components carefully. Handle adapters, memory modules, and other circuit boards by the edges. Never touch exposed circuitry. Prevent others from touching components. When you install a static-sensitive option or CRU, touch the static-protective package containing the part to a metal expansion-slot cover or other unpainted metal surface on the computer for at least two seconds. This reduces static electricity in the package and your body. When possible, remove the static-sensitive part from the static-protective packaging and install the part without setting it down. When this is not possible, place the static-protective packaging on a smooth, level surface and place the part on it. Do not place the part on the computer cover or other metal surface. 44 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide Operating environment Maximum altitude (without pressurization) 3048 m (10 000 ft) Temperature At altitudes up to 2438 m (8000 ft) Operating: 5C to 35C (41F to 95F) Storage: 5C to 43C (41F to 109F) At altitudes above 2438 m (8000 ft) Maximum temperature when operating under the unpressurized condition: 31.3C (88F) Note: When you charge the battery, its temperature must be no lower than 10C (50F). Relative humidity Operating: 8% to 95% at wet-bulb temperature 23C (73F) Storage: 5% to 95% at wet-bulb temperature 27C (81F) Cleaning and maintenance With appropriate care and maintenance your computer will serve you reliably. The following topics offer information to help you keep your computer in top working order. Basic maintenance tips Here are some basic points about keeping your computer functioning properly:

If possible, place your computer in a well-ventilated and dry area without direct exposure to sunshine. Store packing materials safely out of the reach of children to prevent the risk of suffocation from plastic bags. Keep your computer away from magnets, activated cellular phones, electrical appliances, or speakers

(more than 13 cm or 5 inches). Avoid subjecting your computer to extreme temperatures (below 5C/41F or above 35C/95F). Avoid placing any objects (including paper) between the display and the keyboard or the palm rest. Computer display might be designed to be opened and used at a certain angle. Do not open the display with force. Otherwise, the computer hinge might get damaged. Do not turn your computer over when the ac power adapter is plugged in, otherwise, it could break the adapter plug. Before moving your computer, be sure to remove any media, turn off attached devices, and disconnect cords and cables. When picking up your open computer, hold it by the bottom. Do not pick up or hold your computer by the display. Only an authorized Lenovo repair technician should disassemble and repair your computer. Do not modify or tape the latches to keep the display open or closed. Avoid directly exposing your computer and peripherals to the air from an appliance that can produce negative ions. Wherever possible, ground your computer to facilitate safe electrostatic discharge. Appendix A. Important safety information 45 Cleaning your computer It is a good practice to clean your computer periodically to protect the surfaces and ensure trouble-free operation. Cleaning the computer cover: Wipe it with a lint-free cloth dampened in mild soap and water. Avoid applying liquids directly to the cover. Cleaning the keyboard: Wipe the keys one by one with a lint-free cloth dampened in mild soap and water. If you wipe several keys at a time, the cloth might hook onto an adjacent key and possibly damage it. Avoid spraying cleaner directly onto the keyboard. To remove any crumbs or dust from beneath the keys, you can use a camera blower with a brush or use cool air from a hair dryer. Cleaning the computer screen: Scratches, oil, dust, chemicals, and ultraviolet light can affect the performance of your computer screen. Use a dry, soft lint-free cloth to wipe the screen gently. If you see a scratchlike mark on your screen, it might be a stain. Wipe or dust the stain gently with a soft, dry cloth. If the stain remains, moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water or eyeglass cleaner, but do not apply liquids directly to your computer screen. Ensure that the computer screen is dry before closing it. 46 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide Appendix B. Accessibility and ergonomic information This chapter provides information about accessibility and ergonomics. Accessibility information Lenovo is committed to providing users who have hearing, vision, and mobility limitations with greater access to information and technology. This section provides information about the ways these users can get the most out of their computer experience. You also can get the most up-to-date accessibility information from the following Web site:

https://www.lenovo.com/accessibility Keyboard shortcuts The following list contains keyboard shortcuts that can help make your computer easier to use. Note: Depending on your keyboard, some of the following keyboard shortcuts might not be available. Windows logo key + U: Open Ease of Access Center Right Shift for eight seconds: Turn on or turn off Filter Keys Shift five times: Turn on or turn off Sticky Keys Left Alt+Left Shift+PrtScn (or PrtSc): Turn on or turn off High Contrast For more information, go to https://windows.microsoft.com/, and then search using any of the following keywords: keyboard shortcuts, key combinations, shortcut keys. Ease of Access Center Ease of Access Center on the Windows operating system enables you to configure your computers to suit their physical and cognitive needs. To access Ease of Access Center:

1. Go to Control Panel and view by Category. 2. Click Ease of Access Ease of Access Center. 3. Choose the appropriate tool by following the on-screen instructions. Ease of Access Center mainly includes the following tools:

Magnifier Magnifier is a useful utility that enlarges the entire screen or part of the screen so that you can see the items better. Narrator Narrator is a screen reader that reads what is displayed on the screen aloud and describes events such as error messages. On-Screen Keyboard If you prefer to type or enter data into your computer using a mouse, joystick, or other pointing device instead of a physical keyboard, you can use On-Screen Keyboard. On-Screen Keyboard displays a visual keyboard with all the standard keys. You can select keys using the mouse or another pointing device, or you can tap to select the keys if your computer supports multi-touch screen. Copyright Lenovo 2018 47 High Contrast High Contrast is a feature that heightens the color contrast of some text and images on your screen. As a result, those items are more distinct and easier to identify. Personalized keyboard Adjust keyboard settings to make your keyboard easier to use. For example, you can use your keyboard to control the pointer and make the keyboard easier to type certain key combinations. Personalized mouse Adjust mouse settings to make your mouse easier to use. For example, you can change the pointer appearance and make your mouse easier to manage windows. Speech Recognition Speech Recognition enables you to control your computer by voice. You can use verbal instructions to control the keyboard and mouse. With verbal instructions, you can start programs, open menus, click objects on the screen, dictate text into documents, and write and send e-mails. To use Speech Recognition:

1. Go to Control Panel and view by Category. 2. Click Ease of Access Speech Recognition. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Screen-reader technologies Screen-reader technologies are primarily focused on software program interfaces, help systems, and various online documents. For additional information about screen readers, see the following:

Using PDFs with screen readers:

https://www.adobe.com/accessibility.html?promoid=DJGVE Using the JAWS screen reader:

https://www.freedomscientific.com/Products/Blindness/JAWS Using the NVDA screen reader:

https://www.nvaccess.org/

Screen resolution You can make the text and images on your screen easier to read by adjusting the screen resolution of your computer. To adjust the screen resolution:

1. Right-click a blank area on the desktop and then click Display settings Display. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions. Note: Setting a resolution too low might prevent some items from fitting on the screen. Customizable item size You can make the items on your screen easier to read by changing the item size. To change the item size temporarily, use the Magnifier tool in Ease of Access Center. To change the item size permanently:

Change the size of all the items on your screen. 48 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide 1. Right-click a blank area on the desktop and then click Display settings Display. 2. Change the item size by following the on-screen instructions. For some applications, your configuration might not take effect until you sign out and then sign in again. Change the size of the items on a Web page. Press and hold Ctrl, and then press the plus-sign key (+) to enlarge or the minus-sign key () to reduce the text size. Change the size of the items on the desktop or a window. Note: This function might not work on some windows. If your mouse has a wheel, press and hold Ctrl, and then scroll the wheel to change the item size. Industry-standard connectors Your computer provides industry-standard connectors that enable you to connect assistive devices. Documentation in accessible formats Lenovo provides electronic documentation in accessible formats, such as properly tagged PDF files or HyperText Markup Language (HTML) files. Lenovo electronic documentation is developed to ensure that visually impaired users can read the documentation through a screen reader. Each image in the documentation also includes adequate alternative text so that visually impaired users can understand the image when they use a screen reader. Ergonomic information Good ergonomic practice is important to get the most from your personal computer and to avoid discomfort. Arrange your workplace and the equipment you use to suit your individual needs and the kind of work that you perform. In addition, use healthy work habits to maximize your performance and comfort when using your computer. Working in the virtual office might mean adapting to frequent changes in your environment. Adapting to the surrounding light sources, active seating, and the placement of your computer hardware, can help you improve your performance and achieve greater comfort. This example shows someone in a conventional setting. Even when not in such a setting, you can follow many of these tips. Develop good habits, and they will serve you well. General posture: Make minor modifications in your working posture to deter the onset of discomfort caused by long periods of working in the same position. Frequent short breaks from your work also help to prevent minor discomfort associated with your working posture. Display: Position the display to maintain a comfortable viewing distance of 510 mm to 760 mm (20 inches to 30 inches). Avoid glare or reflections on the display from overhead lighting or outside sources of light. Keep Appendix B. Accessibility and ergonomic information 49 the display screen clean and set the brightness to levels that enable you to see the screen clearly. Press the brightness control keys to adjust display brightness. Head position: Keep your head and neck in a comfortable and neutral (vertical, or upright) position. Chair: Use a chair that gives you good back support and seat height adjustment. Use chair adjustments to best suit your comfort posture. Arm and hand position: If available, use chair arm rests or an area on your working surface to provide weight support for your arms. Keep your forearms, wrists, and hands in a relaxed and neutral (horizontal) position. Type with a soft touch without pounding the keys. Leg position: Keep your thighs parallel to the floor and your feet flat on the floor or on a footrest. What if you are traveling?

It might not be possible to observe the best ergonomic practices when you are using your computer while on the move or in a casual setting. Regardless of the setting, try to observe as many of the tips as possible. Sitting properly and using adequate lighting, for example, helps you maintain desirable levels of comfort and performance. If your work area is not in an office setting, ensure to take special note of employing active sitting and taking work breaks. Many product solutions are available to help you modify and expand your computer to best suit your needs. You can find some of these options at https://www.lenovo.com/accessories. Explore your options for docking solutions and external products that provide the adjustability and features that you want. Questions about vision?

The visual display screens of notebook computers are designed to meet the highest standards. These visual display screens provide you with clear, crisp images and large, bright displays that are easy to see, yet easy on the eyes. Any concentrated and sustained visual activity can be tiring. If you have questions on eye fatigue or visual discomfort, consult a vision-care specialist for advice. 50 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide Appendix C. Compliance information This chapter provides regulatory, environmental, RoHS, and ENERGY STAR information about Lenovo products. Radio frequency compliance statements Computer models equipped with wireless communications comply with the radio frequency and safety standards of any country or region in which it has been approved for wireless use. Besides this document, ensure that you read the Regulatory Notice for your country or region before using the wireless devices contained in your computer. European Union compliance with the Radio Equipment Directive This product is in conformity with all the requirements and essential norms that apply to EU Council Radio Equipment Directive 2014/53/EU on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to radio equipment. The full text of the system EU declaration of conformity and the EU wireless module declarations are available at the following Internet addresses:

For notebook computers: https://www.lenovo.com/us/en/social_responsibility/EU_DoC_notebooks For tablet computers: https://www.lenovo.com/us/en/social_responsibility/EU_DoC_notebooks For wireless peripheral devices: https://www.lenovo.com/us/en/social_responsibility/EU_DoC_wireless_ options Lenovo cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification of the product, including the installation of option cards from other manufacturers. This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B equipment according to European Standards harmonized in the Directives in compliance. The limits for Class B equipment were derived for typical residential environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed communication devices. Brazil Este equipamento no tem direito proteo contra interferncia prejudicial e no pode causar interferncia em sistemas devidamente autorizados. This equipment is not protected against harmful interference and may not cause interference with duly authorized systems. Mexico Advertencia: En Mexico la operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Copyright Lenovo 2018 51 Singapore Korea

( 24002483.5 , 57255825 ) SAR

. SAR . SAR

. 20mm

. Environmental information of countries and regions This section provides environmental, recycling, and RoHS information about Lenovo products. Recycling and environmental information Lenovo encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment to responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed. Lenovo offers a variety of programs and services to assist equipment owners in recycling their IT products. For information about recycling Lenovo products, go to:

https://www.lenovo.com/recycling The latest environmental information about our products is available at:

https://www.lenovo.com/ecodeclaration Important WEEE information The WEEE marking on Lenovo products applies to countries with WEEE and e-waste regulations (for example, the European WEEE Directive, India E-Waste Management Rules). Appliances are labeled in accordance with local regulations concerning waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE). These 52 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide regulations determine the framework for the return and recycling of used appliances as applicable within each geography. This label is applied to various products to indicate that the product is not to be thrown away, but rather put in the established collection systems for reclaiming these end of life products. Users of electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) with the WEEE marking must not dispose of end of life EEE as unsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to them for the return, recycle, and recovery of WEEE and to minimize any potential effects of EEE on the environment and human health due to the presence of hazardous substances. Lenovo electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) may contain parts and components, which at end-of-life might qualify as hazardous waste. EEE and waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE) can be delivered free of charge to the place of sale or any distributor that sells electrical and electronic equipment of the same nature and function as the used EEE or WEEE. For additional WEEE information, go to:

https://www.lenovo.com/recycling WEEE information for Hungary Lenovo, as a producer, bears the cost incurred in connection with the fulfillment of Lenovos obligations under Hungary Law No. 197/2014 (VIII.1.) subsections (1)-(5) of section 12. Japan recycling statements Collecting and recycling a disused Lenovo computer or monitor If you are a company employee and need to dispose of a Lenovo computer or monitor that is the property of the company, you must do so in accordance with the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources. Computers and monitors are categorized as industrial waste and should be properly disposed of by an industrial waste disposal contractor certified by a local government. In accordance with the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources, Lenovo Japan provides, through its PC Collecting and Recycling Services, for the collecting, reuse, and recycling of disused computers and monitors. For details, visit the Lenovo Web site at:

https://www.lenovo.com/recycling/japan Pursuant to the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources, the collecting and recycling of home-

used computers and monitors by the manufacturer was begun on October 1, 2003. This service is provided free of charge for home-used computers sold after October 1, 2003. For details, go to:

https://www.lenovo.com/recycling/japan Disposing of Lenovo computer components Some Lenovo computer products sold in Japan may have components that contain heavy metals or other environmental sensitive substances. To properly dispose of disused components, such as a printed circuit board or drive, use the methods described above for collecting and recycling a disused computer or monitor. Disposing of disused lithium batteries from Lenovo computers A button-shaped lithium battery is installed inside your Lenovo computer to provide power to the computer clock while the computer is off or disconnected from the main power source. If you need to replace it with a new one, contact your place of purchase or contact Lenovo for service. If you need to dispose of a disused lithium battery, insulate it with vinyl tape, contact your place of purchase or an industrial-waste-disposal operator, and follow their instructions. Appendix C. Compliance information 53 Disposal of a lithium battery must comply with local ordinances and regulations. Disposing of a disused battery from Lenovo notebook computers Your Lenovo notebook computer has a lithium ion battery or a nickel metal hydride battery. If you are a company employee who uses a Lenovo notebook computer and need to dispose of a battery, contact the proper person in Lenovo sales, service, or marketing, and follow that person's instructions. You also can refer to the instructions at:

https://www.lenovo.com/jp/ja/environment/recycle/battery/

If you use a Lenovo notebook computer at home and need to dispose of a battery, you must comply with local ordinances and regulations. You also can refer to the instructions at:

https://www.lenovo.com/jp/ja/environment/recycle/battery/

Recycling information for Brazil Declaraes de Reciclagem no Brasil Descarte de um Produto Lenovo Fora de Uso Equipamentos eltricos e eletrnicos no devem ser descartados em lixo comum, mas enviados pontos de coleta, autorizados pelo fabricante do produto para que sejam encaminhados e processados por empresas especializadas no manuseio de resduos industriais, devidamente certificadas pelos orgos ambientais, de acordo com a legislao local. A Lenovo possui um canal especfico para auxili-lo no descarte desses produtos. Caso voc possua um produto Lenovo em situao de descarte, ligue para o nosso SAC ou encaminhe um e-mail para:

reciclar@lenovo.com, informando o modelo, nmero de srie e cidade, a fim de enviarmos as instrues para o correto descarte do seu produto Lenovo. Battery recycling information for the European Union Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU). Batteries or packaging for batteries are labeled in accordance with European Directive 2006/66/EC concerning batteries and accumulators and waste batteries and accumulators. The Directive determines the framework for the return and recycling of used batteries and accumulators as applicable throughout the European Union. This label is applied to various batteries to indicate that the battery is not to be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive. In accordance with the European Directive 2006/66/EC, batteries and accumulators are labeled to indicate that they are to be collected separately and recycled at end of life. The label on the battery may also include a chemical symbol for the metal concerned in the battery (Pb for lead, Hg for mercury, and Cd for cadmium). Users of batteries and accumulators must not dispose of batteries and accumulators as unsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers for the return, recycling, and treatment of 54 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide batteries and accumulators. Customer participation is important to minimize any potential effects of batteries and accumulators on the environment and human health due to the potential presence of hazardous substances. Before placing electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) in the waste collection stream or in waste collection facilities, the end user of equipment containing batteries and/or accumulators must remove those batteries and accumulators for separate collection. Disposing of lithium batteries and battery packs from Lenovo products A coin-cell type lithium battery might be installed inside your Lenovo product. You can find details about the battery in the product documentation. If the battery needs to be replaced, contact your place of purchase or contact Lenovo for service. If you need to dispose of a lithium battery, insulate it with vinyl tape, contact your place of purchase or a waste-disposal operator, and follow their instructions. Disposing of battery packs from Lenovo products Your Lenovo device might contain a lithium-ion battery pack or a nickel metal hydride battery pack. You can find details on the battery pack in the product documentation. If you need to dispose of a battery pack, insulate it with vinyl tape, contact Lenovo sales, service, or your place of purchase, or a waste-disposal operator, and follow their instructions. You also can refer to the instructions provided in the user guide for your product. For proper collection and treatment, go to:

https://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment Recycling information for China Battery recycling information for Taiwan Battery recycling information for the United States and Canada Appendix C. Compliance information 55 Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive of countries and regions The latest environmental information about Lenovo products is available at:

https://www.lenovo.com/ecodeclaration European Union RoHS This Lenovo product, with included parts (cables, cords, and so on) meets the requirements of Directive 2011/65/EU on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment ("RoHS recast" or "RoHS 2"). For more information about Lenovo worldwide compliance on RoHS, go to:

https://www.lenovo.com/rohs-communication Turkish RoHS The Lenovo product meets the requirements of the Republic of Turkey Directive on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE). Ukraine RoHS India RoHS RoHS compliant as per E-Waste (Management) Rules. China RoHS The information in the following table is applicable to products manufactured on or after January 1, 2015 for sale in the Peoples Republic of China. 56 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide Appendix C. Compliance information 57 Taiwan RoHS Electromagnetic emission notices Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Suppliers Declaration of Conformity The following information refers to Lenovo IdeaPad S540-14IWL, Lenovo IdeaPad S540- 14API and Lenovo IdeaPad S540-14IWL Touch, machine type(s): 81ND, 81NH and 81QX. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful 58 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Responsible Party:

Lenovo (United States) Incorporated 7001 Development Drive Morrisville, NC 27560 Email: FCC@lenovo.com FCC ID and IC Certification information The following illustration shows where to find the FCC ID and IC Certification information. Industry Canada compliance statement CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B) Appendix C. Compliance information 59 European Union conformity EU Contact: Lenovo (Slovakia), Landererova 12, 811 09 Bratislava, Slovakia Compliance with the EMC Directive This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 2014/30/EU on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B equipment according to European Standards harmonized in the Directives in compliance. The Class B requirements for equipment are intended to offer adequate protection to broadcast services within residential environments. German Class B compliance statement Hinweis zur Einhaltung der Klasse B zur elektromagnetischen Vertrglichkeit Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie zur elektromagnetischen Vertrglichkeit Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit in den EU-

Mitgliedsstaaten und hlt die Grenzwerte der Klasse B der Norm gem Richtlinie. Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Gerte wie in den Handbchern beschrieben zu installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren drfen auch nur von der Lenovo empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. Lenovo bernimmt keine Verantwortung fr die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der Lenovo verndert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne Empfehlung der Lenovo gesteckt/eingebaut werden. Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln, EMVG vom 20. Juli 2007 (frher Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten), bzw. der EU Richtlinie 2014/30/EU, der EU Richtlinie 2014/53/EU Artikel 3.1b), fr Gerte der Klasse B. Dieses Gert ist berechtigt, in bereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG-Konformittszeichen -

CE - zu fhren. Verantwortlich fr die Konformittserklrung nach Paragraf 5 des EMVG ist die Lenovo

(Deutschland) GmbH, Meitnerstr. 9, D-70563 Stuttgart. Japan VCCI Class B compliance statement Japan compliance statement for products which connect to the power mains with rated current less than or equal to 20 A per phase Japan notice for ac power cord The ac power cord shipped with your product can be used only for this specific product. Do not use the ac power cord for other devices. 60 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide Other compliance information This section provides other compliance information about Lenovo products. TCO certification To obtain the TCO certification information for your computer, go to:

https://www.lenovo.com/tco-cert Export classification notice This product is subject to the United States Export Administration Regulations (EAR) and has an Export Classification Control Number (ECCN) of 5A992.c. It can be re-exported except to any of the embargoed countries in the EAR E1 country list. Lenovo product service information for Taiwan Taiwan precautionary vision statement 3010 221 Eurasian compliance mark Brazil audio notice Ouvir sons com mais de 85 decibis por longos perodos pode provocar danos ao sistema auditivo. ENERGY STAR model information ENERGY STAR is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy aimed at saving money and protecting the environment through energy efficient products and practices. Appendix C. Compliance information 61 Lenovo is proud to offer our customers products with an ENERGY STAR compliant designation. Machine type(s) 81ND, 81NH and 81QX have been designed and tested to conform to the ENERGY STAR program requirement for computers at the time of manufacture. For more information about Lenovo ENERGY STAR certified products, go to:

https://www.lenovo.com/us/en/social_responsibility/energy/

By using ENERGY STAR compliant products and taking advantage of the power management features of your computer, you reduce the consumption of electricity. Reduced electrical consumption contributes to potential financial savings, a cleaner environment, and the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions. For more information about ENERGY STAR, go to:

https://www.energystar.gov Lenovo encourages you to make efficient use of energy an integral part of your day-to-day operations. To help in this endeavor, Lenovo has preset a default power plan. To change the power plan, see Set the power plan on page 18. 62 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide Appendix D. Notices and trademarks Notices Lenovo may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in all countries. Consult your local Lenovo representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to a Lenovo product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that Lenovo product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any Lenovo intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the user's responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any other product, program, or service. Lenovo may have patents or pending patent programs covering subject matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:

Lenovo (United States), Inc. 1009 Think Place - Building One Morrisville, NC 27560 U.S.A. Attention: Lenovo Director of Licensing LENOVO PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you. Changes are made periodically to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. To provide better service, Lenovo reserves the right to improve and/or modify the products and software programs described in the manuals included with your computer, and the content of the manual, at any time without additional notice. The software interface and function and hardware configuration described in the manuals included with your computer might not match exactly the actual configuration of the computer that you purchase. For the configuration of the product, refer to the related contract (if any) or product packing list, or consult the distributor for the product sales. Lenovo may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. The products described in this document are not intended for use in implantation or other life support applications where malfunction may result in injury or death to persons. The information contained in this document does not affect or change Lenovo product specifications or warranties. Nothing in this document shall operate as an express or implied license or indemnity under the intellectual property rights of Lenovo or third parties. All information contained in this document was obtained in specific environments and is presented as an illustration. The result obtained in other operating environments may vary. Lenovo may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. Any references in this publication to non-Lenovo Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this Lenovo product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk. Copyright Lenovo 2018 63 Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the result obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly. Some measurements may have been made on development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements may have been estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their specific environment. This document is copyrighted by Lenovo and is not covered by any open source license, including any Linux agreement(s) which may accompany software included with this product. Lenovo may update this document at any time without notice. For the latest information or any questions or comments, contact or visit the Lenovo Web site:

https://support.lenovo.com Trademarks LENOVO and the LENOVO logo are trademarks of Lenovo. Microsoft, Windows, Direct3D and Cortana are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. Wi-Fi and Miracast are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance. USB-C is a trademark of USB Implementers Forum. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2018 Lenovo. 64 Lenovo IdeaPad S540 Series User Guide

 

 

User Guide Copyright 2019 HP Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license. Intel, Celeron, and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Windows is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: March 2019 Document Part Number: L52100-001 Product notice Software terms By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a full refund subject to the refund policy of your seller. For any further information or to request a full refund of the price of the computer, please contact your seller. This guide describes features that are common to most products. Some features may not be available on your computer. Not all features are available in all editions or versions of Windows. Systems may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers, software or BIOS update to take full advantage of Windows functionality. Windows 10 is automatically updated, which is always enabled. ISP fees may apply and additional requirements may apply over time for updates. Go to http://www.microsoft.com for details. To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select User Guides. Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to come into contact with the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950-1). iii iv Safety warning notice Processor configuration setting (select products only) IMPORTANT: Select products are configured with an Intel Pentium N35xx/N37xx series or a Celeron N28xx/N29xx/N30xx/N31xx series processor and a Windows operating system. If your computer is configured as described, do not change the processor configuration setting in msconfig.exe from 4 or 2 processors to 1 processor. If you do so, your computer will not restart. You will have to perform a factory reset to restore the original settings. v vi Processor configuration setting (select products only) Table of contents 1 Getting started ............................................................................................................................................. 1 Best practices ......................................................................................................................................................... 1 More HP resources ................................................................................................................................................. 2 2 Getting to know your computer ...................................................................................................................... 3 Locating hardware ................................................................................................................................................. 3 Locating software .................................................................................................................................................. 3 Right side ............................................................................................................................................................... 4 Left side ................................................................................................................................................................. 5 Display .................................................................................................................................................................... 7 Keyboard area ........................................................................................................................................................ 8 TouchPad ............................................................................................................................................. 8 Lights ................................................................................................................................................... 9 Speakers and fingerprint reader ....................................................................................................... 10 Special keys ....................................................................................................................................... 11 Action keys ........................................................................................................................................ 12 Bottom ................................................................................................................................................................. 13 Labels ................................................................................................................................................................... 13 3 Connecting to a network .............................................................................................................................. 15 Connecting to a wireless network ....................................................................................................................... 15 Using the wireless controls ............................................................................................................... 15 Airplane mode key .......................................................................................................... 15 Operating system controls ............................................................................................. 15 Connecting to a WLAN ....................................................................................................................... 16 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) .......................................................................... 17 Using GPS (select products only) ...................................................................................................... 17 Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) ................................................................. 17 Connecting Bluetooth devices ........................................................................................ 17 Connecting to a wired networkLAN (select products only) ............................................................................. 18 4 Enjoying entertainment features .................................................................................................................. 19 Using the camera ................................................................................................................................................. 19 Using audio .......................................................................................................................................................... 19 Connecting speakers ......................................................................................................................... 19 Connecting headphones .................................................................................................................... 19 vii Connecting headsets ......................................................................................................................... 20 Using sound settings ......................................................................................................................... 20 Using video .......................................................................................................................................................... 20 Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable (select products only) ............................................ 20 Setting up HDMI audio .................................................................................................... 21 Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select products only) ...... 22 Using data transfer .............................................................................................................................................. 22 Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only) ..................................................... 22 5 Navigating the screen .................................................................................................................................. 23 Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures ........................................................................................................ 23 Tap ..................................................................................................................................................... 23 Two-finger pinch zoom ..................................................................................................................... 24 Two-finger slide (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) ...................................................................... 24 Two-finger tap (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) ........................................................................ 24 Three-finger tap (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) ..................................................................... 25 Four-finger tap (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) ....................................................................... 25 Three-finger swipe (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) ................................................................. 26 Four-finger swipe (Precision TouchPad) ........................................................................................... 26 One-finger slide (touch screen) ......................................................................................................... 27 Using an optional keyboard or mouse ................................................................................................................. 27 6 Managing power .......................................................................................................................................... 28 Using Sleep and Hibernation ............................................................................................................................... 28 Initiating and exiting Sleep ............................................................................................................... 28 Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) ................................................................. 29 Shutting down (turning off) the computer .......................................................................................................... 29 Using the Power icon and Power Options ............................................................................................................ 30 Running on battery power ................................................................................................................................... 30 Using HP Fast Charge (select products only) .................................................................................... 30 Displaying battery charge ................................................................................................................. 31 Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only) .................................. 31 Conserving battery power ................................................................................................................. 31 Identifying low battery levels ........................................................................................................... 31 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................................................ 32 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ................................... 32 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ................................. 32 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation .................. 32 Factory-sealed battery ...................................................................................................................... 32 Running on external power ................................................................................................................................. 32 viii 7 Maintaining your computer .......................................................................................................................... 34 Improving performance ....................................................................................................................................... 34 Using Disk Defragmenter .................................................................................................................. 34 Using Disk Cleanup ............................................................................................................................ 34 Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) ................................................................................ 34 Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status .............................................................................. 35 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................................... 35 Cleaning your computer ...................................................................................................................................... 35 Cleaning procedures .......................................................................................................................... 35 Cleaning the display ........................................................................................................ 36 Cleaning the sides or cover ............................................................................................. 36 Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse (select products only) ............................. 36 Traveling with or shipping your computer .......................................................................................................... 36 8 Securing your computer and information ...................................................................................................... 38 Using passwords .................................................................................................................................................. 38 Setting Windows passwords ............................................................................................................. 38 Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords ............................................................................................. 39 Using Windows Hello (select products only) ....................................................................................................... 40 Using Internet security software ......................................................................................................................... 40 Using antivirus software ................................................................................................................... 40 Using firewall software ..................................................................................................................... 40 Installing software updates ................................................................................................................................. 41 Using HP Device as a Service (select products only) ........................................................................................... 41 Securing your wireless network .......................................................................................................................... 41 Backing up your software applications and information .................................................................................... 41 Using an optional security cable (select products only) ..................................................................................... 41 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) ............................................................................................................................. 42 Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) ................................................................................................................................ 42 Updating Setup Utility (BIOS) .............................................................................................................................. 42 Determining the BIOS version ........................................................................................................... 42 Downloading a BIOS update .............................................................................................................. 43 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics .............................................................................................................. 44 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) ................................................................. 44 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows ....................................................................... 44 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows version ....................... 45 Downloading HP Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number

(select products only) ..................................................................................................... 45 ix Installing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows ............................................................................. 45 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ............................................................................................................. 45 Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ....................................................................................... 46 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive .............................................. 46 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version .............................. 46 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number

(select products only) ..................................................................................................... 46 Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) ............................................. 47 Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ................................................................. 47 Downloading the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version ................. 47 Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number ............................................................................................................................ 47 Customizing Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings .................................................... 47 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering ......................................................................................................... 49 Backing up information and creating recovery media ........................................................................................ 49 Using Windows tools ......................................................................................................................... 49 Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only) ..... 49 Restoring and recovery ........................................................................................................................................ 50 Restoring, resetting, and refreshing using Windows tools .............................................................. 50 Recovering using HP Recovery media ............................................................................................... 50 Changing the computer boot order ................................................................................................... 50 12 Specifications ............................................................................................................................................ 51 Input power .......................................................................................................................................................... 51 Operating environment ....................................................................................................................................... 52 13 Electrostatic discharge .............................................................................................................................. 53 14 Accessibility .............................................................................................................................................. 54 Accessibility ......................................................................................................................................................... 54 Finding the technology tools you need ............................................................................................ 54 Our commitment ............................................................................................................................... 54 International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) ....................................................... 54 Finding the best assistive technology .............................................................................................. 55 Assessing your needs ..................................................................................................... 55 Accessibility for HP products .......................................................................................... 55 Standards and legislation .................................................................................................................................... 56 Standards .......................................................................................................................................... 56 Mandate 376 EN 301 549 ............................................................................................ 56 x Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) ................................................................ 56 Legislation and regulations .............................................................................................................. 56 United States ................................................................................................................... 57 21st Century Communications and Video Accessibility Act (CVAA) ............................... 57 Canada ............................................................................................................................. 57 Europe ............................................................................................................................. 58 United Kingdom .............................................................................................................. 58 Australia .......................................................................................................................... 58 Worldwide ....................................................................................................................... 58 Useful accessibility resources and links .............................................................................................................. 59 Organizations .................................................................................................................................... 59 Educational institutions .................................................................................................................... 59 Other disability resources ................................................................................................................. 59 HP links .............................................................................................................................................. 59 Contacting support .............................................................................................................................................. 60 Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 61 xi xii 1 Getting started This computer is a powerful tool designed to enhance your work and entertainment. Read this chapter to learn about best practices after you set up your computer, fun things to do with your computer, and where to find additional HP resources. Best practices After you set up and register the computer, we recommend the following steps to get the most out of your smart investment:

Back up your hard drive by creating recovery media. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 49. If you havent already done so, connect to a wired or wireless network. See details in Connecting to a network on page 15. Become familiar with the computer hardware and software. For more information, see Getting to know your computer on page 3 and Enjoying entertainment features on page 19. Update or purchase antivirus software. See Using antivirus software on page 40. Best practices 1 More HP resources To locate resources that provide product details, how-to information, and more, use this table. Contents Overview of computer setup and features Online chat with an HP technician Support telephone numbers Replacement parts videos (select products only) Maintenance and service guides HP service center locations Proper workstation setup Guidelines for posture and work habits that increase your comfort and decrease your risk of injury Electrical and mechanical safety information Important regulatory notices, including information about proper battery disposal, if needed. Specific warranty information about this computer Table 1-1 Additional information Resource Setup Instructions HP support For HP support, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Safety & Comfort Guide To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. or Go to http://www.hp.com/ergo. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the Internet to access the latest version of the user guide. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices To access this document:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. Limited Warranty*

To access this document:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. or Go to http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the Internet to access the latest version of the user guide.

*You can find your HP Limited Warranty located with the user guides on your product and/or on the CD or DVD provided in the box. In some countries or regions, HP may provide a printed warranty in the box. For countries or regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you can request a copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. For products purchased in Asia Pacific, you can write to HP at POD, PO Box 161, Kitchener Road Post Office, Singapore 912006. Include your product name, and your name, phone number, and postal address. 2 Chapter 1 Getting started 2 Getting to know your computer Your computer features top-rated components. This chapter provides details about your components, where they are located, and how they work. Locating hardware To find out what hardware is installed on your computer:

Type device manager in the taskbar search box, and then select the Device Manager app. A list displays all the devices installed on your computer. For information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number, press fn+esc

(select products only). Locating software To find out what software is installed on your computer:

Right-click the Start button, and then select Apps and Features. Locating hardware 3 Right side Component Description

(1) Camera privacy switch Turns the camera off and on.

(2) Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components. For more information, see Using the camera NOTE:

on page 19.

(3) USB Type-C port with HP Sleep and Charge

(4)

(5) USB SuperSpeed port with HP Sleep and Charge HDMI port NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Connects a USB device that has a Type-C connector, provides data transfer, and even when the computer is off, charges most products such as a cell phone, camera, activity tracker, or smartwatch. and Connects a display device that has a USB Type-C connector, providing DisplayPort output. NOTE: Cables and/or adapters (purchased separately) may be required. Connects a USB device, provides high-speed data transfer, and even when the computer is off, charges most products such as a cell phone, camera, activity tracker, or smartwatch. Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-

definition television, any compatible digital or audio component, or a high-speed High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) device. 4 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Left side Component Description

(1) Power connector Connects an AC adapter.

(2) AC adapter and battery light White: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is fully charged. Blinking white: The AC adapter is disconnected and the battery has reached a low battery level. Amber: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is charging. Off: The battery is not charging. Connects a USB device, such as a cell phone, camera, activity tracker, or smartwatch, and provides high-speed data transfer. USB SuperSpeed port

(3)

(4) Power button and power light Power button:

When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep (select products only). When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. CAUTION: Pressing and holding down the power button results in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button down for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, see your power options:

Right-click the Power icon

, and then select Power Options. Power light:

On: The computer is on. Left side 5 Component Description Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state, a power-

saving state. The computer shuts off power to the display and other unneeded components. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Hibernation is a power-saving state that uses the least amount of power.

(5) Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components.

(6) Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in (microphone) combo jack

(7) Memory card reader NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional standalone microphones. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. Reads optional memory cards that enable you to store, manage, share, or access information. To insert a card:

1. 2. Hold the card label-side up, with connectors facing the computer. Insert the card into the memory card reader, and then press in on the card until it is firmly seated. To remove a card:

Press in on the card, and then remove it from the memory card reader. 6 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Display Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Internal microphones Camera Camera light WLAN antennas*

Description Record sound. Allows you to video chat, record video, and record still images. To use your camera, see Using the camera on page 19. Some cameras also allow a facial recognition logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. For more information, see Using Windows Hello (select products only) on page 40. NOTE: Camera functions vary depending on the camera hardware and software installed on your product. On: The camera is in use. Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs).

*The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. Display 7 Keyboard area TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3) TouchPad zone Description Reads your finger gestures to move the pointer or activate items on the screen. For more information, see Using TouchPad and touch NOTE:

screen gestures on page 23. Left TouchPad button Right TouchPad button Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. 8 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Lights Component Description

(1) Caps lock light

(2) Mute light On: Caps lock is on, which switches the key input to all capital letters. On: Computer sound is off. Off: Computer sound is on. Keyboard area 9 Speakers and fingerprint reader Component

(1)

(2) Speakers (2) Fingerprint reader Description Produce sound. Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. To use the fingerprint reader, place your finger on the fingerprint reader until it reads your fingerprint. See Using Windows Hello (select products only) on page 40 for details. 10 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Special keys Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes specific functions when pressed in combination with another key. Windows key Opens the Start menu. NOTE: Pressing the Windows key again will close the Start menu. Action keys Execute frequently used system functions. num lock key Integrated numeric keypad NOTE: On select products, the f5 action key turns the keyboard backlight feature off or on. Alternates between the navigational and numeric functions on the integrated numeric keypad. A separate keypad to the right of the alphabet keyboard. When num lock is pressed, the keypad can be used like an external numeric keypad. If the keypad function is active when the computer is NOTE:

turned off, that function is reinstated when the computer is turned back on. Keyboard area 11 Action keys An action key performs the function indicated by the icon on the key. To determine which keys are on your product, see Special keys on page 11. To use an action key, press and hold the key. Icon Description Helps prevent side-angle viewing from onlookers. If needed, decrease or increase brightness for well-lit or darker environments. Press the key again to turn off the privacy screen. Decreases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Opens the How to get help in Windows 10 webpage. Switches the screen image between display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, repeatedly pressing this key alternates the screen image from the computer display to the monitor display to a simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. Turns the keyboard backlight off or on. On select products, you can adjust the brightness of the keyboard backlight. Press the key repeatedly to adjust the brightness from high (when you first start up the computer), to low, to off. After you adjust the keyboard backlight setting, the backlight will revert to your previous setting each time you turn on the computer. The keyboard backlight will turn off after 30 seconds of inactivity. To turn the keyboard backlight back on, press any key or tap the TouchPad (select products only). To conserve battery power, turn off this feature. Plays the previous track of an audio CD or the previous section of a DVD or a Blu-ray Disc (BD). Starts, pauses, or resumes playback of an audio CD, a DVD, or a BD. Plays the next track of an audio CD or the next section of a DVD or a BD. Stops audio or video playback of a CD, a DVD, or a BD. Decreases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Increases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. 12 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Icon Description Mutes or restores speaker sound. Turns the airplane mode and wireless feature on or off. NOTE: The airplane mode key is also referred to as the wireless button. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up before a wireless connection is possible. Bottom Component Vent Description Enables airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Labels may be in paper form or imprinted on the product. IMPORTANT: Check the following locations for the labels described in this section: the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, on the back of the display, or on the bottom of a tablet kickstand. Service labelProvides important information to identify your computer. When contacting support, you may be asked for the serial number, the product number, or the model number. Locate this information before you contact support. Your service label will resemble one of the examples shown below. Refer to the illustration that most closely matches the service label on your computer. Bottom 13 Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) HP product name Model number Product ID Serial number Warranty period Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) HP product name Product ID Serial number Warranty period Regulatory label(s)Provide(s) regulatory information about the computer. Wireless certification label(s)Provide(s) information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings for the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. 14 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer 3 Connecting to a network Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter will help you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

WLAN deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, the mobile wireless device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband ModuleGives you wireless connectivity over a wireless wide area network

(WWAN), a much larger area. Mobile network operators install base stations (similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close togethertypically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using one or more of these features:

Airplane mode key (also called wireless button or wireless key) (referred to in this chapter as airplane mode key) Operating system controls Airplane mode key The computer may have an airplane mode key, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights. All the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. Operating system controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, and diagnose and repair network problems. To use operating system controls:

On the taskbar, right-click the network status icon, and then select Open Network & Internet settings. or On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then select Network & Internet settings. Connecting to a wireless network 15 Connecting to a WLAN NOTE: When you are setting up Internet access in your home, you must establish an account with an Internet service provider (ISP). To purchase Internet service and a modem, contact a local ISP. The ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless router to the modem, and test the Internet service. To connect to a WLAN, follow these steps:

1. 2. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then connect to one of the available networks. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Enter the code, and then select Next to complete the connection. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you may be out of range of a wireless router or access point. NOTE:

If you do not see the WLAN you want to connect to:

1. 2. 3. On the taskbar, right-click the network status icon, and then select Open Network & Internet settings. or On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then select Network & Internet settings. Under the Change your network settings section, select Network and Sharing Center. Select Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed, allowing you to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the connection. After the connection is made, right-click the network status icon at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. 16 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) Your HP Mobile Broadband computer has built-in support for mobile broadband service. Your new computer, when used with a mobile operators network, gives you the freedom to connect to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network without the need for Wi-Fi hotspots. You might need the HP Mobile Broadband Module IMEI and/or MEID number to activate mobile broadband service. The number may be printed on a label located on the bottom of your computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, or on the back of the display. or 1. 2. 3. On the taskbar, select the network status icon. Select Network & Internet settings. Under the Network & Internet section, select Cellular, and then select Advanced Options. Some mobile network operators require the use of a subscriber identity module (SIM) card. A SIM card contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some computers include a SIM card that is preinstalled. If the SIM card is not preinstalled, it may be included with the HP Mobile Broadband documents provided with your computer, or the mobile network operator may provide it separately from the computer. For information about HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, see the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. Using GPS (select products only) Your computer may be equipped with a Global Positioning System (GPS) device. GPS satellites deliver location, speed, and direction information to GPS-equipped systems. To enable GPS, make sure location is enabled under the Location setting. Type location in the taskbar search box, select Location privacy settings, and then select a setting. Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) Computers (desktop, notebook) Phones (cellular, cordless, smartphone) A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:

Audio devices (headset, speakers) Imaging devices (printer, camera) External keyboard Mouse Connecting Bluetooth devices Before you can use a Bluetooth device, you must establish a Bluetooth connection. 1. 2. Type bluetooth in the taskbar search box, and then select Bluetooth and other devices settings. Enable Bluetooth, if it is not already enabled. Connecting to a wireless network 17 3. 4. Select Add Bluetooth or other device, and then in the Add a device dialog box, select Bluetooth. Select your device from the list, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE:

If the device requires verification, a pairing code is displayed. On the device you are adding, follow the on-screen instructions to verify that the code on your device matches the pairing code. For more information, refer to the documentation provided with the device. NOTE:

devices may have additional requirements; refer to the documentation provided with the device. If your device does not appear in the list, be sure that Bluetooth on that device is turned on. Some Connecting to a wired networkLAN (select products only) Use a LAN connection if you want to connect the computer directly to a router in your home (instead of working wirelessly), or if you want to connect to an existing network at your office. Connecting to a LAN requires an RJ-45 (network) cable and a network jack or an optional docking device or expansion port, if there is no RJ-45 jack on the computer. To connect the network cable, follow these steps:

1. 2. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer. Plug the other end of the network cable into a network wall jack (2) or router. If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (3), which prevents interference from NOTE:

TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable toward the computer. 18 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network 4 Enjoying entertainment features Use your HP computer as an entertainment hub to socialize via the camera, enjoy and manage your music, and download and watch movies. Or, to make your computer an even more powerful entertainment center, connect external devices like a monitor, projector, TV, speakers, or headphones. Using the camera Your computer has one or more cameras that enable you to connect with others for work or play. Cameras may be front facing, rear facing, or pop up. To determine which camera(s) are on your product, see Getting to know your computer on page 3. Most cameras allow you to video chat, record video, and record still images. Some also provide HD (high-

definition) capability, apps for gaming, or facial recognition software like Windows Hello. See Securing your computer and information on page 38 for details about using Windows Hello. On select products, you can also enhance your camera privacy by turning the camera off. By default, the camera is turned on. To turn off your camera, slide the camera privacy switch toward the icon next to the switch. To turn the camera back on, slide the switch away from the icon. To use your camera, type camera in the taskbar search box, and then select Camera from the list of applications. Using audio You can download and listen to music, stream audio content (including radio) from the web, record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. You can also play music CDs on the computer (on select products) or attach an external optical drive to play CDs. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach external audio devices such as speakers or headphones. Connecting speakers You can attach wired speakers to your computer by connecting them to a USB port or to the audio-out

(headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer or on a docking station. To connect wireless speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. To connect high-definition speakers to the computer, see Setting up HDMI audio on page 21. Before connecting speakers, lower the volume setting. Connecting headphones WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this document:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. You can connect wired headphones to the headphone jack or to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) combo jack on your computer. To connect wireless headphones to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Using the camera 19 Connecting headsets WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this document:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. Headphones combined with a microphone are called headsets. You can connect wired headsets to the audio-

out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer. To connect wireless headsets to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Using sound settings Use sound settings to adjust system volume, change system sounds, or manage audio devices. To view or change sound settings:

Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. Your computer may include an enhanced sound system by Bang & Olufsen, B&O, or another provider. As a result, your computer may include advanced audio features that can be controlled through an audio control panel specific to your sound system. Use the audio control panel to view and control audio settings. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select the audio control panel specific to your system. Using video Your computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer when you are not connected to a network. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the computer to connect an external monitor, projector, or TV. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. For information about using your USB Type-C features, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable (select products only) NOTE: To connect an HDMI device to your computer, you need an HDMI cable, purchased separately. To see the computer screen image on a high-definition TV or monitor, connect the high-definition device according to the following instructions:

1. Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the computer. 20 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the high-definition TV or monitor. PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Press f4 to cycle through four display states:

Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and the external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of NOTE:

the external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select the Settings icon System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes.

, and then select Setting up HDMI audio HDMI is the only video interface that supports high-definition video and audio. After you connect an HDMI TV to the computer, you can then turn on HDMI audio by following these steps:

1. 2. 3. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then select Playback devices. On the Playback tab, select the name of the digital output device. Select Set Default, and then select OK. To return the audio stream to the computer speakers:

1. 2. 3. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then select Playback devices. On the Playback tab, select Speakers. Select Set Default, and then select OK. Using video 21 Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select products only) To discover and connect to Miracast-compatible wireless displays without leaving your current apps, follow the steps below. To open Miracast:

Type project in the taskbar search box, and then select Project to a second screen. Select Connect to a wireless display, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using data transfer Your computer is a powerful entertainment device that enables you to transfer photos, videos, and movies from your USB devices to view on your computer. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the USB Type-C ports on the computer to connect a USB device, such as a cell phone, camera, activity tracker, or smartwatch, and transfer the files to your computer. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. For information about using your USB Type-C features, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only) NOTE: To connect a USB Type-C device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable, purchased separately. 1. Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB Type-C port on the computer. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the external device. 22 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features 5 Navigating the screen Use touch gestures on the TouchPad. Use touch gestures directly on the computer screen. You can navigate the computer screen using one or more of the following methods:

Use an optional mouse or keyboard (purchased separately). Use an on-screen keyboard. Use a pointing stick. Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures The TouchPad helps you navigate the computer screen and control the pointer using simple touch gestures. You can also use the left and right TouchPad buttons as you would use the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. To navigate a touch screen (select products only), touch the screen directly using gestures described in this chapter. To customize gestures and see videos of how they work, type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, and then select Hardware and Sound. Under Devices and Printers, select Mouse. Some products include a Precision TouchPad, which provides enhanced gesture functionality. To determine if you have a Precision TouchPad and find additional information, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. NOTE: Unless noted, gestures can be used on both the TouchPad and a touch screen. Tap Point to an item on the screen, and then tap one finger on the TouchPad zone or touch screen to select the item. Double-tap an item to open it. Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures 23 Two-finger pinch zoom Use the two-finger pinch zoom to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the TouchPad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers together. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the TouchPad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers apart. Two-finger slide (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) Place two fingers slightly apart on the TouchPad zone and then drag them up, down, left, or right to move up, down, or sideways on a page or image. Two-finger tap (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) Tap two fingers on the TouchPad zone to open the options menu for the selected object. NOTE: The two-finger tap performs the same function as right-clicking with a mouse. 24 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Three-finger tap (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) By default, the three-finger tap opens Cortana, a voice-activated virtual assistant. Tap three fingers on the TouchPad zone to perform the gesture. To change the function of this gesture on a Precision TouchPad, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Three-finger gestures, in the Taps box, select a gesture setting. Four-finger tap (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) By default, the four-finger tap opens the Action Center. Tap four fingers on the TouchPad zone to perform the gesture. To change the function of this gesture on a Precision TouchPad, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Four-finger gestures, in the Taps box, select a gesture setting. Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures 25 Three-finger swipe (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) Swipe 3 fingers away from you to see all open windows. By default, the three-finger swipe switches between open apps and the desktop. Swipe 3 fingers left or right to switch between open windows. Swipe 3 fingers toward you to show the desktop. To change the function of this gesture on a Precision TouchPad, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Three-finger gestures, in the Swipes box, select a gesture setting. Four-finger swipe (Precision TouchPad) Swipe 4 fingers away from you to see all open windows. By default, the four-finger swipe switches between open desktops. Swipe 4 fingers left or right to switch between desktops. Swipe 4 fingers toward you to show the desktop. To change the function of this gesture, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Four-finger gestures, in the Swipes box, select a gesture setting. 26 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen One-finger slide (touch screen) Use the one-finger slide to pan or scroll through lists and pages, or to move an object. To scroll across the screen, lightly slide one finger across the screen in the direction you want to move. To move an object, press and hold your finger on an object, and then drag your finger to move the object. Using an optional keyboard or mouse An optional keyboard or mouse allows you to type, select items, scroll, and perform the same functions as you do using touch gestures. The keyboard also allows you to use action keys and hot keys to perform specific functions. Using an optional keyboard or mouse 27 6 Managing power Your computer can operate on either battery power or external power. When the computer is running on battery power and an external power source is not available to charge the battery, it is important to monitor and conserve the battery charge. Some power management features described in this chapter may not be available on your computer. Using Sleep and Hibernation CAUTION: Several well-known vulnerabilities exist when a computer is in the Sleep state. To prevent an unauthorized user from accessing data on your computer, even encrypted data, HP recommends that you always initiate Hibernation instead of Sleep anytime the computer will be out of your physical possession. This practice is particularly important when you travel with your computer. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. Windows has two power-saving states, Sleep and Hibernation. SleepThe Sleep state is automatically initiated after a period of inactivity. Your work is saved to memory, allowing you to resume your work very quickly. You can also initiate Sleep manually. For more information, see Initiating and exiting Sleep on page 28. HibernationThe Hibernation state is automatically initiated if the battery reaches a critical level or the computer has been in the Sleep state for an extended period of time. In the Hibernation state, your work is saved to a hibernation file and the computer powers down. You can also initiate Hibernation manually. For more information, see Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) on page 29. Initiating and exiting Sleep Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Sleep. You can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:

Close the display (select products only). Briefly press the power button (select products only). Press the Sleep hot key (select products only); for example, fn+f1or fn+f12. Briefly press the power button. You can exit Sleep in any of the following ways:

Tap the TouchPad (select products only). Press a key on the keyboard (select products only). If the computer is closed, raise the display (select products only). When the computer exits Sleep, your work returns to the screen. NOTE:

before your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Sleep, you must enter your Windows password 28 Chapter 6 Managing power Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) You can enable user-initiated Hibernation and change other power settings and timeouts using Power Options. 1. 2. 3. Right-click the Power icon

, and then select Power Options. In the left pane, select Choose what the power buttons do (wording may vary by product). Depending on your product, you can enable Hibernation for battery power or external power in any of the following ways:

Power buttonUnder Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording may vary by product), select When I press the power button, and then select Hibernate. Sleep button (select products only)Under Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording may vary by product), select When I press the sleep button, and then select Hibernate. Lid (select products only)Under Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording may vary by product), select When I close the lid, and then select Hibernate. Power menuSelect Change Settings that are currently unavailable, and then, under Shutdown settings, select the Hibernate check box. The Power menu can be accessed by selecting the Start button. Select Save changes. 4. To initiate Hibernation, use the method that you enabled in step 3. To exit Hibernation, briefly press the power button. NOTE:

password before your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Hibernation, you must enter your Windows Shutting down (turning off) the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. Be sure to save your work before shutting down the computer. The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and the computer. Shut down the computer when it will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period. The recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command. NOTE:

pressing the power button. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, first exit Sleep or Hibernation by briefly 1. 2. Save your work and close all open programs. Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. Shutting down (turning off) the computer 29 If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. If your computer has a user-replaceable battery (select products only), disconnect the computer from external power, and then remove the battery. Press and hold the power button for at least 10 seconds. Using the Power icon and Power Options The Power icon is located on the Windows taskbar. The Power icon allows you to quickly access power settings and view the remaining battery charge. To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon

. To use Power Options, right-click the Power icon

, and then select Power Options. Different Power icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. Placing the mouse pointer over the icon reveals a message if the battery has reached a low or critical battery level. Running on battery power WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is off and unplugged from external power, the battery in the computer slowly discharges. The computer displays a message when the battery reaches a low or critical battery level. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, screen brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. NOTE: When you disconnect external power, the display brightness is automatically decreased to conserve battery charge. Select computer products can switch between graphic controllers to conserve battery charge. Using HP Fast Charge (select products only) The HP Fast Charge feature allows you to quickly charge your computer battery. Charging time may vary by

+/- 10%. Depending on your computer model and the HP AC adapter provided with your computer, HP Fast Charge operates in one or more of the following ways:

When the remaining battery charge is between zero and 50%, the battery will charge to 50% of full capacity in no more than 30 to 45 minutes, depending on your computer model. When the remaining battery charge is between zero and 90%, the battery will charge to 90% of full capacity in no more than 90 minutes. To use HP Fast Charge, shut down your computer, and then connect the AC adapter to your computer and to external power. 30 Chapter 6 Managing power Displaying battery charge To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon

. Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only) To access battery information:

1. 2. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select Troubleshooting and fixes, and then in the Diagnostics section, select HP Battery Check. If HP Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. HP Support Assistant provides the following tools and information about the battery:

Information about battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity HP Battery Check Conserving battery power Lower the brightness of the display. To conserve battery power and maximize battery life:

Turn off wireless devices when you are not using them. Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, such as an external hard drive connected to a USB port. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Before you leave your work, initiate Sleep or shut down the computer. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low or critical battery level, the following behavior occurs:

The battery light (select products only) indicates a low or critical battery level. or The Power icon shows a low or critical battery notification. NOTE:

on page 30. For additional information about the Power icon, see Using the Power icon and Power Options The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. Running on battery power 31 Resolving a low battery level Resolving a low battery level when external power is available AC adapter Connect one of the following to the computer and to external power:

Optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP Optional docking device or expansion product Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation 1. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the computer and to external power. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. Factory-sealed battery To monitor the status of the battery, or if the battery is no longer holding a charge, run HP Battery Check in the HP Support Assistant app (select products only). 1. 2. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select Troubleshooting and fixes, and then in the Diagnostics section, select HP Battery Check. If HP Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. Running on external power For information about connecting to external power, refer to the Setup Instructions poster provided in the computer box. The computer does not use battery power when the computer is connected to external power with an approved AC adapter or an optional docking device or expansion product. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are aboard aircraft. When charging or calibrating a battery Connect the computer to external power under any of the following conditions:

When writing information to a disc (select products only) When installing or updating system software When updating the system BIOS 32 Chapter 6 Managing power When running Disk Defragmenter on computers with internal hard drives When performing a backup or recovery The battery begins to charge. When you connect the computer to external power:

The screen brightness increases. The Power icon changes appearance. The computer switches to battery power. When you disconnect external power:

The Power icon changes appearance. The screen brightness automatically decreases to conserve battery charge. Running on external power 33 7 Maintaining your computer It is important to perform regular maintenance to keep your computer in optimal condition. This chapter explains how to use tools like Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. It also provides instructions for updating programs and drivers, steps to clean the computer, and tips for traveling with (or shipping) the computer. Improving performance You can improve the performance of your computer by performing regular maintenance tasks with tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. Using Disk Defragmenter HP recommends using Disk Defragmenter to defragment your hard drive at least once a month. NOTE:

It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives. To run Disk Defragmenter:

1. 2. 3. Connect the computer to AC power. Type defragment in the taskbar search box, and then select Defragment and Optimize Drives. Follow the on-screen instructions. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Use Disk Cleanup to search the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. 2. Type disk in the taskbar search box, and then select Disk Cleanup. Follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) HP 3D DriveGuard protects a hard drive by parking the drive and halting data requests under either of the following conditions:

You move the computer with the display closed while the computer is running on battery power. You drop the computer. A short time after the end of one of these events, HP 3D DriveGuard returns the hard drive to normal operation. NOTE: Only internal hard drives are protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. A hard drive installed in an optional docking device or connected to a USB port is not protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. NOTE: Because solid-state drives (SSDs) lack moving parts, HP 3D DriveGuard is unnecessary for these drives. 34 Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status The hard drive light on the computer changes color to show that the drive in a primary hard drive bay and/or the drive in a secondary hard drive bay (select products only) is parked. Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers on a regular basis. Updates can resolve issues and bring new features and options to your computer. For example, older graphics components might not work well with the most recent gaming software. Without the latest driver, you would not be getting the most out of your equipment. Go to http://www.hp.com/support to download the latest versions of HP programs and drivers. In addition, register to receive automatic notifications when updates become available. If you would like to update your programs and drivers, follow these instructions:

1. 2. 3. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select My notebook, select the Updates tab, and then select Check for updates and messages. Follow the on-screen instructions. Cleaning your computer Alcohol-free glass-cleaning fluid Use the following products to safely clean your computer:

Solution of water and mild soap Static-free cloth wipes Dry microfiber cleaning cloth or a chamois (static-free cloth without oil) CAUTION: Avoid strong cleaning solvents or germicidal wipes that can permanently damage your computer. If you are not sure that a cleaning product is safe for your computer, check the product contents to make sure that ingredients such as alcohol, acetone, ammonium chloride, methylene chloride, hydrogen peroxide, naphtha, and hydrocarbon solvents are not included in the product. Fibrous materials, such as paper towels, can scratch the computer. Over time, dirt particles and cleaning agents can get trapped in the scratches. Cleaning procedures Follow the procedures in this section to safely clean your computer. WARNING! To prevent electric shock or damage to components, do not attempt to clean your computer while it is on. 1. 2. 3. Turn off the computer. Disconnect AC power. Disconnect all powered external devices. Updating programs and drivers 35 CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not spray cleaning agents or liquids directly on any computer surface. Liquids dripped on the surface can permanently damage internal components. Cleaning the display Gently wipe the display using a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with an alcohol-free glass cleaner. Be sure that a display is dry before you close the computer. Cleaning the sides or cover To clean the sides or cover, use a soft microfiber cloth or chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously, or use an acceptable disposable wipe. NOTE: When cleaning the cover of the computer, use a circular motion to aid in removing dirt and debris. Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse (select products only) WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not allow liquids to drip between the keys. To clean the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse, use a soft microfiber cloth or a chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously. To prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles from the keyboard, use a can of compressed air with a straw extension. Traveling with or shipping your computer If you have to travel with or ship your computer, follow these tips to keep your equipment safe. Back up your information to an external drive. Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Shut down the computer. Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as memory cards. Take along a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it in with the rest of your luggage. CAUTION: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, listen for the in-flight announcement that tells you when you are allowed to use your computer. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. The use of wireless devices may be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions may apply aboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that 36 Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer applies to the use of a wireless device in your computer, ask for authorization to use your computer before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Traveling with or shipping your computer 37 8 Securing your computer and information Computer security is essential for protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of your information. Standard security solutions provided by the Windows operating system, HP applications, the Setup Utility (BIOS), and other third-party software can help protect your computer from a variety of risks, such as viruses, worms, and other types of malicious code. NOTE: Some security features listed in this chapter may not be available on your computer. Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information and to protect online transactions. Several types of passwords can be set. For example, when you set up your computer for the first time, you were asked to create a user password to secure your computer. Additional passwords can be set in Windows or in HP Setup Utility (BIOS), which is preinstalled on your computer. You may find it helpful to use the same password for a Setup Utility (BIOS) feature and for a Windows security feature. To create and save passwords, use the following tips:

To reduce the risk of being locked out of the computer, record each password and store it in a secure place away from the computer. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Change your passwords at least every 3 months. An ideal password is long and has letters, punctuation, symbols, and numbers. Before you send your computer for service, back up your files, delete confidential files, and then remove all password settings. For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords:

Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Setting Windows passwords Table 8-1 Types of Windows passwords and their functions Password User password Function Protects access to a Windows user account. Administrator password Protects administrator-level access to computer contents. NOTE: This password cannot be used to access Setup Utility

(BIOS) contents. 38 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords Table 8-2 Types of BIOS passwords and their functions Password Administrator password Power-on password Function Must be entered each time you access Setup Utility (BIOS). If you forget your administrator password, you cannot access Setup Utility (BIOS). Must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer. If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the computer. To set, change, or delete an administrator or power-on password in Setup Utility (BIOS):

IMPORTANT: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. 1. Start Setup Utility (BIOS):

Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10. Tablets without keyboards:

1. Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume up button.

- or -

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button.

- or -

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the Windows button. 2. Tap f10. 2. Select Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To save your changes, select Exit, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. Using passwords 39 Using Windows Hello (select products only) On products equipped with a fingerprint reader or an infrared camera, you can use Windows Hello to sign in by swiping your finger or looking at the camera. To set up Windows Hello:

1. 2. 3. Select the Start button, select Settings, select Accounts, and then select Sign-in options. To add a password, select Add. Select Get Started, and then follow the on-screen instructions enroll your fingerprint or facial ID and set up a PIN. NOTE: The PIN is not limited in length. The default setting is for numbers only. To include alphabetic or special characters, select the include letters and symbols check box. Using Internet security software When you use your computer to access email, a network, or the Internet, you potentially expose your computer to computer viruses, spyware, and other online threats. To help protect your computer, Internet security software that includes antivirus and firewall features may be preinstalled on your computer as a trial offer. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses and other security risks, security software must be kept up to date. It is strongly recommended that you upgrade the security software trial offer or purchase the software of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. Using antivirus software Computer viruses can disable programs, utilities, or the operating system, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. An antivirus program may be preinstalled on your computer. It is strongly recommended that you use the antivirus program of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. For more information about computer viruses, type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Using firewall software Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be software you install on your computer and/or network, or it can be a combination of both hardware and software. There are two types of firewalls to consider:

Host-based firewallsSoftware that protects only the computer it is installed on. Network-based firewallsInstalled between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to protect all the computers on the network. When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked. 40 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information Installing software updates HP, Windows, and third-party software installed on your computer should be regularly updated to correct security problems and improve software performance. IMPORTANT: Microsoft sends out alerts regarding Windows updates, which may include security updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. You can install these updates automatically. To view or change the settings:

1. 2. 3. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select Update & Security. Select Windows Update, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To schedule a time for installing updates, select Advanced options, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP Device as a Service (select products only) HP DaaS is a cloud-based IT solution that enables businesses to effectively manage and secure their company assets. HP DaaS helps protect devices against malware and other attacks, monitors device health, and helps reduce time spent solving device and security issues. You can quickly download and install the software, which is highly cost effective relative to traditional in-house solutions. For more information, go to https://www.hptouchpointmanager.com/. Securing your wireless network When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. WLANs in public areas (hotspots) like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. Backing up your software applications and information Regularly back up your software applications and information to protect them from being permanently lost or damaged through a virus attack or a software or hardware failure. Using an optional security cable (select products only) A security cable (purchased separately) is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. To connect a security cable to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Installing software updates 41 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) Setup Utility, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Setup Utility (BIOS) includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of system and extended memory. NOTE: To start Setup Utility on convertible computers, your computer must be in notebook mode and you must use the keyboard attached to your notebook. Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) CAUTION: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Turn on or restart the computer and quickly press f10. or Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10 when the Start menu is displayed. Updating Setup Utility (BIOS) Updated versions of Setup Utility (BIOS) may be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Determining the BIOS version To decide whether you need to update Setup Utility (BIOS), first determine the BIOS version on your computer. To reveal the BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS), use one of these options. HP Support Assistant 1. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. 2. Select My notebook, and then select Specifications. Setup Utility (BIOS) 1. 2. 3. Start Setup Utility (BIOS) (see Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) on page 42). Select Main, and then make note of the BIOS version. Select Exit, select one of the options, and then follow the on-screen instructions. In Windows, press CTRL+Alt+S. 42 Chapter 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) To check for later BIOS versions, see Downloading a BIOS update on page 43. Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep. NOTE:

software updates, especially system BIOS updates. If your computer is connected to a network, consult the network administrator before installing any 1. 2. 3. 4. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select Updates, and then select Check for updates and messages. Follow the on-screen instructions. At the download area, follow these steps:

a. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. If the update is more recent than your BIOS version, make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that appear on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions appear, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Type file in the taskbar search box, and then select File Explorer. Select your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder that contains the update. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Updating Setup Utility (BIOS) 43 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is a Windows-based utility that allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs within the Windows operating system in order to diagnose hardware failures. If HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is not installed on your computer, first you must download and install it. To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows on page 44. After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, follow these steps to access it from HP Help and Support or HP Support Assistant. 1. To access HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Help and Support:

a. b. Select the Start button, and then select HP Help and Support. Right-click HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, select More, and then select Run as administrator. or To access HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Support Assistant:

a. b. c. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select Troubleshooting and fixes. Select Diagnostics, and then select HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows. 2. When the tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test at any time, select Cancel. When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit Failure ID code is generated. The screen displays one of the following options:

A Quick Response (QR) code is displayed. With a mobile device, scan the code and then follow the on-

screen instructions. A Failure ID link is displayed. Select the link and follow the on-screen instructions. Instructions for calling support are displayed. Follow those instructions. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows download instructions are provided in English only. You must use a Windows computer to download this tool because only .exe files are provided. 44 Chapter 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows version To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, follow these steps:

1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. Select Download HP Diagnostics Windows, and then select a location on your computer or a USB flash drive. The tool is downloaded to the selected location. Downloading HP Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number (select products only) NOTE:

product name or number. For some products, it may be necessary to download the software to a USB flash drive by using the To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Get software and drivers, select your type of product, and then enter the product name or number in the search box that is displayed. In the Diagnostics section, select Download, and then follow the on-screen instructions to select the specific Windows diagnostics version to be downloaded to your computer or USB flash drive. The tool is downloaded to the selected location. Installing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows To install HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, follow these steps:

Navigate to the folder on your computer or the USB flash drive where the .exe file was downloaded, double-click the .exe file, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI NOTE:

For Windows 10 S computers, you must use a Windows computer and a USB flash drive to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. For more information, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive on page 46. HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside the operating system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system or other software components. If your PC will not boot into Windows, you can use HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to diagnose hardware issues. When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit Failure ID code is generated. For assistance in solving the problem:

Select Get Support, and then use a mobile device to scan the QR code that displays on the next screen. The HP Customer Support - Service Center page displays, with your Failure ID and product number automatically filled in. Follow the on-screen instructions. or Contact support, and provide the Failure ID code. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI 45 NOTE: To start diagnostics on a convertible computer, your computer must be in notebook mode, and you must use the attached keyboard. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test, press esc. Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and quickly press esc. Press f2. The BIOS searches three places for the diagnostic tools, in the following order:

a. Connected USB flash drive NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI tool to a USB flash drive, see Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version on page 46. b. c. Hard drive BIOS 3. When the diagnostic tool opens, select a language, select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the preinstall image. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive can be useful in the following situations:

HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the HP Tool partition. The hard drive is damaged. NOTE: The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI download instructions are provided in English only, and you must use a Windows computer to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version To download the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version to a USB flash drive:

1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. Select Download HP Diagnostics UEFI, and then select Run. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only) NOTE:

product name or number. For some products, it may be necessary to download the software to a USB flash drive by using the To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only) to a USB flash drive:

46 Chapter 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics 1. 2. 3. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Enter the product name or number, select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostics section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the specific UEFI Diagnostics version for your computer. Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is a firmware (BIOS) feature that downloads HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to your computer. It can then execute the diagnostics on your computer, and it may upload results to a preconfigured server. For more information about Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags, and then select Find out more. Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI NOTE: HP Remote PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is also available as a Softpaq that can be downloaded to a server. Downloading the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version To download the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version, follow these steps:

1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. Select Download Remote Diagnostics, and then select Run. Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number NOTE:

number. For some products, it may be necessary to download the software by using the product name or To download HP Remote PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Get software and drivers, select your type of product, enter the product name or number in the search box that is displayed, select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostics section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the Remote UEFI version for the product. Customizing Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings Using the Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics setting in Computer Setup (BIOS), you can perform the following customizations:

Set a schedule for running diagnostics unattended. You can also start diagnostics immediately in interactive mode by selecting Execute Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics. Set the location for downloading the diagnostic tools. This feature provides access to the tools from the HP website or from a server that has been preconfigured for use. Your computer does not require the traditional local storage (such as a disk drive or USB flash drive) to run remote diagnostics. Set a location for storing the test results. You can also set the user name and password settings used for uploads. Display status information about the diagnostics run previously. Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) 47 To customize Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Advanced, and then select Settings. 3. Make your customization selections. 4. Select Main, and then Save Changes and Exit to save your settings. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. 48 Chapter 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering This chapter provides information about the following processes, which are standard procedure for most products:

Backing up your personal informationYou can use Windows tools to back up your personal information (see Using Windows tools on page 49). Creating a restore pointYou can use Windows tools to create a restore point (see Using Windows tools on page 49). Creating recovery media (select products only)You can use the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool

(select products only) to create recovery media (see Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only) on page 49). Restoring and recoveryWindows offers several options for restoring from backup, refreshing the computer, and resetting the computer to its original state (see Using Windows tools on page 49). IMPORTANT:

70% charged before you start the recovery process. If you will be performing recovery procedures on a tablet, the tablet battery must be at least IMPORTANT:

beginning any recovery process. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before Backing up information and creating recovery media Using Windows tools IMPORTANT: Windows is the only option that allows you to back up your personal information. Schedule regular backups to avoid information loss. You can use Windows tools to back up personal information and create system restore points and recovery media. NOTE:

If computer storage is 32 GB or less, Microsoft System Restore is disabled by default. For more information and steps, see the Get Help app. 1. 2. Select the Start button, and then select the Get Help app. Enter the task you want to perform. NOTE: You must be connected to the Internet to access the Get Help app. Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only) You can use the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create HP Recovery media on a bootable USB flash drive, as follows:

1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Software and Drivers, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Backing up information and creating recovery media 49 NOTE:

If you cannot create recovery media yourself, contact support to obtain recovery discs. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Restoring and recovery Restoring, resetting, and refreshing using Windows tools Windows offers several options for restoring, resetting, and refreshing the computer. For details, see Using Windows tools on page 49. Recovering using HP Recovery media HP Recovery media is used to recover the original operating system and software programs that were installed at the factory. On select products, it can be created on a bootable USB flash drive using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool. For details, see Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only) on page 49. NOTE:

If you cannot create recovery media yourself, contact support to obtain recovery discs. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To recover your system:

Insert the HP Recovery media, and then restart the computer. Changing the computer boot order If your computer does not restart using the HP Recovery media, you can change the computer boot order. This is the order of devices listed in BIOS where the computer looks for startup information. You can change the selection to an optical drive or a USB flash drive, depending on the location of your HP Recovery media. To change the boot order:

IMPORTANT:

beginning these steps. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before 1. 2. Insert the HP Recovery media. Access the system Startup menu. For computers or tablets with keyboards attached:

Turn on or restart the computer or tablet, quickly press esc, and then press f9 for boot options. For tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the tablet, quickly hold down the volume up button, and then select f9. or Turn on or restart the tablet, quickly hold down the volume down button, and then select f9. 3. Select the optical drive or USB flash drive from which you want to boot, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 50 Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering 12 Specifications Input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100240 V, 5060 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source that is supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within the following specifications. Operating voltage and current varies by platform. The voltage and current for your computer is located on the regulatory label. Table 12-1 DC power specifications Input power Rating Operating voltage and current 5 V dc @ 2 A / 12 V dc @ 3 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 3.75 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A / 15 V dc @ 3 A / 20 V dc @ 2.25 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc @ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc @ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc @ 5 A / 20 V dc @ 4.5 A 90 W USB-C 19.5 V dc @ 2.31 A 45 W 19.5 V dc @ 3.33 A 65 W 19.5 V dc @ 4.62 A 90 W 19.5 V dc @ 6.15 A 120 W 19.5 V dc @ 6.9 A 135 W 19.5 V dc @ 7.70 A 150 W 19.5 V dc @ 10.3 A 200 W 19.5 V dc @ 11.8 A 230 W 19.5 V dc @ 16.92 A 330 W DC plug of external HP power supply (select products only) NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. Input power 51 Operating environment Table 12-2 Operating environment specifications Factor Temperature Operating Nonoperating Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Metric U.S. 5C to 35C

-20C to 60C 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

41F to 95F

-4F to 140F 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Operating Nonoperating

-15 m to 3,048 m

-15 m to 12,192 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft

-50 ft to 40,000 ft 52 Chapter 12 Specifications 13 Electrostatic discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. IMPORTANT: To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, first be sure that it is properly grounded. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 53 14 Accessibility Accessibility HP is working to weave diversity, inclusion and work/life into the fabric of our company, so it is reflected in everything we do. Here are some examples of how we are putting differences to work to create an inclusive environment focused on connecting people to the power of technology throughout the world. Finding the technology tools you need Technology can unleash your human potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology helps increase, maintain, and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology. For more information, see Finding the best assistive technology on page 55. Our commitment HP is committed to providing products and services that are accessible for people with disabilities. This commitment supports our company's diversity objectives and helps us ensure that the benefits of technology are available to all. Our accessibility goal is to design, produce, and market products and services that can be effectively used by everyone, including people with disabilities, either on a stand-alone basis or with appropriate assistive devices. To achieve our goal, this Accessibility Policy establishes seven key objectives to guide our actions as a company. All HP managers and employees are expected to support these objectives and their implementation in accordance with their roles and responsibilities:

Raise the level of awareness of accessibility issues within our company, and provide our employees with the training they need to design, produce, market, and deliver accessible products and services. Develop accessibility guidelines for products and services, and hold product development groups accountable for implementing these guidelines where competitively, technically, and economically feasible. Involve people with disabilities in the development of accessibility guidelines, and in the design and testing of products and services. Document accessibility features and make information about our products and services publicly available in an accessible form. Establish relationships with leading assistive technology and solution providers. Support internal and external research and development that will improve assistive technology relevant to our products and services. Support and contribute to industry standards and guidelines for accessibility. International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) IAAP is a not-for-profit association focused on advancing the accessibility profession through networking, education, and certification. The objective is to help accessibility professionals develop and advance their careers and to better enable organizations to integrate accessibility into their products and infrastructure. 54 Chapter 14 Accessibility HP is a founding member, and we joined to participate with other organizations to advance the field of accessibility. This commitment supports our companys accessibility goal of designing, producing, and marketing products and services that can be effectively used by people with disabilities. IAAP will make our profession strong by globally connecting individuals, students, and organizations to learn from one another. If you are interested in learning more, go to http://www.accessibilityassociation.org to join the online community, sign up for newsletters, and learn about membership options. Finding the best assistive technology Everyone, including people with disabilities or age-related limitations, should be able to communicate, express themselves, and connect with the world using technology. HP is committed to increasing accessibility awareness within HP and with our customers and partners. Whether its large fonts that are easy on the eyes, voice recognition that lets you give your hands a rest, or any other assistive technology to help with your specific situationa variety of assistive technologies make HP products easier to use. How do you choose?

Assessing your needs Technology can unleash your potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology (AT) helps increase, maintain, and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology. You may choose from many AT products. Your AT assessment should allow you to evaluate several products, answer your questions, and facilitate your selection of the best solution for your situation. You will find that professionals qualified to do AT assessments come from many fields, including those licensed or certified in physical therapy, occupational therapy, speech/language pathology, and other areas of expertise. Others, while not certified or licensed, may also provide evaluation information. You will want to ask about the individual's experience, expertise, and fees to determine if they are appropriate for your needs. Accessibility for HP products HP PCsWindows 7 Accessibility Options HP Elite x3Accessibility Options (Windows 10 Mobile) The following links provide information about accessibility features and assistive technology, if applicable, included in various HP products. These resources will help you select the specific assistive technology features and product(s) most appropriate for your situation. HP Slate 7 TabletsEnabling Accessibility Features on Your HP Tablet (Android 4.1/Jelly Bean) HP Chromebook PCsEnabling Accessibility Features on Your HP Chromebook or Chromebox (Chrome OS) HP SlateBook PCsEnabling Accessibility Features (Android 4.3,4.2/Jelly Bean) HP PCsWindows 10 Accessibility Options HP PCsWindows 8 Accessibility Options HP Shoppingperipherals for HP products If you need additional support with the accessibility features on your HP product, see Contacting support on page 60. Additional links to external partners and suppliers that may provide additional assistance:

Google Products accessibility information (Android, Chrome, Google Apps) Microsoft Accessibility information (Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, Microsoft Office) Accessibility 55 Assistive Technologies sorted by impairment type Assistive Technologies sorted by product type Assistive Technology vendors with product descriptions Assistive Technology Industry Association (ATIA) Standards and legislation Standards Section 508 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) standards was created by the US Access Board to address access to information and communication technology (ICT) for people with physical, sensory, or cognitive disabilities. The standards contain technical criteria specific to various types of technologies, as well as performance-based requirements which focus on functional capabilities of covered products. Specific criteria cover software applications and operating systems, web-based information and applications, computers, telecommunications products, video and multi-media, and self-contained closed products. Mandate 376 EN 301 549 The EN 301 549 standard was created by the European Union within Mandate 376 as the basis for an online toolkit for public procurement of ICT products. The standard specifies the functional accessibility requirements applicable to ICT products and services, together with a description of the test procedures and evaluation methodology for each accessibility requirement. Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) from the W3C's Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) helps web designers and developers create sites that better meet the needs of people with disabilities or age-related limitations. WCAG advances accessibility across the full range of web content (text, images, audio, and video) and web applications. WCAG can be precisely tested, is easy to understand and use, and allows web developers flexibility for innovation. WCAG 2.0 has also been approved as ISO/IEC 40500:2012. WCAG specifically addresses barriers to accessing the web experienced by people with visual, auditory, physical, cognitive, and neurological disabilities, and by older web users with accessibility needs. WCAG 2.0 provides characteristics of accessible content:

Perceivable (for instance, by addressing text alternatives for images, captions for audio, adaptability of presentation, and color contrast) Operable (by addressing keyboard access, color contrast, timing of input, seizure avoidance, and navigability) Understandable (by addressing readability, predictability, and input assistance) Robust (for instance, by addressing compatibility with assistive technologies) Legislation and regulations Accessibility of IT and information has become an area of increasing legislative importance. This section provides links to information about key legislation, regulations, and standards. United States Canada Europe 56 Chapter 14 Accessibility United Kingdom Australia Worldwide United States Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act specifies that agencies must identify which standards apply to the procurement of ICT, perform market research to determine the availability of accessible products and services, and document the results of their market research. The following resources provide assistance in meeting Section 508 requirements:

www.section508.gov Buy Accessible The U.S. Access Board is currently updating the Section 508 standards. This effort will address new technologies and other areas where the standards need to be modified. For more information, go to Section 508 Refresh. Section 255 of the Telecommunications Act requires telecommunications products and services to be accessible to people with disabilities. FCC rules cover all hardware and software telephone network equipment and telecommunications equipment used in the home or office. Such equipment includes telephones, wireless handsets, fax machines, answering machines, and pagers. FCC rules also cover basic and special telecommunications services, including regular telephone calls, call waiting, speed dialing, call forwarding, computer-provided directory assistance, call monitoring, caller identification, call tracing, and repeat dialing, as well as voice mail and interactive voice response systems that provide callers with menus of choices. For more information, go to Federal Communication Commission Section 255 information. 21st Century Communications and Video Accessibility Act (CVAA) The CVAA updates federal communications law to increase the access of persons with disabilities to modern communications, updating accessibility laws enacted in the 1980s and 1990s to include new digital, broadband, and mobile innovations. Regulations are enforced by the FCC and documented as 47 CFR Part 14 and Part 79. FCC Guide on the CVAA Other U.S. legislation and initiatives Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Telecommunications Act, the Rehabilitation Act and others Canada The Accessibility for Ontarians with Disabilities Act was established to develop and implement accessibility standards to make goods, services, and facilities accessible to Ontarians with disabilities and to provide for the involvement of persons with disabilities in the development of the accessibility standards. The first standard of the AODA is the customer service standard; however, standards for transportation, employment, and information and communication are also being developed. The AODA applies to the Government of Ontario, the Legislative Assembly, every designated public sector organization, and to every other person or organization that provides goods, services, or facilities to the public or other third parties and that has at least one employee in Ontario; and accessibility measures must be implemented on or before January 1, 2025. For more information, go to Accessibility for Ontarians with Disability Act (AODA) . Standards and legislation 57 Europe EU Mandate 376 ETSI Technical Report ETSI DTR 102 612: "Human Factors (HF); European accessibility requirements for public procurement of products and services in the ICT domain (European Commission Mandate M 376, Phase 1)" has been released. Background: The three European Standardization Organizations have set up two parallel project teams to carry out the work specified in the European Commission "Mandate 376 to CEN, CENELEC and ETSI, in Support of Accessibility Requirements for Public Procurement of Products and Services in the ICT Domain."

ETSI TC Human Factors Specialist Task Force 333 has developed ETSI DTR 102 612. Further details about the work performed by STF333 (e.g., Terms of Reference, specification of the detailed work tasks, time plan for the work, previous drafts, listing of comments received and means to contact the task force) can be found at the Special Task Force 333. The parts relating to the assessment of suitable testing and conformity schemes were carried out by a parallel project, detailed in CEN BT/WG185/PT. For further information, go to the CEN project team website. The two projects are closely coordinated. European Commission mandate for e-accessibility (PDF 46KB) CEN project team United Kingdom The Disability Discrimination Act of 1995 (DDA) was enacted to ensure that websites are accessible to blind and disabled users in the United Kingdom. W3C UK Policies Australia The Australian government has announced their plan to implement Web Content Accessibility Guidelines 2.0. All Australian government websites will require Level A compliance by 2012, and Double A by 2015. The new standard replaces WCAG 1.0, which was introduced as a mandated requirement for agencies in 2000. Worldwide JTC1 Special Working Group on Accessibility (SWG-A) G3ict: The Global Initiative for Inclusive ICT Italian accessibility legislation W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) 58 Chapter 14 Accessibility Useful accessibility resources and links The following organizations may be good resources for information about disabilities and age-related limitations. NOTE: This is not an exhaustive list. These organizations are provided for informational purposes only. HP assumes no responsibility for information or contacts you may encounter on the Internet. Listing on this page does not imply endorsement by HP. Organizations American Association of People with Disabilities (AAPD) The Association of Assistive Technology Act Programs (ATAP) Hearing Loss Association of America (HLAA) Information Technology Technical Assistance and Training Center (ITTATC) Lighthouse International National Association of the Deaf National Federation of the Blind Rehabilitation Engineering & Assistive Technology Society of North America (RESNA) Telecommunications for the Deaf and Hard of Hearing, Inc. (TDI) W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) Educational institutions California State University, Northridge, Center on Disabilities (CSUN) University of Wisconsin - Madison, Trace Center University of Minnesota computer accommodations program Other disability resources ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) Technical Assistance Program Business & Disability network EnableMart European Disability Forum Job Accommodation Network Microsoft Enable U.S. Department of Justice - A Guide to disability rights Laws HP links Our contact webform HP comfort and safety guide HP public sector sales Useful accessibility resources and links 59 Contacting support NOTE: Support is in English only. Customers who are deaf or hard of hearing that have questions about technical support or accessibility of HP products:

Use TRS/VRS/WebCapTel to call (877) 656-7058 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time. Customers with other disabilities or age-related limitations who have questions about technical support or accessibility of HP products, choose one of the following options:

Complete the Contact form for people with disabilities or age-related limitations. Call (888) 259-5707 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time. 60 Chapter 14 Accessibility Index A AC adapter and battery light, identifying 5 accessibility 54 accessibility needs assessment 55 action keys airplane mode 13 help 12 identifying 11, 12 keyboard backlight 12 mute 13 next track 12 pause 12 play 12 privacy screen 12 screen brightness 12 speaker volume 12 stop 12 switch screen image 12 using 12 airplane mode 15 airplane mode key 13, 15 antivirus software, using 40 assistive technology (AT) finding 55 purpose 54 AT (assistive technology) finding 55 purpose 54 audio 19 adjusting volume 12 HDMI audio 21 headphones 19 headsets 20 sound settings 20 speakers 19 audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) combo jack, identifying 6 B backing up software and information 41 backup, creating 49 backups 49 battery conserving power 31 discharging 31 factory-sealed 32 finding information 31 low battery levels 31 resolving low battery level 32 battery charge 31 battery information, finding 31 battery power 30 best practices 1 BIOS determining version 42 downloading an update 43 starting the Setup Utility 42 updating 42 Bluetooth device 15, 17 Bluetooth label 14 boot order, changing 50 bottom components 13 buttons left TouchPad 8 power 5 right TouchPad 8 C camera identifying 7 using 19 camera light, identifying 7 camera privacy switch, identifying 4 caps lock light, identifying 9 caring for your computer 35 cleaning your computer 35 components bottom 13 display 7 keyboard area 8 left side 5 right side 4 connecting to a network 15 connecting to a wireless network 15 connecting to a WLAN 16 connecting to LAN 18 connectors power 5 corporate WLAN connection 16 critical battery level 31 customer support, accessibility 60 D data transfer 22 Disk Cleanup software 34 Disk Defragmenter software 34 display components 7 E electrostatic discharge 53 esc key, identifying 11 external power, using 32 F factory-sealed battery 32 fingerprint reader, identifying 10 fingerprints, registering 40 firewall software 40 fn key, identifying 11 four-finger tap TouchPad gesture 25 G Get Help in Windows 10 action key 12 GPS 17 H hardware, locating 3 HDMI port connecting 20 identifying 4 headphones, connecting 19 headsets, connecting 20 Hibernation exiting 29 initiated during critical battery level 31 initiating 29 high-definition devices, connecting 20, 22 Index 61 HP 3D DriveGuard 34 HP Assistive Policy 54 HP Device as a Service (HP DaaS) 41 HP Fast Charge 30 HP Mobile Broadband num lock 11 Windows 11 L labels activating 17 IMEI number 17 MEID number 17 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI downloading 46 starting 46 using 45 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows downloading 44 installing 45 using 44 HP Recovery Manager correcting boot problems 50 HP Recovery media recovery 50 HP resources 2 HP Touchpoint Manager 41 I IMEI number 17 initiating Sleep and Hibernation 28 input power 51 installing optional security cable 41 integrated numeric keypad, identifying 11 internal microphones, identifying 7 International Association of Accessibility Professionals 54 Internet security software, using 40 J jacks audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) 6 K keyboard and optional mouse using 27 keyboard backlight action key 12 keypad, integrated numeric 11 keys action 11 airplane mode 13 esc 11 fn 11 Bluetooth 14 regulatory 14 serial number 13 service 13 wireless certification 14 WLAN 14 left side components 5 lights AC adapter and battery 5 camera 7 caps lock 9 mute 9 power 5 low battery level 31 M maintenance Disk Cleanup 34 Disk Defragmenter 34 updating programs and drivers 35 managing power 28 MEID number 17 Miracast 22 mobile broadband activating 17 IMEI number 17 MEID number 17 mute light, identifying 9 mute volume action key 13 N next track action key 12 O one-finger slide touch screen gesture 27 operating environment 52 operating system controls 15 P passwords Setup Utility (BIOS) 39 Windows 38 pause action key 12 play action key 12 62 Index ports HDMI 4, 20 USB SuperSpeed 5 USB SuperSpeed port with HP Sleep and Charge 4 USB Type-C 22 USB Type-C with HP Sleep and Charge 4 power battery 30 external 32 power button, identifying 5 power connector identifying 5 Power icon, using 30 power lights, identifying 5 power settings, using 30 Precision TouchPad using 23 Precision TouchPad gestures four-finger tap 25 three-finger swipe 26 three-finger tap 25 two-finger slide 24 two-finger tap 24 privacy screen action key 12 privacy screen action key, identifying 12 product name and number, computer 13 public WLAN connection 16 R recovery 49 discs 50 HP Recovery partition 50 media 50 USB flash drive 50 recovery media creating using HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool 49 creating using Windows tools 49 regulatory information regulatory label 14 wireless certification labels 14 Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings customizing 47 using 47 resources, accessibility 59 restoring 49 right side components 4 TouchPad and touch screen gestures Windows Hello 19 tap 23 two-finger pinch zoom 24 S screen brightness action keys 12 Section 508 accessibility standards TouchPad buttons identifying 8 TouchPad gestures 56, 57 security cable, installing 41 serial number, computer 13 service labels, locating 13 Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords 39 shipping the computer 36 shutdown 29 Sleep exiting 28 initiating 28 Sleep and Hibernation, initiating 28 slots memory card reader 6 software Disk Cleanup 34 Disk Defragmenter 34 locating 3 software installed locating 3 software updates, installing 41 sound. See audio sound settings, using 20 speaker volume action keys 12 speakers connecting 19 identifying 10 special keys, using 11 standards and legislation, accessibility 56 stop action key 12 switch screen image action key 12 system restore point, creating 49 T tap TouchPad and touch screen gesture 23 three-finger swipe TouchPad gesture 26 three-finger tap TouchPad gesture 25 touch screen gestures one-finger slide 27 TouchPad using 23 four-finger tap 25 three-finger swipe 26 three-finger tap 25 two-finger slide 24 two-finger tap 24 TouchPad zone, identifying 8 transfer data 22 traveling with the computer 14, 36 turning off the computer 29 two-finger pinch zoom TouchPad and touch screen gesture 24 two-finger slide TouchPad gesture 24 two-finger tap TouchPad gesture 24 U unresponsive system 29 updating programs and drivers 35 USB SuperSpeed port with HP Sleep and Charge, identifying 4 USB SuperSpeed port, identifying 5 USB Type-C port with HP Sleep and Charge, identifying 4 USB Type-C port, connecting 22 using passwords 38 using the keyboard and optional mouse 27 using the TouchPad 23 V vents, identifying 4, 6, 13 video HDMI port 20 USB Type-C 22 wireless displays 22 video, using 20 volume adjusting 12 mute 13 W Windows backup 49 recovery media 49 system restore point 49 using 40 Windows key, identifying 11 Windows passwords 38 Windows tools, using 49 wired network (LAN) 18 wireless button 15 wireless certification label 14 wireless controls button 15 operating system 15 wireless light 15 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 16 corporate WLAN connection 16 functional range 16 public WLAN connection 16 wireless network, securing 41 WLAN antennas, identifying 7 WLAN device 14 WLAN label 14 WWAN device 17 Index 63

 

 

Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-

15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide Read this first Before using this documentation and the product it supports, ensure that you read and understand the following:

Appendix A Important safety information on page 43 Safety and Warranty Guide Setup Guide First Edition (December 2018) Copyright Lenovo 2018. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If data or software is delivered pursuant to a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-

35F-05925. Contents About this documentation . . . . . . . . iii Chapter 1. Meet your computer . . . . . 1

. . 1 Front . . Base . 2

. 3

. . Left

. 4 Right . . Features. . 6

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connect to networks . Connect to the wired Ethernet Connect to the wired Ethernet Connect to Wi-Fi

. Connect to a cellular network. Use the keyboard shortcuts . Use the multi-touch screen . Chapter 2. Get started with your computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

. 7 Get started with Windows 10 . . 7 Windows account . 8 Windows user interface . . 9

. . Windows label

. 9

. . 9

. 9

. 10

. 10

. 10

. 11

. 12

. 13

. 15

. 15

. 15

. 15

. 17

. 17

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use multimedia . . Use audio . . Use the camera . . Connect to an external display . . . Get to know YOGA modes Use Lenovo Pen (for selected models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Lenovo Vantage . Interact with your computer . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 3. Explore your computer . . 19 Manage power . 19

. 19

. 19

. 19

. 19

. 19

. 20

. 20

. 20

. 20

. 21

. 22

. 22

. . . Check the battery status Charge the battery . . Check the battery temperature . . Maximize the battery life

. . . Set power button behaviors . . Set the power plan . . Set up a Bluetooth connection . . Set up a NFC connection . . Use a media card or smart card . . . . Airplane mode . Color sensor (for selected models)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer data . . . . . . . . . Chapter 4. Secure your computer and information . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

. 23 Lock the computer

. 25 Use passwords . 25

. 26

. . . . Password types . Set, change, and remove a password . Use fingerprint authentication (for selected models) . . Use face authentication (for selected models) . Use firewalls and antivirus programs. 26

. 27

. 27

. . . . . . . . . . RAID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What is UEFI BIOS . . Enter the BIOS menu . Navigate in the BIOS interface . Change the startup sequence . Set the system date and time. . Update UEFI BIOS . . . . . . Chapter 5. Configure advanced settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

. 29 UEFI BIOS . 29

. 29

. 29

. 29

. 30

. 30

. 30

. 30

. 30

. 31

. 31

. 32

. 32

. 32

. 33

. What is RAID . Storage drive requirements for RAID levels . Enter the Intel RST configuration utility . Create RAID volumes . . . Delete RAID volumes . . Reset storage drives to non-RAID . . Rebuild RAID 1 volumes. . Restore system files and settings to an earlier

. . point

. . Restore your files from a backup . . . Reset your computer . . Use advanced options . . Windows automatic recovery. . Create and use a recovery USB device . . 33

. 33

. 33

. 33

. 33

. 34

. 34 Install Windows 10 and drivers . . Recovery information . . . . . . . . . Chapter 6. Help and support

. FAQ . . . Error messages . . Beep errors . . . Self-help resources . . Call Lenovo . . . Before you contact Lenovo . Lenovo Customer Support Center . Purchase additional services. . . . . . . . . . . 37

. 37

. . . 38

. 39

. . 40

. . 41

. . . 41

. 41

. . . 42

. Copyright Lenovo 2018 i Appendix A. Important safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Appendix D. Compliance information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Appendix B. Accessibility and ergonomic information . . . . . . . . 57 Appendix E. Notices and trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Appendix C. Supplemental information about the Ubuntu operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 ii Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide About this documentation Illustrations in this documentation might look different from your product. Depending on the model, some optional accessories, features, and software programs might not be available on your computer. Depending on the version of operating systems, some user interface instructions might not be applicable to your computer. Documentation content is subject to change without notice. Lenovo makes constant improvements on the documentation of your computer, including this User Guide. To get the latest documentation, go to https://

support.lenovo.com. Microsoft makes periodic feature changes to the Windows operating system through Windows Update. As a result, some information in this documentation might become outdated. Refer to Microsoft resources for the latest information. Copyright Lenovo 2018 iii iv Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide Chapter 1. Meet your computer Front 1. Microphones Capture or record sound and voice. 2. Camera 3. Shutter Take pictures or record videos by clicking Camera from the Start menu. The indicator next to the camera is on when the camera is in use.. If you use other apps that support photographing, video chatting, and video conference, the camera starts automatically when you enable the camera-required feature from the app. Slide the shutter to cover or uncover the camera lens. It is designed to protect your privacy. 4. Multi-touch screen Enable you to use your computer with simple touch gestures. See Use the multi-touch screen on page 13. Copyright Lenovo 2018 1 11234 Base 1. Fingerprint reader*

Log in to your computer with enrolled fingerprints. See Use fingerprint authentication

(for selected models) on page 26. 2. Touchpad Perform finger touch and all the functions of a traditional mouse.

* for selected models 2 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide 12 Left 1. Power connector Connect to ac power through an ac power adapter. 2. Battery/Charging status indicator This indicator shows the ac power and battery power status of the computer. Solid White: Connected to ac power (battery power 91%100%) Solid amber: Connected to ac power (battery power 1%90%) Off: Not connected to ac power 3. HDMI connector Connect to a compatible digital audio device or video monitor, such as an HDTV. 4. USB-C connector 5. Audio connector Use the connector to transfer data, charge your device, connect to external displays, or connect to USB-C accessories to help expand your computer functionality. To purchase USB-C accessories, go to https://www.lenovo.com/accessories. Note: When the battery power is below 10%, the connected USB-C accessories might not work correctly. Connect headphones or a headset with a 3.5-mm (0.14-inch), 4-pole plug to listen to the sound from the computer. Note: The audio connector does not support conventional microphones. 6. Speaker Produce sound. Chapter 1. Meet your computer 3 132456 Right 1. Speaker 2. Novo button 3. Power button Produce sound. When the computer is off, press this button to start the System Recovery or to enter the boot menu. Press to turn on the computer or put the computer to sleep mode. To turn off the computer, open the Start menu, click Power, and then select Shut down. The indicator in the power button shows the system status of your computer. Blinking for three times: The computer is initially connected to power. On: The computer is on. Off: The computer is off or in hibernation mode. Blinking slowly: The computer is in sleep mode. 4. Media-card slot Insert a flash media card for data access or storage. See Use a media card or smart card on page 21. 5. USB 3.1 connector Gen 1 Connect a USB-compatible device, such as a USB keyboard, USB mouse, USB storage device, or USB printer. 6. Always On USB 3.1 connector Gen 1 To charge the USB-compatible devices when your computer is off, in sleep mode, or in hibernation mode, enable the Always On USB feature on your computer. To configure the Always On USB settings:

1. Open the Start menu and click Lenovo Vantage. 2. Select Hardware Settings Power. 3. Locate the Always On USB section and follow the on-screen instructions to select options of your preference. Note: The Always On USB 3.1 connector Gen 1 does not work if you click Charge from Sleep and your computer is off without connecting to ac power. 4 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide 213456 Chapter 1. Meet your computer 5 Features Size Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14API:

Length: 328 mm (12.9 inches) Width: 229 mm (9.0 inches) Thickness: 17.9 mm (0.7 inches) Lenovo IdeaPad C340-15IWL:

Length: 364 mm (14.3 inches) Width: 250 mm (9.8 inches) Thickness: 20.5 mm (0.8 inches) Microprocessor Memory To view the microprocessor information of your computer, right-click the Start button and then click System. Double data rate 4 (DDR4) small outline dual in-line memory module (SODIMM) + on-

board memory Storage device M.2 solid-state drive Display Keyboard Display size: 355.6 mm14.0 inches Display resolution: 1366 x 768 pixels or 1920 x 1080 pixels Multi-touch technology Function keys Six-row keyboard ac power connector Audio connector Two USB 3.1 connectors Gen 1 (including one Always On USB 3.1 connector Gen 1) HDMI connector Media-card slot USB-C connector Novo button Fingerprint reader*

Password Bluetooth Wireless LAN Camera Microphones Connectors and slots Security features Wireless features Others

* for selected models 6 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide Chapter 2. Get started with your computer Get started with Windows 10 Learn the basics of Windows 10 and start working with it right away. For more information about Windows 10, see the Windows help information. Windows account To use the Windows operating system, a user account is required. It can either be a Windows user account, or a Microsoft account. Windows user account When you start Windows for the first time, you are prompted to create a Windows user account. This first account you created is of the Administrator type. With an Administrator account, you can create additional user accounts or change account types by doing the following:

1. Open the Start menu and select Settings Accounts Family & other people. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions. Microsoft account You can also log in to the Windows operating system with a Microsoft account. To create a Microsoft account, go to the Microsoft sign-up page at https://signup.live.com/ and follow the on-

screen instructions. With a Microsoft account, you can:

Enjoy one-time signing in if you are using other Microsoft services, such as OneDrive, Skype, and Outlook. com. Sync personalized settings across other Windows-based devices. Copyright Lenovo 2018 7 Windows user interface 1. Account 2. Settings 3. Power 4. Start button 5. Windows search 6. Task View Change account settings, lock the computer, or sign out from the current account. Launch Settings. Shut down, restart, or put the computer into sleep. Open the Start menu. Type what you are looking for in the search box and get search results from your computer and the Web. Display all opened apps and switch among them. 7. Windows notification area Display notifications and status of some features. 8. Battery status icon Display power status and change battery or power settings. When your computer is not connected to ac power, the icon changes to

. 9. Network icon 10. Action center Connect to an available wireless network and display the network status. When connected to a wired network, the icon changes to

. Display the latest notifications from apps and provide quick access to some features. Open the Start menu Click the Start button. Press the Windows logo key on the keyboard. 8 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide Access Control Panel Open the Start menu and click Windows System Control Panel. Use Windows search. Launch an app Open the Start menu and select the app you want to launch. Use Windows search. Windows label Your computer might have a Windows 10 Genuine Microsoft label affixed to its cover depending on the following factors:

Your geographic location Edition of Windows 10 that is preinstalled Go to https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/howtotell/Hardware.aspx for illustrations of the various types of Genuine Microsoft labels. In the Peoples Republic of China, the Genuine Microsoft label is required on all computer models preinstalled with any version of Windows 10. In other countries and regions, the Genuine Microsoft label is required only on computer models licensed for Windows 10 Pro. The absence of a Genuine Microsoft label does not indicate that the preinstalled Windows version is not genuine. For details on how to tell whether your preinstalled Windows product is genuine, refer to the information provided by Microsoft at:

https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/howtotell/default.aspx There are no external, visual indicators of the Product ID or Windows version for which the computer is licensed. Instead, the Product ID is recorded in the computer firmware. Whenever a Windows 10 product is installed, the installation program checks the computer firmware for a valid, matching Product ID to complete the activation. In some cases, an earlier Windows version might be preinstalled under the terms of the Windows 10 Pro license downgrade rights. Connect to networks Your computer helps you connect to the world through a wired or wireless network. Connect to the wired Ethernet Connect your computer to a local network through the Ethernet connector on your computer with an Ethernet cable. Note: If the computer is connected to a supported docking station or dock, use the Ethernet connector on the docking station or dock instead of the one on the computer. Connect to the wired Ethernet Connect your computer to a local network through the mini Ethernet connector on your computer with an Ethernet cable. Chapter 2. Get started with your computer 9 To attach an Ethernet cable to your computer, you need an Ethernet extension adapter. The Ethernet extension adapter is available as an option and shipped with some computer models. You can purchase one from Lenovo at https://www.lenovo.com/accessories. Connect to Wi-Fi 1. Click the network icon in the Windows notification area. A list of available wireless networks is displayed. 2. Select a network to connect. Provide required information if needed. Connect to a cellular network If your computer has a wireless wide area network (WAN) card and a micro-SIM card installed, you can connect to a cellular data network and get online using the cellular signal. Note: The cellular service is provided by authorized mobile service carriers in some countries or regions. You must have a cellular plan from a service carrier to connect to the cellular network. To establish cellular connection:

1. Locate the micro-SIM card slot and insert a micro-SIM card as shown. Note the orientation of the card and ensure that it is seated correctly. 2. Click the network icon in the Windows notification area, and then select the cellular network icon the list. from 3. Provide required information if needed. Use Lenovo Vantage The preinstalled Lenovo Vantage is a customized one-stop solution to help you maintain your computer with automated updates and fixes, configure hardware settings, and get personalized support. 10 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide Access Lenovo Vantage Open the Start menu and click Lenovo Vantage. You also can type Lenovo Vantage in the search box. To download the latest version of Lenovo Vantage, go to Microsoft Store and search by the app name. Key features Lenovo Vantage makes periodic updates of the features to keep improving your experience with your computer. Note: The available features vary depending on the computer model. System Update Download and install firmware and driver updates to keep your computer up-to-date. You can configure the options to install updates automatically when available. Hardware Settings Configure intelligent settings of the following hardware to make your computer smarter to use:

Always On USB Battery Camera Computer display Keyboard Microphone Speakers Trackpad Trackpoint Health & Support Monitor your computer health and get personalized support of your computer. You can:

Scan the computer hardware and diagnose hardware problems. Look up computer warranty status (online). Access User Guide. Read tips and tricks articles customized for your computer. Lenovo Wi-Fi Security Protect your computer from malicious Wi-Fi networks. Interact with your computer Your computer provides you various ways to navigate the screen. Chapter 2. Get started with your computer 11 Use the keyboard shortcuts The special keys on the keyboard help you work more easily and effectively. 1. Numeric keypad Input numbers quickly when the Numeric Lock indicator is on. 2. Windows logo key 3. Caps Lock key Open the Start menu. For information about using this key with other keys, see the Windows help information. Switch the letter case between the upper case and lower case. When the key indicator is on, you can type uppercase letters. Invoke the special function printed as an icon on each key or standard function. 4. F1F12 function keys To choose whether to invoke the special function or standard function:

1. Go to Control Panel and view by Large icons or Small icons. 2. Click Keyboard or Lenovo - Keyboard Manager and select the option of your preference. Switch the function of the F1F12 keys between the standard function and special function printed as an icon on each key. When the Fn Lock indicator is on:

Press F1-F12 to use the standard function. Press Fn+F1-F12 to use the special function. When the Fn Lock indicator is off:

Press Fn+F1-F12 to use the standard function. Press F1-F12 to use the special function. Mute or unmute the speakers. When the key indicator is on, the speakers are muted. If you mute the speakers and turn off your computer, the speakers remain muted when you turn on your computer. Decrease the speaker volume. Increase the speaker volume. Mute or unmute the microphones. When the key indicator is on, the microphones are muted. Darken the computer display. Brighten the computer display. Manage external displays. Enable or disable the built-in wireless features. Open the Settings window. 12 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide Enable or disable the built-in Bluetooth features. Open a keyboard setting page. Invoke the function defined by yourself:

1. Open the Start menu and click Lenovo Vantage. 2. Click Hardware Settings and then click Input. 3. Locate the Keyboard: User-defined Key section and follow the on-screen instructions to complete the setting. On this setting page, you can also define different functions for the key combinations with F12, such as Shift+F12, Alt+F12, or Ctrl+F12. Open the calculator. Put your computer to sleep mode. Open the Snipping Tool program. Fn+Spacebar Switch between different keyboard backlight statuses if your computer supports keyboard backlight. Fn+B Fn+K Fn+P Fn+S Fn+4 Equal the Break key on a conventional external keyboard. Equal the ScrLK or Scroll Lock key on a conventional external keyboard. Equal the Pause key on a conventional external keyboard. Equal the SysRq key on a conventional external keyboard. Put the computer to sleep mode. To wake up the computer, press Fn or the power button. Fn+Left arrow key Equal the Home key. Fn+Right arrow key Equal the End key. Use the multi-touch screen If your computer display supports the multi-touch function, you can navigate the screen with simple touch gestures. Note: Some gestures might not be available depending on the app you use. Chapter 2. Get started with your computer 13 Tap once From the Start menu: Open an app or item. From the desktop: Select an app or item. In an open app: Perform an action such as Copy, Save, and Delete, depending on the app. Tap and hold Open a shortcut menu. Drag an item to the location you want Move an object. Tap twice quickly Open an app or item from the desktop. Slide Scroll through items, such as lists, pages, and photos. Move two fingers closer together Zoom out. Move two fingers farther apart Swipe in from the right edge Zoom in. Open the action center to see your notifications and quick actions. Swipe in from the left edge View all your open windows in task view. Swipe downwards shortly from the top edge (for full-

screened app or when your computer is in the tablet mode) Show a hidden title bar. Swipe in from the top edge to the bottom edge (when your computer is in the tablet mode) Close the current app. Tips Turn off the computer before cleaning the multi-touch screen. Use a dry, soft, and lint-free cloth or a piece of absorbent cotton to remove fingerprints or dust from the multi-touch screen. Do not apply solvents to the cloth. The multi-touch screen is a glass panel covered with a plastic film. Do not apply pressure or place any metallic object on the screen, which might damage the touch panel or cause it to malfunction. Do not use fingernails, gloved fingers, or inanimate objects for input on the screen. Regularly calibrate the accuracy of the finger input to avoid a discrepancy. 14 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide Use multimedia Use your computer for business or entertainment with the built-in components (camera, speakers, and audio features) or connected external devices (an external projector, monitor, and HDTV). Use audio To enhance your listening experience, connect speakers, headphones, or a headset with a 3.5-mm (0.14-

inch), 4-pole plug to the audio connector. Adjust the volume Press to increase the volume or press to decrease the volume. Change the sound settings 1. Go to Control Panel and view by category. 2. Click Hardware and Sound Sound. 3. Change the settings as you prefer. Protect your hearing Smart audio helps protect against hearing loss. The feature limits the computers maximum volume to 130 mV when a headset or headphone is connected. To change the setting:

1. Go to Control Panel and view by Large icons. 2. Click SmartAudio. In the window displayed, click the Disable Headphone Limiter icon. Then, follow the on-screen instructions. Use the camera You can use the built-in camera to take photos or record videos. The indicator next to the camera turns on when the camera is in use. To take photos or record a video:

1. Open the Start menu and click Camera. 2. To take a photo, click the camera icon. If you want to record video, click the video icon to switch to video mode. If you use other programs that provide features such as photographing, video capturing, and video conference, the camera starts automatically when you enable the camera-required feature. To configure the camera settings:

1. Open the Start menu and click Lenovo Vantage Hardware Settings Audio/Visual. 2. Locate the Camera section and then follow the on-screen instructions. Connect to an external display Connect your computer to a projector or a monitor to give presentations or expand your workspace. Connect to a wired display 1. Connect the external display to an appropriate video connector on your computer, such as the HDMI connector or Mini DisplayPort connector. Chapter 2. Get started with your computer 15 2. Connect the external display to an electrical outlet. 3. Turn on the external display. If your computer cannot detect the external display, right-click a blank area on the desktop, and then click Display settings Detect. Supported resolution The following table lists the supported maximum resolution of the external display. Connect the external display to Supported resolution the USB-C connector or the Mini DisplayPort connector Up to 3840 x 2160 pixels / 60 Hz the HDMI connector Up to 3840 x 2160 pixels / 30 Hz Connect to a wireless display To use a wireless display, ensure that both your computer and the external display support the Miracast feature. Open the Start menu, and then click Settings Devices Bluetooth & other devices Add Bluetooth or other device. In the Add a device window, click Wireless display or dock. Then, follow the instructions on the screen. Click the action center icon in the Windows notification area and click Connect. Select the wireless display and follow the on-screen instructions. Set the display mode Press or and then select a display mode of your preference. PC screen only: Displays the video output only on your computer screen. Note: Depending on the situation, you might see Disconnect, PC screen only, Computer only, or Disconnect projector. Duplicate: Displays the same video output on both your computer screen and an external display. Extend: Extends the video output from your computer display to an external display. You can drag and move items between the two displays. Second screen only: Displays the video output only on an external display. Note: Depending on the situation, you might see Projector only or Second screen only. If you show programs using DirectDraw or Direct3D in full-screen mode, only the main display shows the video output. Change display settings 1. Right-click a blank area on the desktop and select Display settings. 2. Select the display that you want to configure. 3. Change display settings of your preference. You can change the settings for both the computer display and the external display. For example, you can define which one is the main display and which one is the secondary display. You also can change the resolution and orientation. 16 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide Note: If you set a higher resolution for the computer display than the external display, only part of the screen can be displayed on the external display. Get to know YOGA modes Your computer display can be rotated to any angle up to 360 degrees. Attention: Do not rotate the computer display with too much force, or apply too much force to the upper-

right or upper-left corner of the computer display. Otherwise the computer display or hinges might get damaged. Your computer features the following four YOGA modes. You can switch among different modes according to your preference. Note: The keyboard and the pointing devices are automatically disabled in the stand mode, tent mode, and tablet mode. Use the touch screen to control your computer instead. Use Lenovo Pen (for selected models) The Lenovo Pen is an electronic pen stored in the pen slot. To use the pen, slide it out of the slot. Notes:

The Lenovo Pen is not waterproof. Keep the pen away from water and excessive moisture. To purchase the Lenovo Pen, go to https://www.lenovo.com/accessories. Use the Lenovo Pen 1 Eraser button 2 Click button You can perform the following operations with the Lenovo Pen:

To click or make a selection, tap the display once. To double-click, tap twice without pausing. To right-click, tap the display and hold the pen there for one second. Alternatively, you can press and hold the click button 2 and tap the display. To erase ink, press and hold the eraser button 1 , tap the display, and drag the pen across the ink you want to erase. Charge the Lenovo Pen 1. Ensure that your computer is on or in sleep mode. 2. Insert the pen back into the pen slot. The pen is 80% charged in about 15 seconds and 100% charged in about five minutes. Chapter 2. Get started with your computer 17 18 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide Chapter 3. Explore your computer Manage power Use the information in this section to achieve the best balance between performance and power efficiency. Check the battery status The battery status icon the current power plan, and access battery settings quickly. or is in the Windows notification area. You can check the battery status, view Click the battery status icon to display the percentage of battery power remaining and change the power mode. A warning message is displayed when the battery is low. Charge the battery When the battery power is low, charge your battery by connecting your computer to ac power. The battery is fully charged in about four to eight hours. If the power adapter shipped with your computer supports the rapid charge function, the battery is xx% charged in about xx hour when the computer is turned off. The actual charging time depends on the battery size, the physical environment, and whether you are using the computer. Battery charging is also affected by the battery temperature. The recommended battery temperature range for charging the battery is between 10C (50F) and 35C (95F). Note: To maximize the life of the battery, the computer does not recharge the battery if the remaining power is greater than 95%. Check the battery temperature 1. Open the Start menu and click Lenovo Vantage. 2. Click Hardware Settings Power. 3. Locate the Power Status section and then click Show Details to view the battery temperature. Maximize the battery life Lower the brightness of the computer display. Turn off the wireless features when not in use. Use the battery until the charge is depleted. Recharge the battery completely before using it. Set power button behaviors You can define what the power button does according to your preference. For example, by pressing the power button, you can turn off the computer or put the computer to sleep or hibernation mode. To change what the power button does:

1. Right-click the battery status icon in the Windows notification area. 2. Click Power Options Choose what the power button does. 3. Change the settings as you prefer. Copyright Lenovo 2018 19 Set the power plan For ENERGY STAR compliant computers, the following power plan takes effect when your computers have been idle for a specified duration:

Table 1. Default power plan (when plugged into ac power) Turn off the display: After 10 minutes Put the computer to sleep: After 30 minutes To reset the power plan to achieve the best balance between performance and power saving:

1. Right-click the battery status icon and select Power Options. 2. Choose or customize a power plan of your preference. Transfer data Quickly share your files using the built-in Bluetooth or NFC technology among devices with the same features. You also can insert a media card or smart card to transfer data. Set up a Bluetooth connection You can connect all types of Bluetooth device to your computer, such as a keyboard, a mouse, a smartphone, or speakers. The devices must be within a short distance, usually 10 meters (33 feet), from the computer. 1. Turn on Bluetooth on the computer. Press Open the Start menu, and then click Settings Devices Bluetooth & other devices. Turn on the or

. Bluetooth switch. 2. Click Add Bluetooth or other device Bluetooth. 3. Select a Bluetooth device, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Your Bluetooth device and computer will automatically connect the next time if the two devices are in range of each other with Bluetooth turned on. You can use Bluetooth for data transfer or remote control and communication. Set up a NFC connection If your computer supports NFC, you will see an NFC mark or label around the trackpad area. NFC is a high-frequency and short-range wireless communication technology. By using NFC, you can simply tap and connect your computer and another NFC-enabled device over a few centimeters or inches. Turn on NFC 1. Open the Start menu and click Settings Network & Internet Airplane mode. 2. Turn off the Airplane mode. 3. Turn on the NFC function. 20 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide Pair with an NFC card or NFC-enabled smartphone Before you start, ensure that:

The card is in NFC Data Exchange Format (NDEF), otherwise the card cannot be detected. The smartphone screen is facing upward. To pair with an NFC card or smartphone:

1. Tap the card or smartphone closely above the NFC mark or label on your computer. 2. Slowly move the card or smartphone around the NFC mark or label until you are prompted that the device has been successfully detected. Attention: During the data transfer, do not put your computer to sleep mode or lock the smartphone;

otherwise, your data might get damaged. Use a media card or smart card If your computer has a media-card slot or smart-card slot, read the following information. Supported smart card Supported smart card specifications: 85.60 mm (3.37 inches) x 53.98 mm (2.13 inches) Attention: Smart cards with slits are not supported. Do not insert such a smart card into the smart-card reader of your computer. Otherwise the reader might get damaged. Install the card 1. Locate the card slot. See Right on page 4. 2. Insert the card firmly into the card slot until it is secured in place. Notes:

For the media card, ensure that the metal contacts are facing down and pointing toward the card slot. For the smart card, ensure that the metal contacts are facing upward and pointing toward the card slot. Remove the card Attention: Before removing a card, eject the card from the Windows operating system first. Otherwise, data on the card might get corrupted or lost. 1. Click the triangular icon in the Windows notification area to show hidden icons. Then, right-click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon. 2. Select the corresponding item to eject the card from the Windows operating system. 3. Press the card and remove it from your computer. Store the card safely for future use. Chapter 3. Explore your computer 21 Airplane mode When the Airplane mode is enabled, all wireless features are disabled. To enable or disable the Airplane mode:

1. Open the Start menu. 2. Click Settings Network & Internet Airplane mode. 3. Turn on or turn off the Airplane mode switch. Color sensor (for selected models) The color sensor enables you to measure and adjust the color accuracy of your computer display. Therefore, a color image or graphic is rendered as close as possible to its original intent. The color profile for computer displays is preinstalled on your computer. If you want to install a different color profile, go to:

https://support.lenovo.com To use the color sensor, open the Start menu, click X-Rite PANTONE Color Calibrator, and then follow the on-screen instructions. When the color sensor is in use, the color-sensor indicator on the computer outer lid blinks twice at regular intervals. When the color measuring and adjustment finishes, the color-sensor indicator stays on. After you use the color sensor for the first time, a calibration profile ECCM2SensorData.dat is generated. Back up this calibration profile on an external storage device in case that both the color sensor and the internal storage device are replaced. To locate the DAT file, go to This PC Documents X-Rite. The display provides a color profile that can work with the Microsoft Image Color Management (ICM) function. If the graphics software you are using is compatible with ICM, you can display a color image on your monitor and match it with the same quality one on another device, such as a scanner or a printer. For more information about the Microsoft ICM, see the Windows help information. 22 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide Chapter 4. Secure your computer and information Lock the computer Lock your computer to a desk, table, or other fixtures through a compatible security cable lock. Note: You are responsible for evaluating, selecting, and implementing the locking device and security feature. Lenovo makes no comments, judgments, or warranties about the function, quality, or performance of the locking device and security feature. Cable locks for your product are available from Lenovo at https://

www.lenovoquickpick.com. Lock your computer to a desk, table, or other fixtures through a compatible security cable lock. Note: The slot supports cable locks that conform to the Kensington MiniSaver lock standards using Cleat locking technology. Do not attempt to use other types of cable locks that use a rotating T-bar locking mechanism.You are responsible for evaluating, selecting, and implementing the locking device and security feature. Lenovo makes no comments, judgments, or warranties about the function, quality, or performance of the locking device and security feature. Cable locks for your product are available from Lenovo at https://www.lenovoquickpick.com/. Copyright Lenovo 2018 23 Lock your computer to a desk, table, or other fixtures through a compatible security cable lock. Note: The slot supports cable locks that conform to the Kensington MicroSaver lock standards (using T-

bar locking technology) or MiniSaver lock standards (using Cleat locking technology). You are responsible for evaluating, selecting, and implementing the locking device and security feature. Lenovo makes no comments, judgments, or warranties about the function, quality, or performance of the locking device and security feature. Cable locks for your product are available from Lenovo at https://

www.lenovoquickpick.com/. 24 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide Use passwords This section introduces types of passwords in UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) BIOS (Basic Input/Output System) and how to set, change, and remove a password. Password types You can set a power-on password, supervisor password, or hard disk password in UEFI BIOS to prevent unauthorized access to your computer. However, you are not prompted to enter any UEFI BIOS password when your computer resumes from sleep mode. Power-on password If you set a power-on password, the icon Enter the correct password to use the computer. is displayed on the screen when you turn on the computer. Supervisor password The supervisor password protects the system information stored in UEFI BIOS. When entering the BIOS menu, enter the correct supervisor password when you are prompted by the icon Enter to skip the password prompt. However, you cannot change most of the system configuration options in UEFI BIOS. You also can press If you have set both the supervisor password and power-on password, you can use the supervisor password to access your computer when you turn it on. The supervisor password overrides the power-on password. Hard disk passwords The hard disk password prevents unauthorized access to the data on the storage drive. When a hard disk password is set, you are prompted to type a correct password each time you try to access the storage drive. To set the hard disk password, select one of the following types:

User hard disk password only When a user hard disk password is set without a master hard disk password, the user must enter the user hard disk password to access files and applications on the storage drive. Master hard disk password + User hard disk password The master hard disk password is set and used by a system administrator. It enables the administrator to access any storage drive in a system or any computer connected in the same network. The administrator can also assign a user hard disk password for each computer in the network. The user of the computer can change the user hard disk password as desired, but only the administrator can remove the user hard disk password. When prompted to enter a hard disk password, press F1 to switch between the master hard disk password and user hard disk password

. Attention: Record your hard disk password and store it in a safe place. If you forget the hard disk password, Lenovo cannot reset your passwords or recover data from the storage drive. You must take your computer to a Lenovo reseller or a marketing representative to have the storage drive replaced. Proof of purchase is required, and a fee will be charged for parts and service. Note: The hard disk password is not available in the following situations:

Chapter 4. Secure your computer and information 25 A Trusted Computing Group (TCG) Opal-compliant storage drive and a TCG Opal management software program are installed in the computer, and the TCG Opal management software program is activated. An eDrive storage drive is installed in the computer preinstalled with the Windows 10 operating system. Set, change, and remove a password Before you start, print these instructions. 1. Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1 to enter the BIOS menu. 2. Select Security Password by using the arrow keys. 3. Select the password type. Then, follow the on-screen instructions to set, change, or remove a password. You might want to record your password and store it in a safe place. Otherwise, if you forget the password, you have to take your computer to a Lenovo reseller or a marketing representative to have the password canceled. However, if you forget the hard disk password, Lenovo cannot reset your passwords or recover data from the storage drive. Use fingerprint authentication (for selected models) Fingerprint authentication can replace your passwords, such as the Windows password, power-on password, and hard disk password and enables you to log in to your computer simply and securely. Enroll your fingerprints Open the Start menu and then click Settings Accounts Sign-in options. Then, follow the on-screen instructions to finish the enrollment. During the enrollment, the fingerprints are associated with the Windows password automatically. It is recommended that you enroll more than one fingerprint in case of any injuries to your fingers. Log in with your fingerprint If the fingerprint reader indicator blinks in amber, the authentication is not successful. Associate your fingerprints with your power-on password and hard disk password 1. Turn off and then turn on the computer. 2. When prompted, scan your finger on the fingerprint reader. 3. Enter your power-on password, hard disk password, or both as required. The connection is created. When you start the computer again, you can use your fingerprints to log in to the computer without entering your Windows password, power-on password, or hard disk password. To change the settings, go to the BIOS menu. Attention: If you always use your fingerprint to log in to the computer, you might forget your passwords. Write down your passwords, and keep them in a safe place. 26 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide If you forget your power-on password, take your computer to a Lenovo-authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the password canceled. If you forget your hard disk password, Lenovo cannot reset your password or recover data from the storage drive. Take your computer to a Lenovo-authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the storage drive replaced. Proof of purchase is required, and a fee will be charged for parts and service. Maintain the fingerprint reader To ensure that the fingerprint reader works correctly, do not:

Scratch the surface of the reader with anything hard. Use or touch the reader with a wet, dirty, wrinkled, or injured finger. Use face authentication (for selected models) The infrared camera provides a personal and secure way for you to sign in to your computer with face authentication. After setting the infrared camera for face authentication, you can unlock your computer by scanning your face instead of using a password. Create face ID 1. Open the Start menu and click Settings Accounts Sign-in options. 2. Scroll down to the Password section and click Add to create a password. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to create a Personal Identification Number (PIN). 4. Locate the Windows Hello section and click Set up under Face Recognition. Then, click Get Started. 5. Enter the PIN you have set earlier. The camera preview starts. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the setup. 7. Click Improve Recognition to improve the image so that Windows Hello can recognize you in different light conditions or when your appearance changes. Log in with face authentication 1. On the Windows lock screen, select the smiling face icon 2. Follow the on-screen instructions and ensure that you are centered and looking directly at the camera. from the sign-in options. When the program recognizes your face, it automatically unlocks the screen and signs you in to the Windows operating system. Use firewalls and antivirus programs Your computer might be preinstalled with a firewall program. The firewall protects against computer Internet security threats, unauthorized access, intrusions, and Internet attacks. It also protects your privacy. A full version of antivirus program is provided with a free 30-day subscription. After 30 days, you must renew the license to continue receiving the antivirus program updates. For more information, see the help system of the program. Chapter 4. Secure your computer and information 27 28 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide Chapter 5. Configure advanced settings This chapter provides information about UEFI BIOS, RAID, recovery, operating system installation, and system management. UEFI BIOS This section introduces what is UEFI BIOS and the operations you can perform in UEFI BIOS. What is UEFI BIOS UEFI BIOS is the first program that the computer runs when the computer is turned on. UEFI BIOS initializes the hardware components and loads the operating system and other programs. You can configure UEFI BIOS to select the preferred settings for your computer. UEFI BIOS is also called the ThinkPad Setup program on your computers. Enter the BIOS menu Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1 to enter the BIOS menu. Note: If you have set the supervisor password, enter the correct password when prompted. You also can press Enter to skip the password prompt and enter the BIOS menu. However, you cannot change the system configurations that are protected by the supervisor password. Navigate in the BIOS interface Attention: The default configurations are already optimized for you in boldface. Improper change of the configurations might cause unexpected results. You can navigate in the BIOS interface by pressing the following keys:

F1 F9 F10 F5 F6 Esc Display the General Help screen. Restore to the default settings. Save your configuration and exit. Change to a lower value. Change to a higher value. Locate an item. Select a tab. Exit the submenu and return to the parent menu. Enter Enter the selected tab or submenu. Change the startup sequence 1. Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1. 2. Select Startup Boot. Then, press Enter. The default device order list is displayed. Note: The Boot menu is displayed if the computer cannot start from any devices or the operating system cannot be found. Copyright Lenovo 2018 29 3. Set the startup sequence as desired. 4. Press F10 to save the changes and restart the computer. To change the startup sequence temporarily:

1. Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F12. 2. Select the device that you want the computer to start from and press Enter. Set the system date and time 1. Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1. 2. Select Date/Time and set the system date and time as desired. 3. Press F10 to save changes and exit. Update UEFI BIOS When you install a new program, device driver, or hardware component, you might need to update UEFI BIOS. Download and install the latest UEFI BIOS update package by one of the following methods:

From Lenovo Vantage:

1. Open the Start menu and click Lenovo Vantage. 2. Click System Update. In the Lenovo System Update section, click Check For Updates. The available update packages are displayed and categorized by critical, recommended, or optional. 3. If the latest UEFI BIOS update package is available, select the package and click Install selected. Then, the update package will be downloaded and installed automatically. From the Lenovo Support Web site:

Go to https://support.lenovo.com and select the entry for your computer. Then, follow the on-screen instructions to download and install the latest UEFI BIOS update package. RAID This section introduces RAID-related information. What is RAID Redundant Array of Independent Disks (RAID) is a technology that provides increased storage functions and reliability through redundancy. It also can improve data storage reliability and fault tolerance compared with single-drive storage systems. Data loss resulting from a drive failure can be prevented by reconstructing missing data from the remaining drives. When a group of independent physical storage drives is set up to use RAID technology, they are in a RAID array. This array distributes data across multiple storage drives, but the array appears to the host computer as one single storage unit. Creating and using RAID arrays provides high performance, such as the expedited I/O performance, because several drives can be accessed simultaneously. Storage drive requirements for RAID levels Your computer supports the following internal storage drives:

2.5-inch form factor, 7-mm (0.28-inch) height hard disk drive M.2 Non-Volatile Memory Express (NVMe) solid-state drive (for selected models) 30 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide Note: Ensure that your computer has two identical storage drives installed (two hard disk drives, or M.2 NVMe solid-state drives with the same capacity) for supported RAID levels. If only one drive is installed, or two different types of drives are installed, the following information does not apply. Your computer supports the following RAID levels:

RAID 0: striped disk array (missing data resulting from a drive failure cannot be reconstructed) Consists of two identical storage drives Supported strip size: 4 KB, 8 KB, 16 KB, 32 KB, 64 KB, or 128 KB Better performance without fault tolerance Higher risk of data loss resulting from a member drive failure compared with non-RAID configuration RAID 1: mirrored disk array Consists of two identical storage drives Improved reading performance and 100% redundancy Enter the Intel RST configuration utility 1. Ensure that RAID is enabled in the BIOS menu:

a. Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1 to enter the BIOS menu. b. Select Config Storage Controller Mode RST mode and then press Enter. c. Press F10 to save changes and exit. 2. Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1 to enter the BIOS menu. 3. Select Config Storage Intel (R) Rapid Storage Technology and then press Enter. The Intel (R) Rapid Storage Technology window opens and the following options are displayed:

Create RAID Volume: Create a RAID volume. If no internal storage drives can be used, this option is not available. RAID Volumes: Confirm the information of the created RAID volumes. Non-RAID Physical Disks: Confirm the information of all non-RAID drives. 4. Press the up and down arrow keys to select an option. Press Enter to enter the menu for the selected option. Press Esc to exit the Intel RST configuration utility. Create RAID volumes Attention: All the existing data stored on the selected drives will be erased while the RAID volume is being created. 1. Enter the Intel RST configuration utility. 2. Select Create RAID Volume, and then press Enter to open the CREATE RAID VOLUME window. 3. Select and configure the options one by one. a. Name: Use the default name or type a preferred name for the RAID volume. b. RAID Level: Press Enter to change the RAID between RAID 0 (Stripe) and RAID 1 (Mirror). c. Select Disks: Select a drive and press Spacebar or Enter to add it into a group. The drive that cannot be used to create a RAID volume is not selectable. An X mark is displayed next to the selected drive. d. Strip Size: Select a strip size and press Enter to complete the configuration. This option is only available for RAID 0. e. Capacity: Customize the capacity of the RAID volume. The default RAID volume is the largest value. f. Create Volume: Press Enter to finish configurations of the preceding options and create a volume. Chapter 5. Configure advanced settings 31 Note: The Create Volume option might not be selectable for some reasons, for example, if different types of drives are selected, the option is not selectable. If it is not selectable, see the message displayed under Create Volume for reference. After the RAID volume is created, the Intel (R) Rapid Storage Technology window is displayed, and the created volume is displayed under RAID Volumes. 4. Press F10 to save changes and exit. Delete RAID volumes Attention: All the existing data stored on the selected drives will be erased after you delete RAID volumes. 1. Enter the Intel RST configuration utility. 2. Select the volume that you want to delete under RAID Volumes. Press Enter to open the RAID VOLUME INFO window. 3. Select Delete and press Enter to delete it from the RAID Volumes list. 4. When prompted, select Yes to confirm the deletion of the selected RAID volume. After you delete the RAID volume, the Intel (R) Rapid Storage Technology window is displayed. Member drives of the deleted volume are displayed under Non-RAID Physical Disks. 5. Press F10 to save changes and exit. Reset storage drives to non-RAID Attention: All the existing data stored on the selected drive will be erased after you reset it to non-RAID. 1. Enter the Intel RST configuration utility. 2. Select the volume that you want to reset under RAID Volumes. Press Enter to open the RAID VOLUME INFO window. 3. Select the drive that you want to reset under RAID Member Disks. Press Enter to open the PHYSICAL DISK INFO window. 4. Select Reset to Non-RAID and press Enter. When prompted, select Yes to confirm the reset action. After the reset process finishes, the Intel (R) Rapid Storage Technology window is displayed. The reset drive is listed under Non-RAID Physical Disks, and the volume of the reset drive is still listed under RAID Volumes. However, the status is changed from Normal to Failed or Degraded. 5. Press F10 to save changes and exit. Rebuild RAID 1 volumes If the status of a RAID 1 volume is Failed or Degraded, you can rebuild it through the Intel RST configuration utility. To rebuild a RAID 1 volume, ensure that at least one member drive of the RAID 1 volume works correctly. Replace the failed storage drive with a new one that has the same capacity before you rebuild a RAID 1 volume. 1. Enter the Intel RST configuration utility. 2. Select the volume that you want to rebuild under RAID Volumes. Press Enter to open the RAID VOLUME INFO window. 3. Select Rebuild and press Enter to open the Rebuild Volume window. 4. Select the drive that you want to rebuild and press Enter to initiate the rebuild process. After you initiate the rebuild process, the Intel (R) Rapid Storage Technology window is displayed. The RAID 1 volume under rebuilding is displayed under RAID Volumes with a Rebuilding mark. 32 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide 5. Wait a few minutes. When the rebuild process finishes successfully, the Rebuilding mark is changed to the Normal mark. 6. Press F10 to save changes and exit. Recovery information This section introduces the recovery information of the Windows 10 operating system. Ensure that you read and follow the on-screen recovery instructions. The data on your computer might be deleted during the recovery process. To avoid data loss, make a backup copy of all the data that you want to keep. Restore system files and settings to an earlier point 1. Go to Control Panel and view by Large icons or Small icons. 2. Click Recovery Open System Restore. Then, follow the on-screen instructions. Restore your files from a backup Note: If you use the File History tool to restore your files from a backup, ensure that you backed up your data earlier with the tool. 1. Go to Control Panel and view by Large icons or Small icons. 2. Click File History Restore personal files. Then, follow the on-screen instructions. Reset your computer In the resetting process, you can choose to keep your files or remove them when you reinstall the operating system. Note: The items in the graphical user interface (GUI) might change without notice. 1. Open the Start menu, and then click Settings Update & Security Recovery. 2. In the Reset this PC section, click Get started. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to reset your computer. Use advanced options Note: The items in the graphical user interface (GUI) might change without notice. 1. Open the Start menu, and then click Settings Update & security Recovery. 2. In the Advanced startup section, click Restart now Troubleshoot Advanced options. 3. Select a preferred option from the following list, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Restore the Windows operating system from a restore point recorded on your computer Restore the Windows operating system from a specific system image Fix problems that prevent the Windows operating system from loading Use the Command Prompt for advanced troubleshooting Change the UEFI firmware settings on your computer Change the startup settings of the Windows operating system Go back to the previous build Windows automatic recovery Note: Ensure that your computer is connected to ac power during the recovery process. Chapter 5. Configure advanced settings 33 The Windows recovery environment on your computer operates independently from the Windows 10 operating system. It enables you to recover or repair the operating system even if the Windows 10 operating system fails to start. After two consecutive failed boot attempts, the Windows recovery environment starts automatically. Then you can choose repair and recovery options by following the on-screen instructions. Create and use a recovery USB device It is recommended that you create a recovery USB drive as early as possible as a backup for the Windows recovery programs. With the recovery USB drive, you can troubleshoot and fix the problems even if the preinstalled Windows recovery programs are damaged. If you did not create a recovery USB drive as a precautionary measure, you can contact Lenovo Customer Support Center and purchase one from Lenovo. For a list of the Lenovo Support phone numbers for your country or region, go to:

https://pcsupport.lenovo.com/supportphonelist Create a recovery USB drive Attention: The creation process deletes anything stored on the USB drive. To avoid data loss, make a backup copy of all the data that you want to keep. 1. Ensure that your computer is connected to ac power. 2. Prepare a USB drive with at least 16 GB of storage capacity. The actual USB capacity required depends on the size of the recovery image. 3. Connect the prepared USB drive to the computer. 4. Type recovery in the search box. Then, click Create a recovery drive. 5. Click Yes in the User Account Control window to allow the Recovery Media Creator program to start. 6. In the Recovery Drive window, follow the on-screen instructions to create a recovery USB drive. Use the recovery USB drive 1. Ensure that your computer is connected to ac power. 2. Connect the recovery USB drive to the computer. 3. Turn on or restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F12. The Boot Menu window opens. 4. Select the recovery USB drive as the boot device. 5. Click Troubleshoot to display optional recovery solutions. 6. Select a recovery solution as desired. Then, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the process. Install Windows 10 and drivers This section provides instructions on installing a Windows 10 operating system and device drivers. Install a Windows 10 operating system Microsoft constantly makes updates to the Windows 10 operating system. Before installing a particular Windows 10 version, check the compatibility list for the Windows version. For details, go to https://

support.lenovo.com/us/en/solutions/windows-support. Attention:

It is recommended that you update your operating system through official channels. Any unofficial update might cause security risks. 34 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide The process of installing a new operating system deletes all the data on your internal storage drive, including the data stored in a hidden folder. 1. If you are using the Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption feature and your computer has a Trusted Platform Module, ensure that you have disabled the feature. 2. Ensure that the security chip is set to Active. a. Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1 to enter the BIOS menu. b. Select Security Security Chip and press Enter. The Security Chip submenu opens. c. Ensure that the security chip for TPM 2.0 is set to Active. d. Press F10 to save the settings and exit the BIOS menu. 3. Connect the drive that contains the operating system installation program to the computer. 4. Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1 to enter the BIOS menu. 5. Select Startup Boot to display the Boot Priority Order submenu. 6. Select the drive that contains the operating system installation program, for example, USB HDD. Then, press Esc. Attention: After you change the startup sequence, ensure that you select the correct device during a copy, a save, or a format operation. If you select the wrong device, the data on that device might be erased or overwritten. 7. Select Restart and ensure that OS Optimized Defaults is enabled. Then, press F10 to save the settings and exit the BIOS menu. 8. Follow the on-screen instructions to install the device drivers and necessary programs. 9. After installing the device drivers, apply Windows Update to get the latest updates, for example the security patches. 10. Go to Microsoft Store to download and install the latest version of Lenovo Vantage. Note: After installing the operating system, do not change the initial UEFI/Legacy Boot setting in the BIOS menu. Otherwise, the operating system will not start correctly. Install device drivers You should download the latest driver for a component when you notice poor performance from that component or when you added a component. This action might eliminate the driver as the potential cause of a problem. Download and install the latest driver by one of the following methods:

From Lenovo Vantage:

1. Open the Start menu and click Lenovo Vantage. 2. Click System Update. In the Lenovo System Update section, click Check For Updates. The available update packages are displayed and categorized by critical, recommended, or optional. 3. Select the update packages you want and click Install selected. Then, the update packages will be downloaded and installed automatically. From the Lenovo Support Web site:

Go to https://support.lenovo.com and select the entry for your computer. Then, follow the on-screen instructions to download and install necessary drivers and software. Chapter 5. Configure advanced settings 35 36 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide Chapter 6. Help and support FAQ How do I access Control Panel?

Open the Start menu and click Windows System Control Panel. Use Windows search. How do I turn off my computer?

Open the Start menu and click Power. Then, click Shut down. How do I partition my storage drive?

https://support.lenovo.com/solutions/ht503851 What do I do if my computer stops responding. What do I do if I spill liquid on the computer?

1. Press and hold the power button until the computer turns off. Then, restart the computer. 2. If step 1 does not work:

For models with an emergency reset hole: Insert a straightened paper clip into the emergency reset hole to cut off power supply temporarily. Then, restart the computer with ac power connected. For models without an emergency reset hole: Remove the battery pack and disconnect all power sources. Then, reconnect to ac power and restart the computer. 1. Carefully unplug the ac power adapter and turn off the computer immediately. The more quickly you stop the current from passing through the computer the more likely you will reduce damage from short circuits. Attention: Although you might lose some data or work by turning off the computer immediately, leaving the computer on might make your computer unusable. 2. Do not try to drain out the liquid by turning over the computer. If your computer has keyboard drainage holes on the bottom, the liquid will be drained out through the holes. 3. Wait until you are certain that all the liquid is dry before turning on your computer. How do I enter the BIOS menu?

Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1 to enter the BIOS menu. How do I disable my trackpad?

1. Go to Control Panel and view by Large icons or Small icons. 2. Click Mouse. The Mouse Properties window is displayed. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the setting. Where can I get the latest device drivers and UEFI BIOS?

From Lenovo Vantage. See Install Windows 10 and drivers on page 34 and Update UEFI BIOS on page 30. Download from Lenovo Support Web site at https://support.lenovo.com. Copyright Lenovo 2018 37 Error messages If you see a message that is not included in the following table, record the error message first, then shut down the computer and call Lenovo for help. See Lenovo Customer Support Center on page 41. Message Solution 0190: Critical low-battery error The computer turned off because the battery power is low. Connect the ac power adapter to the computer and charge the batteries. 0191: System Security - Invalid remote change requested The system configuration change has failed. Confirm the operation and try again. 0199: System Security - Security password retry count exceeded. This message is displayed when you enter a wrong supervisor password more than three times. Confirm the supervisor password and try again. 0271: Check Date and Time settings. 1802: Unauthorized network card is plugged in - Power off and remove the network card. The date or the time is not set in the computer. Enter the BIOS menu and set the date and time. The wireless network card is not supported on this computer. Replace with a supported wireless network card. 1820: More than one external fingerprint readers are attached. Turn off and remove all but the reader that you set up within your main operating system. 210x/211x: Detection/Read error on HDDx/SSDx The storage drive is not working. Reinstall the storage drive. If the problem still exists, replace the storage drive. Error: The non-volatile system UEFI variable storage is nearly full. Note:

This error indicates that the operating system or programs cannot create, modify, or delete data in the non-volatile system UEFI variable storage due to insufficient storage space after POST. The non-volatile system UEFI variable storage is used by the UEFI BIOS and by the operating system or programs. This error occurs when the operating system or programs store large amounts of data in the variable storage. All data needed for POST, such as UEFI BIOS setup settings, chipset, or platform configuration data, are stored in a separate UEFI variable storage. Press F1 after the error message is displayed to enter the BIOS menu. A dialog asks for confirmation to clean up the storage. If you select Yes, all data that were created by the operating system or programs will be deleted except global variables defined by the Unified Extensible Firmware Interface Specification. If you select No, all data will be kept, but the operating system or programs will not be able to create, modify, or delete data in the storage. If this error happens at a service center, Lenovo authorized service personnel will clean up the non-volatile system UEFI variable storage using the preceding solution. 38 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide Beep errors Lenovo SmartBeep technology enables you to decode beep errors with your smartphone when a black screen occurs with beeps from your computer. To decode the beep error with Lenovo SmartBeep technology:

1. Go to https://support.lenovo.com/smartbeep or scan the following QR Code. 2. Download the proper diagnostic app and install it on your smartphone. 3. Run the diagnostic app and place the smartphone near the computer. 4. Press Fn on your computer to emit the beep again. The diagnostic app decodes the beep error and shows possible solutions on the smartphone. Note: Do not attempt to service a product yourself unless instructed to do so by the Customer Support Center or product documentation. Only use a Lenovo-authorized service provider to repair your product. Chapter 6. Help and support 39 Self-help resources Use the following self-help resources to learn more about the computer and troubleshoot problems. Resources How to access?

Use Lenovo Vantage to:

Download and install the latest drivers and firmware. Configure hardware settings. Diagnose computer hardware problems. Check the computer warranty status. Protect you computer from malicious Wi-Fi networks. Product documentation:

Safety and Warranty Guide Setup Guide This User Guide Regulatory Notice Lenovo Support Web site with the latest support information of the following:

Drivers and software Diagnostic solutions Product and service warranty Product and parts details Knowledge base and frequently asked questions Windows help information Open the Start menu and click Lenovo Vantage. Use Windows search. 1. Go to https://support.lenovo.com. 2. Detect your computer or select computer model manually. 3. Select Documentation and filter out the documentation you want. https://support.lenovo.com Open the Start menu and click Get Help or Tips. Use Windows search or the Cortana personal assistant. Microsoft support Web site: https://

support.microsoft.com 40 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide Call Lenovo If you have tried to correct the problem yourself and still need help, you can call Lenovo Customer Support Center. Before you contact Lenovo Prepare the following before you contact Lenovo:

1. Record the problem symptoms and details:

What is the problem? Is it continuous or intermittent?

Any error message or error code?

What operating system are you using? Which version?

Which software applications were running at the time of the problem?

Can the problem be reproduced? If so, how?

2. Record the system information:

Product name Machine type and serial number The following illustration shows where to find the machine type and serial number of your computer. Lenovo Customer Support Center During the warranty period, you can call Lenovo Customer Support Center for help. Telephone numbers For a list of the Lenovo Support phone numbers for your country or region:

Go to https://pcsupport.lenovo.com/supportphonelist for the latest phone numbers. Refer to the Safety and Warranty Guide that comes with your computer. Note: Phone numbers are subject to change without notice. If the number for your country or region is not provided, contact your Lenovo reseller or Lenovo marketing representative. Services available during the warranty period Problem determination - Trained personnel are available to assist you with determining if you have a hardware problem and deciding what action is necessary to fix the problem. Lenovo hardware repair - If the problem is determined to be caused by Lenovo hardware under warranty, trained service personnel are available to provide the applicable level of service. Chapter 6. Help and support 41 Engineering change management - Occasionally, there might be changes that are required after a product has been sold. Lenovo or your reseller, if authorized by Lenovo, will make selected Engineering Changes

(ECs) that apply to your hardware available. Services not covered Replacement or use of parts not manufactured for or by Lenovo or nonwarranted parts Identification of software problem sources Configuration of UEFI BIOS as part of an installation or upgrade Changes, modifications, or upgrades to device drivers Installation and maintenance of network operating systems (NOS) Installation and maintenance of programs For the terms and conditions of the Lenovo Limited Warranty that apply to your Lenovo hardware product, see Warranty information in the Safety and Warranty Guide that comes with your computer. Purchase additional services During and after the warranty period, you can purchase additional services from Lenovo at https://

www.lenovo.com/services. Service availability and service name might vary by country or region. 42 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide Appendix A. Important safety information Safety notices This information can help you safely use your computer. Follow and retain all information included with your computer. The information in this document does not alter the terms of your purchase agreement or the Limited Warranty. For more information, see "Warranty Information" in the Safety and Warranty Guide that comes with your computer. Customer safety is important. Our products are developed to be safe and effective. However, personal computers are electronic devices. Power cords, power adapters, and other features can create potential safety risks that can result in physical injury or property damage, especially if misused. To reduce these risks, follow the instructions included with your product, observe all warnings on the product and in the operating instructions, and review the information included in this document carefully. By carefully following the information contained in this document and provided with your product, you can help protect yourself from hazards and create a safer computer work environment. Note: This information includes references to power adapters and batteries. In addition, some products

(such as speakers and monitors) ship with external power adapters. If you have such a product, this information applies to your product. In addition, computer products contain a coin-sized internal battery that provides power to the system clock even when the computer is unplugged, so the battery safety information applies to all computer products. Important information about using your computer Ensure that you follow the important tips given here to get the most use and enjoyment out of your computer. Failure to do so might lead to discomfort or injury, or cause the computer to fail. Protect yourself from the heat that your computer generates. When your computer is turned on or the battery is charging, the base, the palm rest, and some other parts may become hot. The temperature they reach depends on the amount of system activity and the level of charge in the battery. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, could cause discomfort or even a skin burn. Avoid keeping your hands, your lap, or any other part of your body in contact with a hot section of the computer for any extended time. Periodically take hands from using the keyboard by lifting your hands from the palm rest. Copyright Lenovo 2018 43 Protect yourself from the heat generated by the ac power adapter. When the ac power adapter is connected to an electrical outlet and your computer, it generates heat. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, may cause a skin burn. Do not place the ac power adapter in contact with any part of your body while it is in use. Never use it to warm your body. Do not wrap the cords around the ac power adapter while in use. Prevent your computer from getting wet. To avoid spills and the danger of electrical shock, keep liquids away from your computer. Protect the cables from being damaged. Applying strong force to cables may damage or break them. Route communication lines, or the cables of an ac power adapter, a mouse, a keyboard, a printer, or any other electronic device, so that they cannot be walked on, tripped over, pinched by your computer or other objects, or in any way subject to treatment that could interfere with the operation of your computer. Protect your computer and data when moving it. Before moving a computer equipped with a hard disk drive, do one of the following:

Turn it off. Put it in sleep mode. Put it in hibernation mode. This helps to prevent damage to the computer, and possible loss of data. 44 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide Handle your computer gently. Carry your computer carefully. Do not drop, bump, scratch, twist, hit, vibrate, push, or place heavy objects on your computer, display, or external devices. Use a quality carrying case that provides adequate cushioning and protection. Do not pack your computer in a tightly packed suitcase or bag. Before putting your computer in a carrying case, make sure that it is off, in sleep mode, or in hibernation mode. Do not put a computer in a carrying case while it is turned on. Conditions that require immediate action Products can become damaged due to misuse or neglect. Some product damage is serious enough that the product should not be used again until it has been inspected and, if necessary, repaired by an authorized servicer. As with any electronic device, pay close attention to the product when it is turned on. On very rare occasions, you might notice an odor or see a puff of smoke or sparks vent from your product. Or you might hear sounds like popping, cracking, or hissing. These might merely mean that an internal electronic component has failed in a safe and controlled manner. Or, they might indicate a potential safety issue. Do not take risks or attempt to diagnose the situation yourself. Contact the Customer Support Center for further guidance. For a list of Service and Support phone numbers, see the following Web site:

https://pcsupport.lenovo.com/supportphonelist Frequently inspect your computer and its components for damage or wear or signs of danger. If you have any question about the condition of a component, do not use the product. Contact the Customer Support Center or the product manufacturer for instructions on how to inspect the product and have it repaired, if necessary. In the unlikely event that you notice any of the following conditions, or if you have any safety concerns with your product, stop using the product and unplug it from the power source and telecommunication lines until you can speak to the Customer Support Center for further guidance. Appendix A. Important safety information 45 Power cords, plugs, power adapters, extension cords, surge protectors, or power supplies that are cracked, broken, or damaged. Signs of overheating, smoke, sparks, or fire. Damage to a battery (such as cracks, dents, or creases), discharge from a battery, or a buildup of foreign substances on the battery. A cracking, hissing, or popping sound, or strong odor that comes from the product. Signs that liquid has been spilled or an object has fallen onto the computer product, the power cord, or power adapter. The computer product, power cord, or power adapter has been exposed to water. The product has been dropped or damaged in any way. The product does not operate normally when you follow the operating instructions. Note: If you notice these conditions with a product (such as an extension cord) that is not manufactured for or by Lenovo, stop using that product until you can contact the product manufacturer for further instructions, or until you get a suitable replacement. Service and upgrades Do not attempt to service a product yourself unless instructed to do so by the Customer Support Center or your documentation. Only use a Service Provider who is approved to repair your particular product. Note: Some computer parts can be upgraded or replaced by the customer. Upgrades typically are referred to as options. Replacement parts approved for customer installation are referred to as Customer Replaceable Units, or CRUs. Lenovo provides documentation with instructions when it is appropriate for customers to install options or replace CRUs. You must closely follow all instructions when installing or replacing parts. The Off state of a power indicator does not necessarily mean that voltage levels inside a product are zero. Before you remove the covers from a product equipped with a power cord, always ensure that the power is turned off and that the product is unplugged from any power source. If you have any questions or concerns, contact the Customer Support Center. Although there are no moving parts in your computer after the power cord has been disconnected, the following warnings are required for your safety. Keep fingers and other parts of your body away from hazardous, moving parts. If you suffer an injury, seek medical care immediately. Avoid contact with hot components inside the computer. During operation, some components become hot enough to burn the skin. Before you open the computer cover, turn off the computer, disconnect power, and wait approximately 10 minutes for the components to cool. After replacing a CRU, reinstall all protective covers, including the computer cover, before connecting power and operating the computer. This action is important to help prevent unexpected electrical shock and help ensure the containment of an unexpected fire that could happen under extremely rare conditions. 46 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide When replacing CRUs, be cautious of sharp edges or corners that might cause injury. If you suffer an injury, seek medical care immediately. Power cords and power adapters DANGER Use only the power cords and power adapters supplied by the product manufacturer. The power cords shall be safety approved. For Germany, it shall be H03VV-F, 3G, 0.75 mm2, or better. For other countries, the suitable types shall be used accordingly. Never wrap a power cord around a power adapter or other object. Doing so can stress the cord in ways that can cause the cord to fray, crack, or crimp. This can present a safety hazard. Always route power cords so that they will not be walked on, tripped over, or pinched by objects. Protect power cords and power adapters from liquids. For instance, do not leave your power cord or power adapter near sinks, tubs, toilets, or on floors that are cleaned with liquid cleansers. Liquids can cause a short circuit, particularly if the power cord or power adapter has been stressed by misuse. Liquids also can cause gradual corrosion of power cord terminals and/or the connector terminals on a power adapter, which can eventually result in overheating. Ensure that all power cord connectors are securely and completely plugged into receptacles. Do not use any power adapter that shows corrosion at the ac input pins or shows signs of overheating (such as deformed plastic) at the ac input pins or anywhere on the power adapter. Do not use any power cords where the electrical contacts on either end show signs of corrosion or overheating or where the power cord appears to have been damaged in any way. To prevent possible overheating, do not cover the power adapter with clothing or other objects when the power adapter is plugged into an electrical outlet. Extension cords and related devices Ensure that extension cords, surge protectors, uninterruptible power supplies, and power strips that you use are rated to handle the electrical requirements of the product. Never overload these devices. If power strips are used, the load should not exceed the power strip input rating. Consult an electrician for more information if you have questions about power loads, power requirements, and input ratings. Appendix A. Important safety information 47 Plugs and outlets DANGER If a receptacle (power outlet) that you intend to use with your computer equipment appears to be damaged or corroded, do not use the outlet until it is replaced by a qualified electrician. Do not bend or modify the plug. If the plug is damaged, contact the manufacturer to obtain a replacement. Do not share an electrical outlet with other home or commercial appliances that draw large amounts of electricity; otherwise, unstable voltage might damage your computer, data, or attached devices. Some products are equipped with a three-pronged plug. This plug fits only into a grounded electrical outlet. This is a safety feature. Do not defeat this safety feature by trying to insert it into a non-grounded outlet. If you cannot insert the plug into the outlet, contact an electrician for an approved outlet adapter or to replace the outlet with one that enables this safety feature. Never overload an electrical outlet. The overall system load should not exceed 80 percent of the branch circuit rating. Consult an electrician for more information if you have questions about power loads and branch circuit ratings. Be sure that the power outlet you are using is properly wired, easily accessible, and located close to the equipment. Do not fully extend power cords in a way that will stress the cords. Be sure that the power outlet provides the correct voltage and current for the product you are installing. Carefully connect and disconnect the equipment from the electrical outlet. Power supply statement Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following label attached. Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact a service technician. External devices CAUTION:

Do not connect or disconnect any external device cables other than Universal Serial Bus (USB) and 1394 cables while the computer power is on; otherwise, you might damage your computer. To avoid possible damage to attached devices, wait at least five seconds after the computer is shut down to disconnect external devices. 48 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide General battery notice DANGER Batteries supplied by Lenovo for use with your product have been tested for compatibility and should only be replaced with approved parts. A battery other than the one specified by Lenovo, or a disassembled or modified battery is not covered by the warranty. Battery abuse or mishandling can cause overheat, liquid leakage, or an explosion. To avoid possible injury, do the following:

Do not open, dissemble, or service any battery. Do not crush or puncture the battery. Do not short-circuit the battery, or expose it to water or other liquids. Keep the battery away from children. Keep the battery away from fire. Stop using the battery if it is damaged, or if you notice any discharge or the buildup of foreign materials on the battery leads. Store the rechargeable batteries or products containing the rechargeable batteries at room temperature, charged to approximately 30 to 50% of capacity. We recommend that the batteries be charged about once per year to prevent overdischarge. Do not put the battery in trash that is disposed of in landfills. When disposing of the battery, comply with local ordinances or regulations. Notice for removable rechargeable battery DANGER Only recharge the battery strictly according to instructions included in the product documentation. If the battery is incorrectly replaced, there is danger of an explosion. The battery contains a small amount of harmful substances. Notice for built-in rechargeable battery DANGER Do not attempt to remove or replace the built-in rechargeable battery. Replacement of the battery must be done by a Lenovo-authorized repair facility or technician. Only recharge the battery strictly according to instructions included in the product documentation. The Lenovo-authorized repair facilities or technicians recycle Lenovo batteries according to local laws and regulations. Appendix A. Important safety information 49 Lithium coin-cell battery notice DANGER Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. If the coin-cell battery is not a CRU, do not attempt to replace the coin-cell battery. Replacement of the battery must be done by a Lenovo-authorized repair facility or technician. The Lenovo-authorized repair facilities or technicians recycle Lenovo batteries according to local laws and regulations. When replacing the lithium coin-cell battery, use only the same type or equivalent type that is recommended by the manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can explode if not properly used, handled, or disposed of. Swallowing the lithium coin-cell battery will cause chocking or severe internal burns in just two hours and might even result in death. Keep batteries away from children. If the lithium coin-cell battery is swallowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek medical care immediately. Do not:

Throw or immerse into water Heat to more than 100 C (212F). Repair or disassemble Leave in an extremely low air pressure environment Leave in an extremely high-temperature environment Crush, puncture, cut, or incinerate Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations. The following statement applies to users in the state of California, U.S.A. California Perchlorate Information:

Products containing manganese dioxide lithium coin-cell batteries may contain perchlorate. Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply, see https://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/

perchlorate/. 50 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide Heat and product ventilation DANGER Computers, ac power adapters, and many accessories can generate heat when turned on and when batteries are charging. Notebook computers can generate a significant amount of heat due to their compact size. Always follow these basic precautions:

When your computer is turned on or the battery is charging, the base, the palm rest, and some other parts may become hot. Avoid keeping your hands, your lap, or any other part of your body in contact with a hot section of the computer for any extended length of time. When you use the keyboard, avoid keeping your palms on the palm rest for a prolonged period of time. Your computer generates some heat during normal operation. The amount of heat depends on the amount of system activity and the battery charge level. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, could cause discomfort or even a skin burn. Periodically take breaks from using the keyboard by lifting your hands from the palm rest; and be careful not to use the keyboard for any extended length of time. Do not operate your computer or charge the battery near flammable materials or in explosive environments. Ventilation slots, fans and/or heat sinks are provided with the product for safety, comfort, and reliable operation. These features might inadvertently become blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, carpet, or other flexible surface. Never block, cover, or disable these features. When the ac power adapter is connected to an electrical outlet and your computer, it generates heat. Do not place the adapter in contact with any part of your body while using it. Never use the ac power adapter to warm your body. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, may cause a skin burn. For your safety, always follow these basic precautions with your computer:

Keep the cover closed whenever the computer is plugged in. Regularly inspect the outside of the computer for dust accumulation. Remove dust from vents and any perforations in the bezel. More frequent cleanings might be required for computers in dusty or high-traffic areas. Do not restrict or block any ventilation openings. Do not operate your computer inside furniture, as this might increase the risk of overheating. Airflow temperatures into the computer should not exceed 35C (95F). Appendix A. Important safety information 51 Electrical current safety information DANGER Electric current from power, telephone, and communication cables is hazardous. To avoid a shock hazard:

Do not use your computer during a lightning storm. Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet. Connect properly wired outlets to any equipment that will be attached to this product. Whenever possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables. Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage. Disconnect the attached power cords, battery, and all the cables before you open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures. Do not use your computer until all internal parts enclosures are fastened into place. Never use the computer when internal parts and circuits are exposed. DANGER Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following procedures when installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices. To connect:

To disconnect:

1. Turn everything OFF. 2. First, attach all cables to devices. 3. Attach signal cables to connectors. 4. Attach power cords to outlets. 5. Turn devices ON. 1. Turn everything OFF. 2. First, remove power cords from outlets. 3. Remove signal cables from connectors. 4. Remove all cables from devices. The power cord must be disconnected from the wall outlet or receptacle before installing all other electrical cables connected to the computer. The power cord may be reconnected to the wall outlet or receptacle only after all other electrical cables have been connected to the computer. DANGER During electrical storms, do not perform any replacement and do not connect the telephone cable to or disconnect it from the telephone outlet on the wall. 52 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide Laser safety information CAUTION:

When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber optic devices, or transmitters) are installed, note the following:

Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable parts inside the device. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation exposure. DANGER Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3B laser diode. Note the following:

Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view directly with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam. Liquid crystal display (LCD) notice CAUTION:

The liquid crystal display (LCD) is made of glass, and rough handling or dropping the computer can cause the LCD to break. If the LCD breaks and the internal fluid gets into your eyes or on your hands, immediately wash the affected areas with water for at least 15 minutes; if any symptoms are present after washing, get medical care. Note: For products with mercury-containing fluorescent lamps (for example, non-LED), the fluorescent lamp in the liquid crystal display (LCD) contains mercury; dispose of according to local, state, or federal laws. Use headphones or earphones Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss. Adjustment of the equalizer to maximum increases the earphone and headphone output voltage and the sound pressure level. Therefore, to protect your hearing, adjust the equalizer to an appropriate level. Excessive use of headphones or earphones for a long period of time at high volume can be dangerous if the output of the headphone or earphone connectors do not comply with specifications of EN 50332-2. The headphone output connector of your computer complies with EN 50332-2 Sub clause 7. This specification limits the computers maximum wide band true RMS output voltage to 150 mV. To help protect against hearing loss, ensure that the headphones or earphones you use also comply with EN 50332-2 (Clause 7 limits) for a wide band characteristic voltage of 75 mV. Using headphones that do not comply with EN 50332-

2 can be dangerous due to excessive sound pressure levels. If your Lenovo computer came with headphones or earphones in the package, as a set, the combination of the headphones or earphones and the computer already complies with the specifications of EN 50332-1. If different headphones or earphones are used, ensure that they comply with EN 50332-1 (Clause 6.5 Limitation Values). Using headphones that do not comply with EN 50332-1 can be dangerous due to excessive sound pressure levels. Appendix A. Important safety information 53 Choking hazard notice CHOKING HAZARD Product contains small parts. Keep away from children under three years. Plastic bag notice DANGER Plastic bags can be dangerous. Keep plastic bags away from babies and children to avoid danger of suffocation. Glass parts notice CAUTION:

Some parts of your product may be made of glass. This glass could break if the product is dropped on a hard surface or receives a substantial impact. If glass breaks, do not touch or attempt to remove it. Stop using your product until the glass is replaced by trained service personnel. Static electricity prevention Static electricity, although harmless to you, can seriously damage computer components and options. Improper handling of static-sensitive parts can damage the part. When you unpack an option or CRU, do not open the static-protective package containing the part until the instructions direct you to install it. When you handle options or CRUs, or perform any work inside the computer, take the following precautions to avoid static-electricity damage:

Limit your movement. Movement can cause static electricity to build up around you. Always handle components carefully. Handle adapters, memory modules, and other circuit boards by the edges. Never touch exposed circuitry. Prevent others from touching components. When you install a static-sensitive option or CRU, touch the static-protective package containing the part to a metal expansion-slot cover or other unpainted metal surface on the computer for at least two seconds. This reduces static electricity in the package and your body. When possible, remove the static-sensitive part from the static-protective packaging and install the part without setting it down. When this is not possible, place the static-protective packaging on a smooth, level surface and place the part on it. Do not place the part on the computer cover or other metal surface. 54 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide Operating environment Maximum altitude (without pressurization) 3048 m (10 000 ft) Temperature At altitudes up to 2438 m (8000 ft) Operating: 5C to 35C (41F to 95F) Storage: 5C to 43C (41F to 109F) At altitudes above 2438 m (8000 ft) Maximum temperature when operating under the unpressurized condition: 31.3C (88F) Note: When you charge the battery, its temperature must be no lower than 10C (50F). Relative humidity Operating: 8% to 95% at wet-bulb temperature 23C (73F) Storage: 5% to 95% at wet-bulb temperature 27C (81F) Cleaning and maintenance With appropriate care and maintenance your computer will serve you reliably. The following topics offer information to help you keep your computer working with best performance. Basic maintenance tips Here are some basic points about keeping your computer functioning properly:

If possible, place your computer in a well-ventilated and dry area without direct exposure to sunshine. Store packing materials safely out of the reach of children to prevent the risk of suffocation from plastic bags. Keep your computer away from magnets, activated cellular phones, electrical appliances, or speakers

(more than 13 cm or 5 inches). Avoid subjecting your computer to extreme temperatures (below 5C/41F or above 35C/95F). Avoid placing any objects (including paper) between the display and the keyboard or the palm rest. Computer display might be designed to be opened and used at a certain angle. Do not open the display with force. Otherwise, the computer hinge might get damaged. Do not turn your computer over when the ac power adapter is plugged in, otherwise, it could break the adapter plug. Before moving your computer, be sure to remove any media, turn off attached devices, and disconnect cords and cables. When picking up your open computer, hold it by the bottom. Do not pick up or hold your computer by the display. Only an authorized Lenovo repair technician should disassemble and repair your computer. Do not modify or tape the latches to keep the display open or closed. Avoid directly exposing your computer and peripherals to the air from an appliance that can produce negative ions. Wherever possible, ground your computer to facilitate safe electrostatic discharge. Appendix A. Important safety information 55 Clean your computer It is a good practice to clean your computer periodically to protect the surfaces and ensure trouble-free operation. Clean the computer cover: Wipe it with a lint-free cloth dampened in mild soap and water. Avoid applying liquids directly to the cover. Clean the keyboard: Wipe the keys one by one with a lint-free cloth dampened in mild soap and water. If you wipe several keys at a time, the cloth might hook onto an adjacent key and possibly damage it. Avoid spraying cleaner directly onto the keyboard. To remove any crumbs or dust from beneath the keys, you can use a camera blower with a brush or use cool air from a hair dryer. Clean the computer screen: Scratches, oil, dust, chemicals, and ultraviolet light can affect the performance of your computer screen. Use a dry, soft lint-free cloth to wipe the screen gently. If you see a scratchlike mark on your screen, it might be a stain. Wipe or dust the stain gently with a soft, dry cloth. If the stain remains, moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water or eyeglass cleaner, but do not apply liquids directly to your computer screen. Ensure that the computer screen is dry before closing it. 56 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide Appendix B. Accessibility and ergonomic information This chapter provides information about accessibility and ergonomics. Accessibility information Lenovo is committed to providing users who have hearing, vision, and mobility limitations with greater access to information and technology. This section provides information about the ways these users can get the most out of their computer experience. You also can get the most up-to-date accessibility information from the following Web site:

https://www.lenovo.com/accessibility Keyboard shortcuts The following list contains keyboard shortcuts that can help make your computer easier to use. Note: Depending on your keyboard, some of the following keyboard shortcuts might not be available. Windows logo key + U: Open Ease of Access Center Right Shift for eight seconds: Turn on or turn off Filter Keys Shift five times: Turn on or turn off Sticky Keys Num Lock for five seconds: Turn on or turn off Toggle Keys Left Alt+Left Shift+Num Lock: Turn on or turn off Mouse Keys Left Alt+Left Shift+PrtScn (or PrtSc): Turn on or turn off High Contrast For more information, go to https://windows.microsoft.com, and then search using any of the following keywords: keyboard shortcuts, key combinations, shortcut keys. Ease of Access Center Ease of Access Center on the Windows operating system enables you to configure your computers to suit their physical and cognitive needs. To access Ease of Access Center:

1. Go to Control Panel and view by Category. 2. Click Ease of Access Ease of Access Center. 3. Choose the appropriate tool by following the on-screen instructions. Ease of Access Center mainly includes the following tools:

Magnifier Magnifier is a useful utility that enlarges the entire screen or part of the screen so that you can see the items better. Narrator Narrator is a screen reader that reads what is displayed on the screen aloud and describes events such as error messages. On-Screen Keyboard If you prefer to type or enter data into your computer using a mouse, joystick, or other pointing device instead of a physical keyboard, you can use On-Screen Keyboard. On-Screen Keyboard displays a visual Copyright Lenovo 2018 57 keyboard with all the standard keys. You can select keys using the mouse or another pointing device, or you can tap to select the keys if your computer supports multi-touch screen. High Contrast High Contrast is a feature that heightens the color contrast of some text and images on your screen. As a result, those items are more distinct and easier to identify. Personalized keyboard Adjust keyboard settings to make your keyboard easier to use. For example, you can use your keyboard to control the pointer and make the keyboard easier to type certain key combinations. Personalized mouse Adjust mouse settings to make your mouse easier to use. For example, you can change the pointer appearance and make your mouse easier to manage windows. Speech Recognition Speech Recognition enables you to control your computer by voice. You can use verbal instructions to control the keyboard and mouse. With verbal instructions, you can start programs, open menus, click objects on the screen, dictate text into documents, and write and send e-mails. To use Speech Recognition:

1. Go to Control Panel and view by Category. 2. Click Ease of Access Speech Recognition. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Screen-reader technologies Screen-reader technologies are primarily focused on software program interfaces, help systems, and various online documents. For additional information about screen readers, see the following:

Use PDFs with screen readers:

https://www.adobe.com/accessibility.html?promoid=DJGVE Use the JAWS screen reader:

https://www.freedomscientific.com/Products/Blindness/JAWS Use the NVDA screen reader:

https://www.nvaccess.org/

Screen resolution You can make the text and images on your screen easier to read by adjusting the screen resolution of your computer. To adjust the screen resolution:

1. Right-click a blank area on the desktop and then click Display settings Display. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions. Note: Setting a resolution too low might prevent some items from fitting on the screen. Customizable item size You can make the items on your screen easier to read by changing the item size. To change the item size temporarily, use the Magnifier tool in Ease of Access Center. To change the item size permanently:

58 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide Change the size of all the items on your screen. 1. Right-click a blank area on the desktop and then click Display settings Display. 2. Change the item size by following the on-screen instructions. For some applications, your configuration might not take effect until you sign out and then sign in again. Change the size of the items on a Web page. Press and hold Ctrl, and then press the plus-sign key (+) to enlarge or the minus-sign key () to reduce the text size. Change the size of the items on the desktop or a window. Note: This function might not work on some windows. If your mouse has a wheel, press and hold Ctrl, and then scroll the wheel to change the item size. Industry-standard connectors Your computer provides industry-standard connectors that enable you to connect assistive devices. Documentation in accessible formats Lenovo provides electronic documentation in accessible formats, such as properly tagged PDF files or HyperText Markup Language (HTML) files. Lenovo electronic documentation is developed to ensure that visually impaired users can read the documentation through a screen reader. Each image in the documentation also includes adequate alternative text so that visually impaired users can understand the image when they use a screen reader. Ergonomic information Good ergonomic practice is important to get the most from your personal computer and to avoid discomfort. Arrange your workplace and the equipment you use to suit your individual needs and the kind of work that you perform. In addition, use healthy work habits to maximize your performance and comfort when using your computer. Working in the virtual office might mean adapting to frequent changes in your environment. Adapting to the surrounding light sources, active seating, and the placement of your computer hardware, can help you improve your performance and achieve greater comfort. This example shows someone in a conventional setting. Even when not in such a setting, you can follow many of these tips. Develop good habits, and they will serve you well. General posture: Make minor modifications in your working posture to deter the onset of discomfort caused by long periods of working in the same position. Frequent short breaks from your work also help to prevent minor discomfort associated with your working posture. Appendix B. Accessibility and ergonomic information 59 Display: Position the display to maintain a comfortable viewing distance of 510 mm to 760 mm (20 inches to 30 inches). Avoid glare or reflections on the display from overhead lighting or outside sources of light. Keep the display screen clean and set the brightness to levels that enable you to see the screen clearly. Press the brightness control keys to adjust display brightness. Head position: Keep your head and neck in a comfortable and neutral (vertical, or upright) position. Chair: Use a chair that gives you good back support and seat height adjustment. Use chair adjustments to best suit your comfort posture. Arm and hand position: If available, use chair arm rests or an area on your working surface to provide weight support for your arms. Keep your forearms, wrists, and hands in a relaxed and neutral (horizontal) position. Type with a soft touch without pounding the keys. Leg position: Keep your thighs parallel to the floor and your feet flat on the floor or on a footrest. What if you are traveling?

It might not be possible to observe the best ergonomic practices when you are using your computer while on the move or in a casual setting. Regardless of the setting, try to observe as many of the tips as possible. Sitting properly and using adequate lighting, for example, helps you maintain desirable levels of comfort and performance. If your work area is not in an office setting, ensure to take special note of employing active sitting and taking work breaks. Many product solutions are available to help you modify and expand your computer to best suit your needs. You can find some of these options at https://www.lenovo.com/accessories. Explore your options for docking solutions and external products that provide the adjustability and features that you want. Questions about vision?

The visual display screens of notebook computers are designed to meet the highest standards. These visual display screens provide you with clear, crisp images and large, bright displays that are easy to see, yet easy on the eyes. Any concentrated and sustained visual activity can be tiring. If you have questions on eye fatigue or visual discomfort, consult a vision-care specialist for advice. 60 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide Appendix C. Supplemental information about the Ubuntu operating system In limited countries or regions, Lenovo offers customers an option to order computers with the preinstalled Ubuntu operating system. If the Ubuntu operating system is available on your computer, read the following information before you use the computer. Ignore any information related to Windows-based programs, utilities, and Lenovo preinstalled applications in this documentation. Access the Lenovo Limited Warranty This product is covered by the terms of the Lenovo Limited Warranty (LLW), version L505-0010-02 08/2011. You can view the LLW in a number of languages from the following Web site. Read the Lenovo Limited Warranty at:

https://www.lenovo.com/warranty/llw_02 The LLW also is preinstalled on the computer. To access the LLW, go to the following directory:

/usr/share/doc/lenovo-doc If you cannot view the LLW either from the Web site or from your computer, contact your local Lenovo office or reseller to obtain a printed version of the LLW. Access the Ubuntu help system The Ubuntu help system provides information about how to use the Ubuntu operating system. To access the help system from the Unity, move your pointer to the Launch bar, and then click the Help icon. If you cannot find the Help icon from the Launch bar, click the Search icon, and type Help to search it. To learn more about the Ubuntu operating system, go to:

https://www.ubuntu.com Get support information If you need help, service, technical assistance, or more information about the Ubuntu operating system or other applications, contact the provider of the Ubuntu operating system or the provider of the application. If you need the service and support for hardware components shipped with your computer, contact Lenovo. For more information about how to contact Lenovo, refer to the User Guide and Safety and Warranty Guide. To access the latest User Guide and Safety and Warranty Guide, go to:

https://support.lenovo.com Copyright Lenovo 2018 61 62 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide Appendix D. Compliance information This chapter provides regulatory, environmental, RoHS, and ENERGY STAR information about Lenovo products. Radio frequency compliance statements Computer models equipped with wireless communications comply with the radio frequency and safety standards of any country or region in which it has been approved for wireless use. Besides this document, ensure that you read the Regulatory Notice for your country or region before using the wireless devices contained in your computer. Wireless-related information This topic provides wireless-related information about Lenovo products. Wireless interoperability Wireless-LAN card is designed to be interoperable with any wireless-LAN product that is based on Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS), Complementary Code Keying (CCK), and/or Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) radio technology, and is compliant to:

The 802.11b/g Standard, 802.11a/b/g, 802.11n, or 802.11ac on wireless-LANs, as defined and approved by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. The Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) certification as defined by the Wi-Fi Alliance. Usage environment and your health This computer contains integrated wireless cards that operate within the guidelines identified by radio frequency (RF) safety standards and recommendations; therefore, Lenovo believes that this product is safe for use by consumers. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the worldwide scientific community, and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists, who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of wireless devices might be restricted by the proprietor of a building or responsible representatives of an organization. For example, these situations and areas might include the following:

On board of airplanes, in hospitals or near petrol stations, blasting areas (with electro-explosive devices), medical implants or body-worn electronic medical devices, such as pace makers. In any other environment where the risk of interference to other devices or services is perceived or identified as harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices in a specific area (such as an airport or hospital), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use a wireless device prior to turning on the computer. Locate the UltraConnect wireless antennas Your computer has a UltraConnect wireless antenna system. You can enable wireless communication wherever you are. Copyright Lenovo 2018 63 The following illustration shows the antenna locations on your computer:

1 Wireless-LAN antenna (auxiliary) 2 Wireless-WAN antenna (auxiliary, for selected models) 3 Wireless-WAN antenna (main, for selected models) 4 Wireless-LAN antenna (main) Locate wireless regulatory notices For more information about the wireless regulatory notices, refer to the Regulatory Notice at https://

support.lenovo.com. European Union compliance with the Radio Equipment Directive This product is in conformity with all the requirements and essential norms that apply to EU Council Radio Equipment Directive 2014/53/EU on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to radio equipment. The full text of the system EU declaration of conformity and the EU wireless module declarations are available at the following Internet addresses:

For notebook computers: https://www.lenovo.com/us/en/social_responsibility/EU_DoC_notebooks For tablet computers: https://www.lenovo.com/us/en/social_responsibility/EU_DoC_notebooks For wireless peripheral devices: https://www.lenovo.com/us/en/social_responsibility/EU_DoC_wireless_ options Lenovo cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification of the product, including the installation of option cards from other manufacturers. This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B equipment according to European Standards harmonized in the Directives in compliance. The limits for Class B equipment were derived for typical residential environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed communication devices. Brazil Este equipamento no tem direito proteo contra interferncia prejudicial e no pode causar interferncia em sistemas devidamente autorizados. This equipment is not protected against harmful interference and may not cause interference with duly authorized systems. Mexico Advertencia: En Mexico la operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. 64 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide Singapore Korea

( 24002483.5 , 57255825 ) SAR

. SAR . SAR

. 20mm

. Environmental information of countries and regions This section provides environmental, recycling, and RoHS information about Lenovo products. Recycling and environmental information Lenovo encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment to responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed. Lenovo offers a variety of programs and services to assist equipment owners in recycling their IT products. For information about recycling Lenovo products, go to:

https://www.lenovo.com/recycling The latest environmental information about our products is available at:

https://www.lenovo.com/ecodeclaration Important WEEE information The WEEE marking on Lenovo products applies to countries with WEEE and e-waste regulations (for example, the European WEEE Directive, India E-Waste Management Rules). Appliances are labeled in accordance with local regulations concerning waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE). These regulations determine the framework for the return and recycling of used appliances as applicable within each geography. This label is applied to various products to indicate that the product is not to be thrown away, but rather put in the established collection systems for reclaiming these end of life products. Appendix D. Compliance information 65 Users of electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) with the WEEE marking must not dispose of end of life EEE as unsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to them for the return, recycle, and recovery of WEEE and to minimize any potential effects of EEE on the environment and human health due to the presence of hazardous substances. Lenovo electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) may contain parts and components, which at end-of-life might qualify as hazardous waste. EEE and waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE) can be delivered free of charge to the place of sale or any distributor that sells electrical and electronic equipment of the same nature and function as the used EEE or WEEE. For additional WEEE information, go to:

https://www.lenovo.com/recycling WEEE information for Hungary Lenovo, as a producer, bears the cost incurred in connection with the fulfillment of Lenovos obligations under Hungary Law No. 197/2014 (VIII.1.) subsections (1)-(5) of section 12. Japan recycling statements Collect and recycle a disused Lenovo computer or monitor If you are a company employee and need to dispose of a Lenovo computer or monitor that is the property of the company, you must do so in accordance with the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources. Computers and monitors are categorized as industrial waste and should be properly disposed of by an industrial waste disposal contractor certified by a local government. In accordance with the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources, Lenovo Japan provides, through its PC Collecting and Recycling Services, for the collecting, reuse, and recycling of disused computers and monitors. For details, visit the Lenovo Web site at:

https://www.lenovo.com/recycling/japan Pursuant to the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources, the collecting and recycling of home-

used computers and monitors by the manufacturer was begun on October 1, 2003. This service is provided free of charge for home-used computers sold after October 1, 2003. For details, go to:

https://www.lenovo.com/recycling/japan Dispose of Lenovo computer components Some Lenovo computer products sold in Japan may have components that contain heavy metals or other environmental sensitive substances. To properly dispose of disused components, such as a printed circuit board or drive, use the methods described above for collecting and recycling a disused computer or monitor. Dispose of disused lithium batteries from Lenovo computers A button-shaped lithium battery is installed inside your Lenovo computer to provide power to the computer clock while the computer is off or disconnected from the main power source. If you need to replace it with a new one, contact your place of purchase or contact Lenovo for service. If you need to dispose of a disused lithium battery, insulate it with vinyl tape, contact your place of purchase or an industrial-waste-disposal operator, and follow their instructions. Disposal of a lithium battery must comply with local ordinances and regulations. 66 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide Dispose of a disused battery from Lenovo notebook computers Your Lenovo notebook computer has a lithium ion battery or a nickel metal hydride battery. If you are a company employee who uses a Lenovo notebook computer and need to dispose of a battery, contact the proper person in Lenovo sales, service, or marketing, and follow that person's instructions. You also can refer to the instructions at:

https://www.lenovo.com/jp/ja/environment/recycle/battery/

If you use a Lenovo notebook computer at home and need to dispose of a battery, you must comply with local ordinances and regulations. You also can refer to the instructions at:

https://www.lenovo.com/jp/ja/environment/recycle/battery/

Recycling information for Brazil Declaraes de Reciclagem no Brasil Descarte de um Produto Lenovo Fora de Uso Equipamentos eltricos e eletrnicos no devem ser descartados em lixo comum, mas enviados pontos de coleta, autorizados pelo fabricante do produto para que sejam encaminhados e processados por empresas especializadas no manuseio de resduos industriais, devidamente certificadas pelos orgos ambientais, de acordo com a legislao local. A Lenovo possui um canal especfico para auxili-lo no descarte desses produtos. Caso voc possua um produto Lenovo em situao de descarte, ligue para o nosso SAC ou encaminhe um e-mail para:

reciclar@lenovo.com, informando o modelo, nmero de srie e cidade, a fim de enviarmos as instrues para o correto descarte do seu produto Lenovo. Battery recycling information for the European Union Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU). Batteries or packaging for batteries are labeled in accordance with European Directive 2006/66/EC concerning batteries and accumulators and waste batteries and accumulators. The Directive determines the framework for the return and recycling of used batteries and accumulators as applicable throughout the European Union. This label is applied to various batteries to indicate that the battery is not to be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive. In accordance with the European Directive 2006/66/EC, batteries and accumulators are labeled to indicate that they are to be collected separately and recycled at end of life. The label on the battery may also include a chemical symbol for the metal concerned in the battery (Pb for lead, Hg for mercury, and Cd for cadmium). Users of batteries and accumulators must not dispose of batteries and accumulators as unsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers for the return, recycling, and treatment of batteries and accumulators. Customer participation is important to minimize any potential effects of batteries Appendix D. Compliance information 67 and accumulators on the environment and human health due to the potential presence of hazardous substances. Before placing electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) in the waste collection stream or in waste collection facilities, the end user of equipment containing batteries and/or accumulators must remove those batteries and accumulators for separate collection. Dispose of lithium batteries and battery packs from Lenovo products A coin-cell type lithium battery might be installed inside your Lenovo product. You can find details about the battery in the product documentation. If the battery needs to be replaced, contact your place of purchase or contact Lenovo for service. If you need to dispose of a lithium battery, insulate it with vinyl tape, contact your place of purchase or a waste-disposal operator, and follow their instructions. Dispose of battery packs from Lenovo products Your Lenovo device might contain a lithium-ion battery pack or a nickel metal hydride battery pack. You can find details on the battery pack in the product documentation. If you need to dispose of a battery pack, insulate it with vinyl tape, contact Lenovo sales, service, or your place of purchase, or a waste-disposal operator, and follow their instructions. You also can refer to the instructions provided in the user guide for your product. For proper collection and treatment, go to:

https://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment Recycling information for China Battery recycling information for Taiwan Battery recycling information for the United States and Canada Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive of countries and regions The latest environmental information about Lenovo products is available at:

68 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide https://www.lenovo.com/ecodeclaration European Union RoHS This Lenovo product, with included parts (cables, cords, and so on) meets the requirements of Directive 2011/65/EU on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment ("RoHS recast" or "RoHS 2"). For more information about Lenovo worldwide compliance on RoHS, go to:

https://www.lenovo.com/rohs-communication Turkish RoHS The Lenovo product meets the requirements of the Republic of Turkey Directive on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE). Ukraine RoHS India RoHS RoHS compliant as per E-Waste (Management) Rules. China RoHS The information in the following table is applicable to products manufactured on or after January 1, 2015 for sale in the Peoples Republic of China. Appendix D. Compliance information 69 70 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide Taiwan RoHS Electromagnetic emission notices Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Suppliers Declaration of Conformity The following information refers to Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-

14API, machine types: 81N4, 81RL, 81N5 and 81N6. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful Appendix D. Compliance information 71 interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Responsible Party:

Lenovo (United States) Incorporated 7001 Development Drive Morrisville, NC 27560 Email: FCC@lenovo.com FCC ID and IC Certification information The FCC and IC Certification information is identified by a label on the computer as shown in the following illustration. Note: Depending on the model, your computer might look different from the following illustration. For a factory-preinstalled wireless module, this label identifies the actual FCC ID and IC certification number for the wireless module installed by Lenovo. Note: Do not remove or replace a factory-preinstalled wireless module by yourself. For replacement, you must contact Lenovo service first. Lenovo is not responsible for any damage caused by unauthorized replacement. 72 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide For a user-installable wireless WAN module, the actual FCC ID and IC certification number is affixed to the wireless WAN module 1 installed in the computer. To view the FCC ID and IC certification number, you must remove the computer base cover assembly. For instructions, see on page . Note: For the user-installable wireless module, ensure that you use only a Lenovo-authorized wireless module specifically tested for this computer model. Otherwise, the computer will generate an error-code beep sequence when you turn on the computer. FCC ID and IC Certification information You can find the FCC and IC Certification information through one of the following methods:

Through an electronic-label screen (E-label screen) preinstalled on your computer. To view the E-label screen, see Regulatory labels on page 75. On a physical label attached to the outside of your computer shipping carton. Industry Canada compliance statement CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B) European Union conformity EU Contact: Lenovo, Einsteinova 21, 851 01 Bratislava, Slovakia Compliance with the EMC Directive This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 2014/30/EU on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B equipment according to European Standards harmonized in the Directives in compliance. The Class B requirements for equipment are intended to offer adequate protection to broadcast services within residential environments. German Class B compliance statement Hinweis zur Einhaltung der Klasse B zur elektromagnetischen Vertrglichkeit Appendix D. Compliance information 73 Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie zur elektromagnetischen Vertrglichkeit Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit in den EU-

Mitgliedsstaaten und hlt die Grenzwerte der Klasse B der Norm gem Richtlinie. Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Gerte wie in den Handbchern beschrieben zu installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren drfen auch nur von der Lenovo empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. Lenovo bernimmt keine Verantwortung fr die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der Lenovo verndert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne Empfehlung der Lenovo gesteckt/eingebaut werden. Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln, EMVG vom 20. Juli 2007 (frher Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten), bzw. der EU Richtlinie 2014/30/EU, der EU Richtlinie 2014/53/EU Artikel 3.1b), fr Gerte der Klasse B. Dieses Gert ist berechtigt, in bereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG-Konformittszeichen -

CE - zu fhren. Verantwortlich fr die Konformittserklrung nach Paragraf 5 des EMVG ist die Lenovo

(Deutschland) GmbH, Meitnerstr. 9, D-70563 Stuttgart. Japan VCCI Class B compliance statement Japan compliance statement for products which connect to the power mains with rated current less than or equal to 20 A per phase Japan notice for ac power cord The ac power cord shipped with your product can be used only for this specific product. Do not use the ac power cord for other devices. Other compliance information This section provides other compliance information about Lenovo products. Certification-related information Product name: xxxxxx Compliance ID: xxxxxx Machine types: xxxx and xxxx The latest compliance information is available at:

74 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide https://www.lenovo.com/compliance Regulatory labels Depending on your country or region, you can find the government-required regulatory information through one of the following methods:

On a physical label attached to the outside of your computer shipping carton On a physical label attached to your computer Through an electronic-label screen (E-label screen) preinstalled on your computer To access the E-label screen, do one of the following:

Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F9. The E-label screen is displayed. Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press Enter or tap the prompt to enter the Startup Interrupt menu. Then, press F9 or tap the Regulatory Information option. The E-label screen is displayed. Korean E-label notice TCO certification To obtain the TCO certification information for your computer, go to:

https://www.lenovo.com/tco-cert Export classification notice This product is subject to the United States Export Administration Regulations (EAR) and has an Export Classification Control Number (ECCN) of 5A992.c. It can be re-exported except to any of the embargoed countries in the EAR E1 country list. Lenovo product service information for Taiwan Taiwan precautionary vision statement 3010 221 Eurasian compliance mark Appendix D. Compliance information 75 Brazil audio notice Ouvir sons com mais de 85 decibis por longos perodos pode provocar danos ao sistema auditivo. ENERGY STAR model information ENERGY STAR is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy aimed at saving money and protecting the environment through energy efficient products and practices. Lenovo is proud to offer our customers products with an ENERGY STAR compliant designation. The following machine types have been designed and tested to conform to the ENERGY STAR program requirement for computers at the time of manufacture. 81N4, 81RL, 81N5 and 81N6 For more information about Lenovo ENERGY STAR certified products, go to:

https://www.lenovo.com/us/en/social_responsibility/energy/

By using ENERGY STAR compliant products and taking advantage of the power management features of your computer, you reduce the consumption of electricity. Reduced electrical consumption contributes to potential financial savings, a cleaner environment, and the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions. For more information about ENERGY STAR, go to:

https://www.energystar.gov Lenovo encourages you to make efficient use of energy an integral part of your day-to-day operations. To help in this endeavor, Lenovo has preset a default power plan. To change the power plan, see Set the power plan on page 20. 76 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide Appendix E. Notices and trademarks Notices Lenovo may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in all countries. Consult your local Lenovo representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to a Lenovo product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that Lenovo product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any Lenovo intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the user's responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any other product, program, or service. Lenovo may have patents or pending patent programs covering subject matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:

Lenovo (United States), Inc. 1009 Think Place - Building One Morrisville, NC 27560 U.S.A. Attention: Lenovo Director of Licensing LENOVO PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you. Changes are made periodically to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. To provide better service, Lenovo reserves the right to improve and/or modify the products and software programs described in the manuals included with your computer, and the content of the manual, at any time without additional notice. The software interface and function and hardware configuration described in the manuals included with your computer might not match exactly the actual configuration of the computer that you purchase. For the configuration of the product, refer to the related contract (if any) or product packing list, or consult the distributor for the product sales. Lenovo may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. The products described in this document are not intended for use in implantation or other life support applications where malfunction may result in injury or death to persons. The information contained in this document does not affect or change Lenovo product specifications or warranties. Nothing in this document shall operate as an express or implied license or indemnity under the intellectual property rights of Lenovo or third parties. All information contained in this document was obtained in specific environments and is presented as an illustration. The result obtained in other operating environments may vary. Lenovo may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. Any references in this publication to non-Lenovo Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this Lenovo product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk. Copyright Lenovo 2018 77 Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the result obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly. Some measurements may have been made on development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements may have been estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their specific environment. This document is copyrighted by Lenovo and is not covered by any open source license, including any Linux agreement(s) which may accompany software included with this product. Lenovo may update this document at any time without notice. For the latest information or any questions or comments, contact or visit the Lenovo Web site:

https://support.lenovo.com Trademarks LENOVO and LENOVO logo are trademarks of Lenovo. Microsoft, Windows, Direct3D, BitLocker, and Cortana are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. Ubuntu is a registered trademark of Canonical Ltd. The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi Alliance, WiGig, and Miracast are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance. USB-C is a trademark of USB Implementers Forum. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2018 Lenovo. 78 Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/IdeaPad C340-15IWL/IdeaPad C340-14API User Guide

 

 

Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX Series User Guide Read this first Before using this documentation and the product it supports, ensure that you read and understand the following:

Appendix A Important safety information on page 33 Safety and Warranty Guide Setup Guide First Edition (December 2018) Copyright Lenovo 2018. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If data or software is delivered pursuant to a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-

35F-05925. Contents About this documentation . . . . . . . . iii Chapter 1. Meet your computer . . . . . 1

. . 1 Front . . Base . 2

. 3

. . Left

. 4 Right . . Features and specifications . . 5

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hotkeys . Use the multi-touch screen . Chapter 2. Get started with your computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

. 7 Get started with Windows 10 . . 7 Windows account . 8 Windows user interface . . 9

. . Windows label

. . 9 Connect to networks . . 10 Use Lenovo Vantage . 11 Interact with your computer . . 11

. . 12

. 13

. 13

. 13

. 13

. 15

. 16

. . . . . . . . . . . . Use multimedia . . Use audio . . Use the camera . . Connect to an external display . . . . . Operating modes . . Lenovo Digital Pen (Base Pen II)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check the battery status Charge the battery . . Check the battery temperature . . Maximize the battery life

. . . Set power button behaviors . . Set the power plan . . Chapter 3. Explore your computer . . 17 Manage power . 17

. 17

. 17

. 17

. 17

. 17

. 18

. 18

. 18

. 18

. 19

. Connect a Bluetooth-enabled device. Use a media card . . . . . . . . . . . . Airplane mode . Transfer data . . . . . . . . . Chapter 4. Secure your computer and information . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

. 21 Use passwords . 21

. 21

. . Password types . Set administrator password . . . . . . . . . Change or remove administrator password . . Set user password . . . . Enable power-on password . Set hard disk password . . . Change or remove hard disk password . . . Use the fingerprint reader . Use firewalls and antivirus programs. . 21

. 22

. 22

. 22

. 23

. 23

. 23

. . . . Chapter 5. Configure advanced settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

. 25 UEFI/BIOS . 25

. 25

. 25

. 25

. 26

. 26

. 26

. 26

. 26

. 26

. 27

. 27

. 27

. . . What is UEFI/BIOS setup utility . . Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility . Navigate in the UEFI/BIOS interface . . . Change the startup sequence . . Set the system date and time. Enable/Disable hotkey mode . . . Enable/Disable always-on . . . . Update UEFI/BIOS . . . . Recovery information . . Reset your computer . . . . Use advanced options . . Windows automatic recovery. . Create and use a recovery USB device . Chapter 6. Help and support

. Frequently asked questions . . Self-help resources . . Call Lenovo . . . Before you contact Lenovo . Lenovo Customer Support Center . Purchase additional services. . . . . . . . 29

. 29

. . 30

. . . 31

. 31

. . 31

. . . 32

. Appendix A. Important safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Appendix B. Accessibility and ergonomic information . . . . . . . . 47 Appendix C. Compliance information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Appendix D. Notices and trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Copyright Lenovo 2018 i ii Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide About this documentation Illustrations in this documentation might look different from your product. This documentation applies to models listed in the following table. Depending on the model, some optional accessories, features, and software programs might not be available on your computer. Depending on the version of operating systems, some user interface instructions might not be applicable to your computer. Documentation content is subject to change without notice. Lenovo makes constant improvements on the documentation of your computer, including this User Guide. To get the latest documentation, go to https://

support.lenovo.com. Microsoft makes periodic feature changes to the Windows operating system through Windows Update. As a result, some information in this documentation might become outdated. Refer to Microsoft resources for the latest information. Model name Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX-14IWL Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX-15IWL Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX-14API MT 81SQ 81SR 81SS Copyright Lenovo 2018 iii iv Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide Chapter 1. Meet your computer Front 1. Microphones Capture or record sound and voice. 2. Camera 3. Shutter Take pictures or record videos by clicking Camera from the Start menu. If you use other apps that support photographing, video chatting, and video conference, the camera starts automatically when you enable the camera-required feature from the app. Slide the shutter to cover or uncover the camera lens. It is designed to protect your privacy. 4. Camera light If the light is on, the camera is in use. 5. Multi-touch screen Displays text, graphics, and videos. See Use the multi-touch screen on page 12. 6. Wireless LAN/Bluetooth antennas Send and receive radio waves for the wireless LAN/Bluetooth module. Note: The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. Copyright Lenovo 2018 1 1145623 Base 1. Fingerprint reader*

Log in to your computer with enrolled fingerprints. See Use the fingerprint reader on page 23. 2. Touchpad Perform finger touch and all the functions of a traditional mouse.

* for selected models 2 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide 12 Left 1. Power connector Connect to ac power through an ac power adapter. 2. Battery/Charging status indicator This indicator shows whether the computer is connected to ac power. Solid white: Connected to ac power (battery power 91%100%) Solid amber: Connected to ac power (battery power 1%90%) Off: Not connected to ac power 3. HDMI connector Connect to a compatible digital audio device or video monitor, such as an HDTV. Charges USB-C compatible devices with the output voltage and current of 5 V and 3 A. 4. USB-C connector Transfers data at USB 3.1 speed, up to 5 Gbps. Connects to USB-C accessories to expand computer functionality. To purchase USB-C accessories, go to https://www.lenovo.com/accessories 5. Audio connector Note: When the battery power is below 10%, the connected USB-C accessories might not work correctly. Connect headphones or a headset with a 3.5-mm (0.14-inch) and 4-pole plug to listen to the sound from the computer. Note: The audio connector does not support conventional microphones. 6. Speaker Produces sound. Chapter 1. Meet your computer 3 132456 Right 1. Speaker 2. Novo button 3. Power button Produces sound. When the computer is off, press this button to start the System Recovery or the BIOS setup utility, or to enter the boot menu. Press to turn on the computer or put the computer to sleep mode. To turn off the computer, open the Start menu, click Power, and then select Shut down. The indicator in the power button shows the system status of your computer. Solid white/Solid amber: The computer is on. Off: The computer is off or in hibernation mode. Blinking slowly: The computer is in sleep mode. 4. Media-card slot Insert a flash media card for data access or storage. See Use a media card on page 18. 5. USB 3.1 connector Gen 1 Connect a USB-compatible device, such as a USB keyboard, USB mouse, USB storage device, or USB printer. 6. Always On USB 3.1 connector Gen 1 To charge the USB-compatible devices when your computer is off, in sleep mode, or in hibernation mode, enable the Always On USB feature on your computer. See Enable/

Disable always-on on page 26. 4 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide 213456 Features and specifications Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14API:

Dimensions Length: 328 mm (12.9 inches) Width: 229 mm (9.0 inches) Thickness: 17.9 mm (0.7 inches) Lenovo IdeaPad C340-15IWL:

Length: 364 mm (14.3 inches) Width: 250 mm (9.8 inches) Thickness: 20.5 mm (0.8 inches) Power source(ac power adapter) Sine-wave input at 50 Hz to 60 Hz Input rating of the ac power adapter: 100 V to 240 V ac Battery pack Microprocessor Memory Storage device Display Keyboard Connectors and slots Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14API: 45 Wh Lenovo IdeaPad C340-15IWL: 52.5 Wh To view the microprocessor information of your computer, right-click the Start button and then click System. Double data rate 4 (DDR4) small outline dual in-line memory module (SODIMM) On-board memory Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14API:

M.2 PCIE solid-state drive Lenovo IdeaPad C340-15IWL:

M.2 PCIE solid-state drive 2.5-inch hard disk drive*

Display size Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14IWL/Lenovo IdeaPad C340-14API: 355.6 mm (14.0 inches) Lenovo IdeaPad C340-15IWL: 381 mm (15.0 inches) Display resolution: 1366 x 768 pixels or 1920 x 1080 pixels Multi-touch technology Function keys Six-row keyboard (with backlight*) ac power connector Audio connector Two USB 3.1 connectors Gen 1 (including one Always On USB 3.1 connector Gen 1) USB-C connector HDMI connector Media-card slot Security features Fingerprint reader*

Password Chapter 1. Meet your computer 5 Wireless features Others

* for selected models Bluetooth Wireless LAN Camera Microphones Note: The battery capacity is the typical or average capacity as measured in a specific test environment. Capacities measured in other environments may differ but are no lower than the rated capacity (see product label). 6 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide Chapter 2. Get started with your computer Get started with Windows 10 Learn the basics of Windows 10 and start working with it right away. For more information about Windows 10, see the Windows help information. Windows account To use the Windows operating system, a user account is required. It can either be a Windows user account or a Microsoft account. Windows user account When you start Windows for the first time, you are prompted to create a Windows user account. This first account you created is of the Administrator type. With an Administrator account, you can create additional user accounts or change account types by doing the following:

1. Open the Start menu and select Settings Accounts Family & other people. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions. Microsoft account You can also log in to the Windows operating system with a Microsoft account. To create a Microsoft account, go to the Microsoft sign-up page at https://signup.live.com and follow the on-

screen instructions. With a Microsoft account, you can:

Enjoy one-time signing in if you are using other Microsoft services, such as OneDrive, Skype, and Outlook. com. Sync personalized settings across other Windows-based devices. Copyright Lenovo 2018 7 Windows user interface 1. Account 2. Settings 3. Power 4. Start button 5. Windows Search 6. Task View Change account settings, lock the computer, or sign out from the current account. Launch Settings. Shut down, restart, or put the computer into sleep. Open the Start menu. Type what you are looking for in the search box and get search results from your computer and the Web. Display all opened apps and switch among them. 7. Windows notification area Display notifications and status of some features. 8. Battery status icon 9. Network icon 10. Action center Display power status and change battery or power settings. When your computer is not connected to ac power, the icon changes to

. Connect to an available wireless network and display the network status. Display the latest notifications from apps and provide quick access to some features. Open the Start menu Click the Start button. Press the Windows logo key on the keyboard. Access Control Panel Open the Start menu and click Windows System Control Panel. 8 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide 12345687910 Use Windows Search. Launch an app Open the Start menu and select the app you want to launch. Use Windows Search. Windows label Your computer might have a Windows 10 Genuine Microsoft label affixed to its cover depending on the following factors:

Your geographic location Edition of Windows 10 that is preinstalled Go to https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/howtotell/Hardware.aspx for illustrations of the various types of Genuine Microsoft labels. In the Peoples Republic of China, the Genuine Microsoft label is required on all computer models preinstalled with any version of Windows 10. In other countries and regions, the Genuine Microsoft label is required only on computer models licensed for Windows 10 Pro. The absence of a Genuine Microsoft label does not indicate that the preinstalled Windows version is not genuine. For details on how to tell whether your preinstalled Windows product is genuine, refer to the information provided by Microsoft at https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/howtotell/default.aspx There are no external, visual indicators of the Product ID or Windows version for which the computer is licensed. Instead, the Product ID is recorded in the computer firmware. Whenever a Windows 10 product is installed, the installation program checks the computer firmware for a valid, matching Product ID to complete the activation. In some cases, an earlier Windows version might be preinstalled under the terms of the Windows 10 Pro license downgrade rights. Connect to networks Your computer helps you connect to the world through a wireless network. 1. Click the network icon in the Windows notification area. A list of available wireless networks is displayed. 2. Select a network to connect to. Provide required information if needed. Chapter 2. Get started with your computer 9 Use Lenovo Vantage The preinstalled Lenovo Vantage is a customized one-stop solution to help you maintain your computer with automated updates and fixes, configure hardware settings, and get personalized support. Access Lenovo Vantage Open the Start menu and click Lenovo Vantage. You also can type Lenovo Vantage in the search box. To download the latest version of Lenovo Vantage, go to Microsoft Store and search by the app name. Key features Lenovo Vantage makes periodic updates of the features to keep improving your experience with your computer. Note: The available features vary depending on the computer model. System Update Download and install firmware and driver updates to keep your computer up-to-date. You can configure the options to install updates automatically when available. Hardware Settings Configure intelligent settings of the following hardware to make your computer smarter to use:

Always On USB Battery Camera Computer display Keyboard Microphone Speakers Touchpad Health & Support Monitor your computer health and get personalized support of your computer. You can:

Scan the computer hardware. Look up computer warranty status (online). Access User Guide. Read tips and tricks articles customized for your computer. Security Advisor Make sure that your computer is always staying protected and safe. 10 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide Interact with your computer Your computer provides you various ways to navigate the screen. Hotkeys Some keys on the keyboard are printed with icons. These keys are called hotkeys and can be pressed alone or in combination with the Fn key to access certain Windows functions or settings quickly. The functions of hotkeys are symbolized by the icons printed on them. Hotkey Function Mutes/Unmutes the computer. If you mute the computer and turn off your computer, the speakers remain muted when you turn on your computer.

/

/

Fn + B Fn + P Fn + S Fn + K Fn + Q Decreases/Increases volume. Enables/Disables the microphones. Refreshes the current window. Enables/Disables the touchpad. Turns on/off airplane mode. Enables/Disables the camera. Locks the current user account. Manages external displays. Decreases/Increases display brightness. Equal the Break key on a conventional external keyboard. Equal the Pause key on a conventional external keyboard. Equal the SysRq key on a conventional external keyboard. Equal the ScrLK or Scroll Lock key on a conventional external keyboard. Switch among the three modes, auto mode, performance mode and quiet mode. Hotkey mode Some hotkeys share keys with functions keys (F1 to F12). The hotkey mode is a UEFI/BIOS setting that changes how hotkeys (or function keys) are used. Hotkey mode setting How to use hotkeys How to use function keys Disabled Enabled Hold down the Fn key and press one of the hotkeys. Press the hotkeys directly. Press the function keys directly. Hold down the Fn key and press one of the function keys. Note: Hotkeys that do not share keys with function keys are not affected by the hotkey mode setting. They should always be used with the Fn key. Chapter 2. Get started with your computer 11 Use the multi-touch screen Your computer display supports the multi-touch function. You can navigate the screen with simple touch gestures. Note: Some gestures might not be available depending on the app you use. Tap once From the Start menu: Open an app or item. From the desktop: Select an app or item. In an open app: Perform an action such as Copy, Save, and Delete, depending on the app. Tap and hold Open a shortcut menu. Drag an item to the location you want Move an object. Tap twice quickly Open an app or item from the desktop. Slide Scroll through items, such as lists, pages, and photos. Move two fingers closer together Zoom out. Move two fingers farther apart Swipe in from the right edge Zoom in. Open the action center to see your notifications and quick actions. Swipe in from the left edge View all your open windows in task view. Swipe downwards shortly from the top edge (for full-

screened app or when your computer is in the tablet mode) Show a hidden title bar. Swipe in from the top edge to the bottom edge (when your computer is in the tablet mode) Close the current app. Tips Turn off the computer before cleaning the multi-touch screen. 12 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide Use a dry, soft, and lint-free cloth or a piece of absorbent cotton to remove fingerprints or dust from the multi-touch screen. Do not apply solvents to the cloth. The multi-touch screen is a glass panel covered with a plastic film. Do not apply pressure or place any metallic object on the screen, which might damage the touch panel or cause it to malfunction. Do not use fingernails, gloved fingers, or inanimate objects for input on the screen. Regularly calibrate the accuracy of the finger input to avoid a discrepancy. Use multimedia Use your computer for business or entertainment with the built-in components (camera, speakers, and audio features) or connected external devices (an external projector, monitor, and HDTV). Use audio To enhance your listening experience, connect speakers, headphones, or a headset with a 3.5-mm (0.14-

inch) and 4-pole plug to the audio connector. Change the sound settings 1. Go to Control Panel and view by category. 2. Click Hardware and Sound Sound. 3. Change the settings as you prefer. Use the camera You can use the built-in camera to take photos or record videos. The indicator next to the camera is on when the camera is in use. To take photos or record videos:

1. Open the Start menu and click Camera. 2. Click the camera icon to take photos. Click the video icon to record videos. Note: To switch from photo mode to video mode, click Switch to Video mode

. To configure the camera settings, open the Start menu and then click Lenovo Vantage Hardware Settings Audio/Visual. Locate the Camera section and then follow the on-screen instructions to configure the camera settings. Connect to an external display Connect your computer to a projector or a monitor to give presentations or expand your workspace. Connect a wired display 1. Connect the external display to an appropriate video connector on your computer, such as the HDMI connector . 2. Connect the external display to an electrical outlet. 3. Turn on the external display. If your computer cannot detect the external display, right-click a blank area on the desktop, and then click Display settings Detect. Chapter 2. Get started with your computer 13 Supported resolution Your computer supports the following video resolution, if the external display also supports that resolution. Connect the external display to the HDMI connector Supported resolution Up to 3840 x 2160 pixels / 30 Hz Connect a wireless display (for computers and external displays supporting Miracast) Open the Start menu, and then click Settings Devices Bluetooth & other devices Add Bluetooth or other device Wireless display or dock. Click the action center icon in the Windows notification area and click Connect. Select the wireless display and follow the on-screen instructions. Set the display mode Press and then select a display mode of your preference. PC screen only: Displays the video output only on your computer screen. Note: Depending on the situation, you might see Disconnect, PC screen only, Computer only, or Disconnect projector. Duplicate: Displays the same video output on both your computer screen and an external display. Extend: Extends the video output from your computer display to an external display. You can drag and move items between the two displays. Second screen only: Displays the video output only on an external display. Note: Depending on the situation, you might see Projector only or Second screen only. If you show programs using DirectDraw or Direct3D in full-screen mode, only the main display shows the video output. Change display settings 1. Right-click a blank area on the desktop and select Display settings. 2. Select the display that you want to configure. 3. Change display settings of your preference. You can change the settings for both the computer display and the external display. For example, you can define which one is the main display and which one is the secondary display. You also can change the resolution and orientation. Note: If you set a higher resolution for the computer display than the external display, only part of the screen can be displayed on the external display. 14 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide Operating modes Your computer display can be rotated up to 360 degrees. Attention: Do not rotate the computer display with too much force, or apply too much force to the upper-

right or upper-left corner of the computer display. Otherwise the display or hinges might get damaged. Your computer features the following four operating modes. You can switch among different modes according to your preference. Note: The keyboard, the mouse and the touch pad are automatically disabled in the stand mode, tent mode, and tablet mode. Use the touch screen to control your computer instead. Notebook mode Stand mode Tent mode Tablet mode Chapter 2. Get started with your computer 15 Lenovo Digital Pen (Base Pen II) Selected models are equipped with Lenovo Digital Pen (Base Pen II). The pen is not waterproof. Keep the pen away from water and excessive moisture. To purchase Lenovo Digital Pen, go to https://

www.lenovo.com/accessories. Use Lenovo Digital Pen (Base Pen II) 1 Eraser button 2 Click button You can perform the following operations with the Lenovo Digital Pen (Base Pen II):

To click or make a selection, tap the display once. To double-click, tap twice without pausing. To right-click, tap the display and hold the pen there for one second. Alternatively, you can press and hold the click button 2 and tap the display. To erase ink, press and hold the eraser button 1 , tap the display, and drag the pen across the ink you want to erase. Charge Lenovo Digital Pen (Base Pen II) 1. Ensure that your computer is on or in sleep mode. 2. Insert the pen back into the pen slot. The pen is 80% charged in about 15 seconds and 100% charged in about five minutes. 16 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide 12 Chapter 3. Explore your computer Manage power Use the information in this section to achieve the best balance between performance and power efficiency. Check the battery status The battery status icon the current power plan, and access battery settings quickly. or is in the Windows notification area. You can check the battery status, view Click the battery status icon to display the percentage of battery power remaining and change the power mode. A warning message is displayed when the battery is low. Charge the battery When the battery power is low, charge your battery by connecting your computer to ac power. The battery is fully charged in about four to eight hours. The actual charging time depends on the battery size, the physical environment, and whether you are using the computer. If the power adapter shipped with your computer supports the rapid charge function, the battery is 80% charged in about one hour. Battery charging is also affected by its temperature. The recommended battery temperature range for charging the battery is between 10C (50F) and 35C (95F). Note: To maximize the life of the battery, the computer does not start recharging the battery if the remaining power is greater than 95%. Check the battery temperature 1. Open the Start menu and click Lenovo Vantage. 2. Click Hardware Settings Power. 3. Locate the Power Status section and then click Show Details to view the battery temperature. Maximize the battery life Lower the brightness of the computer display. Turn off the wireless features when not in use. Use the battery until the charge is depleted. Recharge the battery completely before using it. Set power button behaviors You can define what the power button does according to your preference. For example, by pressing the power button, you can turn off the computer or put the computer to sleep or hibernation mode. To change what the power button does:

1. Right-click the battery status icon in the Windows notification area. 2. Click Power Options Choose what the power button does. 3. Change the settings as you prefer. Copyright Lenovo 2018 17 Set the power plan For ENERGY STAR compliant computers, the following power plan takes effect when your computers have been idle for a specified duration:

Table 1. Default power plan (when plugged into ac power) Turn off the display: After 10 minutes Put the computer to sleep: After 30 minutes To reset the power plan to achieve the best balance between performance and power saving:

1. Right-click the battery status icon and select Power Options. 2. Click Change plan setting to choose or customize a power plan as you prefer. Transfer data Quickly share your files using the built-in Bluetooth among devices with the same features. You also can insert a media card to transfer data. Connect a Bluetooth-enabled device You can connect all types of Bluetooth device to your computer, such as a keyboard, a mouse, a smartphone, or speakers. The devices must be within a short distance, usually 10 meters (33 feet), from the computer. 1. Open the Start menu, and then click Settings Devices Bluetooth & other devices. Turn on the Bluetooth switch. 2. Click Add Bluetooth or other device Bluetooth. 3. Select a Bluetooth device, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Your Bluetooth-enabled device and computer will automatically connect the next time if the two devices are in range of each other with Bluetooth turned on. You can use Bluetooth for data transfer or remote control and communication. Use a media card Install the card 1. Locate the card slot. See Right on page 4. 2. Orient the metal contacts of the card to ensure that they are facing down and pointing toward the card slot. 3. Insert the card firmly into the card slot. Remove the card Attention: Before removing a card, eject the card from the Windows operating system first. Otherwise, data on the card might get corrupted or lost. 1. Click the triangular icon in the Windows notification area to show hidden icons. Then, right-click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon. 2. Select the corresponding item to eject the card from the Windows operating system. 3. Press the card and remove it from your computer. Store the card safely for future use. 18 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide Airplane mode When the Airplane mode is enabled, all wireless features are disabled. To enable or disable the Airplane mode:

1. Open the Start menu. 2. Click Settings Network & Internet Airplane mode. 3. Turn on or turn off the Airplane mode switch. Chapter 3. Explore your computer 19 20 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide Chapter 4. Secure your computer and information Use passwords This section introduces types of passwords in UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) or BIOS (Basic Input/Output System) and how to set, change, and remove a password. Password types You can set various passwords in the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. Password type Pre-requisite When set Administrator password No You must enter it to start the setup utility. User password The administrator password must be set. You can use the user password to start the setup utility. Master hard disk password No User hard disk password The master hard disk password must be set. You must enter it to start the operating system. You can use the user hard disk password to start the operating system. Notes:

All passwords set in the setup utility consist of alphanumeric characters only. If you start the setup utility using the user password, you can only change a few settings. Set administrator password You set the administrator password to prevent unauthorized access to the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. Attention: If you forget the administrator password, a Lenovo authorized service personnel cannot reset your password. You must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized service personnel or a marketing representative to have the system board replaced. Proof of purchase is required and a fee will be charged for parts and service. 1. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. 2. Select Security Set Administrator Password and press Enter. 3. Enter a password string that contains only letters and numbers. Then, press Enter. 4. Enter the password again and press Enter. 5. Select Exit Exit Saving Changes. Next time you start the computer, you must enter the administrator password to start the setup utility. If Power on Password is enabled, you must enter the administrator password or the user password to start the computer. Change or remove administrator password Only the administrator can change or remove the administrator password. If you remove the administrator password, the user password will also be removed. Copyright Lenovo 2018 21 1. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility using the administrator password. 2. Select Security Set Administrator Password and press Enter. 3. Enter the current password. 4. In the Enter New Password text box, enter the new password. 5. In the Confirm New Password text box, enter the new password again. Note: If you want to remove the password, press Enter in both text boxes and do not enter any character. 6. Select Exit Exit Saving Changes. Set user password Before you can set up user password, the administrator password must be set. The administrator of the setup utility might need to set up a user password for use by others. 1. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility using the administrator password. 2. Select Security Set User Password and press Enter. 3. Enter a password string that contains only letters and numbers. Then, press Enter. Note: The user password must be different from the administrator password. 4. Enter the password again and press Enter. 5. Select Exit Exit Saving Changes. Enable power-on password If the administrator password has been set, you can enable power-on password to enforce greater security. 1. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. 2. Select Security Power on Password and press Enter. Note: The administrator password must be set in advance. 3. Change the setting to Enabled. 4. Select Exit Exit Saving Changes. If power-on password is enabled, a prompt appears on the screen every time you turn on the computer. You must enter the administrator or user password to start the computer. Set hard disk password You can set a hard disk password in the setup utility to prevent unauthorized access to your data. Attention: Be extremely careful when setting a hard disk password. If you forget the hard disk password, a Lenovo authorized service personnel cannot reset your password or recover data from the hard disk. You must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized service personnel or a marketing representative to have the hard disk drive replaced. Proof of purchase is required and a fee will be charged for parts and service. 1. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. Note: If you start the setup utility using the user password, you cannot set hard disk password. 2. Select Security Set Hard Disk Password and press Enter. 3. Follow on-screen instructions to set both the master and the user passwords. 22 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide Note: The master and user hard disk passwords must be set at the same time. 4. Select Exit Exit Saving Changes. If the hard disk password is set, you must provide the correct password to start the operating system. Change or remove hard disk password 1. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. 2. Select Security. 3. Change or remove the hard disk password. To change or remove master hard disk password, select Change Master Password and press Enter. Note: If you remove the master hard disk password, the user hard disk password will also be removed. To change user hard disk password, select Change User Password and press Enter. Note: If you delete the master password, the user hard disk password will be removed together. 4. Select Exit Exit Saving Changes. Use the fingerprint reader Selected models include a fingerprint reader. You can use the reader to enroll your fingerprints. After enrolling, you can tap your finger on the fingerprint reader to log in to Windows. Enroll your fingerprints Open the Start menu and then click Settings Accounts Sign-in options. Then, follow the on-screen instructions to finish the enrollment. Notes:

You need to add a Windows password before you can enroll fingerprints. It is recommended that you enroll more than one fingerprint in case of any injury to your fingers. Maintain the fingerprint reader To ensure that the fingerprint reader works correctly, do not:

Scratch the surface of the fingerprint reader with anything hard. Use or touch the reader with a wet, dirty, wrinkled, or injured finger. Use firewalls and antivirus programs Your computer might be preinstalled with a firewall program. The firewall protects against computer Internet security threats, unauthorized access, intrusions, and Internet attacks. It also protects your privacy. A full version of antivirus program is provided with a free 30-day subscription. After 30 days, you must renew the license to continue receiving the antivirus program updates. For more information, see the help system of the program. Chapter 4. Secure your computer and information 23 24 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide Chapter 5. Configure advanced settings This chapter provides information about UEFI/BIOS and system recovery. UEFI/BIOS This section introduces what is UEFI/BIOS and the operations you can perform in UEFI/BIOS. What is UEFI/BIOS setup utility UEFI/BIOS is the first program that the computer runs when the computer is turned on. UEFI/BIOS initializes the hardware components and loads the operating system and other programs. Your computer may include a setup program (setup utility) with which you can change UEFI/BIOS settings. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility 1. Press the Novo button with an expanded paper clip (or similar slender object) when your computer is off. 2. Select BIOS Setup from Novo Button Menu. Navigate in the UEFI/BIOS interface You can navigate in the UEFI/BIOS interface by pressing the following keys:

F1 F9 F10 F5 F6 Esc Displays the General Help screen. Restores to the default settings. Saves your configuration and exits. Changes to a lower value. Changes to a higher value. Locates an item. Selects a tab. Exits the submenu and returns to the parent menu. Enter Enters the selected tab or submenu. Change the startup sequence 1. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. 2. Select Boot. The default device order list is displayed. Note: The Boot menu is displayed if the computer cannot start from any devices or the operating system cannot be found. 3. Set the startup sequence as desired. 4. Press F10 to save the changes and restart the computer. To change the startup sequence temporarily:

1. Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F12. Note: For computers with Hotkey mode enabled, press Fn + F12. Copyright Lenovo 2018 25 2. Select the device that you want the computer to start from and press Enter. Set the system date and time 1. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. 2. Select Configuration System Time / System Date and set the system date and time as desired. 3. Press F10 to save changes and exit. Enable/Disable hotkey mode Step 1. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. Step 2. Select Configuration Hotkey Mode and press Enter; change the setting to Disabled or Enabled. Step 3. Select Exit Exit Saving Changes. Enable/Disable always-on 1. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. 2. Select Configuration Always On USB and press Enter. Change the setting to Disabled or Enabled. 3. Select Exit Exit Saving Changes. Update UEFI/BIOS When you install a new program, device driver, or hardware component, you might need to update UEFI/

BIOS. Download and install the latest UEFI/BIOS update package by one of the following methods:

From Lenovo Vantage:

1. Open the Start menu and click Lenovo Vantage. 2. Click System Update. In the Lenovo System Update section, click Check for updates. The available update packages are displayed and categorized by critical, recommended, or optional. 3. If the latest UEFI/BIOS update package is available, select the package and click Install selected. Then, the update package will be downloaded and installed automatically. From the Lenovo Support Web site:

Go to https://support.lenovo.com and select the entry for your computer. Then, follow the on-screen instructions to download and install the latest UEFI/BIOS update package. Recovery information This section introduces the recovery information of the Windows 10 operating system. Ensure that you read and follow the on-screen recovery instructions. The data on your computer might be deleted during the recovery process. To avoid data loss, make a backup copy of all the data that you want to keep. Reset your computer In the resetting process, you can choose to keep your files or remove them when you reinstall the operating system. Note: The items in the graphical user interface (GUI) might change without notice. 1. Open the Start menu, and then click Settings Update & Security Recovery. 2. In the Reset this PC section, click Get started. 26 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to reset your computer. Use advanced options Note: The items in the graphical user interface (GUI) might change without notice. 1. Open the Start menu, and then click Settings Update & security Recovery. 2. In the Advanced startup section, click Restart now Troubleshoot Advanced options. 3. Select a preferred option from the following list, and then follow the on-screen instructions. System Restore: Use a restore point recorded on your PC to restore Windows Startup Repair: Fix problems that keep Windows from loading Go back to the previous version Command Prompt: Use the Command Prompt for advanced troubleshooting System Image Recovery: Recover Windows using a specific system image file UEFI Firmware Settings: Change settings in your PC's UEFI firmware Startup Settings: Change Windows startup behavior Windows automatic recovery Note: Ensure that your computer is connected to ac power during the recovery process. The Windows recovery environment on your computer operates independently from the Windows 10 operating system. It enables you to recover or repair the operating system even if the Windows 10 operating system fails to start. After two consecutive failed boot attempts, the Windows recovery environment starts automatically. Then you can choose repair and recovery options by following the on-screen instructions. Create and use a recovery USB device It is recommended that you create a recovery USB drive as early as possible as a backup for the Windows recovery programs. With the recovery USB drive, you can troubleshoot and fix the problems even if the preinstalled Windows recovery programs are damaged. If you did not create a recovery USB drive as a precautionary measure, you can contact Lenovo Customer Support Center and purchase one from Lenovo. For a list of the Lenovo Support phone numbers for your country or region, go to:

https://pcsupport.lenovo.com/supportphonelist Create a recovery USB drive Attention: The creation process deletes anything stored on the USB drive. To avoid data loss, make a backup copy of all the data that you want to keep. 1. Ensure that your computer is connected to ac power. 2. Prepare a USB drive with at least 16 GB of storage capacity. The actual USB capacity required depends on the size of the recovery image. 3. Connect the prepared USB drive to the computer. 4. Type recovery in the search box. Then click Create a recovery drive. 5. Click Yes in the User Account Control window to allow the Recovery Media Creator program to start. 6. In the Recovery Drive window, follow the on-screen instructions to create a recovery USB drive. Chapter 5. Configure advanced settings 27 Use the recovery USB drive 1. Ensure that your computer is connected to ac power. 2. Connect the recovery USB drive to the computer. 3. Turn on or restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F12. The Boot Menu window opens. 4. Select the recovery USB drive as the boot device. 5. Click Troubleshoot to display optional recovery solutions. 6. Select a recovery solution as desired. Then follow the on-screen instructions to complete the process. 28 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide Chapter 6. Help and support Frequently asked questions How do I access Control Panel?

Open the Start menu and click Windows System Control Panel. Use Windows search. How do I turn off my computer?

Open the Start menu and click Power. Then click Shut down. How do I partition my storage drive?

https://support.lenovo.com/solutions/ht503851 What do I do if my computer stops responding. Press and hold the power button until the computer turns off. Then restart the computer. What do I do if I spill liquid on the computer?

1. Carefully unplug the ac power adapter and turn off the computer immediately. The more quickly you stop the current from passing through the computer the more likely you will reduce damage from short circuits. Attention: Although you might lose some data or work by turning off the computer immediately, leaving the computer on might make your computer unusable. 2. Do not try to drain out the liquid by turning over the computer. If your computer has keyboard drainage holes on the bottom, the liquid will be drained out through the holes. 3. Wait until you are certain that all the liquid is dry before turning on your computer. Where can I get the latest device drivers and UEFI/BIOS?

From Lenovo Vantage. See Update UEFI/BIOS on page 26. Download from Lenovo Support Web site at https://support.lenovo.com. Copyright Lenovo 2018 29 Self-help resources Use the following self-help resources to learn more about the computer and troubleshoot problems. Resources How to access?

Use Lenovo Vantage to:

Download and install the latest drivers and firmware. Configure hardware settings. Diagnose computer hardware problems. Check the computer warranty status. Protect you computer from malicious Wi-Fi networks. Product documentation:

Safety and Warranty Guide Setup Guide This User Guide Regulatory Notice Lenovo Support Web site with the latest support information of the following:

Drivers and software Diagnostic solutions Product and service warranty Product and parts details Knowledge base and frequently asked questions Windows help information Open the Start menu and click Lenovo Vantage. Use Windows Search. 1. Go to https://support.lenovo.com. 2. Detect your computer or select computer model manually. 3. Select Documentation and filter out the documentation you want. https://support.lenovo.com Open the Start menu and click Get Help or Tips. Use Windows Search or the Cortana personal assistant. Microsoft support Web site: https://

support.microsoft.com 30 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide Call Lenovo If you have tried to correct the problem yourself and still need help, you can call Lenovo Customer Support Center. Before you contact Lenovo Prepare the following before you contact Lenovo:

1. Record the problem symptoms and details:

What is the problem? Is it continuous or intermittent?

Any error message or error code?

What operating system are you using? Which version?

Which software applications were running at the time of the problem?

Can the problem be reproduced? If so, how?

2. Record the system information:

Product name Machine type and serial number The following illustration shows where to find the machine type and serial number of your computer. Lenovo Customer Support Center During the warranty period, you can call Lenovo Customer Support Center for help. Telephone numbers For a list of the Lenovo Support phone numbers for your country or region:

Go to https://pcsupport.lenovo.com/supportphonelist for the latest phone numbers. Refer to the Safety and Warranty Guide that comes with your computer. Note: Phone numbers are subject to change without notice. If the number for your country or region is not provided, contact your Lenovo reseller or Lenovo marketing representative. Services available during the warranty period Problem determination - Trained personnel are available to assist you with determining if you have a hardware problem and deciding what action is necessary to fix the problem. Lenovo hardware repair - If the problem is determined to be caused by Lenovo hardware under warranty, trained service personnel are available to provide the applicable level of service. Chapter 6. Help and support 31 Engineering change management - Occasionally, there might be changes that are required after a product has been sold. Lenovo or your reseller, if authorized by Lenovo, will make selected Engineering Changes

(ECs) that apply to your hardware available. Services not covered Replacement or use of parts not manufactured for or by Lenovo or nonwarranted parts Identification of software problem sources Configuration of UEFI/BIOS as part of an installation or upgrade Changes, modifications, or upgrades to device drivers Installation and maintenance of network operating systems (NOS) Installation and maintenance of programs For the terms and conditions of the Lenovo Limited Warranty that apply to your Lenovo hardware product, see Warranty information in the Safety and Warranty Guide that comes with your computer. Purchase additional services During and after the warranty period, you can purchase additional services from Lenovo at https://

www.lenovo.com/services. Service availability and service name might vary by country or region. 32 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide Appendix A. Important safety information Safety notices This information can help you safely use your computer. Follow and retain all information included with your computer. The information in this document does not alter the terms of your purchase agreement or the Limited Warranty. For more information, see "Warranty Information" in the Safety and Warranty Guide that comes with your computer. Customer safety is important. Our products are developed to be safe and effective. However, personal computers are electronic devices. Power cords, power adapters, and other features can create potential safety risks that can result in physical injury or property damage, especially if misused. To reduce these risks, follow the instructions included with your product, observe all warnings on the product and in the operating instructions, and review the information included in this document carefully. By carefully following the information contained in this document and provided with your product, you can help protect yourself from hazards and create a safer computer work environment. Note: This information includes references to power adapters and batteries. In addition, some products

(such as speakers and monitors) ship with external power adapters. If you have such a product, this information applies to your product. In addition, computer products contain a coin-sized internal battery that provides power to the system clock even when the computer is unplugged, so the battery safety information applies to all computer products. Important information about using your computer Ensure that you follow the important tips given here to get the most use and enjoyment out of your computer. Failure to do so might lead to discomfort or injury, or cause the computer to fail. Protect yourself from the heat that your computer generates. When your computer is turned on or the battery is charging, the base, the palm rest, and some other parts may become hot. The temperature they reach depends on the amount of system activity and the level of charge in the battery. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, could cause discomfort or even a skin burn. Avoid keeping your hands, your lap, or any other part of your body in contact with a hot section of the computer for any extended time. Periodically take hands from using the keyboard by lifting your hands from the palm rest. Copyright Lenovo 2018 33 Protect yourself from the heat generated by the ac power adapter. When the ac power adapter is connected to an electrical outlet and your computer, it generates heat. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, may cause a skin burn. Do not place the ac power adapter in contact with any part of your body while it is in use. Never use it to warm your body. Do not wrap the cords around the ac power adapter while in use. Prevent your computer from getting wet. To avoid spills and the danger of electrical shock, keep liquids away from your computer. Protect the cables from being damaged. Applying strong force to cables may damage or break them. Route communication lines, or the cables of an ac power adapter, a mouse, a keyboard, a printer, or any other electronic device, so that they cannot be walked on, tripped over, pinched by your computer or other objects, or in any way subject to treatment that could interfere with the operation of your computer. Protect your computer and data when moving it. Before moving a computer equipped with a hard disk drive, do one of the following:

Turn it off. Put it in sleep mode. Put it in hibernation mode. This helps to prevent damage to the computer, and possible loss of data. 34 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide Handle your computer gently. Carry your computer carefully. Do not drop, bump, scratch, twist, hit, vibrate, push, or place heavy objects on your computer, display, or external devices. Use a quality carrying case that provides adequate cushioning and protection. Do not pack your computer in a tightly packed suitcase or bag. Before putting your computer in a carrying case, make sure that it is off, in sleep mode, or in hibernation mode. Do not put a computer in a carrying case while it is turned on. Conditions that require immediate action Products can become damaged due to misuse or neglect. Some product damage is serious enough that the product should not be used again until it has been inspected and, if necessary, repaired by an authorized servicer. As with any electronic device, pay close attention to the product when it is turned on. On very rare occasions, you might notice an odor or see a puff of smoke or sparks vent from your product. Or you might hear sounds like popping, cracking, or hissing. These might merely mean that an internal electronic component has failed in a safe and controlled manner. Or, they might indicate a potential safety issue. Do not take risks or attempt to diagnose the situation yourself. Contact the Customer Support Center for further guidance. For a list of Service and Support phone numbers, see the following Web site:

https://pcsupport.lenovo.com/supportphonelist Frequently inspect your computer and its components for damage or wear or signs of danger. If you have any question about the condition of a component, do not use the product. Contact the Customer Support Center or the product manufacturer for instructions on how to inspect the product and have it repaired, if necessary. In the unlikely event that you notice any of the following conditions, or if you have any safety concerns with your product, stop using the product and unplug it from the power source and telecommunication lines until you can speak to the Customer Support Center for further guidance. Appendix A. Important safety information 35 Power cords, plugs, power adapters, extension cords, surge protectors, or power supplies that are cracked, broken, or damaged. Signs of overheating, smoke, sparks, or fire. Damage to a battery (such as cracks, dents, or creases), discharge from a battery, or a buildup of foreign substances on the battery. A cracking, hissing, or popping sound, or strong odor that comes from the product. Signs that liquid has been spilled or an object has fallen onto the computer product, the power cord, or power adapter. The computer product, power cord, or power adapter has been exposed to water. The product has been dropped or damaged in any way. The product does not operate normally when you follow the operating instructions. Note: If you notice these conditions with a product (such as an extension cord) that is not manufactured for or by Lenovo, stop using that product until you can contact the product manufacturer for further instructions, or until you get a suitable replacement. Service and upgrades Do not attempt to service a product yourself unless instructed to do so by the Customer Support Center or your documentation. Only use a Service Provider who is approved to repair your particular product. Note: Some computer parts can be upgraded or replaced by the customer. Upgrades typically are referred to as options. Replacement parts approved for customer installation are referred to as Customer Replaceable Units, or CRUs. Lenovo provides documentation with instructions when it is appropriate for customers to install options or replace CRUs. You must closely follow all instructions when installing or replacing parts. The Off state of a power indicator does not necessarily mean that voltage levels inside a product are zero. Before you remove the covers from a product equipped with a power cord, always ensure that the power is turned off and that the product is unplugged from any power source. If you have any questions or concerns, contact the Customer Support Center. Although there are no moving parts in your computer after the power cord has been disconnected, the following warnings are required for your safety. Keep fingers and other parts of your body away from hazardous, moving parts. If you suffer an injury, seek medical care immediately. Avoid contact with hot components inside the computer. During operation, some components become hot enough to burn the skin. Before you open the computer cover, turn off the computer, disconnect power, and wait approximately 10 minutes for the components to cool. After replacing a CRU, reinstall all protective covers, including the computer cover, before connecting power and operating the computer. This action is important to help prevent unexpected electrical shock and help ensure the containment of an unexpected fire that could happen under extremely rare conditions. 36 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide When replacing CRUs, be cautious of sharp edges or corners that might cause injury. If you suffer an injury, seek medical care immediately. Power cords and power adapters DANGER Use only the power cords and power adapters supplied by the product manufacturer. The power cords shall be safety approved. For Germany, it shall be H03VV-F, 3G, 0.75 mm2, or better. For other countries, the suitable types shall be used accordingly. Never wrap a power cord around a power adapter or other object. Doing so can stress the cord in ways that can cause the cord to fray, crack, or crimp. This can present a safety hazard. Always route power cords so that they will not be walked on, tripped over, or pinched by objects. Protect power cords and power adapters from liquids. For instance, do not leave your power cord or power adapter near sinks, tubs, toilets, or on floors that are cleaned with liquid cleansers. Liquids can cause a short circuit, particularly if the power cord or power adapter has been stressed by misuse. Liquids also can cause gradual corrosion of power cord terminals and/or the connector terminals on a power adapter, which can eventually result in overheating. Ensure that all power cord connectors are securely and completely plugged into receptacles. Do not use any power adapter that shows corrosion at the ac input pins or shows signs of overheating (such as deformed plastic) at the ac input pins or anywhere on the power adapter. Do not use any power cords where the electrical contacts on either end show signs of corrosion or overheating or where the power cord appears to have been damaged in any way. To prevent possible overheating, do not cover the power adapter with clothing or other objects when the power adapter is plugged into an electrical outlet. Extension cords and related devices Ensure that extension cords, surge protectors, uninterruptible power supplies, and power strips that you use are rated to handle the electrical requirements of the product. Never overload these devices. If power strips are used, the load should not exceed the power strip input rating. Consult an electrician for more information if you have questions about power loads, power requirements, and input ratings. Appendix A. Important safety information 37 Plugs and outlets DANGER If a receptacle (power outlet) that you intend to use with your computer equipment appears to be damaged or corroded, do not use the outlet until it is replaced by a qualified electrician. Do not bend or modify the plug. If the plug is damaged, contact the manufacturer to obtain a replacement. Do not share an electrical outlet with other home or commercial appliances that draw large amounts of electricity; otherwise, unstable voltage might damage your computer, data, or attached devices. Some products are equipped with a three-pronged plug. This plug fits only into a grounded electrical outlet. This is a safety feature. Do not defeat this safety feature by trying to insert it into a non-grounded outlet. If you cannot insert the plug into the outlet, contact an electrician for an approved outlet adapter or to replace the outlet with one that enables this safety feature. Never overload an electrical outlet. The overall system load should not exceed 80 percent of the branch circuit rating. Consult an electrician for more information if you have questions about power loads and branch circuit ratings. Be sure that the power outlet you are using is properly wired, easily accessible, and located close to the equipment. Do not fully extend power cords in a way that will stress the cords. Be sure that the power outlet provides the correct voltage and current for the product you are installing. Carefully connect and disconnect the equipment from the electrical outlet. Power supply statement Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following label attached. Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact a service technician. External devices CAUTION:

Do not connect or disconnect any external device cables other than Universal Serial Bus (USB) and 1394 cables while the computer power is on; otherwise, you might damage your computer. To avoid possible damage to attached devices, wait at least five seconds after the computer is shut down to disconnect external devices. 38 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide General battery notice DANGER Batteries supplied by Lenovo for use with your product have been tested for compatibility and should only be replaced with approved parts. A battery other than the one specified by Lenovo, or a disassembled or modified battery is not covered by the warranty. Battery abuse or mishandling can cause overheat, liquid leakage, or an explosion. To avoid possible injury, do the following:

Do not open, dissemble, or service any battery. Do not crush or puncture the battery. Do not short-circuit the battery, or expose it to water or other liquids. Keep the battery away from children. Keep the battery away from fire. Stop using the battery if it is damaged, or if you notice any discharge or the buildup of foreign materials on the battery leads. Store the rechargeable batteries or products containing the rechargeable batteries at room temperature, charged to approximately 30 to 50% of capacity. We recommend that the batteries be charged about once per year to prevent overdischarge. Do not put the battery in trash that is disposed of in landfills. When disposing of the battery, comply with local ordinances or regulations. Notice for removable rechargeable battery DANGER Only recharge the battery strictly according to instructions included in the product documentation. If the battery is incorrectly replaced, there is danger of an explosion. The battery contains a small amount of harmful substances. Notice for built-in rechargeable battery DANGER Do not attempt to remove or replace the built-in rechargeable battery. Replacement of the battery must be done by a Lenovo-authorized repair facility or technician. Only recharge the battery strictly according to instructions included in the product documentation. The Lenovo-authorized repair facilities or technicians recycle Lenovo batteries according to local laws and regulations. Appendix A. Important safety information 39 Lithium coin-cell battery notice DANGER Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. If the coin-cell battery is not a CRU, do not attempt to replace the coin-cell battery. Replacement of the battery must be done by a Lenovo-authorized repair facility or technician. The Lenovo-authorized repair facilities or technicians recycle Lenovo batteries according to local laws and regulations. When replacing the lithium coin-cell battery, use only the same type or equivalent type that is recommended by the manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can explode if not properly used, handled, or disposed of. Swallowing the lithium coin-cell battery will cause chocking or severe internal burns in just two hours and might even result in death. Keep batteries away from children. If the lithium coin-cell battery is swallowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek medical care immediately. Do not:

Throw or immerse into water Heat to more than 100 C (212F). Repair or disassemble Leave in an extremely low air pressure environment Leave in an extremely high-temperature environment Crush, puncture, cut, or incinerate Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations. The following statement applies to users in the state of California, U.S.A. California Perchlorate Information:

Products containing manganese dioxide lithium coin-cell batteries may contain perchlorate. Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply, see https://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/

perchlorate/. 40 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide Heat and product ventilation DANGER Computers, ac power adapters, and many accessories can generate heat when turned on and when batteries are charging. Notebook computers can generate a significant amount of heat due to their compact size. Always follow these basic precautions:

When your computer is turned on or the battery is charging, the base, the palm rest, and some other parts may become hot. Avoid keeping your hands, your lap, or any other part of your body in contact with a hot section of the computer for any extended length of time. When you use the keyboard, avoid keeping your palms on the palm rest for a prolonged period of time. Your computer generates some heat during normal operation. The amount of heat depends on the amount of system activity and the battery charge level. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, could cause discomfort or even a skin burn. Periodically take breaks from using the keyboard by lifting your hands from the palm rest; and be careful not to use the keyboard for any extended length of time. Do not operate your computer or charge the battery near flammable materials or in explosive environments. Ventilation slots, fans and/or heat sinks are provided with the product for safety, comfort, and reliable operation. These features might inadvertently become blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, carpet, or other flexible surface. Never block, cover, or disable these features. When the ac power adapter is connected to an electrical outlet and your computer, it generates heat. Do not place the adapter in contact with any part of your body while using it. Never use the ac power adapter to warm your body. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, may cause a skin burn. For your safety, always follow these basic precautions with your computer:

Keep the cover closed whenever the computer is plugged in. Regularly inspect the outside of the computer for dust accumulation. Remove dust from vents and any perforations in the bezel. More frequent cleanings might be required for computers in dusty or high-traffic areas. Do not restrict or block any ventilation openings. Do not operate your computer inside furniture, as this might increase the risk of overheating. Airflow temperatures into the computer should not exceed 35C (95F). Appendix A. Important safety information 41 Electrical current safety information DANGER Electric current from power, telephone, and communication cables is hazardous. To avoid a shock hazard:

Do not use your computer during a lightning storm. Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet. Connect properly wired outlets to any equipment that will be attached to this product. Whenever possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables. Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage. Disconnect the attached power cords, battery, and all the cables before you open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures. Do not use your computer until all internal parts enclosures are fastened into place. Never use the computer when internal parts and circuits are exposed. DANGER Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following procedures when installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices. To connect:

To disconnect:

1. Turn everything OFF. 2. First, attach all cables to devices. 3. Attach signal cables to connectors. 4. Attach power cords to outlets. 5. Turn devices ON. 1. Turn everything OFF. 2. First, remove power cords from outlets. 3. Remove signal cables from connectors. 4. Remove all cables from devices. The power cord must be disconnected from the wall outlet or receptacle before installing all other electrical cables connected to the computer. The power cord may be reconnected to the wall outlet or receptacle only after all other electrical cables have been connected to the computer. DANGER During electrical storms, do not perform any replacement and do not connect the telephone cable to or disconnect it from the telephone outlet on the wall. 42 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide Laser safety information CAUTION:

When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber optic devices, or transmitters) are installed, note the following:

Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable parts inside the device. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation exposure. DANGER Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3B laser diode. Note the following:

Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view directly with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam. Liquid crystal display (LCD) notice CAUTION:

The liquid crystal display (LCD) is made of glass, and rough handling or dropping the computer can cause the LCD to break. If the LCD breaks and the internal fluid gets into your eyes or on your hands, immediately wash the affected areas with water for at least 15 minutes; if any symptoms are present after washing, get medical care. Note: For products with mercury-containing fluorescent lamps (for example, non-LED), the fluorescent lamp in the liquid crystal display (LCD) contains mercury; dispose of according to local, state, or federal laws. Using headphones or earphones Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss. Adjustment of the equalizer to maximum increases the earphone and headphone output voltage and the sound pressure level. Therefore, to protect your hearing, adjust the equalizer to an appropriate level. Excessive use of headphones or earphones for a long period of time at high volume can be dangerous if the output of the headphone or earphone connectors do not comply with specifications of EN 50332-2. The headphone output connector of your computer complies with EN 50332-2 Sub clause 7. This specification limits the computers maximum wide band true RMS output voltage to 150 mV. To help protect against hearing loss, ensure that the headphones or earphones you use also comply with EN 50332-2 (Clause 7 limits) for a wide band characteristic voltage of 75 mV. Using headphones that do not comply with EN 50332-

2 can be dangerous due to excessive sound pressure levels. If your Lenovo computer came with headphones or earphones in the package, as a set, the combination of the headphones or earphones and the computer already complies with the specifications of EN 50332-1. If different headphones or earphones are used, ensure that they comply with EN 50332-1 (Clause 6.5 Limitation Values). Using headphones that do not comply with EN 50332-1 can be dangerous due to excessive sound pressure levels. Appendix A. Important safety information 43 Choking hazard notice CHOKING HAZARD Product contains small parts. Keep away from children under three years. Plastic bag notice DANGER Plastic bags can be dangerous. Keep plastic bags away from babies and children to avoid danger of suffocation. Glass parts notice CAUTION:

Some parts of your product may be made of glass. This glass could break if the product is dropped on a hard surface or receives a substantial impact. If glass breaks, do not touch or attempt to remove it. Stop using your product until the glass is replaced by trained service personnel. Static electricity prevention Static electricity, although harmless to you, can seriously damage computer components and options. Improper handling of static-sensitive parts can damage the part. When you unpack an option or CRU, do not open the static-protective package containing the part until the instructions direct you to install it. When you handle options or CRUs, or perform any work inside the computer, take the following precautions to avoid static-electricity damage:

Limit your movement. Movement can cause static electricity to build up around you. Always handle components carefully. Handle adapters, memory modules, and other circuit boards by the edges. Never touch exposed circuitry. Prevent others from touching components. When you install a static-sensitive option or CRU, touch the static-protective package containing the part to a metal expansion-slot cover or other unpainted metal surface on the computer for at least two seconds. This reduces static electricity in the package and your body. When possible, remove the static-sensitive part from the static-protective packaging and install the part without setting it down. When this is not possible, place the static-protective packaging on a smooth, level surface and place the part on it. Do not place the part on the computer cover or other metal surface. 44 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide Operating environment Maximum altitude (without pressurization) 3048 m (10 000 ft) Temperature At altitudes up to 2438 m (8000 ft) Operating: 5C to 35C (41F to 95F) Storage: 5C to 43C (41F to 109F) At altitudes above 2438 m (8000 ft) Maximum temperature when operating under the unpressurized condition: 31.3C (88F) Note: When you charge the battery, its temperature must be no lower than 10C (50F). Relative humidity Operating: 8% to 95% at wet-bulb temperature 23C (73F) Storage: 5% to 95% at wet-bulb temperature 27C (81F) Cleaning and maintenance With appropriate care and maintenance your computer will serve you reliably. The following topics offer information to help you keep your computer in top working order. Basic maintenance tips Here are some basic points about keeping your computer functioning properly:

If possible, place your computer in a well-ventilated and dry area without direct exposure to sunshine. Store packing materials safely out of the reach of children to prevent the risk of suffocation from plastic bags. Keep your computer away from magnets, activated cellular phones, electrical appliances, or speakers

(more than 13 cm or 5 inches). Avoid subjecting your computer to extreme temperatures (below 5C/41F or above 35C/95F). Avoid placing any objects (including paper) between the display and the keyboard or the palm rest. Computer display might be designed to be opened and used at a certain angle. Do not open the display with force. Otherwise, the computer hinge might get damaged. Do not turn your computer over when the ac power adapter is plugged in, otherwise, it could break the adapter plug. Before moving your computer, be sure to remove any media, turn off attached devices, and disconnect cords and cables. When picking up your open computer, hold it by the bottom. Do not pick up or hold your computer by the display. Only an authorized Lenovo repair technician should disassemble and repair your computer. Do not modify or tape the latches to keep the display open or closed. Avoid directly exposing your computer and peripherals to the air from an appliance that can produce negative ions. Wherever possible, ground your computer to facilitate safe electrostatic discharge. Appendix A. Important safety information 45 Cleaning your computer It is a good practice to clean your computer periodically to protect the surfaces and ensure trouble-free operation. Cleaning the computer cover: Wipe it with a lint-free cloth dampened in mild soap and water. Avoid applying liquids directly to the cover. Cleaning the keyboard: Wipe the keys one by one with a lint-free cloth dampened in mild soap and water. If you wipe several keys at a time, the cloth might hook onto an adjacent key and possibly damage it. Avoid spraying cleaner directly onto the keyboard. To remove any crumbs or dust from beneath the keys, you can use a camera blower with a brush or use cool air from a hair dryer. Cleaning the computer screen: Scratches, oil, dust, chemicals, and ultraviolet light can affect the performance of your computer screen. Use a dry, soft lint-free cloth to wipe the screen gently. If you see a scratchlike mark on your screen, it might be a stain. Wipe or dust the stain gently with a soft, dry cloth. If the stain remains, moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water or eyeglass cleaner, but do not apply liquids directly to your computer screen. Ensure that the computer screen is dry before closing it. 46 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide Appendix B. Accessibility and ergonomic information This chapter provides information about accessibility and ergonomics. Accessibility information Lenovo is committed to providing users who have hearing, vision, and mobility limitations with greater access to information and technology. This section provides information about the ways these users can get the most out of their computer experience. You also can get the most up-to-date accessibility information from the following Web site:

https://www.lenovo.com/accessibility Keyboard shortcuts The following list contains keyboard shortcuts that can help make your computer easier to use. Note: Depending on your keyboard, some of the following keyboard shortcuts might not be available. Windows logo key + U: Open Ease of Access Center Right Shift for eight seconds: Turn on or turn off Filter Keys Shift five times: Turn on or turn off Sticky Keys Left Alt+Left Shift+PrtSn: Turn on or turn off High Contrast For more information, go to https://windows.microsoft.com/, and then search using any of the following keywords: keyboard shortcuts, key combinations, shortcut keys. Ease of Access Center Ease of Access Center on the Windows operating system enables you to configure your computers to suit their physical and cognitive needs. To access Ease of Access Center:

1. Go to Control Panel and view by Category. 2. Click Ease of Access Ease of Access Center. 3. Choose the appropriate tool by following the on-screen instructions. Ease of Access Center mainly includes the following tools:

Magnifier Magnifier is a useful utility that enlarges the entire screen or part of the screen so that you can see the items better. Narrator Narrator is a screen reader that reads what is displayed on the screen aloud and describes events such as error messages. On-Screen Keyboard If you prefer to type or enter data into your computer using a mouse, joystick, or other pointing device instead of a physical keyboard, you can use On-Screen Keyboard. On-Screen Keyboard displays a visual keyboard with all the standard keys. You can select keys using the mouse or another pointing device, or you can tap to select the keys if your computer supports multi-touch screen. Copyright Lenovo 2018 47 High Contrast High Contrast is a feature that heightens the color contrast of some text and images on your screen. As a result, those items are more distinct and easier to identify. Personalized keyboard Adjust keyboard settings to make your keyboard easier to use. For example, you can use your keyboard to control the pointer and make the keyboard easier to type certain key combinations. Personalized mouse Adjust mouse settings to make your mouse easier to use. For example, you can change the pointer appearance and make your mouse easier to manage windows. Speech Recognition Speech Recognition enables you to control your computer by voice. You can use verbal instructions to control the keyboard and mouse. With verbal instructions, you can start programs, open menus, click objects on the screen, dictate text into documents, and write and send e-mails. To use Speech Recognition:

1. Go to Control Panel and view by Category. 2. Click Ease of Access Speech Recognition. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Screen-reader technologies Screen-reader technologies are primarily focused on software program interfaces, help systems, and various online documents. For additional information about screen readers, see the following:

Using PDFs with screen readers:

https://www.adobe.com/accessibility.html?promoid=DJGVE Using the JAWS screen reader:

https://www.freedomscientific.com/Products/Blindness/JAWS Using the NVDA screen reader:

https://www.nvaccess.org/

Screen resolution You can make the text and images on your screen easier to read by adjusting the screen resolution of your computer. To adjust the screen resolution:

1. Right-click a blank area on the desktop and then click Display settings Display. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions. Note: Setting a resolution too low might prevent some items from fitting on the screen. Customizable item size You can make the items on your screen easier to read by changing the item size. To change the item size temporarily, use the Magnifier tool in Ease of Access Center. To change the item size permanently:

Change the size of all the items on your screen. 48 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide 1. Right-click a blank area on the desktop and then click Display settings Display. 2. Change the item size by following the on-screen instructions. For some applications, your configuration might not take effect until you sign out and then sign in again. Change the size of the items on a Web page. Press and hold Ctrl, and then press the plus-sign key (+) to enlarge or the minus-sign key () to reduce the text size. Change the size of the items on the desktop or a window. Note: This function might not work on some windows. If your mouse has a wheel, press and hold Ctrl, and then scroll the wheel to change the item size. Industry-standard connectors Your computer provides industry-standard connectors that enable you to connect assistive devices. Documentation in accessible formats Lenovo provides electronic documentation in accessible formats, such as properly tagged PDF files or HyperText Markup Language (HTML) files. Lenovo electronic documentation is developed to ensure that visually impaired users can read the documentation through a screen reader. Each image in the documentation also includes adequate alternative text so that visually impaired users can understand the image when they use a screen reader. Ergonomic information Good ergonomic practice is important to get the most from your personal computer and to avoid discomfort. Arrange your workplace and the equipment you use to suit your individual needs and the kind of work that you perform. In addition, use healthy work habits to maximize your performance and comfort when using your computer. Working in the virtual office might mean adapting to frequent changes in your environment. Adapting to the surrounding light sources, active seating, and the placement of your computer hardware, can help you improve your performance and achieve greater comfort. This example shows someone in a conventional setting. Even when not in such a setting, you can follow many of these tips. Develop good habits, and they will serve you well. General posture: Make minor modifications in your working posture to deter the onset of discomfort caused by long periods of working in the same position. Frequent short breaks from your work also help to prevent minor discomfort associated with your working posture. Display: Position the display to maintain a comfortable viewing distance of 510 mm to 760 mm (20 inches to 30 inches). Avoid glare or reflections on the display from overhead lighting or outside sources of light. Keep Appendix B. Accessibility and ergonomic information 49 the display screen clean and set the brightness to levels that enable you to see the screen clearly. Press the brightness control keys to adjust display brightness. Head position: Keep your head and neck in a comfortable and neutral (vertical, or upright) position. Chair: Use a chair that gives you good back support and seat height adjustment. Use chair adjustments to best suit your comfort posture. Arm and hand position: If available, use chair arm rests or an area on your working surface to provide weight support for your arms. Keep your forearms, wrists, and hands in a relaxed and neutral (horizontal) position. Type with a soft touch without pounding the keys. Leg position: Keep your thighs parallel to the floor and your feet flat on the floor or on a footrest. What if you are traveling?

It might not be possible to observe the best ergonomic practices when you are using your computer while on the move or in a casual setting. Regardless of the setting, try to observe as many of the tips as possible. Sitting properly and using adequate lighting, for example, helps you maintain desirable levels of comfort and performance. If your work area is not in an office setting, ensure to take special note of employing active sitting and taking work breaks. Many product solutions are available to help you modify and expand your computer to best suit your needs. You can find some of these options at https://www.lenovo.com/accessories. Explore your options for docking solutions and external products that provide the adjustability and features that you want. Questions about vision?

The visual display screens of notebook computers are designed to meet the highest standards. These visual display screens provide you with clear, crisp images and large, bright displays that are easy to see, yet easy on the eyes. Any concentrated and sustained visual activity can be tiring. If you have questions on eye fatigue or visual discomfort, consult a vision-care specialist for advice. 50 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide Appendix C. Compliance information This chapter provides regulatory, environmental, RoHS, and ENERGY STAR information about Lenovo products. Radio frequency compliance statements Computer models equipped with wireless communications comply with the radio frequency and safety standards of any country or region in which it has been approved for wireless use. Besides this document, ensure that you read the Regulatory Notice for your country or region before using the wireless devices contained in your computer. European Union compliance with the Radio Equipment Directive This product is in conformity with all the requirements and essential norms that apply to EU Council Radio Equipment Directive 2014/53/EU on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to radio equipment. The full text of the system EU declaration of conformity and the EU wireless module declarations are available at the following Internet addresses:

For notebook computers: https://www.lenovo.com/us/en/social_responsibility/EU_DoC_notebooks For tablet computers: https://www.lenovo.com/us/en/social_responsibility/EU_DoC_notebooks For wireless peripheral devices: https://www.lenovo.com/us/en/social_responsibility/EU_DoC_wireless_ options Lenovo cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification of the product, including the installation of option cards from other manufacturers. This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B equipment according to European Standards harmonized in the Directives in compliance. The limits for Class B equipment were derived for typical residential environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed communication devices. Brazil Este equipamento no tem direito proteo contra interferncia prejudicial e no pode causar interferncia em sistemas devidamente autorizados. This equipment is not protected against harmful interference and may not cause interference with duly authorized systems. Mexico Advertencia: En Mexico la operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Copyright Lenovo 2018 51 Singapore Korea

( 24002483.5 , 57255825 ) SAR

. SAR . SAR

. 20mm

. Environmental information of countries and regions This section provides environmental, recycling, and RoHS information about Lenovo products. Recycling and environmental information Lenovo encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment to responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed. Lenovo offers a variety of programs and services to assist equipment owners in recycling their IT products. For information about recycling Lenovo products, go to:

https://www.lenovo.com/recycling The latest environmental information about our products is available at:

https://www.lenovo.com/ecodeclaration Important WEEE information The WEEE marking on Lenovo products applies to countries with WEEE and e-waste regulations (for example, the European WEEE Directive, India E-Waste Management Rules). Appliances are labeled in accordance with local regulations concerning waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE). These regulations determine the framework for the return and recycling of used appliances as applicable within 52 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide each geography. This label is applied to various products to indicate that the product is not to be thrown away, but rather put in the established collection systems for reclaiming these end of life products. Users of electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) with the WEEE marking must not dispose of end of life EEE as unsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to them for the return, recycle, and recovery of WEEE and to minimize any potential effects of EEE on the environment and human health due to the presence of hazardous substances. Lenovo electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) may contain parts and components, which at end-of-life might qualify as hazardous waste. EEE and waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE) can be delivered free of charge to the place of sale or any distributor that sells electrical and electronic equipment of the same nature and function as the used EEE or WEEE. For additional WEEE information, go to:

https://www.lenovo.com/recycling WEEE information for Hungary Lenovo, as a producer, bears the cost incurred in connection with the fulfillment of Lenovos obligations under Hungary Law No. 197/2014 (VIII.1.) subsections (1)-(5) of section 12. Japan recycling statements Collecting and recycling a disused Lenovo computer or monitor If you are a company employee and need to dispose of a Lenovo computer or monitor that is the property of the company, you must do so in accordance with the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources. Computers and monitors are categorized as industrial waste and should be properly disposed of by an industrial waste disposal contractor certified by a local government. In accordance with the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources, Lenovo Japan provides, through its PC Collecting and Recycling Services, for the collecting, reuse, and recycling of disused computers and monitors. For details, visit the Lenovo Web site at:

https://www.lenovo.com/recycling/japan Pursuant to the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources, the collecting and recycling of home-

used computers and monitors by the manufacturer was begun on October 1, 2003. This service is provided free of charge for home-used computers sold after October 1, 2003. For details, go to:

https://www.lenovo.com/recycling/japan Disposing of Lenovo computer components Some Lenovo computer products sold in Japan may have components that contain heavy metals or other environmental sensitive substances. To properly dispose of disused components, such as a printed circuit board or drive, use the methods described above for collecting and recycling a disused computer or monitor. Disposing of disused lithium batteries from Lenovo computers A button-shaped lithium battery is installed inside your Lenovo computer to provide power to the computer clock while the computer is off or disconnected from the main power source. If you need to replace it with a new one, contact your place of purchase or contact Lenovo for service. If you need to dispose of a disused lithium battery, insulate it with vinyl tape, contact your place of purchase or an industrial-waste-disposal operator, and follow their instructions. Disposal of a lithium battery must comply with local ordinances and regulations. Appendix C. Compliance information 53 Disposing of a disused battery from Lenovo notebook computers Your Lenovo notebook computer has a lithium ion battery or a nickel metal hydride battery. If you are a company employee who uses a Lenovo notebook computer and need to dispose of a battery, contact the proper person in Lenovo sales, service, or marketing, and follow that person's instructions. You also can refer to the instructions at:

https://www.lenovo.com/jp/ja/environment/recycle/battery/

If you use a Lenovo notebook computer at home and need to dispose of a battery, you must comply with local ordinances and regulations. You also can refer to the instructions at:

https://www.lenovo.com/jp/ja/environment/recycle/battery/

Recycling information for Brazil Declaraes de Reciclagem no Brasil Descarte de um Produto Lenovo Fora de Uso Equipamentos eltricos e eletrnicos no devem ser descartados em lixo comum, mas enviados pontos de coleta, autorizados pelo fabricante do produto para que sejam encaminhados e processados por empresas especializadas no manuseio de resduos industriais, devidamente certificadas pelos orgos ambientais, de acordo com a legislao local. A Lenovo possui um canal especfico para auxili-lo no descarte desses produtos. Caso voc possua um produto Lenovo em situao de descarte, ligue para o nosso SAC ou encaminhe um e-mail para:

reciclar@lenovo.com, informando o modelo, nmero de srie e cidade, a fim de enviarmos as instrues para o correto descarte do seu produto Lenovo. Battery recycling information for the European Union Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU). Batteries or packaging for batteries are labeled in accordance with European Directive 2006/66/EC concerning batteries and accumulators and waste batteries and accumulators. The Directive determines the framework for the return and recycling of used batteries and accumulators as applicable throughout the European Union. This label is applied to various batteries to indicate that the battery is not to be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive. In accordance with the European Directive 2006/66/EC, batteries and accumulators are labeled to indicate that they are to be collected separately and recycled at end of life. The label on the battery may also include a chemical symbol for the metal concerned in the battery (Pb for lead, Hg for mercury, and Cd for cadmium). Users of batteries and accumulators must not dispose of batteries and accumulators as unsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers for the return, recycling, and treatment of batteries and accumulators. Customer participation is important to minimize any potential effects of batteries 54 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide and accumulators on the environment and human health due to the potential presence of hazardous substances. Before placing electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) in the waste collection stream or in waste collection facilities, the end user of equipment containing batteries and/or accumulators must remove those batteries and accumulators for separate collection. Disposing of lithium batteries and battery packs from Lenovo products A coin-cell type lithium battery might be installed inside your Lenovo product. You can find details about the battery in the product documentation. If the battery needs to be replaced, contact your place of purchase or contact Lenovo for service. If you need to dispose of a lithium battery, insulate it with vinyl tape, contact your place of purchase or a waste-disposal operator, and follow their instructions. Disposing of battery packs from Lenovo products Your Lenovo device might contain a lithium-ion battery pack or a nickel metal hydride battery pack. You can find details on the battery pack in the product documentation. If you need to dispose of a battery pack, insulate it with vinyl tape, contact Lenovo sales, service, or your place of purchase, or a waste-disposal operator, and follow their instructions. You also can refer to the instructions provided in the user guide for your product. For proper collection and treatment, go to:

https://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment Recycling information for China Battery recycling information for Taiwan Battery recycling information for the United States and Canada Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive of countries and regions The latest environmental information about Lenovo products is available at:

Appendix C. Compliance information 55 https://www.lenovo.com/ecodeclaration European Union RoHS This Lenovo product, with included parts (cables, cords, and so on) meets the requirements of Directive 2011/65/EU on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment ("RoHS recast" or "RoHS 2"). For more information about Lenovo worldwide compliance on RoHS, go to:

https://www.lenovo.com/rohs-communication Turkish RoHS The Lenovo product meets the requirements of the Republic of Turkey Directive on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE). Ukraine RoHS India RoHS RoHS compliant as per E-Waste (Management) Rules. China RoHS The information in the following table is applicable to products manufactured on or after January 1, 2015 for sale in the Peoples Republic of China. 56 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide Appendix C. Compliance information 57 Taiwan RoHS Electromagnetic emission notices Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Suppliers Declaration of Conformity The following information refers to Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX-14IWL, IdeaPad FLEX-15IWL, and IdeaPad FLEX-

14API, machine type(s): 81SQ, 81SR and 81SS. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful 58 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Responsible Party:

Lenovo (United States) Incorporated 7001 Development Drive Morrisville, NC 27560 Email: FCC@lenovo.com FCC ID and IC Certification information The following illustration shows where to find the FCC ID and IC Certification information. Industry Canada compliance statement CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B) European Union conformity EU Contact: Lenovo (Slovakia), Landererova 12, 811 09 Bratislava, Slovakia Appendix C. Compliance information 59 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX-14APILenovo IdeaPad FLEX-14API Model Name: 81SS INPUT: 20V 3.25A MO: WWWWWWXXXX Contains Transmitter Module: Mfg Date: XXXXXX Factory ID: PRC4 Manufactured for Lenovo PC HK Limited Made in China MTM: WWWWWWXXXX FCC ID: XXXXXXXXXX S/N: WWWWWWXX IC: WWWWW-XXXXXX Compliance with the EMC Directive This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 2014/30/EU on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B equipment according to European Standards harmonized in the Directives in compliance. The Class B requirements for equipment are intended to offer adequate protection to broadcast services within residential environments. German Class B compliance statement Hinweis zur Einhaltung der Klasse B zur elektromagnetischen Vertrglichkeit Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie zur elektromagnetischen Vertrglichkeit Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit in den EU-

Mitgliedsstaaten und hlt die Grenzwerte der Klasse B der Norm gem Richtlinie. Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Gerte wie in den Handbchern beschrieben zu installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren drfen auch nur von der Lenovo empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. Lenovo bernimmt keine Verantwortung fr die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der Lenovo verndert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne Empfehlung der Lenovo gesteckt/eingebaut werden. Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln, EMVG vom 20. Juli 2007 (frher Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten), bzw. der EU Richtlinie 2014/30/EU, der EU Richtlinie 2014/53/EU Artikel 3.1b), fr Gerte der Klasse B. Dieses Gert ist berechtigt, in bereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG-Konformittszeichen -

CE - zu fhren. Verantwortlich fr die Konformittserklrung nach Paragraf 5 des EMVG ist die Lenovo

(Deutschland) GmbH, Meitnerstr. 9, D-70563 Stuttgart. Japan VCCI Class B compliance statement Japan compliance statement for products which connect to the power mains with rated current less than or equal to 20 A per phase Japan notice for ac power cord The ac power cord shipped with your product can be used only for this specific product. Do not use the ac power cord for other devices. 60 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide Other compliance information This section provides other compliance information about Lenovo products. TCO certification To obtain the TCO certification information for your computer, go to:

https://www.lenovo.com/tco-cert Export classification notice This product is subject to the United States Export Administration Regulations (EAR) and has an Export Classification Control Number (ECCN) of 5A992.c. It can be re-exported except to any of the embargoed countries in the EAR E1 country list. Lenovo product service information for Taiwan Taiwan precautionary vision statement 3010 221 Eurasian compliance mark Brazil audio notice Ouvir sons com mais de 85 decibis por longos perodos pode provocar danos ao sistema auditivo. ENERGY STAR model information ENERGY STAR is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy aimed at saving money and protecting the environment through energy efficient products and practices. Appendix C. Compliance information 61 Lenovo is proud to offer our customers products with an ENERGY STAR compliant designation. Machine type(s) 81SQ, 81SR and 81SS have been designed and tested to conform to the ENERGY STAR program requirement for computers at the time of manufacture. For more information about Lenovo ENERGY STAR certified products, go to:

https://www.lenovo.com/us/en/social_responsibility/energy/

By using ENERGY STAR compliant products and taking advantage of the power management features of your computer, you reduce the consumption of electricity. Reduced electrical consumption contributes to potential financial savings, a cleaner environment, and the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions. For more information about ENERGY STAR, go to:

https://www.energystar.gov Lenovo encourages you to make efficient use of energy an integral part of your day-to-day operations. To help in this endeavor, Lenovo has preset a default power plan. To change the power plan, see Set the power plan on page 18. 62 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide Appendix D. Notices and trademarks Notices Lenovo may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in all countries. Consult your local Lenovo representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to a Lenovo product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that Lenovo product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any Lenovo intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the user's responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any other product, program, or service. Lenovo may have patents or pending patent programs covering subject matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:

Lenovo (United States), Inc. 1009 Think Place - Building One Morrisville, NC 27560 U.S.A. Attention: Lenovo Director of Licensing LENOVO PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you. Changes are made periodically to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. To provide better service, Lenovo reserves the right to improve and/or modify the products and software programs described in the manuals included with your computer, and the content of the manual, at any time without additional notice. The software interface and function and hardware configuration described in the manuals included with your computer might not match exactly the actual configuration of the computer that you purchase. For the configuration of the product, refer to the related contract (if any) or product packing list, or consult the distributor for the product sales. Lenovo may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. The products described in this document are not intended for use in implantation or other life support applications where malfunction may result in injury or death to persons. The information contained in this document does not affect or change Lenovo product specifications or warranties. Nothing in this document shall operate as an express or implied license or indemnity under the intellectual property rights of Lenovo or third parties. All information contained in this document was obtained in specific environments and is presented as an illustration. The result obtained in other operating environments may vary. Lenovo may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. Any references in this publication to non-Lenovo Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this Lenovo product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk. Copyright Lenovo 2018 63 Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the result obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly. Some measurements may have been made on development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements may have been estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their specific environment. This document is copyrighted by Lenovo and is not covered by any open source license, including any Linux agreement(s) which may accompany software included with this product. Lenovo may update this document at any time without notice. For the latest information or any questions or comments, contact or visit the Lenovo Web site:

https://support.lenovo.com Trademarks LENOVO and the LENOVO logo are trademarks of Lenovo. Microsoft, Windows, Direct3D, and Cortana are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. Wi-Fi and Miracast are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance. USB-C is a trademark of USB Implementers Forum. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2018 Lenovo. 64 Lenovo IdeaPad FLEX SeriesUser Guide

 

 

Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules First edition (January 2018) Copyright Lenovo 2018. Contents

. . . . . . . . . Chapter 1. Notice for users in USA and Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

. 1

. . Approved wireless devices . . 1 Preinstalled wireless LAN module . . Simultaneous use of RF transmitters. . 2

. 2

. . Canada Industry Canada (IC)

. 2 Approved wireless devices. . Preinstalled wireless LAN module . 3 Low power license-exempt radiocommunication devices (RSS-210, RSS-

247)

. . Exposure of humans to RF fields (RSS-102) . . . . . Priphriques sans fil homologus

. Module rseau local sans fil prinstall . Appareils de radio-communication basse tension sans licence d'utilisation (CNR-210, CNR-247) . . Conformit des appareils de radiocommunication aux limites d'exposition humaine aux radiofrquences (CNR-102) . . . Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

. . Declaration of Conformity . Usage environment and your health . . 4

. 5

. 5

. 5

. 6 Electronic emission notices . . Canada Industrie Canada (IC)

. 3

. 3

. 4

. 4

. 4

. . . . . . . . RF exposure information Chapter 2. Europe EU Declaration of Conformity (wireless module). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 English . . 7

. 7

. 8

. 8

. 8

. 8

. 8

. Informacije o izlaganju radijskoj frekvenciji

. . . . . . . . . Bulgarian . Croatian. . Czech . . . . . . . . . . . Informace o vystaven radiofrekvennmu zen . Danish . . . . Oplysninger om radioblgeeksponering . . . . . . . . . Dutch . . . . . 9

. 9

. 9

. 9 Estonian. . Informatie over blootstelling aan radiogolven. . . Raadiosagedusliku kiirguse teave . . . . . . . . Finnish . . Tietoja radiotaajuiselle steilylle altistumisesta . . . . . . . French . . . . . . 10

. 10

. 10

. 10

. . . 10

. 11

. 11

. 11

. 11

. 11

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Italian . Greek. Polish. . . German . Latvian . Hungarian . Lithuanian . Norwegian . . . . . Informacija apie radijo dani poveik

. Informasjon om RF-eksponering . Informationen zur HF-Exposition . Informazioni sull'esposizione RF . Informations sur l'exposition aux RF . . . . . .

(RF). . . RF-kitettsgre vonatkoz informcik . . . . Informcija par pakauanu RF starojumam . . . Informaes sobre exposio a RF . . . Informacje o ekspozycji na czstotliwoci

. radiowe . . Portuguese . . Informaii privind expunerea la frecvenele

. radio . Slovenian . Informacije o izpostavljenosti RF-sevanju . Informcie o vystaven rdiofrekvennmu iareniu . . . Information om exponering fr radiovgor. Informacin de exposicin a RF. RF maruz kalma bilgileri . . . . . Romanian . Slovakian . Spanish . Swedish. Turkish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

. 12

. 12

. 12

. 13

. 13

. 13

. 13

. 13

. 14

. 14

. 14

. 14

. 14

. 15

. 15

. 15

. 15

. 15

. 16

. 16

. 16

. 16

. 16

. 17

. 17

. 17

. . . Chapter 3. Regulatory notices for other countries. . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Notice for users in Argentina (Nota para uso en

. Argentina) . Modelo: Intel 3165NGW

. Modelo: Intel 7265NGW Modelo: Intel 8265NGW

. Modelo: Qualcomm QCNFA344A . Modelo: Qualcomm QCNFA364

. Modelo: Qualcomm QCNFA435

. Modelo: Realtek RTL8821CE . Modelo: Realtek RTL8822BE . 19

. 19

. 19

. 19

. 19

. 19

. 19

. 19

. 20

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copyright Lenovo 2018 i

. . . . . . Modelo: Intel 9260NGW . . Modelo: Intel 9560NGW . . Modelo: Intel 9462NGW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . For model: 3165NGW. . For model: 7265NGW. For model: 8265NGW. . For model: QCNFA344A. . For model: QCNFA364 . . For model: QCNFA435 . . For model: RTL8821CE . . For model: RTL8822BE . . . For model: 9260NGW. . For model: 9560NGW. . For model: 9462NGW. . Notice for users in India. . Modelo: 3165NGW

. . Modelo: 7265NGW

. . Modelo: 8265NGW

. Modelo: QCNFA344A

. . . Modelo: QCNFA364 . . Modelo: QCNFA435 . . Modelo: RTL8821CE . Modelo: RTL8822BE . . . Modelo: 9260NGW

. . Modelo: 9560NGW Modelo: 9462NGW

. . . . . Notice for users in Brazil (Aviso para usuarios no Brasil)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notice for users in Mexico (Nota para uso en

. Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notice for users in Morocco . . Notice for users in Nigeria . . Modelo: 3165NGW

. Modelo: 7265NGW

. Modelo: 8265NGW

. Modelo: QCNFA344A Modelo: QCNFA364 . Modelo: QCNFA435 . Modelo: RTL8821CE . Modelo: RTL8822BE . Modelo: 9260NGW Modelo: 9560NGW

. Modelo: 9462NGW

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notice for users in Saudi Arabia . . . . For model: 3165NGW. For model: 7265NGW. For model: 8265NGW. For model: QCNFA344A. For model: QCNFA364 . For model: QCNFA435 . For model: RTL8821CE . For model: RTL8822BE . For model: 9260NGW. For model: 9560NGW. For model: 9462NGW. Notice for users in Taiwan . . . For model: 3165NGW. . For model: 7265NGW. For model: 8265NGW. . For model: Qualcomm QCNFA344A . . For model: Qualcomm QCNFA364 . . For model: Qualcomm QCNFA435 . . . For model: RTL8821CE . For model: RTL8822BE . . . For model: 9260NGW. . For model: 9560NGW. . For model: 9462NGW. Notice for users in Serbia . . . Notice for users in South Africa

. . . . . . . . . . . . . NCC

. . Notice for users in the UAE

. For model: 3165NGW. For model: 7265NGW. For model: 8265NGW. For model: QCNFA344A. For model: QCNFA364 . For model: QCNFA435 . For model: RTL8821CE . For model: RTL8822BE . For model: 9260NGW. For model: 9560NGW. For model: 9462NGW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trademarks . . . 26

. 26

. 27

. 28

. 29

. 30

. 31

. 32

. 33

. 34

. 35

. 36

. 37

. 37

. 37

. 37

. 37

. 37

. 37

. 37

. 38

. 38

. 38

. 38

. 38

. 38

. 38

. 39

. 39

. 39

. 39

. 39

. 39

. 39

. 40

. 40

. 40

. 40

. 40

. . xli

. 20

. 20

. 20

. 20

. 20

. 20

. 21

. 21

. 21

. 21

. 21

. 21

. 22

. 22

. 22

. 22

. 22

. 22

. 22

. 22

. 22

. 23

. 23

. 23

. 23

. 23

. 23

. 23

. 23

. 23

. 23

. 23

. 24

. 24

. 24

. 24

. 24

. 24

. 24

. 24

. 25 ii Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules About this manual This publication contains regulatory information for wireless modules that may be included by Lenovo computers. Different wireless modules are supported by different computer products. The table below lists product names for Lenovo computers in rows. All supported wireless modules by a product are marked with a circle. Product Name QCNFA 344A QCNFA 435 QCNFA 364 7265 NGW 8265 NGW 3165 NGW RTL 8821CE RTL 8822BE 9260 NGW 9560 NGW 9462 NGW Lenovo 500e Chromebook Lenovo 100e Yoga 530-

14IKB Yoga 530-

15IKB ideapad 330-

15ICH ideapad 330-

17ICH Legion Y530-

15ICH ideapad FLEX 6-14IKB ideapad FLEX 6-14ARR Lenovo V330-

14ARR ideapad 530s-

14IKB ideapad 530s-

15IKB Lenovo V130-

15IKB Lenovo V130-

15IGM Lenovo V130-

14IGM ideapad 330S-

15IKB GTX1050 Product Name QCNFA 344A QCNFA 435 QCNFA 364 7265 NGW 8265 NGW 3165 NGW RTL 8821CE RTL 8822BE 9260 NGW 9560 NGW 9462 NGW ideapad 530s-

14ARR ideapad 330-

14IGM ideapad 330-

15IGM ideapad 330-

15ICN ideapad 330-

15ARR ideapadd 330-

15ARR Touch Lenovo B330-

15IGM Lenovo S130-

11IGM Lenovo S130-

14IGM Lenovo 130S-

11IGM Lenovo 130S-

14IGM Yoga 530-

14ARR Lenovo B330-

15IKBR Yoga C930-

13IKB Yoga C930-

13IKB Glass Legion Y7000P Yoga S730-

13IWL ideapad 730S-

13IWL Legion Y730-

15ICH Product Name QCNFA 344A QCNFA 435 QCNFA 364 7265 NGW 8265 NGW 3165 NGW RTL 8821CE RTL 8822BE 9260 NGW 9560 NGW 9462 NGW Legion Y730-

15ICHg Legion Y730-

17ICH Legion Y730-

17ICHg Yoga 730-

13IWL Yoga 730-

15IWL Legion Y530-

15ICH-1060 Legion Y7000P-1060 Lenovo S50 Scuderia Ferrari Edition ideapad S530-

13IWL Lenovo 100e Windows 2nd Gen Lenovo 300e Windows 2nd Gen Legion Y740-

15ICHg Legion Y740-

17ICHg Lenovo 100e Chromebook 2nd Gen Lenovo 300e Chromebook 2nd Gen Lenovo 500e Chromebook 2nd Gen IdeaPad S340-

14IWL Product Name QCNFA 344A QCNFA 435 QCNFA 364 7265 NGW 8265 NGW 3165 NGW RTL 8821CE RTL 8822BE 9260 NGW 9560 NGW 9462 NGW IdeaPad S340-

15IWL IdeaPad S340-

15IWL Touch IdeaPad S340-

14API IdeaPad S340-

15API IdeaPad S340-

15API Touch IdeaPad S540-

14IWL IdeaPad S540-

14API IdeaPad C340-14IWL IdeaPad C340-15IWL IdeaPad C340-14IAPI IdeaPad FLEX-

14API IdeaPad FLEX-

14IWL IdeaPad FLEX-

15IWL IdeaPad S540-

15IWL Chapter 1. Notice for users in USA and Canada Read this document before using your computer. This computer complies with the radio frequency and safety standards of any country or region in which it has been approved for wireless use. Install and use your computer according to the following instructions. The latest Regulatory Notice manual is available on the Lenovo Web site. To download the manual, go to http://www.lenovo.com/support and then follow the on-screen instructions. Lisez ce document avant d'utiliser votre ordinateur. Cet ordinateur est conforme aux normes de frquence radiolectrique et de scurit du pays ou de la rgion o son utilisation sans fil est autorise. Installez et utilisez votre ordinateur en vous conformant aux instructions ci-dessous. La dernire version du manuel Regulatory Notice est disponible sur le site Web de Lenovo. Pour tlcharger le document, rendez-vous sur http://www.lenovo.com/support et suivez les instructions l'cran. Approved wireless devices This system contains the following wireless devices and underwent the certification process of FCC CFR 47 Part 2 section 1093, Part 15 Subpart C and Subpart E, Part 27, Part 22 Subpart H, Part 24 Subpart E, and Part 90 under each respective FCC ID below. The FCC ID is indicated on the bottom cover of your system. Preinstalled wireless LAN modules with Bluetooth function FCC ID: PD97265NGU (Model: 7265NGW) FCC ID: PD93165NGU (Model: 3165NGW) FCC ID: PD98265NG (Model: 8265NGW ) FCC ID: PPD-QCNFA435 (Model: QCNFA435) FCC ID: PPD-QCNFA364AH (Model: QCNFA364) FCC ID: PPD-QCNFA344AH (Model: QCNFA344A) FCC ID: TX2-RTL8821CE (Model: RTL8821CE) FCC ID: TX2-RTL8822BE (Model: RTL8822BE) FCC ID: PD99260NG (Model: 9260NGW) FCC ID: PD99560NG (Model: 9560NGW) FCC ID: PD99462NG (Model: 9462NGW) Notes:

The wireless LAN, the Bluetooth, and the WiGig features operate at different frequencies exclusively, and transmit radio frequencies simultaneously. The following wireless LAN modules marketed in the USA and Canada do not support or function in the extended channels (12ch, 13ch):

Model: QCNFA435 Preinstalled wireless LAN module The wireless LAN module in your computer is preinstalled by Lenovo, and you are prohibited to replace with other wireless adapter or remove it. If the device requires replacement due to some problem during warranty, it must be serviced by a Lenovo authorized servicer. Copyright Lenovo 2018 1 1. FCC ID location The FCC ID for the preinstalled wireless LAN module is shown on the enclosure of your computer. For the location of the FCC ID indicator and the slot, see FCC ID and IC Certification number label in User Guide. 2. FCC RF exposure compliance The radiated output power of the wireless LAN module authorized to use for your computer is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, it shall be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized as follows:

CAUTION:

The total radiated energy from the antennas connected to the installed wireless LAN module, conforms to the FCC limit of the SAR (Specific Absorption Rate) requirement, regarding 47 CFR Part 2 section 1093, when the computer was tested in either conventional notebook or tablet computer orientations. The transmission antennas for the wireless LAN module are located in the LCD cover. See Locating the UltraConnect wireless antennas in User Guide. 3. Radio Frequency interference requirements Each device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to FCC Part 15 Subpart B. Refer to "Electronic emission notices" on page 6. When you use a wireless LAN module in the 802.11 a/n transmission mode, note that high power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5250 to 5350 MHz and 5650 to 5850 MHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Simultaneous use of RF transmitters Your computer is approved for simultaneous use of one of the approved wireless LAN modules, the approved wireless WAN module, and the approved NFC module. Make sure of the following conditions when you use any other external RF option device:

When you use any other RF option device, you are requested to confirm that the device conforms to the RF Safety requirement and is approved to use for your computer. You must follow the RF Safety instructions of the RF option device that are included in the user manual of the RF option device. If the RF option device is prohibited to use in conjunction with another transmitters, you must turn off all other wireless features in your computer. Canada Industry Canada (IC) Approved wireless devices This system contains the following wireless devices and the IC certification number is as below. The IC certification number is indicated on the bottom cover of your system. Preinstalled wireless LAN modules with Bluetooth function IC: 1000M-7265NG (Model: 7265NGW) IC: 1000M-3165NG (Model: 3165NGW) IC: 1000M-8265NG (Model: 8265NGW ) IC: 4104A-QCNFA435 (Model: QCNFA435) 2 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules IC: 4104A-QCNFA364A (Model: QCNFA364) IC: 4104A-QCNFA344A (Model: QCNFA344A) IC: 6317A-RTL8821CE (Model: RTL8821CE) IC: 6317A-RTL8822BE (Model: RTL8822BE) IC: 1000M-9260NG (Model: 9260NGW) IC: 1000M-9560NG (Model: 9560NGW) IC: 1000M-9462NG (Model: 9462NGW) Notes:

The wireless LAN, the Bluetooth, and the WiGig features operate at different frequencies exclusively, and transmit radio frequencies simultaneously. The following wireless LAN modules marketed in the USA and Canada do not support or function in the extended channels (12ch, 13ch):

Model: QCNFA435 Preinstalled wireless LAN module The IC Certification number for the wireless LAN module is shown on the enclosure of your computer. For the location of the IC Certification number, see FCC ID and IC Certification information in User Guide . Attention: The wireless LAN module in your computer is preinstalled by Lenovo, and you are prohibited to replace with other wireless adapter nor remove it. If the device requires replacement due to some problem during warranty, it must be serviced by a Lenovo authorized servicer. Low power license-exempt radiocommunication devices (RSS-210, RSS-

247) Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference. 2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. When you use a wireless LAN module in the 802.11 a/n transmission mode, note the following:

The devices for the band 51505350 MHz are only for indoor usage to reduce potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems The devices for the band 51505350 MHz are only for indoor usage to reduce potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems High power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) of 52505350 MHz and 56505850 MHz and these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN (Licence-Exempt Local Area Network) devices. The maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the 5250-5350 MHz, 5470-5725 MHz, and 5725-5825 MHz bands complies with the e.i.r.p. limit. Exposure of humans to RF fields (RSS-102) The computers employ low gain integral antennas that do not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canada's Web site at http://

www.hc-sc.gc.ca/. Chapter 1. Notice for users in USA and Canada 3 The radiated energy from the antennas connected to the wireless modules conforms to the Canada Portable RF exposure limit regarding IC RSS-102, Issue 5, Section 4, set forth for an uncontrolled environment, and are safe for intended operation in the conventional setting. The further RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. Canada Industrie Canada (IC) Priphriques sans fil homologus Ce systme contient les priphriques sans fil suivants et le numro d'homologation IC indiqu ci-dessous. Le numro d'homologation IC figure sur la partie infrieure de votre systme. Modules de rseau local sans fil avec fonction Bluetooth prinstalls IC: 1000M-7265NG (modle: 7265NGW) IC: 1000M-3165NG (modle: 3165NGW) IC: 1000M-8265NG (modle: 8265NGW ) IC: 4104A-QCNFA435 (modle: QCNFA435) IC: 4104A-QCNFA364A (modle: QCNFA364) IC: 4104A-QCNFA344A (modle: QCNFA344A) IC: 6317A-RTL8821CE (modle: RTL8821CE) IC: 6317A-RTL8822BE (modle: RTL8822BE) IC: 1000M-9260NG (modle: 9260NGW) IC: 1000M-9560NG (modle: 9560NGW) IC: 1000M-9462NG (modle: 9462NGW) Notes:

Les fonctions de rseau local sans fil, Bluetooth et WiGig sont oprationnelles des frquences diffrentes exclusivement et mettent des frquences radio simultanment. Les modules de rseau local sans fil suivants commercialiss aux tats-Unis et au Canada ne prennent pas en charge les canaux tendus (12ch, 13ch):

Modle: QCNFA435 Module rseau local sans fil prinstall Le numro de certification IC correspondant au module de rseau local sans fil figure sur le botier de votre ordinateur. Pour connatre l'emplacement du numro de certification IC, reportez-vous la section Informations sur l'identification FCC et la certification IC du . guide d'utilisation . Attention: Le module rseau local sans fil est prinstall sur votre ordinateur par Lenovo et il est interdit au client de le remplacer par un autre adaptateur sans fil ou de le supprimer. Si le priphrique doit tre remplac cause d'un problme survenu pendant la priode de garantie, l'opration doit tre effectue par un technicien agr Lenovo. Appareils de radio-communication basse tension sans licence d'utilisation (CNR-210, CNR-247) Le fonctionnement de ce type d'appareil est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. Cet appareil ne peut pas causer de perturbations lectromagntiques. 4 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules 2. Cet appareil doit accepter toutes les perturbations reues, y compris celles susceptibles d'occasionner un fonctionnement indsirable. Lorsque vous utilisez un module de rseau local sans fil dans le mode de transmission 802.11 a/n, tenez compte des remarques suivantes:

Les appareils destins la bande 51505350 MHz devront tre exclusivement utiliss en intrieur afin de rduire les risques de perturbations lectromagntiques gnantes sur les systmes de satellite mobile dans un mme canal. otential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems Les radars forte puissance sont dsigns comme les utilisateurs principaux (c'est--dire qu'ils sont prioritaires) des bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5650-5850 MHz. Ils peuvent provoquer des perturbations lectromagntiques sur les appareils de type LE-LAN (rseau de communication local sans licence) ou les endommager. Le gain d'antenne maximal autoris pour les appareils dans les bandes de frquence 5250-5350 MHz, 5470-5725 MHz et 5725-5825 MHz est conforme la limite p.i.r.e (puissance isotrope rayonne quivalente). Conformit des appareils de radiocommunication aux limites d'exposition humaine aux radiofrquences (CNR-102) Lesordinateursutilisentdesantennesintgralesfaiblegainquin'mettentpasunchamplectromagntique suprieur aux normes imposes par Sant Canada pour la population. Consultez le Code de scurit 6 sur le site Web de Sant Canada l'adresse http://www.hc-sc.gc.ca/. L'nergie mise par les antennes relies aux modules sans fil respecte la limite d'exposition aux radiofrquences mises par les appareils portables au Canada telle que dfinie par Industrie Canada dans la section 4 du document CNR-102, version 5 pour un environnement non contrl et permet d'affecter sans danger le produit l'usage auquel il est destin. La rduction de l'exposition aux radiofrquences est possible si le produit peut tre conserv aussi loin que possible du corps de l'utilisateur ou en dfinissant une puissance de sortie plus faible si une telle fonction est disponible. Electronic emission notices Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Declaration of Conformity Models: QCNFA344A, QCNFA435, QCNFA364, 7265NGW, 8265NGW, 3165NGW, RTL8821CE, RTL8822BE, 9260NGW, 9560NGW, 9462NGW This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. Chapter 1. Notice for users in USA and Canada 5 Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation Responsible Party:

Lenovo (United States) Incorporated 1009 Think Place-Building One Morrisville, NC 27560 Telephone: 1-919-294-5900 Usage environment and your health The wireless device installed in the computer operates within the guidelines identified by radio frequency (RF) safety standards and recommendations; therefore, Lenovo believes this product is safe for use by consumers. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the worldwide scientific community, and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists, who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of wireless devices might be restricted by the proprietor of a building or responsible representatives of an organization. For example, these situations and areas might include the following:

On board of airplanes, in hospitals, or near petrol stations, blasting areas (with electro-explosive devices), medical implants, or body-worn electronic medical devices, such as pace makers. In any other environment where the risk of interference to other devices or services is perceived or identified as harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices in a specific area (such as an airport or hospital), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use a wireless device prior to turning on the computer. 6 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules Chapter 2. Europe EU Declaration of Conformity (wireless module) Table 1. EU Directive 2014/53/EU Technology Frequency band [MHz]

Maximum transmit power [dBm]

(less than) WLAN 802.11b/g/n WLAN 802.11a/n/ac WLAN 802.11a/n/ac WiGig 802.11ad Bluetooth BR/EDR/LE WWAN UMTS WWAN LTE NFC 2400 - 2483.5 5150 - 5725 5725 - 5875 58210 - 62640 2400 - 2483.5 1/3/8 1/3/7/8/20/28 13.56 20 23 13.98 25 20 24.5 24

-38.11 English Hereby, Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., declares that the wireless equipment listed in this section is in compliance with the Radio Equipment Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the system EU declaration of conformity and the EU wireless module declarations are available at the following Internet addresses:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables EU Frequency band restriction for a wireless LAN Usage of this device is limited to indoor in the band 5150 MHz to 5350 MHz (channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). RF exposure information This device meets the EU requirements and the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) guidelines for general publics exposure to electromagnetic fields. To comply with the RF exposure requirements, refer to the Setup Guide for your product for the minimum safe-operating separation distance and SAR values. Copyright Lenovo 2018 7 Bulgarian Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. , ,

, 2014/53/E.

:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables LAN 5150 MHz 5350 MHz

( 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64).

(ICNIRP) . SAR. Croatian Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. ovime izjavljuje da je beina oprema navedena u ovom odjeljku usklaena s Direktivom o radijskoj opremi 2014/53/EU. Cjeloviti tekst EU izjave o sukladnosti sustava i EU izjave o beinim modulima dostupne su na sljedeoj web-adresi:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Ogranienje frekvencijskog pojasa za beini LAN u EU-u Upotreba ureaja ograniena je na zatvorene prostore unutar pojasa od 5150 MHz do 5350 MHz (kanali 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informacije o izlaganju radijskoj frekvenciji Ovaj ureaj zadovoljava zahtjeve EU-a i smjernice Meunarodne komisije za zatitu od neionizirajueg zraenja o izlaganju javnosti elektromagnetskim poljima. Da bi oprema bila usklaena sa zahtjevima o izlaganju radijskoj frekvenciji, u priruniku za postavljanje proizvoda potraite vrijednosti minimalne sigurne udaljenosti i specifine brzine apsorpcije. Czech Spolenost Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. tmto prohlauje, e bezdrtov zazen uveden v tto sti dokumentu spluj zkladn i dal relevantn poadavky smrnice o rdiovch zazench 2014/53/EU. Cel znn EU prohlen o shod systmu a EU prohlen o bezdrtovch modulech je k dispozici na tto internetov adrese:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks 8 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Omezen EU pro frekvenn psma bezdrtov st LAN Pouit tohoto zazen je omezeno na vnitn prostory a frekvenn psma 5150 a 5350 MHz (kanly 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informace o vystaven radiofrekvennmu zen Toto zazen spluje poadavky EU a pokyny ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection Mezinrodn komise pro ochranu ped neionizujcm zenm) tkajc se vystaven obecn veejnosti elektromagnetickm polm. Informace o minimln bezpen provozn vzdlenosti a hodnotch SAR pro v produkt, kter jsou v souladu s poadavky na ochranu ped radiofrekvennm zenm, najdete v Nvodu k nastaven. Danish Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. erklrer hermed, at det trdlse udstyr, der er angivet i dette afsnit, overholder direktivet om radioudstyr 2014/53/EU. Den fulde erklring vedrrende systemets overholdelse af EU-krav og erklringerne om de trdlse modulers overholdelse af EU-krav (hvis relevante) er tilgngelige via flgende internetadresse:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Restriktioner for frekvensbnd i EU for et trdlst LAN Brug af denne enhed er begrnset til indendrs brug i frekvensbndet 5150 MHz til 5350 MHz (kanal 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Oplysninger om radioblgeeksponering Denne enhed opfylder EU-kravene og ICNIRP-retningslinjerne ( International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) for eksponering for elektromagnetiske felter. For at overholde RF-

eksponeringskravene, kan du se Brugervejledningen for dit produkt for den minimale sikkerhedsafstandsafstand og SAR-vrdier. Dutch Hierbij verklaart Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. dat de draadloze apparatuur die in dit artikel is aangegeven voldoet aan de richtlijn 2014/53/EU voor radioapparatuur. De volledige tekst van de EU-conformiteitsverklaring betreffende systemen en van de EU-verklaringen betreffende draadloze modules is beschikbaar op het volgende internetadres:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables EU-beperking van frequentieband voor een draadloos LAN Gebruik van dit apparaat is beperkt tot gebruik binnenshuis in de band van 5150 MHz tot 5350 MHz (kanalen 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Chapter 2. Europe EU Declaration of Conformity (wireless module) 9 Informatie over blootstelling aan radiogolven Dit apparaat voldoet aan de vereisten van de EU en de richtlijnen van de ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) voor blootstelling van het algemene publiek aan elektromagnetische velden. Om te voldoen aan de vereisten voor blootstelling aan radiogolven, raadpleegt u de Installatiehandleiding voor uw product voor de minimale veilige afstand en de SAR-waarden. Estonian Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. kinnitab kesolevaga, et selles jaotises esitatud traadita side seadmed vastavad raadioseadmete direktiivile 2014/53/EL. Ssteemi EL-i vastavusdeklaratsiooni ja EL-i traadita side mooduli deklaratsioonide tielikud tekstid on saadaval jrgmisel Interneti-aadressil:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables EL-i sagedusvahemiku piirang traadita side LAN-ile Seda seadet vib kasutada siseruumides sagedusvahemikus 51505350 MHz (kanalid 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Raadiosagedusliku kiirguse teave Seade vastab EL-i nuetele ja Rahvusvahelise mitteioniseeriva kiirguse eest kaitsmise komisjoni (ICNIRP) juhistele elanikkonna elektromagnetiliste vljadega kokkupuute kohta. Raadiosageduslikule kiirgusele stestatud nuetele vastamiseks vt oma toote kohta kivat vhimat ohutut ttamiskaugust ja SAR-i vrtuseid seadistusjuhendist. Finnish Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. ilmoittaa tten, ett tss jaksossa mainitut langattomat laitteet ovat radiolaitedirektiivin 2014/53/EU mukaisia. Lausuma jrjestelmn EU-snnstenmukaisuudesta ja lausumat langattomien moduulien EU-

snnstenmukaisuudesta ovat saatavilla kokonaisuudessaan seuraavassa Internet-osoitteessa:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Langattoman lhiverkon taajuusalueen rajoitus EU:n alueella Tm laite on tarkoitettu kytettvksi sistiloissa taajuusalueella 5 1505 350 MHz (kanavat 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60 ja 64). Tietoja radiotaajuiselle steilylle altistumisesta Tm laite tytt Euroopan unionin vaatimukset ja kansainvlisen ionisoimattoman steilyn toimikunnan

(ICNIRP, International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) suositukset, jotka koskevat vestn altistumista shkmagneettisille kentille. Saat listietoja radiotaajuiselle steilylle altistumista koskevien vaatimusten noudattamisesta tutustumalla tuotteen asennusoppaassa ilmoitettuihin SAR-arvoihin ja turvallisen kytn edellyttmn vhimmisetisyyteen. 10 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules French Par la prsente, Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., dclare que les quipements sans fil lists dans cette section sont conformes la directive 2014/53/EU sur les quipements radio. Le texte complet de la dclaration europenne de conformit et des dclarations europennes concernant les modules sans fil, s'il y a lieu, sont disponibles l'adresse Internet suivante:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Restriction lie une bande de frquence pour un rseau local sans fil au sein de l'Union europenne Ce priphrique doit tre utilis exclusivement l'intrieur, dans la bande de frquence de 5150 5350 MHz

(canaux 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informations sur l'exposition aux RF Ce priphrique respecte les directives de l'UE et de la Commission internationale pour la protection contre les radiations non-ionisantes (ICNIRP) concernant l'exposition du public des champs lectromagntiques. Pour rpondre aux exigences en matire d'exposition aux RF, reportez-vous au Guide de configuration de votre produit afin de connatre la distance de sparation minimale pour une utilisation en toute scurit, ainsi que les valeurs de dbit d'absorption spcifique. German Hiermit erklrt Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., dass das in diesem Abschnitt aufgelistete drahtlose Gert die Funkanlagen-Richtlinie 2014/53/EU erfllt. Der vollstndige Text der EU-Konformittserklrung fr das System und der EU-Deklarationen zu drahtlosen Modulen kann unter der folgenden Internetadresse eingesehen werden:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables EU-Frequenzbandeinschrnkung fr drahtloses LAN Die Verwendung dieses Gertes ist im Frequenzband zwischen 5.150 und 5.350 MHz (Kanle 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64) auf die Verwendung im Innenbereich beschrnkt. Informationen zur HF-Exposition Dieses Gert erfllt die EU-Anforderungen sowie die Richtlinien der International Commission on Non-

Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) hinsichtlich der Exposition der Bevlkerung gegenber elektromagnetischen Feldern. Um die Anforderungen bezglich der HF-Exposition zu erfllen, lesen Sie die Einrichtungsanleitung zu Ihrem Produkt im Hinblick auf den Mindestabstand fr einen sicheren Betrieb und die SAR-Werte. Greek

, Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., 2014/53/. Internet:

Chapter 2. Europe EU Declaration of Conformity (wireless module) 11 https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables LAN 5150 MHz 5350 MHz ( 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64).

(RF)

(ICNIRP)

.

(RF), SAR. Hungarian A Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. ezennel kijelenti, hogy a fejezetben emltett vezetk nlkli kszlk megfelel az 2014/53/EU szm, Rdiberendezsekrl szl direktvban foglaltaknak. A berendezs Eurpai Uni-beli megfelelsgi nyilatkozata s a vezetk nlkli eszkzkkel kapcsolatos eurpai nyilatkozat (ha elrhet) a kvetkez weboldalon tekinthet meg:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Frekvenciatartomnyra vonatkoz eurpai unis korltozs vezetk nlkli LAN-hlzatokhoz Az eszkz hasznlata beltrre korltozdik az 51505350 MHz tartomnyban (csatornk: 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). RF-kitettsgre vonatkoz informcik Ez az eszkz megfelel a szemlyek elektromgneses mezknek val kitettsgre vonatkoz, az EU s az International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP Nemzetkzi Bizottsg a Nem-

ionizl Sugrzssal Szembeni Vdelemrl) ltal elrt kvetelmnyeknek. Az RF-kitettsgre vonatkoz kvetelmnyeknek val megfelelsrl (tbbek kztt a biztonsgos hasznlat minimlis tvolsgrl s a SAR-rtkekrl) az zembe helyezsi tmutatban tall tovbbi informcit. Italian Con la presente documentazione, Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. dichiara che l'apparecchiatura wireless indicata in questa sezione conforme alla direttiva 2014/53/EU sulle apparecchiature radio. Il testo integrale della dichiarazione di conformit europea del sistema e le dichiarazioni UE dei moduli wireless, se applicabili, sono disponibili al seguente indirizzo Internet:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Restrizioni UE sulla banda di frequenza per una WLAN (wireless LAN) L'utilizzo di questo dispositivo limitato ad ambienti chiusi in banda compresa tra 5150 MHz e 5350 MHz

(canali 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). 12 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules Informazioni sull'esposizione RF Questo dispositivo rispetta i requisiti EU e le linee guida ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) per l'esposizione generale ai campi elettromagnetici. Per rispettare i requisiti di conformit dell'esposizione RF, consultare la Guida di configurazione del prodotto per conoscere la distanza di sicurezza operativa minima e i valori SAR. Latvian Ar o uzmums Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. pazio, ka aj sada nordtais bezvadu aprkojums atbilst radioiekrtu Direktvai 2014/53/EK. Pilnais teksts par sistmas piemrotbu ES atbilstbas deklarcijai un ES bezvadu moduu deklarcijm ir pieejams d interneta adres:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables ES frekvenu joslu ierobeojums bezvadu LAN adapterim ierce ir paredzta izmantoanai iektelps josls no 5150 MHz ldz 5350 MHz (kanlos 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informcija par pakauanu RF starojumam ierce atbilst ES prasbm un vadlnijm, ko publicjusi Starptautisk komisija aizsardzbai pret nejonizjoo starojumu (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection ICNIRP), attiecb uz visprgu sabiedrbas pakauanu elektromagntiskajam laukam. Lai nodrointu prasbas par pakauanu RF starojumam, sk. jsu produkta Iestatanas pamcbu un mekljiet informciju par minimlo droo lietoanas attlumu un SAR vrtbas. Lithuanian iame dokumente Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. pareikia, kad belaid ranga, nurodyta iame skyriuje, atitinka Radijo rangos direktyvos 2014/53/ES reikalavimus. Vis sistemos ES atitikties deklaracijos ir ES belaidio ryio modulio deklaracij tekst galite rasti apsilank adresu internete:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Belaidio LAN ES dani diapazono apribojimas rengin patalpose galima naudoti 5 1505 350 MHz dani diapazonu (kanalai: 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informacija apie radijo dani poveik is renginys atitinka ES reikalavimus ir Tarptautins apsaugos nuo nejonizuojaniosios spinduliuots komisijos (ICNIRP) gaires dl elektromagnetini lauk poveikio plaiajai visuomenei. Kad laikytumts radijo dani poveikio apribojimo reikalavim, savo produkto Srankos vadove iekokite informacijos apie minimal saug naudojimo atstum ir SAR (savitosios sugerties sparta, angl. Specific Absorption Rate) vertes. Chapter 2. Europe EU Declaration of Conformity (wireless module) 13 Norwegian Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. erklrer herved at det trdlse utstyret som er oppfrt i dette kapittelet, er i samsvar med direktiv 2014/53/EU om radioutstyr. Den fullstendige teksten i EUs samsvarserklring for systemet og EUs samsvarserklringer for trdlse moduler, hvis aktuelt, er tilgjengelig p flgende Internett-adresser:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Begrensinger for frekvensbnd i EU for trdlst LAN Denne enheten er begrenset til innendrs bruk i frekvensbndet 5150 til 5350 MHz (kanal 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informasjon om RF-eksponering Denne enheten oppfyller EU-kravene og ICNIRP-retningslinjene (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation) for eksponering for elektromagnetiske felter ved generell bruk. Se produktets installasjonsveiledning for informasjon om minimumsavstand for trygg bruk og SAR-verdiene som overholder RF-eksponeringskravene. Polish Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., niniejszym owiadcza, e urzdzenie bezprzewodowe wymienione w tej sekcji spenia wymagania dyrektywy w sprawie sprztu radiowego 2014/53/UE. Peny tekst deklaracji zgodnoci systemw i moduw cznoci bezprzewodowej z przepisami UE mona znale na nastpujcej stronie internetowej:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Ograniczenia dotyczce pasm czstotliwoci w UE dla pocze bezprzewodowych LAN Urzdzenie jest przeznaczone do uywania wewntrz budynkw, w pasmach czstotliwoci 5150 do 5350 MHz (kanay 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60 i 64). Informacje o ekspozycji na czstotliwoci radiowe To urzdzenie spenia wymagania UE i wytyczne Midzynarodowej Komisji ds. Ochrony przed Promieniowaniem Niejonizujcym (ICNIRP) dotyczce wystawienia ludzi na dziaanie pl elektromagnetycznych. W celu spenienia wymaga dotyczcych wystawienia na dziaanie czstotliwoci radiowych zobacz Podrcznik konfiguracji do swojego produktu, aby sprawdzi minimaln bezpieczn odlego podczas obsugi i wartoci SAR. Portuguese A Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., declara por este meio que o equipamento sem fios listado nesta seco est em conformidade com a Diretiva de Equipamento de Rdio 2014/53/UE. O texto completo da declarao de conformidade da UE e das declaraes de mdulos sem fios da UE para o sistema encontram-se disponveis no seguinte endereo da Internet:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks 14 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Restrio da banda de frequncias na UE para uma LAN sem fios A utilizao deste dispositivo est limitada utilizao no interior, na banda 5150 a 5350 MHz (canais 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informaes sobre exposio a RF Este dispositivo cumpre os requisitos da UE e as diretrizes da International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) para exposio do pblico geral a campos eletromagnticos. Para estar em conformidade com os requisitos de exposio a RF, consulte o Manual de Configurao do produto para ficar a saber a distncia mnima de separao para uma operao segura e os valores SAR. Romanian Prin aceasta, Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. declar c echipamentul fr fir prezentat n aceast seciune este n conformitate cu Directiva privitoare la echipamentele radio 2014/53/UE. Textul complet al sistemului de declaraii de conformitate i declaraiile privind modulele fr fir UE sunt disponibile la urmtoarele adrese:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Restricia UE privind banda de frecven a unei reele LAN fr fir Utilizarea acestui dispozitiv este limitat la spaiile interioare, n banda de 5.150 5.350 MHz (canalele 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informaii privind expunerea la frecvenele radio Acest dispozitiv ndeplinete cerinele UE i instruciunile Comisiei internaionale pentru protecia mpotriva radiaiilor neionizante (ICNIRP) referitoare la expunerea persoanelor la cmpuri electromagnetice. Pentru a respecta cerinele privind expunerea la frecvenele radio, consultai Ghid de configurare al produsului, pentru distana minim de utilizare n siguran i pentru valorile SAR. Slovenian Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. s tem izjavlja, da je brezina oprema, navedena v tem razdelku, v skladu z direktivo o radijski opremi 2014/53/EU. Celotno besedilo izjave EU o skladnosti za sistem in morebitnih deklaracij EU za brezini modul je na voljo na tem spletnem naslovu:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Omejitve Evropske unije glede frekvennega pasu za brezina krajevna omreja Ta naprava je omejena na notranjo uporabo v pasu od 5150 do 5350 MHz (kanali 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informacije o izpostavljenosti RF-sevanju Ta naprava izpolnjuje zahteve EU in smernice Mednarodne komisije za varstvo pred neionizirnimi sevanji

(International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection ICNIRP) za izpostavljenost splone Chapter 2. Europe EU Declaration of Conformity (wireless module) 15 javnosti elektromagnetnim poljem. Informacije za izpolnjevanje zahtev glede izpostavljenosti RF-sevanju so v navodilih za uporabo za ustrezen izdelek, v katerih so navedene najmanje loitvene razdalje za varno uporabo in vrednosti SAR. Slovakian Spolonos Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. tmto vyhlasuje, e bezdrtov zariadenie uveden v tejto asti je v slade so smernicou o rdiovch zariadeniach 2014/53/E. pln texty vyhlsenia E o zhode pre systm a vyhlsen E pre bezdrtov moduly s dostupn na nasledujcej internetovej adrese:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Obmedzenie frekvennho psma E pre bezdrtov sie LAN Pouvanie tohto zariadenia je obmedzen na interir vo frekvennom psme 5 150 a 5 350 MHz (kanly 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informcie o vystaven rdiofrekvennmu iareniu Toto zariadenie vyhovuje poiadavkm E a smerniciam Medzinrodnej komisie pre ochranu pred neionizujcim iarenm (ICNIRP), ktor upravuj vystavenie irokej verejnosti elektromagnetickm poliam. Na zaistenie sladu s poiadavkami v oblasti vystavenia rdiofrekvennmu iareniu sa oboznmte s Prrukou o nastaven, ktor obsahuje informcie o minimlnej vzdialenosti vyadovanej na bezpen pouvanie a o hodnotch SAR. Spanish Mediante el presente documento, Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., declara que el equipo inalmbrico indicado en esta seccin cumple con la Directiva de Equipos de Radio 2014/53/UE. El texto completo del sistema Declaracin de conformidad UE y las declaraciones de los mdulos inalmbricos de la UE, si corresponde, estn disponibles en la siguiente direccin de Internet:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Restriccin de banda de frecuencia de la UE para LAN inalmbrica La utilizacin de este dispositivo est limitada a interiores en la banda de 5150 MHz a 5350 MHz (canales 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informacin de exposicin a RF Este dispositivo satisface los requisitos de la UE y las directrices de la International Commission on Non-

Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) sobre la exposicin del pblico general a campos electromagnticos. Para cumplir los requisitos de exposicin a RF, consulte la Gua de instalacin del producto, donde encontrar la informacin acerca de la distancia de separacin mnima segura y los valores de SAR. Swedish Hrmed intygar Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. att den trdlsa utrustningen i det hr avsnittet verensstmmer med direktivet fr radioutrustning 2014/53/EU. 16 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules Den fullstndiga texten i EU-deklarationen om verensstmmelse och EU-deklarationen om trdlsa moduler fr systemet finns, om tillmpligt, p fljande webbadress:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Frekvensomrdesbegrnsning inom EU fr trdlst ntverk Enheten fr bara anvndas inomhus i frekvensomrdet 51505350 MHz (kanal 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Information om exponering fr radiovgor Denna enhet verensstmmer med EU:s krav och ICNIRP:s (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) riktlinjer avseende allmnhetens exponering fr elektromagnetiska flt. Fr att uppfylla kraven p exponering fr radiovgor, se information om minsta avstnd fr sker anvndning samt SAR-

vrden i installationshandboken. Turkish Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., bu blmde listelenen kablosuz cihazlarn temel gereksinimler ve Radyo Ekipmanlar Ynetmelii 2014/53/EC ile uyumlu olduunu beyan eder. Sisteme ait AB uyumluluk bildirimi ve ABD kablosuz modl bildirimlerinin tam metni u nternet adresinde sunulmaktadr:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Kablosuz LAN iin AB Frekans band kstlamas Bu cihazn kullanm i mekanlarda, 5150 - 5350 MHz bant aral (36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64 kanallar) ile snrldr. RF maruz kalma bilgileri Bu cihaz, kamunun elektromanyetik alanlara maruz kalmasna ilikin AB gereksinimlerine ve Uluslararas Non-

yonizan Radyasyondan Korunma Komitesi (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection-

ICNIRP) ynergelerine uygundur. RF maruz kalma gereksinimlerine uyum gerei, minimum gvenli altrma mesafesi ve SAR deerleri iin rnnzn Kurulum Klavuzu'na bakn. Chapter 2. Europe EU Declaration of Conformity (wireless module) 17 18 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules Chapter 3. Regulatory notices for other countries This chapter provides wireless information about the following countries. Notice for users in Argentina (Nota para uso en Argentina) Modelo: Intel 3165NGW Equipo: Acceso Inalambrico De Red CNC: C-14446 Modelo: Intel 7265NGW Equipo: Acceso Inalambrico De Red CNC: C-13275 Modelo: Intel 8265NGW Equipo:Transceptor CNC: C-16376 Modelo: Qualcomm QCNFA344A Equipo: Transceptor CNC: C-14869 Modelo: Qualcomm QCNFA364 Equipo: Acceso Inalambrico De Red CNC: C-14866 Modelo: Qualcomm QCNFA435 Equipo: Transceptor CNC: C-14476 Modelo: Realtek RTL8821CE Equipo: Transceptor CNC: C-17250 Copyright Lenovo 2018 19 Modelo: Realtek RTL8822BE Equipo: Transceptor CNC: C-16809 Modelo: Intel 9260NGW CNC: C-20821 Modelo: Intel 9560NGW CNC: C-20824 Modelo: Intel 9462NGW CNC: C-20987 Notice for users in Brazil (Aviso para usuarios no Brasil) For models: QCNFA344A, QCNFA435, QCNFA364, 7265NGW, 8265NGW, 3165NGW, RTL8821CE, RTL8822BE, 9260NGW, 9560NGW, 9462NGW Portuguese English Portuguese English Este equipamento no tem direito proteo contra interferncia prejudicial e no pode causar interferncia em sistemas devidamente autorizados. This equipment is not protected against harmful interference and may not cause interference with duly authorized systems. Este produto est homologado pela Anatel, de acordo com os procedimentos regulamentados pela Resoluo n 242/2000 e atende aos requisitos tcnicos aplicados, incluindo os limites de exposio da Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncia, de acordo com as Resoluos n 303/2002 This product meets the applicable technical requirements, including exposure limits on Specific Absorption Rate related to electric, magnetic and electromagnetic radiofrequency, in accordance with Resolutions No. 303/2002. For model: 3165NGW For model: 7265NGW 20 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules

(01)78983559503910258-14-2198(01)78983559503530258-14-2198 For model: 8265NGW For model: QCNFA344A For model: QCNFA364 For model: QCNFA435 For model: RTL8821CE For model: RTL8822BE Chapter 3. Regulatory notices for other countries 21 03877-16-02198(01)078989313312172544-15-6534(01)078989313312242563-15-6534(01)078989313312000784-15-653406446-16-0407603595-16-04076 For model: 9260NGW For model: 9560NGW For model: 9462NGW Notice for users in India Modelo: 3165NGW NR-EAT/1623 Modelo: 7265NGW ETA-1075/2014 Modelo: 8265NGW NR-ETA-14791 Modelo: QCNFA344A ETA-032/2015-RLO(SR)/2120r ETA-033/2015-RLO(SR)/2121 Modelo: QCNFA364 ETA-034/2015-RLO ETA-035/2015-RLO 22 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules 05831-17-0442305788-17-0442300595-18-04423 Modelo: QCNFA435 ETA-010/2015-RLO Modelo: RTL8821CE NR-ETA/5229-RLO NR-ETA/5230-RLO Modelo: RTL8822BE NR-ETA-/4671 NR-ETA-/4670 Modelo: 9260NGW NR-EAT/6865-RLO Modelo: 9560NGW NR-EAT/6863-RLO Modelo: 9462NGW NR-ETA/7902-RLO(NR) Notice for users in Mexico (Nota para uso en Mexico) En Mexico la operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada Modelo: 3165NGW Adaptador Intel Dual Band Wireless AC 3165 IFT RCPIN3115-0385 Modelo: 7265NGW Adaptador Intel 7265NGW IFT RCPIN7214-0488 Modelo: 8265NGW Adaptador Intel Dual Band Wireless AC 8265 IFT RCPIN8216-0896 Modelo: QCNFA344A TARJETA TIPO M.2 2230 Chapter 3. Regulatory notices for other countries 23 802.11a/b/g/n/ac+BT 4.1 IFT RCPQUQC15-0890 Modelo: QCNFA364 TARJETA TIPO M.2230 802.11a/b/g/n/ac+BT 4.1 IFT RCPQUQC15-0928 Modelo: QCNFA435 802.11a/b/g/n/ac+BT 4.1 M.2 IFT RCPQUQC15-0323 Modelo: RTL8821CE Modulo combo 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac IFTRCPRERT17-0354 Modelo: RTL8822BE Modulo WI-FI RCPRERT16-1591 Modelo: 9260NGW Adaptador Intel Wireless AC 9260 IFT RCPIN9217-1585 Modelo: 9560NGW Adaptador Intel Wireless AC 9560 IFT RCPIN9517-1584 Modelo: 9462NGW Adaptador Intel Wireless AC 9462 IFT RCPIN9417-2005 Notice for users in Morocco Model: is approved for Morocco by ANRT. In addition, the following wireless modules used in this product are all approved for Morocco by ANRT:

QCNFA344A, QCNFA435, QCNFA364, 7265NGW, 8265NGW, 3165NGW, RTL8821CE, RTL8822BE, 9260NGW, 9560NGW, 9462NGW Notes:

24 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules The operation of this product in the radio channel 2 (2417 MHz) is not authorized in the following cities:

Agadir, Assa-Zag, Cabo Negro, Chaouen, Goulmima, Oujda, Tan Tan, Taourirt, Taroudant, and Taza. The operation of this product in the radio channels 4, 5, 6 and 7 (2425 - 2442 MHz) is not authorized in the following cities: Aroport Mohamed V, Agadir, Aguelmous, Anza, Benslimane, Bni Hafida, Cabo Negro, Casablanca, Fs, Lakbab, Marrakech, Merchich, Mohammdia, Rabat, Sal, Tanger, Tan Tan, Taounate, Tit Mellil, and Zag. Due to the channel restrictions above, the operation of this product using the fat channel mode (40 MHz of channel bandwidth) is not allowed at the 2.4 GHz frequency band. Notice for users in Nigeria For models: QCNFA344A, QCNFA435, QCNFA364, 7265NGW, 8265NGW, 3165NGW, RTL8821CE, RTL8822BE, 9260NGW, 9560NGW, 9462NGW Chapter 3. Regulatory notices for other countries 25 Notice for users in Saudi Arabia For model: 3165NGW 26 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules Applicant Information Applicant:Intel Mobile Communications SAS:) Certificate Details) / Issue Date:12/02/20171438/05/15: / Validity Period:12/02/20191440/06/07:) / Device Details) / Product Name:Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3165: Product Model:Intel 3165NGW: / Manufacturer:INTEL MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS : Additional Details/ Operating Frequency : Maximum Output Power allowed (EIRP) :2400-2483.5 MHZ:100 mW 5150-5350 MHZ:200 mW 5470-5825 MHZ:200 mW : Device comply with CITC technical Specification No.:RI045 ): /)Additional RequirementWLAN / WiFi) ) / Certificate No:TA 14022017-12022019-19328:) / : / )  / / / /) http://ers.citc.gov.sa ) Conformity Certificate ( ( ( ,(( 6 1422/03/12 ( (12/) (  . 6( R (  (R ,1422/03/05 ( (74) (R R  .(R R ( R  ,R ( R( R ( R R ( ( ,R  R R R ( (  R , R (R / R (R ( 6 R .R R  (( ) For model: 7265NGW Chapter 3. Regulatory notices for other countries 27 Applicant Information Applicant:Intel Mobile Communications SAS:) Certificate Details) / Issue Date:23/03/20171438/06/24: / Validity Period:23/03/20191440/07/16:) / Device Details) / Product Name:INTEL WIRELESS 7265: Product Model:7265NGW: / Manufacturer:INTEL MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS : Additional Details/ Operating Frequency : Maximum Output Power allowed (EIRP) :2400-2483 MHZ:100 mW 5150-5250 MHZ:200 mW 5250-5350 MHZ:200 mW 5470-5725 MHZ:200 mW : Device comply with CITC technical Specification No.:RI103 , RI045 ): /)Additional Requirement (WLAN - WiFi)/ Certificate No:TA 23032017-23032019-19844:) / : / )  / / / /) http://ers.citc.gov.sa ) Conformity Certificate ( ( ( ,(( 6 1422/03/12 ( (12/) (  . 6( R (  (R ,1422/03/05 ( (74) (R R  .(R R ( R  ,R ( R( R ( R R ( ( ,R  R R R ( (  R , R (R / R (R ( 6 R .R R  (( ) For model: 8265NGW 28 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules Applicant Information Applicant:Intel Mobile Communications SAS:) Certificate Details) / Issue Date:04/08/20161437/11/01: / Validity Period:04/08/20181439/11/22:) / Device Details) / Product Name:INTEL 8265NGW: Product Model:8265NGW: / Manufacturer:INTEL MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS : Additional Details/ Operating Frequency : Maximum Output Power allowed (EIRP) :2400-2483.5 MHZ:19.6 dBm 5150-5250 MHZ:22.3 dBm 5470-5725 MHZ:22.4 dBm 2400-2483.5 MHZ:9.5 dBm 2400-2483.5 MHZ:14.9 dBm 5250-5350 MHZ:22.2 dBm 5725-5850 MHZ:13.98 dBm : Device comply with CITC technical Specification No.:RI045 , RI103 ): /)Additional Requirement/ Certificate No:TA 04082016-04082018-17006:) / : / )  / / / /) http://ers.citc.gov.sa ) Conformity Certificate ( ( ( ,(( 6 1422/03/12 ( (12/) (  . 6( R (  (R ,1422/03/05 ( (74) (R R  .(R R ( R  ,R ( R( R ( R R ( ( ,R  R R R ( (  R , R (R / R (R ( 6 R .R R  (( ) For model: Qualcomm QCNFA344A Chapter 3. Regulatory notices for other countries 29 For model: Qualcomm QCNFA364 30 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules For model: Qualcomm QCNFA435 Chapter 3. Regulatory notices for other countries 31 For model: RTL8821CE 32 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules Applicant Information Applicant:Aman for Modern Technologies:) Certificate Details) / Issue Date:22/01/20171438/04/24: / Validity Period:22/01/20191440/05/16:) / Device Details) / Product Name:RTL8821CE: Product Model:RTL8821CE: / Manufacturer:Realtek Semiconductor Corp. : Additional Details/ Operating Frequency : Maximum Output Power allowed (EIRP) :2400-2483.5 MHZ:19.99 dBm 5150-5725 MHZ:22.73 dBm : Device comply with CITC technical Specification No.:RI045 , RI103 , GEN001 ): /)Additional Requirement(WLAN / WiFi) / Certificate No:TA 22012017-22012019-18919:) / : / )  / / / /) http://ers.citc.gov.sa ) Conformity Certificate ( ( ( ,(( 6 1422/03/12 ( (12/) (  . 6( R (  (R ,1422/03/05 ( (74) (R R  .(R R ( R  ,R ( R( R ( R R ( ( ,R  R R R ( (  R , R (R / R (R ( 6 R .R R  (( ) For model: RTL8822BE Chapter 3. Regulatory notices for other countries 33 Applicant Information Applicant:SGS Taiwan Ltd.:) Certificate Details) / Issue Date:11/10/20161438/01/10: / Validity Period:11/10/20181440/02/02:) / Device Details) / Product Name:802.11 a/b/g/n/ac RTL8822BE Combo module : Product Model:RTL8822BE: / Manufacturer:Realtek Semiconductor Corp. : Additional Details/ Operating Frequency : Maximum Output Power allowed (EIRP) :2400-2483.5 MHZ:19.98 dBm 5150-5250 MHZ:22.93 dBm 5250-5350 MHZ:22.97 dBm 5470-5725 MHZ:22.97 dBm 5725-5825 MHZ:29.11 dBm : Device comply with CITC technical Specification No.:RI045 , RI103 ): /)Additional Requirement(WLAN - WiFi) / Certificate No:TA 11102016-11102018-17824:) / : / )  / / / /) http://ers.citc.gov.sa ) Conformity Certificate ( ( ( ,(( 6 1422/03/12 ( (12/) (  . 6( R (  (R ,1422/03/05 ( (74) (R R  .(R R ( R  ,R ( R( R ( R R ( ( ,R  R R R ( (  R , R (R / R (R ( 6 R .R R  (( ) For model: 9260NGW 34 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules Applicant Information Applicant:Intel Mobile Communications SAS:) Certificate Details) / Issue Date:07/08/20171438/11/15: / Validity Period:07/08/20191440/12/06:) / Device Details) / Product Name:9260NGW: Product Model:9260NGW: / Manufacturer:INTEL MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS : Additional Details/ Operating Frequency : Maximum Output Power allowed (EIRP) :2400-2483.5 MHZ:19.9 dBm 5150-5250 MHZ:22.8 dBm 5250-5350 MHZ:22.8 dBm 5470-5725 MHZ:22.7 dBm 5725-5850 MHZ:13.76 dBm 2400-2483.5 MHZ:12.9 dBm 2400-5825 MHZ:9.8 dBm : Device comply with CITC technical Specification No.:RI045 , RI103 ): /)Additional Requirement(WLAN / WiFi) / Certificate No:07082017-07082019-20916:) / : / )  / / / /) http://ers.citc.gov.sa ) Conformity Certificate ( ( ( ,(( 6 1422/03/12 ( (12/) (  . 6( R (  (R ,1422/03/05 ( (74) (R R  .(R R ( R  ,R ( R( R ( R R ( ( ,R  R R R ( (  R , R (R / R (R ( 6 R .R R  (( ) For model: 9560NGW Chapter 3. Regulatory notices for other countries 35 Applicant Information Applicant:Intel Mobile Communications SAS:) Certificate Details) / Issue Date:16/08/20171438/11/24: / Validity Period:16/08/20191440/12/15:) / Device Details) / Product Name:9560NGW: Product Model:9560NGW: / Manufacturer:INTEL MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS : Additional Details/ Operating Frequency : Maximum Output Power allowed (EIRP) :2400-2483.5 MHZ:9.8 dBm 2400-2483.5 MHZ:13.5 dBm 2400-2483.5 MHZ:19.7 dBm 5150-5250 MHZ:22.5 dBm 5250-5350 MHZ:22.5 dBm 5470-5725 MHZ:20.7 dBm 5725-5825 MHZ:13.65 dBm : Device comply with CITC technical Specification No.:RI103 ): /)Additional Requirement/ Certificate No:TA 16082017-16082019-20980:) / : / )  / / / /) http://ers.citc.gov.sa ) Conformity Certificate ( ( ( ,(( 6 1422/03/12 ( (12/) (  . 6( R (  (R ,1422/03/05 ( (74) (R R  .(R R ( R  ,R ( R( R ( R R ( ( ,R  R R R ( (  R , R (R / R (R ( 6 R .R R  (( ) For model: 9462NGW 36 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules Applicant Information Applicant:Intel Mobile Communications SAS:) Certificate Details) / Issue Date:14/12/20171439/03/26: / Validity Period:14/12/20191441/04/17:) / Device Details) / Product Name:Intel Wireless-AC 9462: Product Model:9462NGW: / Manufacturer:INTEL MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS : Additional Details/ Operating Frequency : Maximum Output Power allowed (EIRP) :2400-2483.5 MHZ:10 dBm 2400-2483.5 MHZ:13.3 dBm 2400-2483.5 MHZ:19.8 dBm 5150-5250 MHZ:22.8 dBm 5250-5350 MHZ:22.8 dBm 5470-5725 MHZ:22.8 dBm 5725-5825 MHZ:13.91 dBm : Device comply with CITC technical Specification No.:RI045 , RI103 ): /)Additional Requirement/ Certificate No:TA 14122017-14122019-21795:) / : / )  / / / /) http://ers.citc.gov.sa ) Conformity Certificate ( ( ( ,(( 6 1422/03/12 ( (12/) (  . 6( R (  (R ,1422/03/05 ( (74) (R R  .(R R ( R  ,R ( R( R ( R R ( ( ,R  R R R ( (  R , R (R / R (R ( 6 R .R R  (( ) Notice for users in Serbia The following models have been approved by Ratel: QCNFA344A, QCNFA435, QCNFA364, 7265NGW, 8265NGW, 3165NGW, RTL8821CE, RTL8822BE, 9260NGW, 9560NGW, 9462NGW. Notice for users in South Africa For model: 3165NGW For model: 7265NGW For model: 8265NGW For model: QCNFA344A For model: QCNFA364 For model: QCNFA435 Chapter 3. Regulatory notices for other countries 37 TA-2015/580APPROVEDTA-2014/499APPROVEDTA-20161468APPROVEDTA-2015/829APPROVEDTA-2015/831APPROVEDTA-2014/2507APPROVED For model: RTL8821CE For model: RTL8822BE For model: 9260NGW For model: 9560NGW For model: 9462NGW Notice for users in Taiwan For models: QCNFA344A, QCNFA435, QCNFA364, 7265NGW, 8265NGW, 3165NGW, RTL8821CE, RTL8822BE, 9260NGW, 9560NGW, 9462NGW NCC 38 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules TA-2016/2779APPROVEDTA-2016/2137APPROVEDTA-2017/1348APPROVEDTA-2017/1347APPROVEDTA-2017/2772APPROVED 5.255.35 Notice for users in the UAE For model: 3165NGW For model: 7265NGW For model: 8265NGW For model: QCNFA344A For model: QCNFA364 For model: QCNFA435 Chapter 3. Regulatory notices for other countries 39 TRAREGISTERED NO.ER37771/15DEALER NO.0018841/09TRAREGISTERED NO.ER0128120/14DEALER NO.0018841/09TRAREGISTERED NO.ER46868/16DEALER NO.0018841/09TRAREGISTERED NO.ER38777/15DEALER NO.DA0039119/10TRAREGISTERED NO.ER38759/15DEALER NO.0014005/08TRAREGISTERED NO.ER37623/15DEALER NO.0014005/08 For model: RTL8821CE For model: RTL8822BE For model: 9260NGW For model: 9560NGW For model: 9462NGW 40 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules TRAREGISTERED NO.ER50849/16DEALER NO.0033451/10TRAREGISTERED NO.ER48726/16DEALER NO.0033451/10TRAREGISTERED NO.ER57060/17DEALER NO.0018841/09TRAREGISTERED NO.ER57050/17DEALER NO.0018841/09TRAREGISTERED NO.ER60467/18DEALER NO.0018841/09 Trademarks LENOVO and the LENOVO logo are trademarks of Lenovo. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2018 Lenovo

 

 

Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide Read this first Before using this documentation and the product it supports, ensure that you read and understand the following:

Appendix A Important safety information on page 31 Safety and Warranty Guide Setup Guide First Edition (December 2018) Copyright Lenovo 2018.

About this documentation . . . . . . . . iii Chapter 1. Meet your computer . . . . . 1

. . 1 Front . . 2 Base . 3

. . Left

. . Right . 4

. 5 Features and specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 2. Get started with your computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

. 7 Get started with Windows 10 . 7 Windows account . . 8 Windows user interface . . Windows label

. . 9

. Connect to Wi-Fi networks . . 9

. 10 Use Lenovo Vantage . . 11 Interact with your computer . . . 11

. 12

. . 12

. . 12

. . 13

. . . . . . . . . . . . Use multimedia . . Use audio . . Use the camera . . Connect to an external display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hotkeys . . . . . . Check the battery status Charge the battery . . Check the battery temperature . . . Maximize the battery life

. Set power button behaviors . . . Set the power plan . . Chapter 3. Explore your computer . . 15

. 15 Manage power . 15

. 15

. 15

. 15

. 15

. 16

. 16

. 16

. 16

. 17

. Connect a Bluetooth-enabled device. Use an SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . Airplane mode . Transfer data . . . . . . . . Chapter 4. Secure your computer and information . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Use passwords . 19

. 19

. 19

. 19

. 20

. 20

. . . . Password types . Set administrator password . . Change or remove administrator password . Set user password . . . Enable power-on password . . . . . . . . . Set hard disk password . . Change or remove hard disk password . Use the fingerprint reader (for selected models)

. Use firewalls and antivirus programs. . . 20

. 21

. 21

. 21

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 5. Configure advanced settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

. 23 UEFI/BIOS . 23

. 23

. 23

. 23

. 24

. 24

. 24

. 24

. 24

. What is UEFI/BIOS setup utility . Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility . Navigate in the BIOS interface . Change the startup sequence . Set the system date and time. Enable/Disable hotkey mode . Enable/Disable always-on . . . Update UEFI/BIOS . . Recovery information . . . Restore system files and settings to an earlier

. . point

. . Restore your files from a backup . . . Reset your computer . . Use advanced options . . . Windows automatic recovery. Create and use a recovery USB device . 25

. 25

. 25

. 25

. 25

. 25

. . . . Chapter 6. Help and support

. Frequently asked questions . . Self-help resources . . Call Lenovo . . . Before you contact Lenovo . Lenovo Customer Support Center . Purchase additional services. . . . . . . . 27

. . 27

. 28

. . 29

. . 29

. . . 29

. 30

. . Appendix A. Important safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Appendix B. Accessibility and ergonomic information . . . . . . . . 45 Appendix C. Compliance information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Appendix D. Notices and trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Copyright Lenovo 2018 i ii Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide About this documentation Illustrations in this documentation might look different from your product. Depending on the model, some optional accessories, features, and software programs might not be available on your computer. Depending on the version of operating systems, some user interface instructions might not be applicable to your computer. Documentation content is subject to change without notice. Lenovo makes constant improvements on the documentation of your computer, including this User Guide. To get the latest documentation, go to https://

support.lenovo.com. Microsoft makes periodic feature changes to the Windows operating system through Windows Update. As a result, some information in this documentation might become outdated. Refer to Microsoft resources for the latest information. Copyright Lenovo 2018 iii iv Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide Chapter 1. Meet your computer Front 3 1 2 4 1 5 6 1. Microphones Capture or record sound and voice. 2. Camera 3. Shutter Take pictures or record videos by clicking Camera from the Start menu. If you use other apps that support photographing, video chatting, and video conference, the camera starts automatically when you enable the camera-required feature from the app. Slide the shutter to cover or uncover the camera lens. It is designed to protect your privacy. 4. Camera light If the light is on, the camera is in use. 5. Screen Displays text, graphics, and videos. 6. Wireless LAN/Bluetooth antennas Send and receive radio waves for the wireless LAN/Bluetooth module. Note: The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. Copyright Lenovo 2018 1 Base 1 2 3 4 1. Power button (with power indicator) 2. Numeric keypad Press to turn on the computer or put the computer to sleep mode. To turn off the computer, open the Start menu, click Power, and then select Shut down. The indicator on the power button shows the system status of your computer. Solid white/Solid amber: The computer is on. Off: The computer is off or in hibernation mode. Blinking slowly: The computer is in sleep mode. To enable or disable the numeric keypad, press the Num Lock key. Note: If the Num Lock light is on, the numeric keypad is in use. 3. Fingerprint reader*

Log in to your computer with enrolled fingerprints. See Use the fingerprint reader (for selected models) on page 21. 4. Touchpad Performs finger touch and all the functions of a traditional mouse.

* for selected models 2 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide Left 1 32 4 5 6 1. Power connector Connects to ac power through an ac power adapter. 2. Battery/Charging indicator This indicator shows whether the ac power is connected to the computer. White: connected to ac power (battery power 91% -100%) Amber: connected to ac power (battery power 0% -90%) Off: not connected to ac power 3. HDMIconnector Connects to a compatible digital audio device or video monitor, such as an HDTV. 4. USB-Cconnector 5. Audio connector Transfers data at USB 3.1 speed, up to 5 Gbps. Connects to USB-C accessories to expand computer functionality. To purchase USB-C accessories, go to https://www.lenovo.com/accessories. Note: When the battery power is below 10%, the connected USB-C accessories might not work correctly. Connects headphones or a headset with a 3.5-mm (0.14-inch) and 4-pole plug to listen to the sound from the computer. Note: The conventional microphone is not supported. 6. Speaker Produces sound. Chapter 1. Meet your computer 3 Right 1 32 4 5 6 1. Speaker Produces sound. 2. Power indicator 3. Novo button 4. SD-card slot The power indicator shows the system status of your computer. Solid white/Solid amber: The computer is on. Off: The computer is off or in hibernation mode. Blinking slowly: The computer is in sleep mode. When the computer is off, press this button to enter Novo Button Menu. Supported cards:

Secure Digital (SD) card Secure Digital eXtended-Capacity (SDXC) USH-1 card Secure Digital High-Capacity (SDHC) USH-1 card Note: Your computer does not support the content protection for recordable media

(CPRM) feature for the SD card. See Use an SD card on page 16. 5. USB 3.0 connector 6. Always On USB 3.0 connector Connect USB-compatible devices, such as a USB keyboard, USB mouse, USB storage device, or USB printer. To charge the USB-compatible devices when your computer is off, in sleep mode, or in hibernation mode, enable the Always On USB feature on your computer. See Enable/

Disable always-on on page 24. 4 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide Features and specifications Dimensions Width: 358 mm (14.09 inches) Depth: 245 mm (9.65 inches) Thickness: 16.9 mm (0.67 inches) Power source (ac power adapter) Sine-wave input at 50 Hz to 60 Hz Input rating of the ac power adapter: 100 V to 240 V ac, 50 Hz to 60 Hz Battery pack Microprocessor 52.5 Wh / 72 Wh 3 cells / 4 cells To view the microprocessor information of your computer, right-click the Start button and then click System. Memory Double data rate 4 (DDR4) Storage device Display Keyboard M.2 PCIe solid-state drive SSD+HDD*

Intel Optanememory*

Display size: 396.24 mm (15.6 inches) Display resolution: 1920 x 1080 pixels Function keys Numeric keypad Six-row keyboard (with backlight*) ac power connector Audio connector Two USB 3.0 connectors(including one Always On USB 3.0) USB-C connector HDMI connector SD-card slot Novo button Fingerprint reader*

Password Bluetooth Wireless LAN Camera Microphones Connectors and slots Security features Wireless features Others

* for selected models Note: The battery capacity is the typical or average capacity as measured in a specific test environment. Capacities measured in other environments may differ but are no lower than the rated capacity (see product label). Chapter 1. Meet your computer 5 6 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide Chapter 2. Get started with your computer Get started with Windows 10 Learn the basics of Windows 10 and start working with it right away. For more information about Windows 10, see the Windows help information. Windows account To use the Windows operating system, a user account is required. It can either be a Windows user account or a Microsoft account. Windows user account When you start Windows for the first time, you are prompted to create a Windows user account. This first account you created is of the Administrator type. With an Administrator account, you can create additional user accounts or change account types by doing the following:

1. Open the Start menu and select Settings Accounts Family & other people. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions. Microsoft account You can also log in to the Windows operating system with a Microsoft account. To create a Microsoft account, go to the Microsoft sign-up page at https://signup.live.com and follow the on-

screen instructions. With a Microsoft account, you can:

Enjoy one-time signing in if you are using other Microsoft services, such as OneDrive, Skype, and Outlook. com. Sync personalized settings across other Windows-based devices. Copyright Lenovo 2018 7 Windows user interface 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1. Account 2. Settings 3. Power 4. Start button 5. Windows Search 6. Task View Changes account settings, locks the computer, or signs out from the current account. Launch Settings. Shuts down, restarts, or puts the computer into sleep. Opens the Start menu. Type what you are looking for in the search box and get search results from your computer and the Web. Displays all opened apps and switches among them. 7. Windows notification area Displays notifications and status of some features. 8. Battery status icon 9. Network icon 10. Action center Displays power status and changes battery or power settings. When your computer is not connected to ac power, the icon changes to

. Connects to an available wireless network and displays the network status. Displays the latest notifications from apps and provides quick access to some features. Open the Start menu Click the Start button. Press the Windows logo key on the keyboard. Access Control Panel Open the Start menu and click Windows System Control Panel. 8 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide Use Windows Search. Launch an app Open the Start menu and select the app you want to launch. Use Windows Search. Windows label Your computer might have a Windows 10 Genuine Microsoft label affixed to its cover depending on the following factors:

Your geographic location Edition of Windows 10 that is preinstalled Go to https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/howtotell/Hardware.aspx for illustrations of the various types of Genuine Microsoft labels. In the Peoples Republic of China, the Genuine Microsoft label is required on all computer models preinstalled with any version of Windows 10. In other countries and regions, the Genuine Microsoft label is required only on computer models licensed for Windows 10 Pro. The absence of a Genuine Microsoft label does not indicate that the preinstalled Windows version is not genuine. For details on how to tell whether your preinstalled Windows product is genuine, refer to the information provided by Microsoft at:

https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/howtotell/default.aspx There are no external, visual indicators of the Product ID or Windows version for which the computer is licensed. Instead, the Product ID is recorded in the computer firmware. Whenever a Windows 10 product is installed, the installation program checks the computer firmware for a valid, matching Product ID to complete the activation. In some cases, an earlier Windows version might be preinstalled under the terms of the Windows 10 Pro license downgrade rights. Connect to Wi-Fi networks Your computer helps you connect to the world through a wireless network. 1. Click the network icon in the Windows notification area. A list of available wireless networks is displayed. 2. Select a network to connect to. Provide required information if needed. Chapter 2. Get started with your computer 9 Use Lenovo Vantage The preinstalled Lenovo Vantage is a customized one-stop solution to help you maintain your computer with automated updates and fixes, configure hardware settings, and get personalized support. Access Lenovo Vantage Open the Start menu and click Lenovo Vantage. You also can type in the search box. To download the latest version of Lenovo Vantage, go to Microsoft Store and search by the app name. Key features Lenovo Vantage makes periodic updates of the features to keep improving your experience with your computer. Note: The available features vary depending on the computer model. System Update Download and install firmware and driver updates to keep your computer up-to-date. You can configure the options to install updates automatically when available. Hardware Settings Configure intelligent settings of the following hardware to make your computer smarter to use:

Always On USB Battery Camera Computer display Keyboard Microphones Speakers Touchpad Health & Support Monitor your computer health and get personalized support of your computer. You can:

Scan the computer hardware and diagnose hardware problems. Look up computer warranty status (online). Access User Guide. Read tips and tricks articles customized for your computer. Security Advisor Make sure that your computer is always staying protected and safe. 10 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide Interact with your computer Your computer provides you various ways to navigate the screen. Hotkeys Some keys on the keyboard are printed with icons. These keys are called hotkeys and can be pressed alone or in combination with the Fn key to access certain Windows functions or settings quickly. The functions of hotkeys are symbolized by the icons printed on them. Hotkey Function Mutes/Unmutes the computer. If you mute the computer and turn off your computer, the speakers remain muted when you turn on your computer.

/

/

Decreases/Increases volume. Enables/Disables the microphones. Refreshes the current window. Enables/Disables the touchpad. Turns on/off airplane mode. Enables/Disables the camera. Locks the current user account. Manages external displays. Decreases/Increases display brightness. Turns on/off or adjusts the brightness of the keyboard backlight. Note: This hotkey must be used with the Fn key. Hotkey mode Some hotkeys share keys with functions keys (F1 to F12). The hotkey mode is a UEFI/BIOS setting that changes how hotkeys (or function keys) are used. Hotkey mode setting How to use hotkeys How to use function keys Disabled Enabled Hold down the Fn key and press one of the hotkeys. Press the hotkeys directly. Press the function keys directly. Hold down the Fn key and press one of the function keys. Note: Hotkeys that do not share keys with function keys are not affected by the hotkey mode setting. They should always be used with the Fn key. Chapter 2. Get started with your computer 11 Use multimedia Use your computer for business or entertainment with the built-in components (camera, speakers, and audio features) or connected external devices (an external projector, monitor, and HDTV). Use audio To enhance your listening experience, connect speakers, headphones, or a headset with a 3.5-mm (0.14-

inch) and 4-pole plug to the audio connector. Change the sound settings 1. Go to Control Panel and view by category. 2. Click Hardware and Sound Sound. 3. Change the settings as you prefer. Use the camera You can use the built-in camera to take photos or record videos. The indicator next to the camera turns on when the camera is activated. To take photos or record a video:

1. Open the Start menu and click Camera. 2. To take a photo, click the camera icon

. If you want to record video, click the video icon

. If you use other programs that provide features such as photographing, video capturing, and video conference, the camera starts automatically when you enable the camera-required feature. To configure the camera settings:

1. Open the Start menu and then click Lenovo Vantage Hardware Settings Audio/Visual. 2. Locate the Camera section and then follow the on-screen instructions. 12 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide Connect to an external display Connect your computer to a projector or a monitor to give presentations or expand your workspace. Connect to a wired display 1. Connect the external display to an appropriate video connector on your computer, such as the HDMI connector. 2. Connect the external display to an electrical outlet. 3. Turn on the external display. If your computer cannot detect the external display, right-click a blank area on the desktop, and then click Display settings Detect. Supported resolution The following table lists the supported maximum resolution of the external display. Connect the external display to the HDMI connector Supported resolution Up to 3840 x 2160 pixels / 30 Hz Connect a wireless display To use a wireless display, ensure that both your computer and the external display support the Miracast) Open the Start menu, and then click Settings Devices Bluetooth & other devices Add Bluetooth or other device. In the Add a device window, click Wireless display or dock. Then follow the on-screen instructions. Click the action center icon in the Windows notification area and click Connect. Select the wireless display and follow the on-screen instructions. Set the display mode Press and then select a display mode of your preference. PC screen only: Displays the video output only on your computer screen. Note: Depending on the situation, you might see Disconnect, PC screen only, Computer only, or Disconnect projector. Duplicate: Displays the same video output on both your computer screen and an external display. Extend: Extends the video output from your computer display to an external display. You can drag and move items between the two displays. Second screen only: Displays the video output only on an external display. Note: Depending on the situation, you might see Projector only or Second screen only. If you show programs using DirectDraw or Direct3D in full-screen mode, only the main display shows the video output. Change display settings 1. Right-click a blank area on the desktop and select Display settings. 2. Select the display that you want to configure. 3. Change display settings of your preference. Chapter 2. Get started with your computer 13 You can change the settings for both the computer display and the external display. For example, you can define which one is the main display and which one is the secondary display. You also can change the resolution and orientation. Note: If you set a higher resolution for the computer display than the external display, only part of the screen can be displayed on the external display. 14 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide Chapter 3. Explore your computer Manage power Use the information in this section to achieve the best balance between performance and power efficiency. Check the battery status You can check the battery status as follows. When the computer is on, click the battery status icon or in the Windows notification area. You can check the battery power remaining, view the current power plan, and access battery settings quickly. A warning message is displayed when the battery is low. When the computer is off, press any key on the keyboard (except the power button) to check the battery power remaining. Note: A battery icon will display for 3 seconds and then disappear. Charge the battery When the battery power is low, charge your battery by connecting your computer to ac power. Battery charging is affected by its temperature. The recommended battery temperature range for charging the battery is between 10C (50F) and 35C (95F). Note: To maximize the life of the battery, the computer does not start recharging the battery if the remaining power is greater than 95%. Check the battery temperature 1. Open the Start menu and click Lenovo Vantage. 2. Click Hardware Settings Power. 3. Locate the Power Status section and then click Show Details to view the battery temperature. Maximize the battery life Lower the brightness of the computer display. Turn off the wireless features when not in use. Use the battery until the charge is depleted. Recharge the battery completely before using it. Set power button behaviors You can define what the power button does according to your preference. For example, by pressing the power button, you can turn off the computer or put the computer to sleep or hibernation mode. To change what the power button does:

1. Right-click the battery status icon in the Windows notification area. 2. Click Power Options Choose what the power button does. 3. Change the settings as you prefer. Copyright Lenovo 2018 15 Set the power plan For ENERGY STAR compliant computers, the following power plan takes effect when your computers have been idle for a specified duration:

Table 1. Default power plan (when plugged into ac power) Turn off the display: After 10 minutes Put the computer to sleep: After 30 minutes To reset the power plan to achieve the best balance between performance and power saving:

1. Right-click the battery status icon and select Power Options. 2. Choose or customize a power plan of your preference. Transfer data Quickly share your files using the built-in Bluetooth among devices with the same features. You also can insert an SD card to transfer data. Connect a Bluetooth-enabled device You can connect all types of Bluetooth device to your computer, such as a keyboard, a mouse, a smartphone, or speakers. The devices must be within a short distance, usually 10 meters (33 feet), from the computer. 1. Open the Start menu, and then click Settings Devices Bluetooth & other devices. Turn on the Bluetooth switch. 2. Click Add Bluetooth or other device Bluetooth. 3. Select a Bluetooth device, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Your Bluetooth-enabled device and computer will automatically connect the next time if the two devices are in range of each other with Bluetooth turned on. You can use Bluetooth for data transfer or remote control and communication. Use an SD card If your computer has an SD-card slot, read the following information. Install the card 1. Locate the card slot. See Right on page 4. 2. Ensure that the metal contacts are facing upward and pointing toward the card slot. 3. Insert the card firmly into the card slot. Remove the card Attention: Before removing a card, eject the card from the Windows operating system first. Otherwise, data on the card might get corrupted or lost. 1. Click the triangular icon in the Windows notification area to show hidden icons. Then, right-click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon. 2. Select the corresponding item to eject the card from the Windows operating system. 3. Press the card and remove it from your computer. Store the card safely for future use. 16 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide Airplane mode When the Airplane mode is enabled, all wireless features are disabled. To enable or disable the Airplane mode:

1. Open the Start menu. 2. Click Settings Network & Internet Airplane mode. 3. Turn on or turn off the Airplane mode switch. Chapter 3. Explore your computer 17 18 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide Chapter 4. Secure your computer and information Use passwords This section introduces types of passwords in UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) or BIOS (Basic Input/Output System) and how to set, change, and remove a password. Password types You can set various passwords in the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. Password type Pre-requisite When set Administrator password No You must enter it to start the setup utility. User password The administrator password must be set. You can use the user password to start the setup utility. Master hard disk password No User hard disk password The master hard disk password must be set. You must enter it to start the operating system. You can use the user hard disk password to start the operating system. Notes:

All passwords set in the setup utility consist of alphanumeric characters only. If you start the setup utility using the user password, you can only change a few settings. Set administrator password You set the administrator password to prevent unauthorized access to the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. Attention: If you forget the administrator password, a Lenovo authorized service personnel cannot reset your password. You must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized service personnel or a marketing representative to have the system board replaced. Proof of purchase is required and a fee will be charged for parts and service. Step 1. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. Step 2. Select Security Set Administrator Password and press Enter. Step 3. Enter a password string that contains only letters and numbers. Then press Enter. Step 4. Enter the password again and press Enter. Step 5. Select Exit Exit Saving Changes. Next time you start the computer, you must enter the administrator password to start the setup utility. If Power on Password is enabled, you must enter the administrator password or the user password to start the computer. Change or remove administrator password Only the administrator can change or remove the administrator password. Copyright Lenovo 2018 19 Step 1. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility using the administrator password. Step 2. Select Security Set User Password and press Enter. Step 3. Enter the current password. Step 4. Step 5. In the Enter New Password text box, enter the new password. In the Confirm New Password text box, enter the new password again. Note: If you want to remove the password, press Enter in both text boxes and do not enter any character. Step 6. Select Exit Exit Saving Changes. If you remove the administrator password, the user password is also removed. Set user password Before you can set up user password, the administrator password must be set. The administrator of the setup utility might need to set up a user password for use by others. Step 1. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility using the administrator password. Step 2. Select Security Set User Password and press Enter. Step 3. Enter a password string that contains only letters and numbers; press Enter. Note: The user password must be different from the administrator password. Step 4. Enter the password again and press Enter. Step 5. Select Exit Exit Saving Changes. Enable power-on password If the administrator password has been set, you can enable power-on password to enforce greater security. Step 1. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. Step 2. Select Security Power on Password and press Enter. Note: The administrator password must be set in advance. Step 3. Change the setting to Enabled. Step 4. Select Exit Exit Saving Changes. If power-on password is enabled, a prompt appears on the screen every time you turn on the computer. You must enter the administrator or user password to start the computer. Set hard disk password You can set a hard disk password in the setup utility to prevent unauthorized access to your data. Attention: Be extremely careful when setting a hard disk password. If you forget the hard disk password, a Lenovo authorized service personnel cannot reset your password or recover data from the hard disk. You must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized service personnel or a marketing representative to have the hard disk drive replaced. Proof of purchase is required and a fee will be charged for parts and service. Step 1. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. Step 2. Select Security Set Hard Disk Password and press Enter. 20 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide Note: If you start the setup utility using the user password, you cannot set hard disk password. Step 3. Follow on-screen instructions to set both the master and the user passwords. Note: The master and user hard disk passwords must be set at the same time. Step 4. Select Exit Exit Saving Changes. If the hard disk password is set, you must enter the correct password to start the operating system. Change or remove hard disk password Step 1. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. Step 2. Select Security. Step 3. Change or remove the hard disk password. To change or remove master password, select Change Master Password and press Enter. Note: If you remove the master hard disk password, the user hard disk password is also removed. To change user password, select Change User Password and press Enter. Note: The user hard disk password cannot be removed separately. Step 4. Select Exit Exit Saving Changes. Use the fingerprint reader (for selected models) If your computer includes a fingerprint reader, you can use it to enroll your fingerprints. After enrollment, you can tap your finger on the fingerprint reader to sign in to Windows. Enroll your fingerprints Open the Start menu and then click Settings Accounts Sign-in options. Then, follow the on-screen instructions to finish the enrollment. Notes:

You need to add a password before setting fingerprints. It is recommended to enroll more than one fingerprint in case of any injuries to your fingers. Maintain the fingerprint reader To ensure that the fingerprint reader works correctly, do not:

Scratch the surface of the reader with anything hard. Use or touch the reader with a wet, dirty, wrinkled, or injured finger. Use firewalls and antivirus programs Your computer might be preinstalled with a firewall program. The firewall protects against computer Internet security threats, unauthorized access, intrusions, and Internet attacks. It also protects your privacy. A full version of antivirus program is provided with a free 30-day subscription. After 30 days, you must renew the license to continue receiving the antivirus program updates. For more information, see the help system of the program. Chapter 4. Secure your computer and information 21 22 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide Chapter 5. Configure advanced settings This chapter provides information about UEFI/BIOS and system recovery. UEFI/BIOS This section introduces what is UEFI/BIOS and the operations you can perform in UEFI/BIOS. What is UEFI/BIOS setup utility UEFI/BIOS is the first program that the computer runs when the computer is turned on. UEFI/BIOS initializes the hardware components and loads the operating system and other programs. Your computer may include a setup program (setup utility) with which you can change UEFI/BIOS settings. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility Step 1. Press the Novo button with an expanded paper clip (or similar slender object) when your computer is off. Step 2. Select BIOS Setup from Novo Button Menu. Navigate in the BIOS interface You can navigate in the BIOS interface by pressing the following keys:

F1 F9 F10 F5 F6

Esc Displays the General Help screen. Restores to the default settings. Saves your configuration and exits. Changes to a lower value. Changes to a higher value. Locates an item. Selects a tab. Exits the submenu and returns to the parent menu. Enter Enters the selected tab or submenu. Change the startup sequence 1. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. 2. Select Boot. The default device order list is displayed. Note: The Boot menu is displayed if the computer cannot start from any devices or the operating system cannot be found. 3. Set the startup sequence as desired. 4. Press F10 to save the changes and restart the computer. To change the startup sequence temporarily:

1. Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F12. Copyright Lenovo 2018 23 Note: For computers with Hotkey mode enabled, press Fn+F12. 2. Select the device that you want the computer to start from and press Enter. Set the system date and time 1. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. 2. Select Configuration System Time/System Date and set the system date and time as desired. 3. Press F10 to save changes and exit. Enable/Disable hotkey mode Step 1. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. Step 2. Select Configuration Hotkey Mode and press Enter. Change the setting to Disabled or Enabled. Step 3. Select Exit Exit Saving Changes. Enable/Disable always-on For some Lenovo computers with always-on connectors, the always-on function can be enabled/disabled in the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. Step 1. Start the UEFI/BIOS setup utility. Step 2. Select Configuration Always On USB and press Enter; change the setting to Disabled or Enabled. Step 3. Select Exit Exit Saving Changes. Note: If Lenovo Vantage (software) is pre-installed on your computer, you can also enable/disable always-on in it. Update UEFI/BIOS When you install a new program, device driver, or hardware component, you might need to update UEFI/

BIOS. Download and install the latest UEFI/BIOS update package by one of the following methods:

From Lenovo Vantage:

1. Open the Start menu and click Lenovo Vantage. 2. Click System Update. In the Lenovo System Update section, click Check for updates. The available update packages are displayed and categorized by critical, recommended, or optional. 3. If the latest UEFI/BIOS update package is available, select the package and click Install selected. Then, the update package will be downloaded and installed automatically. From the Lenovo Support Web site:

Go to https://support.lenovo.com and select the entry for your computer. Then, follow the on-screen instructions to download and install the latest UEFI/BIOS update package. Recovery information This section introduces the recovery information of the Windows 10 operating system. Ensure that you read and follow the on-screen recovery instructions. The data on your computer might be deleted during the recovery process. To avoid data loss, make a backup copy of all the data that you want to keep. 24 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide Restore system files and settings to an earlier point 1. Go to Control Panel and view by Large icons or Small icons. 2. Click Recovery Open System Restore. Then follow the on-screen instructions. Restore your files from a backup If you use the File History tool to restore your files from a backup, ensure that you backed up your data earlier with the tool. 1. Go to Control Panel and view by Large icons or Small icons. 2. Click File History Restore personal files.Then follow the on-screen instructions. Reset your computer In the resetting process, you can choose to keep your files or remove them when you reinstall the operating system. Note: The items in the graphical user interface (GUI) might change without notice. 1. Open the Start menu, and then click Settings Update & Security Recovery. 2. In the Reset this PC section, click Get started. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to reset your computer. Use advanced options Note: The items in the graphical user interface (GUI) might change without notice. 1. Open the Start menu, and then click Settings Update & security Recovery. 2. In the Advanced startup section, click Restart now Troubleshoot Advanced options. 3. Select a preferred option from the following list, and then follow the on-screen instructions. System Restore: Use a restore point recorded on your PC to restore Windows. Go back to the previous version System Image Recovery: Recover Windows using a specific system image file. Startup Repair: Fix problems that keep Windows from loading. Command Prompt: Use the Command Prompt for advanced troubleshooting. UEFI Firmware Settings: Change settings in your PCs UEFI firmware. Startup Settings: Change Windows startup behavior. Windows automatic recovery Note: Ensure that your computer is connected to ac power during the recovery process. The Windows recovery environment on your computer operates independently from the Windows 10 operating system. It enables you to recover or repair the operating system even if the Windows 10 operating system fails to start. After two consecutive failed boot attempts, the Windows recovery environment starts automatically. Then you can choose repair and recovery options by following the on-screen instructions. Create and use a recovery USB device It is recommended that you create a recovery USB drive as early as possible as a backup for the Windows recovery programs. With the recovery USB drive, you can troubleshoot and fix the problems even if the Chapter 5. Configure advanced settings 25 preinstalled Windows recovery programs are damaged. If you did not create a recovery USB drive as a precautionary measure, you can contact Lenovo Customer Support Center and purchase one from Lenovo. For a list of the Lenovo Support phone numbers for your country or region, go to https://

pcsupport.lenovo.com/supportphonelist. Create a recovery USB drive Attention: The creation process deletes anything stored on the USB drive. To avoid data loss, make a backup copy of all the data that you want to keep. 1. Ensure that your computer is connected to ac power. 2. Prepare a USB drive with at least 16 GB of storage capacity. The actual USB capacity required depends on the size of the recovery image. 3. Connect the prepared USB drive to the computer. 4. Type in the search box. Then click Create a recovery drive. 5. Click Yes in the User Account Control window to allow the Recovery Media Creator program to start. 6. In the Recovery Drive window, follow the on-screen instructions to create a recovery USB drive. Use the recovery USB drive 1. Ensure that your computer is connected to ac power. 2. Connect the recovery USB drive to the computer. 3. Turn on or restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F12. The Boot Menu window opens. 4. Select the recovery USB drive as the boot device. 5. Click Troubleshoot to display optional recovery solutions. 6. Select a recovery solution as desired. Then follow the on-screen instructions to complete the process. 26 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide Chapter 6. Help and support Frequently asked questions How do I access Control Panel?

Open the Start menu and click Windows System Control Panel. Use Windows Search. How do I turn off my computer?

Open the Start menu and click Power. Then click Shut down. How do I partition my storage drive?

https://support.lenovo.com/solutions/ht503851 What do I do if my computer stops responding. Press and hold the power button until the computer turns off. Then restart the computer. What do I do if I spill liquid on the computer?

1. Carefully unplug the ac power adapter and turn off the computer immediately. The more quickly you stop the current from passing through the computer the more likely you will reduce damage from short circuits. Attention: Although you might lose some data or work by turning off the computer immediately, leaving the computer on might make your computer unusable. 2. Do not try to drain out the liquid by turning over the computer. If your computer has keyboard drainage holes on the bottom, the liquid will be drained out through the holes. 3. Wait until you are certain that all the liquid is dry before turning on your computer. Where can I get the latest device drivers and UEFI/BIOS?

From Lenovo Vantage. See Update UEFI/BIOS on page 24. Download from Lenovo Support Web site at https://support.lenovo.com. Copyright Lenovo 2018 27 Self-help resources Use the following self-help resources to learn more about the computer and troubleshoot problems. Resources How to access?

Use Lenovo Vantage to:

Download and install the latest drivers and firmware. Configure hardware settings. Diagnose computer hardware problems. Check the computer warranty status. Protect you computer from malicious Wi-Fi networks. Product documentation:

Safety and Warranty Guide Setup Guide This User Guide Regulatory Notice Lenovo Support Web site with the latest support information of the following:

Drivers and software Diagnostic solutions Product and service warranty Product and parts details Knowledge base and frequently asked questions Windows help information Open the Start menu and click Lenovo Vantage. Use Windows Search. 1. Go to https://support.lenovo.com. 2. Detect your computer or select computer model manually. 3. Select Documentation and filter out the documentation you want. https://support.lenovo.com Open the Start menu and click Get Help or Tips. Use Windows Search or the Cortana personal assistant. Microsoft support Web site: https://

support.microsoft.com 28 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide Call Lenovo If you have tried to correct the problem yourself and still need help, you can call Lenovo Customer Support Center. Before you contact Lenovo Prepare the following before you contact Lenovo:

1. Record the problem symptoms and details:

What is the problem? Is it continuous or intermittent?

Any error message or error code?

What operating system are you using? Which version?

Which software applications were running at the time of the problem?

Can the problem be reproduced? If so, how?

2. Record the system information:

Product name Machine type and serial number The following illustration shows where to find the machine type and serial number of your computer. Lenovo Customer Support Center During the warranty period, you can call Lenovo Customer Support Center for help. Telephone numbers For a list of the Lenovo Support phone numbers for your country or region:

Go to https://pcsupport.lenovo.com/supportphonelist for the latest phone numbers. Refer to the Safety and Warranty Guide that comes with your computer. Note: Phone numbers are subject to change without notice. If the number for your country or region is not provided, contact your Lenovo reseller or Lenovo marketing representative. Services available during the warranty period Problem determination - Trained personnel are available to assist you with determining if you have a hardware problem and deciding what action is necessary to fix the problem. Chapter 6. Help and support 29 Lenovo hardware repair - If the problem is determined to be caused by Lenovo hardware under warranty, trained service personnel are available to provide the applicable level of service. Engineering change management - Occasionally, there might be changes that are required after a product has been sold. Lenovo or your reseller, if authorized by Lenovo, will make selected Engineering Changes

(ECs) that apply to your hardware available. Services not covered Replacement or use of parts not manufactured for or by Lenovo or nonwarranted parts Identification of software problem sources Configuration of UEFI/BIOS as part of an installation or upgrade Changes, modifications, or upgrades to device drivers Installation and maintenance of network operating systems (NOS) Installation and maintenance of programs For the terms and conditions of the Lenovo Limited Warranty that apply to your Lenovo hardware product, see Warranty information in the Safety and Warranty Guide that comes with your computer. Purchase additional services During and after the warranty period, you can purchase additional services from Lenovo at https://

www.lenovo.com/services. Service availability and service name might vary by country or region. 30 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide Appendix A. Important safety information Safety notices This information can help you safely use your computer. Follow and retain all information included with your computer. The information in this document does not alter the terms of your purchase agreement or the Limited Warranty. For more information, see "Warranty Information" in the Safety and Warranty Guide that comes with your computer. Customer safety is important. Our products are developed to be safe and effective. However, personal computers are electronic devices. Power cords, power adapters, and other features can create potential safety risks that can result in physical injury or property damage, especially if misused. To reduce these risks, follow the instructions included with your product, observe all warnings on the product and in the operating instructions, and review the information included in this document carefully. By carefully following the information contained in this document and provided with your product, you can help protect yourself from hazards and create a safer computer work environment. Note: This information includes references to power adapters and batteries. In addition, some products

(such as speakers and monitors) ship with external power adapters. If you have such a product, this information applies to your product. In addition, computer products contain a coin-sized internal battery that provides power to the system clock even when the computer is unplugged, so the battery safety information applies to all computer products. Important information about using your computer Ensure that you follow the important tips given here to get the most use and enjoyment out of your computer. Failure to do so might lead to discomfort or injury, or cause the computer to fail. Protect yourself from the heat that your computer generates. When your computer is turned on or the battery is charging, the base, the palm rest, and some other parts may become hot. The temperature they reach depends on the amount of system activity and the level of charge in the battery. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, could cause discomfort or even a skin burn. Avoid keeping your hands, your lap, or any other part of your body in contact with a hot section of the computer for any extended time. Periodically take hands from using the keyboard by lifting your hands from the palm rest. Copyright Lenovo 2018 31 Protect yourself from the heat generated by the ac power adapter. When the ac power adapter is connected to an electrical outlet and your computer, it generates heat. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, may cause a skin burn. Do not place the ac power adapter in contact with any part of your body while it is in use. Never use it to warm your body. Do not wrap the cords around the ac power adapter while in use. Prevent your computer from getting wet. To avoid spills and the danger of electrical shock, keep liquids away from your computer. Protect the cables from being damaged. Applying strong force to cables may damage or break them. Route communication lines, or the cables of an ac power adapter, a mouse, a keyboard, a printer, or any other electronic device, so that they cannot be walked on, tripped over, pinched by your computer or other objects, or in any way subject to treatment that could interfere with the operation of your computer. Protect your computer and data when moving it. Before moving a computer equipped with a hard disk drive, do one of the following:

Turn it off. Put it in sleep mode. Put it in hibernation mode. This helps to prevent damage to the computer, and possible loss of data. 32 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide Handle your computer gently. Carry your computer carefully. Do not drop, bump, scratch, twist, hit, vibrate, push, or place heavy objects on your computer, display, or external devices. Use a quality carrying case that provides adequate cushioning and protection. Do not pack your computer in a tightly packed suitcase or bag. Before putting your computer in a carrying case, make sure that it is off, in sleep mode, or in hibernation mode. Do not put a computer in a carrying case while it is turned on. Conditions that require immediate action Products can become damaged due to misuse or neglect. Some product damage is serious enough that the product should not be used again until it has been inspected and, if necessary, repaired by an authorized servicer. As with any electronic device, pay close attention to the product when it is turned on. On very rare occasions, you might notice an odor or see a puff of smoke or sparks vent from your product. Or you might hear sounds like popping, cracking, or hissing. These might merely mean that an internal electronic component has failed in a safe and controlled manner. Or, they might indicate a potential safety issue. Do not take risks or attempt to diagnose the situation yourself. Contact the Customer Support Center for further guidance. For a list of Service and Support phone numbers, see the following Web site:

https://pcsupport.lenovo.com/supportphonelist Frequently inspect your computer and its components for damage or wear or signs of danger. If you have any question about the condition of a component, do not use the product. Contact the Customer Support Center or the product manufacturer for instructions on how to inspect the product and have it repaired, if necessary. In the unlikely event that you notice any of the following conditions, or if you have any safety concerns with your product, stop using the product and unplug it from the power source and telecommunication lines until you can speak to the Customer Support Center for further guidance. Appendix A. Important safety information 33 Power cords, plugs, power adapters, extension cords, surge protectors, or power supplies that are cracked, broken, or damaged. Signs of overheating, smoke, sparks, or fire. Damage to a battery (such as cracks, dents, or creases), discharge from a battery, or a buildup of foreign substances on the battery. A cracking, hissing, or popping sound, or strong odor that comes from the product. Signs that liquid has been spilled or an object has fallen onto the computer product, the power cord, or power adapter. The computer product, power cord, or power adapter has been exposed to water. The product has been dropped or damaged in any way. The product does not operate normally when you follow the operating instructions. Note: If you notice these conditions with a product (such as an extension cord) that is not manufactured for or by Lenovo, stop using that product until you can contact the product manufacturer for further instructions, or until you get a suitable replacement. Service and upgrades Do not attempt to service a product yourself unless instructed to do so by the Customer Support Center or your documentation. Only use a Service Provider who is approved to repair your particular product. Note: Some computer parts can be upgraded or replaced by the customer. Upgrades typically are referred to as options. Replacement parts approved for customer installation are referred to as Customer Replaceable Units, or CRUs. Lenovo provides documentation with instructions when it is appropriate for customers to install options or replace CRUs. You must closely follow all instructions when installing or replacing parts. The Off state of a power indicator does not necessarily mean that voltage levels inside a product are zero. Before you remove the covers from a product equipped with a power cord, always ensure that the power is turned off and that the product is unplugged from any power source. If you have any questions or concerns, contact the Customer Support Center. Although there are no moving parts in your computer after the power cord has been disconnected, the following warnings are required for your safety. Keep fingers and other parts of your body away from hazardous, moving parts. If you suffer an injury, seek medical care immediately. Avoid contact with hot components inside the computer. During operation, some components become hot enough to burn the skin. Before you open the computer cover, turn off the computer, disconnect power, and wait approximately 10 minutes for the components to cool. After replacing a CRU, reinstall all protective covers, including the computer cover, before connecting power and operating the computer. This action is important to help prevent unexpected electrical shock and help ensure the containment of an unexpected fire that could happen under extremely rare conditions. 34 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide When replacing CRUs, be cautious of sharp edges or corners that might cause injury. If you suffer an injury, seek medical care immediately. Power cords and power adapters DANGER Use only the power cords and power adapters supplied by the product manufacturer. The power cords shall be safety approved. For Germany, it shall be H03VV-F, 3G, 0.75 mm2, or better. For other countries, the suitable types shall be used accordingly. Never wrap a power cord around a power adapter or other object. Doing so can stress the cord in ways that can cause the cord to fray, crack, or crimp. This can present a safety hazard. Always route power cords so that they will not be walked on, tripped over, or pinched by objects. Protect power cords and power adapters from liquids. For instance, do not leave your power cord or power adapter near sinks, tubs, toilets, or on floors that are cleaned with liquid cleansers. Liquids can cause a short circuit, particularly if the power cord or power adapter has been stressed by misuse. Liquids also can cause gradual corrosion of power cord terminals and/or the connector terminals on a power adapter, which can eventually result in overheating. Ensure that all power cord connectors are securely and completely plugged into receptacles. Do not use any power adapter that shows corrosion at the ac input pins or shows signs of overheating (such as deformed plastic) at the ac input pins or anywhere on the power adapter. Do not use any power cords where the electrical contacts on either end show signs of corrosion or overheating or where the power cord appears to have been damaged in any way. To prevent possible overheating, do not cover the power adapter with clothing or other objects when the power adapter is plugged into an electrical outlet. Extension cords and related devices Ensure that extension cords, surge protectors, uninterruptible power supplies, and power strips that you use are rated to handle the electrical requirements of the product. Never overload these devices. If power strips are used, the load should not exceed the power strip input rating. Consult an electrician for more information if you have questions about power loads, power requirements, and input ratings. Appendix A. Important safety information 35 Plugs and outlets DANGER If a receptacle (power outlet) that you intend to use with your computer equipment appears to be damaged or corroded, do not use the outlet until it is replaced by a qualified electrician. Do not bend or modify the plug. If the plug is damaged, contact the manufacturer to obtain a replacement. Do not share an electrical outlet with other home or commercial appliances that draw large amounts of electricity; otherwise, unstable voltage might damage your computer, data, or attached devices. Some products are equipped with a three-pronged plug. This plug fits only into a grounded electrical outlet. This is a safety feature. Do not defeat this safety feature by trying to insert it into a non-grounded outlet. If you cannot insert the plug into the outlet, contact an electrician for an approved outlet adapter or to replace the outlet with one that enables this safety feature. Never overload an electrical outlet. The overall system load should not exceed 80 percent of the branch circuit rating. Consult an electrician for more information if you have questions about power loads and branch circuit ratings. Be sure that the power outlet you are using is properly wired, easily accessible, and located close to the equipment. Do not fully extend power cords in a way that will stress the cords. Be sure that the power outlet provides the correct voltage and current for the product you are installing. Carefully connect and disconnect the equipment from the electrical outlet. Power supply statement Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following label attached. Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact a service technician. External devices CAUTION:

Do not connect or disconnect any external device cables other than Universal Serial Bus (USB) and 1394 cables while the computer power is on; otherwise, you might damage your computer. To avoid possible damage to attached devices, wait at least five seconds after the computer is shut down to disconnect external devices. 36 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide General battery notice DANGER Batteries supplied by Lenovo for use with your product have been tested for compatibility and should only be replaced with approved parts. A battery other than the one specified by Lenovo, or a disassembled or modified battery is not covered by the warranty. Battery abuse or mishandling can cause overheat, liquid leakage, or an explosion. To avoid possible injury, do the following:

Do not open, dissemble, or service any battery. Do not crush or puncture the battery. Do not short-circuit the battery, or expose it to water or other liquids. Keep the battery away from children. Keep the battery away from fire. Stop using the battery if it is damaged, or if you notice any discharge or the buildup of foreign materials on the battery leads. Store the rechargeable batteries or products containing the rechargeable batteries at room temperature, charged to approximately 30 to 50% of capacity. We recommend that the batteries be charged about once per year to prevent overdischarge. Do not put the battery in trash that is disposed of in landfills. When disposing of the battery, comply with local ordinances or regulations. Notice for removable rechargeable battery DANGER Only recharge the battery strictly according to instructions included in the product documentation. If the battery is incorrectly replaced, there is danger of an explosion. The battery contains a small amount of harmful substances. Notice for built-in rechargeable battery DANGER Do not attempt to remove or replace the built-in rechargeable battery. Replacement of the battery must be done by a Lenovo-authorized repair facility or technician. Only recharge the battery strictly according to instructions included in the product documentation. The Lenovo-authorized repair facilities or technicians recycle Lenovo batteries according to local laws and regulations. Appendix A. Important safety information 37 Lithium coin-cell battery notice DANGER Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. If the coin-cell battery is not a CRU, do not attempt to replace the coin-cell battery. Replacement of the battery must be done by a Lenovo-authorized repair facility or technician. The Lenovo-authorized repair facilities or technicians recycle Lenovo batteries according to local laws and regulations. When replacing the lithium coin-cell battery, use only the same type or equivalent type that is recommended by the manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can explode if not properly used, handled, or disposed of. Swallowing the lithium coin-cell battery will cause chocking or severe internal burns in just two hours and might even result in death. Keep batteries away from children. If the lithium coin-cell battery is swallowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek medical care immediately. Do not:

Throw or immerse into water Heat to more than 100 C (212F). Repair or disassemble Leave in an extremely low air pressure environment Leave in an extremely high-temperature environment Crush, puncture, cut, or incinerate Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations. The following statement applies to users in the state of California, U.S.A. California Perchlorate Information:

Products containing manganese dioxide lithium coin-cell batteries may contain perchlorate. Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply, see https://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/

perchlorate/. 38 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide Heat and product ventilation DANGER Computers, ac power adapters, and many accessories can generate heat when turned on and when batteries are charging. Notebook computers can generate a significant amount of heat due to their compact size. Always follow these basic precautions:

When your computer is turned on or the battery is charging, the base, the palm rest, and some other parts may become hot. Avoid keeping your hands, your lap, or any other part of your body in contact with a hot section of the computer for any extended length of time. When you use the keyboard, avoid keeping your palms on the palm rest for a prolonged period of time. Your computer generates some heat during normal operation. The amount of heat depends on the amount of system activity and the battery charge level. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, could cause discomfort or even a skin burn. Periodically take breaks from using the keyboard by lifting your hands from the palm rest; and be careful not to use the keyboard for any extended length of time. Do not operate your computer or charge the battery near flammable materials or in explosive environments. Ventilation slots, fans and/or heat sinks are provided with the product for safety, comfort, and reliable operation. These features might inadvertently become blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, carpet, or other flexible surface. Never block, cover, or disable these features. When the ac power adapter is connected to an electrical outlet and your computer, it generates heat. Do not place the adapter in contact with any part of your body while using it. Never use the ac power adapter to warm your body. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, may cause a skin burn. For your safety, always follow these basic precautions with your computer:

Keep the cover closed whenever the computer is plugged in. Regularly inspect the outside of the computer for dust accumulation. Remove dust from vents and any perforations in the bezel. More frequent cleanings might be required for computers in dusty or high-traffic areas. Do not restrict or block any ventilation openings. Do not operate your computer inside furniture, as this might increase the risk of overheating. Airflow temperatures into the computer should not exceed 35C (95F). Appendix A. Important safety information 39 Electrical current safety information DANGER Electric current from power, telephone, and communication cables is hazardous. To avoid a shock hazard:

Do not use your computer during a lightning storm. Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet. Connect properly wired outlets to any equipment that will be attached to this product. Whenever possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables. Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage. Disconnect the attached power cords, battery, and all the cables before you open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures. Do not use your computer until all internal parts enclosures are fastened into place. Never use the computer when internal parts and circuits are exposed. DANGER Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following procedures when installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices. To connect:

To disconnect:

1. Turn everything OFF. 2. First, attach all cables to devices. 3. Attach signal cables to connectors. 4. Attach power cords to outlets. 5. Turn devices ON. 1. Turn everything OFF. 2. First, remove power cords from outlets. 3. Remove signal cables from connectors. 4. Remove all cables from devices. The power cord must be disconnected from the wall outlet or receptacle before installing all other electrical cables connected to the computer. The power cord may be reconnected to the wall outlet or receptacle only after all other electrical cables have been connected to the computer. DANGER During electrical storms, do not perform any replacement and do not connect the telephone cable to or disconnect it from the telephone outlet on the wall. 40 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide Laser safety information CAUTION:

When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber optic devices, or transmitters) are installed, note the following:

Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable parts inside the device. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation exposure. DANGER Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3B laser diode. Note the following:

Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view directly with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam. Liquid crystal display (LCD) notice CAUTION:

The liquid crystal display (LCD) is made of glass, and rough handling or dropping the computer can cause the LCD to break. If the LCD breaks and the internal fluid gets into your eyes or on your hands, immediately wash the affected areas with water for at least 15 minutes; if any symptoms are present after washing, get medical care. Note: For products with mercury-containing fluorescent lamps (for example, non-LED), the fluorescent lamp in the liquid crystal display (LCD) contains mercury; dispose of according to local, state, or federal laws. Using headphones or earphones Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss. Adjustment of the equalizer to maximum increases the earphone and headphone output voltage and the sound pressure level. Therefore, to protect your hearing, adjust the equalizer to an appropriate level. Excessive use of headphones or earphones for a long period of time at high volume can be dangerous if the output of the headphone or earphone connectors do not comply with specifications of EN 50332-2. The headphone output connector of your computer complies with EN 50332-2 Sub clause 7. This specification limits the computers maximum wide band true RMS output voltage to 150 mV. To help protect against hearing loss, ensure that the headphones or earphones you use also comply with EN 50332-2 (Clause 7 limits) for a wide band characteristic voltage of 75 mV. Using headphones that do not comply with EN 50332-

2 can be dangerous due to excessive sound pressure levels. If your Lenovo computer came with headphones or earphones in the package, as a set, the combination of the headphones or earphones and the computer already complies with the specifications of EN 50332-1. If different headphones or earphones are used, ensure that they comply with EN 50332-1 (Clause 6.5 Limitation Values). Using headphones that do not comply with EN 50332-1 can be dangerous due to excessive sound pressure levels. Appendix A. Important safety information 41 Choking hazard notice CHOKING HAZARD Product contains small parts. Keep away from children under three years. Plastic bag notice DANGER Plastic bags can be dangerous. Keep plastic bags away from babies and children to avoid danger of suffocation. Glass parts notice CAUTION:

Some parts of your product may be made of glass. This glass could break if the product is dropped on a hard surface or receives a substantial impact. If glass breaks, do not touch or attempt to remove it. Stop using your product until the glass is replaced by trained service personnel. Static electricity prevention Static electricity, although harmless to you, can seriously damage computer components and options. Improper handling of static-sensitive parts can damage the part. When you unpack an option or CRU, do not open the static-protective package containing the part until the instructions direct you to install it. When you handle options or CRUs, or perform any work inside the computer, take the following precautions to avoid static-electricity damage:

Limit your movement. Movement can cause static electricity to build up around you. Always handle components carefully. Handle adapters, memory modules, and other circuit boards by the edges. Never touch exposed circuitry. Prevent others from touching components. When you install a static-sensitive option or CRU, touch the static-protective package containing the part to a metal expansion-slot cover or other unpainted metal surface on the computer for at least two seconds. This reduces static electricity in the package and your body. When possible, remove the static-sensitive part from the static-protective packaging and install the part without setting it down. When this is not possible, place the static-protective packaging on a smooth, level surface and place the part on it. Do not place the part on the computer cover or other metal surface. 42 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide Operating environment Maximum altitude (without pressurization) 3048 m (10 000 ft) Temperature At altitudes up to 2438 m (8000 ft) Operating: 5C to 35C (41F to 95F) Storage: 5C to 43C (41F to 109F) At altitudes above 2438 m (8000 ft) Maximum temperature when operating under the unpressurized condition: 31.3C (88F) Note: When you charge the battery, its temperature must be no lower than 10C (50F). Relative humidity Operating: 8% to 95% at wet-bulb temperature 23C (73F) Storage: 5% to 95% at wet-bulb temperature 27C (81F) Cleaning and maintenance With appropriate care and maintenance your computer will serve you reliably. The following topics offer information to help you keep your computer in top working order. Basic maintenance tips Here are some basic points about keeping your computer functioning properly:

If possible, place your computer in a well-ventilated and dry area without direct exposure to sunshine. Store packing materials safely out of the reach of children to prevent the risk of suffocation from plastic bags. Keep your computer away from magnets, activated cellular phones, electrical appliances, or speakers

(more than 13 cm or 5 inches). Avoid subjecting your computer to extreme temperatures (below 5C/41F or above 35C/95F). Avoid placing any objects (including paper) between the display and the keyboard or the palm rest. Computer display might be designed to be opened and used at a certain angle. Do not open the display with force. Otherwise, the computer hinge might get damaged. Do not turn your computer over when the ac power adapter is plugged in, otherwise, it could break the adapter plug. Before moving your computer, be sure to remove any media, turn off attached devices, and disconnect cords and cables. When picking up your open computer, hold it by the bottom. Do not pick up or hold your computer by the display. Only an authorized Lenovo repair technician should disassemble and repair your computer. Do not modify or tape the latches to keep the display open or closed. Avoid directly exposing your computer and peripherals to the air from an appliance that can produce negative ions. Wherever possible, ground your computer to facilitate safe electrostatic discharge. Appendix A. Important safety information 43 Cleaning your computer It is a good practice to clean your computer periodically to protect the surfaces and ensure trouble-free operation. Cleaning the computer cover: Wipe it with a lint-free cloth dampened in mild soap and water. Avoid applying liquids directly to the cover. Cleaning the keyboard: Wipe the keys one by one with a lint-free cloth dampened in mild soap and water. If you wipe several keys at a time, the cloth might hook onto an adjacent key and possibly damage it. Avoid spraying cleaner directly onto the keyboard. To remove any crumbs or dust from beneath the keys, you can use a camera blower with a brush or use cool air from a hair dryer. Cleaning the computer screen: Scratches, oil, dust, chemicals, and ultraviolet light can affect the performance of your computer screen. Use a dry, soft lint-free cloth to wipe the screen gently. If you see a scratchlike mark on your screen, it might be a stain. Wipe or dust the stain gently with a soft, dry cloth. If the stain remains, moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water or eyeglass cleaner, but do not apply liquids directly to your computer screen. Ensure that the computer screen is dry before closing it. 44 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide Appendix B. Accessibility and ergonomic information This chapter provides information about accessibility and ergonomics. Accessibility information Lenovo is committed to providing users who have hearing, vision, and mobility limitations with greater access to information and technology. This section provides information about the ways these users can get the most out of their computer experience. You also can get the most up-to-date accessibility information from the following Web site:

https://www.lenovo.com/accessibility Keyboard shortcuts The following list contains keyboard shortcuts that can help make your computer easier to use. Note: Depending on your keyboard, some of the following keyboard shortcuts might not be available. Windows logo key + U: Open Ease of Access Center Right Shift for eight seconds: Turn on or turn off Filter Keys Shift five times: Turn on or turn off Sticky Keys Num Lock for five seconds: Turn on or turn off Toggle Keys Left Alt+Left Shift+Num Lock: Turn on or turn off Mouse Keys Left Alt+Left Shift+PrtScn (or PrtSc): Turn on or turn off High Contrast For more information, go to https://windows.microsoft.com/, and then search using any of the following keywords: , , . Ease of Access Center Ease of Access Center on the Windows operating system enables you to configure your computers to suit their physical and cognitive needs. To access Ease of Access Center:

1. Go to Control Panel and view by Category. 2. Click Ease of Access Ease of Access Center. 3. Choose the appropriate tool by following the on-screen instructions. Ease of Access Center mainly includes the following tools:

Magnifier Magnifier is a useful utility that enlarges the entire screen or part of the screen so that you can see the items better. Narrator Narrator is a screen reader that reads what is displayed on the screen aloud and describes events such as error messages. On-Screen Keyboard If you prefer to type or enter data into your computer using a mouse, joystick, or other pointing device instead of a physical keyboard, you can use On-Screen Keyboard. On-Screen Keyboard displays a visual Copyright Lenovo 2018 45 keyboard with all the standard keys. You can select keys using the mouse or another pointing device, or you can tap to select the keys if your computer supports multi-touch screen. High Contrast High Contrast is a feature that heightens the color contrast of some text and images on your screen. As a result, those items are more distinct and easier to identify. Personalized keyboard Adjust keyboard settings to make your keyboard easier to use. For example, you can use your keyboard to control the pointer and make the keyboard easier to type certain key combinations. Personalized mouse Adjust mouse settings to make your mouse easier to use. For example, you can change the pointer appearance and make your mouse easier to manage windows. Speech Recognition Speech Recognition enables you to control your computer by voice. You can use verbal instructions to control the keyboard and mouse. With verbal instructions, you can start programs, open menus, click objects on the screen, dictate text into documents, and write and send e-mails. To use Speech Recognition:

1. Go to Control Panel and view by Category. 2. Click Ease of Access Speech Recognition. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Screen-reader technologies Screen-reader technologies are primarily focused on software program interfaces, help systems, and various online documents. For additional information about screen readers, see the following:

Using PDFs with screen readers:

https://www.adobe.com/accessibility.html?promoid=DJGVE Using the JAWS screen reader:

https://www.freedomscientific.com/Products/Blindness/JAWS Using the NVDA screen reader:

https://www.nvaccess.org/

Screen resolution You can make the text and images on your screen easier to read by adjusting the screen resolution of your computer. To adjust the screen resolution:

1. Right-click a blank area on the desktop and then click Display settings Display. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions. Note: Setting a resolution too low might prevent some items from fitting on the screen. Customizable item size You can make the items on your screen easier to read by changing the item size. To change the item size temporarily, use the Magnifier tool in Ease of Access Center. To change the item size permanently:

46 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide Change the size of all the items on your screen. 1. Right-click a blank area on the desktop and then click Display settings Display. 2. Change the item size by following the on-screen instructions. For some applications, your configuration might not take effect until you sign out and then sign in again. Change the size of the items on a Web page. Press and hold Ctrl, and then press the plus-sign key (+) to enlarge or the minus-sign key () to reduce the text size. Change the size of the items on the desktop or a window. Note: This function might not work on some windows. If your mouse has a wheel, press and hold Ctrl, and then scroll the wheel to change the item size. Industry-standard connectors Your computer provides industry-standard connectors that enable you to connect assistive devices. Documentation in accessible formats Lenovo provides electronic documentation in accessible formats, such as properly tagged PDF files or HyperText Markup Language (HTML) files. Lenovo electronic documentation is developed to ensure that visually impaired users can read the documentation through a screen reader. Each image in the documentation also includes adequate alternative text so that visually impaired users can understand the image when they use a screen reader. Ergonomic information Good ergonomic practice is important to get the most from your personal computer and to avoid discomfort. Arrange your workplace and the equipment you use to suit your individual needs and the kind of work that you perform. In addition, use healthy work habits to maximize your performance and comfort when using your computer. Working in the virtual office might mean adapting to frequent changes in your environment. Adapting to the surrounding light sources, active seating, and the placement of your computer hardware, can help you improve your performance and achieve greater comfort. This example shows someone in a conventional setting. Even when not in such a setting, you can follow many of these tips. Develop good habits, and they will serve you well. General posture: Make minor modifications in your working posture to deter the onset of discomfort caused by long periods of working in the same position. Frequent short breaks from your work also help to prevent minor discomfort associated with your working posture. Appendix B. Accessibility and ergonomic information 47 Display: Position the display to maintain a comfortable viewing distance of 510 mm to 760 mm (20 inches to 30 inches). Avoid glare or reflections on the display from overhead lighting or outside sources of light. Keep the display screen clean and set the brightness to levels that enable you to see the screen clearly. Press the brightness control keys to adjust display brightness. Head position: Keep your head and neck in a comfortable and neutral (vertical, or upright) position. Chair: Use a chair that gives you good back support and seat height adjustment. Use chair adjustments to best suit your comfort posture. Arm and hand position: If available, use chair arm rests or an area on your working surface to provide weight support for your arms. Keep your forearms, wrists, and hands in a relaxed and neutral (horizontal) position. Type with a soft touch without pounding the keys. Leg position: Keep your thighs parallel to the floor and your feet flat on the floor or on a footrest. What if you are traveling?

It might not be possible to observe the best ergonomic practices when you are using your computer while on the move or in a casual setting. Regardless of the setting, try to observe as many of the tips as possible. Sitting properly and using adequate lighting, for example, helps you maintain desirable levels of comfort and performance. If your work area is not in an office setting, ensure to take special note of employing active sitting and taking work breaks. Many product solutions are available to help you modify and expand your computer to best suit your needs. You can find some of these options at https://www.lenovo.com/accessories. Explore your options for docking solutions and external products that provide the adjustability and features that you want. Questions about vision?

The visual display screens of notebook computers are designed to meet the highest standards. These visual display screens provide you with clear, crisp images and large, bright displays that are easy to see, yet easy on the eyes. Any concentrated and sustained visual activity can be tiring. If you have questions on eye fatigue or visual discomfort, consult a vision-care specialist for advice. 48 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide Appendix C. Compliance information This chapter provides regulatory, environmental, RoHS, and ENERGY STAR information about Lenovo products. Radio frequency compliance statements Computer models equipped with wireless communications comply with the radio frequency and safety standards of any country or region in which it has been approved for wireless use. Besides this document, ensure that you read the Regulatory Notice for your country or region before using the wireless devices contained in your computer. European Union compliance with the Radio Equipment Directive This product is in conformity with all the requirements and essential norms that apply to EU Council Radio Equipment Directive 2014/53/EU on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to radio equipment. The full text of the system EU declaration of conformity and the EU wireless module declarations are available at the following Internet addresses:

For notebook computers: https://www.lenovo.com/us/en/social_responsibility/EU_DoC_notebooks For tablet computers: https://www.lenovo.com/us/en/social_responsibility/EU_DoC_notebooks For wireless peripheral devices: https://www.lenovo.com/us/en/social_responsibility/EU_DoC_wireless_ options Lenovo cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification of the product, including the installation of option cards from other manufacturers. This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B equipment according to European Standards harmonized in the Directives in compliance. The limits for Class B equipment were derived for typical residential environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed communication devices. Brazil Este equipamento no tem direito proteo contra interferncia prejudicial e no pode causar interferncia em sistemas devidamente autorizados. This equipment is not protected against harmful interference and may not cause interference with duly authorized systems. Mexico Advertencia: En Mexico la operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Copyright Lenovo 2018 49 Singapore Korea

(24002483.5 , 57255825 )

SAR

.

. SAR . SAR

. 20mm

. Environmental information of countries and regions This section provides environmental, recycling, and RoHS information about Lenovo products. Recycling and environmental information Lenovo encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment to responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed. Lenovo offers a variety of programs and services to assist equipment owners in recycling their IT products. For information about recycling Lenovo products, go to:

https://www.lenovo.com/recycling The latest environmental information about our products is available at:

https://www.lenovo.com/ecodeclaration Important WEEE information The WEEE marking on Lenovo products applies to countries with WEEE and e-waste regulations (for example, the European WEEE Directive, India E-Waste Management Rules). Appliances are labeled in accordance with local regulations concerning waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE). These 50 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide regulations determine the framework for the return and recycling of used appliances as applicable within each geography. This label is applied to various products to indicate that the product is not to be thrown away, but rather put in the established collection systems for reclaiming these end of life products. Users of electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) with the WEEE marking must not dispose of end of life EEE as unsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to them for the return, recycle, and recovery of WEEE and to minimize any potential effects of EEE on the environment and human health due to the presence of hazardous substances. Lenovo electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) may contain parts and components, which at end-of-life might qualify as hazardous waste. EEE and waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE) can be delivered free of charge to the place of sale or any distributor that sells electrical and electronic equipment of the same nature and function as the used EEE or WEEE. For additional WEEE information, go to:

https://www.lenovo.com/recycling WEEE information for Hungary Lenovo, as a producer, bears the cost incurred in connection with the fulfillment of Lenovos obligations under Hungary Law No. 197/2014 (VIII.1.) subsections (1)-(5) of section 12. Japan recycling statements Collecting and recycling a disused Lenovo computer or monitor If you are a company employee and need to dispose of a Lenovo computer or monitor that is the property of the company, you must do so in accordance with the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources. Computers and monitors are categorized as industrial waste and should be properly disposed of by an industrial waste disposal contractor certified by a local government. In accordance with the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources, Lenovo Japan provides, through its PC Collecting and Recycling Services, for the collecting, reuse, and recycling of disused computers and monitors. For details, visit the Lenovo Web site at:

https://www.lenovo.com/recycling/japan Pursuant to the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources, the collecting and recycling of home-

used computers and monitors by the manufacturer was begun on October 1, 2003. This service is provided free of charge for home-used computers sold after October 1, 2003. For details, go to:

https://www.lenovo.com/recycling/japan Disposing of Lenovo computer components Some Lenovo computer products sold in Japan may have components that contain heavy metals or other environmental sensitive substances. To properly dispose of disused components, such as a printed circuit board or drive, use the methods described above for collecting and recycling a disused computer or monitor. Disposing of disused lithium batteries from Lenovo computers A button-shaped lithium battery is installed inside your Lenovo computer to provide power to the computer clock while the computer is off or disconnected from the main power source. If you need to replace it with a new one, contact your place of purchase or contact Lenovo for service. If you need to dispose of a disused lithium battery, insulate it with vinyl tape, contact your place of purchase or an industrial-waste-disposal operator, and follow their instructions. Appendix C. Compliance information 51 Disposal of a lithium battery must comply with local ordinances and regulations. Disposing of a disused battery from Lenovo notebook computers Your Lenovo notebook computer has a lithium ion battery or a nickel metal hydride battery. If you are a company employee who uses a Lenovo notebook computer and need to dispose of a battery, contact the proper person in Lenovo sales, service, or marketing, and follow that person's instructions. You also can refer to the instructions at:

https://www.lenovo.com/jp/ja/environment/recycle/battery/

If you use a Lenovo notebook computer at home and need to dispose of a battery, you must comply with local ordinances and regulations. You also can refer to the instructions at:

https://www.lenovo.com/jp/ja/environment/recycle/battery/

Recycling information for Brazil Declaraes de Reciclagem no Brasil Descarte de um Produto Lenovo Fora de Uso Equipamentos eltricos e eletrnicos no devem ser descartados em lixo comum, mas enviados pontos de coleta, autorizados pelo fabricante do produto para que sejam encaminhados e processados por empresas especializadas no manuseio de resduos industriais, devidamente certificadas pelos orgos ambientais, de acordo com a legislao local. A Lenovo possui um canal especfico para auxili-lo no descarte desses produtos. Caso voc possua um produto Lenovo em situao de descarte, ligue para o nosso SAC ou encaminhe um e-mail para:

reciclar@lenovo.com, informando o modelo, nmero de srie e cidade, a fim de enviarmos as instrues para o correto descarte do seu produto Lenovo. Battery recycling information for the European Union Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU). Batteries or packaging for batteries are labeled in accordance with European Directive 2006/66/EC concerning batteries and accumulators and waste batteries and accumulators. The Directive determines the framework for the return and recycling of used batteries and accumulators as applicable throughout the European Union. This label is applied to various batteries to indicate that the battery is not to be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive. In accordance with the European Directive 2006/66/EC, batteries and accumulators are labeled to indicate that they are to be collected separately and recycled at end of life. The label on the battery may also include a chemical symbol for the metal concerned in the battery (Pb for lead, Hg for mercury, and Cd for cadmium). Users of batteries and accumulators must not dispose of batteries and accumulators as unsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers for the return, recycling, and treatment of 52 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide batteries and accumulators. Customer participation is important to minimize any potential effects of batteries and accumulators on the environment and human health due to the potential presence of hazardous substances. Before placing electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) in the waste collection stream or in waste collection facilities, the end user of equipment containing batteries and/or accumulators must remove those batteries and accumulators for separate collection. Disposing of lithium batteries and battery packs from Lenovo products A coin-cell type lithium battery might be installed inside your Lenovo product. You can find details about the battery in the product documentation. If the battery needs to be replaced, contact your place of purchase or contact Lenovo for service. If you need to dispose of a lithium battery, insulate it with vinyl tape, contact your place of purchase or a waste-disposal operator, and follow their instructions. Disposing of battery packs from Lenovo products Your Lenovo device might contain a lithium-ion battery pack or a nickel metal hydride battery pack. You can find details on the battery pack in the product documentation. If you need to dispose of a battery pack, insulate it with vinyl tape, contact Lenovo sales, service, or your place of purchase, or a waste-disposal operator, and follow their instructions. You also can refer to the instructions provided in the user guide for your product. For proper collection and treatment, go to:

https://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment Recycling information for China Battery recycling information for Taiwan Battery recycling information for the United States and Canada Appendix C. Compliance information 53 Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive of countries and regions The latest environmental information about Lenovo products is available at:

https://www.lenovo.com/ecodeclaration European Union RoHS This Lenovo product, with included parts (cables, cords, and so on) meets the requirements of Directive 2011/65/EU on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment ("RoHS recast" or "RoHS 2"). For more information about Lenovo worldwide compliance on RoHS, go to:

https://www.lenovo.com/rohs-communication Turkish RoHS The Lenovo product meets the requirements of the Republic of Turkey Directive on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE). Ukraine RoHS India RoHS RoHS compliant as per E-Waste (Management) Rules. China RoHS The information in the following table is applicable to products manufactured on or after January 1, 2015 for sale in the Peoples Republic of China. 54 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide Appendix C. Compliance information 55 Taiwan RoHS Electromagnetic emission notices Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Suppliers Declaration of Conformity The following information refers to Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL, machine type(s): 81NE. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency 56 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Responsible Party:

Lenovo (United States) Incorporated 7001 Development Drive Morrisville, NC 27560 Email: FCC@lenovo.com FCC ID and IC Certification information You can find the FCC and IC Certification information through one of the following methods:

Through an electronic-label screen (E-label screen) preinstalled on your computer. To view the E-label screen, see Regulatory labels on page 58. On a physical label attached to the outside of your computer shipping carton. Industry Canada compliance statement CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B) European Union conformity EU Contact: Lenovo, Einsteinova 21, 851 01 Bratislava, Slovakia Compliance with the EMC Directive This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 2014/30/EU on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B equipment according to European Standards harmonized in the Directives in compliance. The Class B requirements for equipment are intended to offer adequate protection to broadcast services within residential environments. Appendix C. Compliance information 57 German Class B compliance statement Hinweis zur Einhaltung der Klasse B zur elektromagnetischen Vertrglichkeit Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie zur elektromagnetischen Vertrglichkeit Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit in den EU-

Mitgliedsstaaten und hlt die Grenzwerte der Klasse B der Norm gem Richtlinie. Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Gerte wie in den Handbchern beschrieben zu installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren drfen auch nur von der Lenovo empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. Lenovo bernimmt keine Verantwortung fr die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der Lenovo verndert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne Empfehlung der Lenovo gesteckt/eingebaut werden. Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln, EMVG vom 20. Juli 2007 (frher Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten), bzw. der EU Richtlinie 2014/30/EU, der EU Richtlinie 2014/53/EU Artikel 3.1b), fr Gerte der Klasse B. Dieses Gert ist berechtigt, in bereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG-Konformittszeichen -

CE - zu fhren. Verantwortlich fr die Konformittserklrung nach Paragraf 5 des EMVG ist die Lenovo

(Deutschland) GmbH, Meitnerstr. 9, D-70563 Stuttgart. Japan VCCI Class B compliance statement Japan compliance statement for products which connect to the power mains with rated current less than or equal to 20 A per phase Japan notice for ac power cord The ac power cord shipped with your product can be used only for this specific product. Do not use the ac power cord for other devices. Other compliance information This section provides other compliance information about Lenovo products. Regulatory labels Depending on your country or region, you can find the government-required regulatory information through one of the following methods:

On a physical label attached to the outside of your computer shipping carton On a physical label attached to your computer 58 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide Through an electronic-label screen (E-label screen) preinstalled on your computer To access the E-label screen, do one of the following:

Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F9. The E-label screen is displayed. Restart the computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press Enter or tap the prompt to enter the Startup Interrupt menu. Then press F9 or tap the Regulatory Information option. The E-label screen is displayed. Press the Novo button with an expanded paper clip (or similar slender object) when your computer is off, and then select Regulatory Information when the Novo Button Menu appears on the screen. Korean E-label notice TCO certification To obtain the TCO certification information for your computer, go to:

https://www.lenovo.com/tco-cert Export classification notice This product is subject to the United States Export Administration Regulations (EAR) and has an Export Classification Control Number (ECCN) of 5A992.c. It can be re-exported except to any of the embargoed countries in the EAR E1 country list. Lenovo product service information for Taiwan Taiwan precautionary vision statement

3010 221 Eurasian compliance mark Brazil audio notice Ouvir sons com mais de 85 decibis por longos perodos pode provocar danos ao sistema auditivo. Appendix C. Compliance information 59 ENERGY STAR model information ENERGY STAR is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy aimed at saving money and protecting the environment through energy efficient products and practices. Lenovo is proud to offer our customers products with an ENERGY STAR compliant designation. Machine type(s) 81NE has been designed and tested to conform to the ENERGY STAR program requirement for computers at the time of manufacture. For more information about Lenovo ENERGY STAR certified products, go to:

https://www.lenovo.com/us/en/social_responsibility/energy/

By using ENERGY STAR compliant products and taking advantage of the power management features of your computer, you reduce the consumption of electricity. Reduced electrical consumption contributes to potential financial savings, a cleaner environment, and the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions. For more information about ENERGY STAR, go to:

https://www.energystar.gov Lenovo encourages you to make efficient use of energy an integral part of your day-to-day operations. To help in this endeavor, Lenovo has preset a default power plan. To change the power plan, see Set the power plan on page 16. 60 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide Appendix D. Notices and trademarks Notices Lenovo may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in all countries. Consult your local Lenovo representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to a Lenovo product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that Lenovo product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any Lenovo intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the user's responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any other product, program, or service. Lenovo may have patents or pending patent programs covering subject matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:

Lenovo (United States), Inc. 1009 Think Place - Building One Morrisville, NC 27560 U.S.A. Attention: Lenovo Director of Licensing LENOVO PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you. Changes are made periodically to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. To provide better service, Lenovo reserves the right to improve and/or modify the products and software programs described in the manuals included with your computer, and the content of the manual, at any time without additional notice. The software interface and function and hardware configuration described in the manuals included with your computer might not match exactly the actual configuration of the computer that you purchase. For the configuration of the product, refer to the related contract (if any) or product packing list, or consult the distributor for the product sales. Lenovo may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. The products described in this document are not intended for use in implantation or other life support applications where malfunction may result in injury or death to persons. The information contained in this document does not affect or change Lenovo product specifications or warranties. Nothing in this document shall operate as an express or implied license or indemnity under the intellectual property rights of Lenovo or third parties. All information contained in this document was obtained in specific environments and is presented as an illustration. The result obtained in other operating environments may vary. Lenovo may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. Any references in this publication to non-Lenovo Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this Lenovo product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk. Copyright Lenovo 2018 61 Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the result obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly. Some measurements may have been made on development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements may have been estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their specific environment. This document is copyrighted by Lenovo and is not covered by any open source license, including any Linux agreement(s) which may accompany software included with this product. Lenovo may update this document at any time without notice. For the latest information or any questions or comments, contact or visit the Lenovo Web site:

https://support.lenovo.com Trademarks LENOVO and the LENOVO logo are trademarks of Lenovo. Microsoft, Windows, Direct3D and Cortana are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. Wi-Fi and Miracast are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance. USB-C is a trademark of USB Implementers Forum. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2018 Lenovo. 62 Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL User Guide

 

 

Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules First edition (January 2018) Copyright Lenovo 2018.

. . . . . . . . . Chapter 1. Notice for users in USA and Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

. . Approved wireless devices . . 1

. 2 Preinstalled wireless LAN module . . 2 Simultaneous use of RF transmitters. . 2 Canada Industry Canada (IC)

. . Approved wireless devices. . 2 Preinstalled wireless LAN module . 3 Low power license-exempt radiocommunication devices (RSS-210, RSS-

247)

. . Exposure of humans to RF fields (RSS-102) . . . . . Priphriques sans fil homologus

. Module rseau local sans fil prinstall . Appareils de radio-communication basse tension sans licence d'utilisation (CNR-210, CNR-247) . . Conformit des appareils de radiocommunication aux limites d'exposition humaine aux radiofrquences (CNR-102) . . . Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

. Declaration of Conformity . . . Usage environment and your health . 5

. 5

. 6

. 6

. 6 Electronic emission notices . . Canada Industrie Canada (IC)

. 3

. 4

. 4

. 4

. 5

. . . . . . . . Chapter 2. Europe EU Declaration of Conformity (wireless module). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

. 9 English . . 9

. 10 RF exposure information

. . Informacije o izlaganju radijskoj frekvenciji

. . . . . . . . . . . . Czech . . Bulgarian . Croatian. . . . . . . . . . Informace o vystaven radiofrekvennmu zen . Danish . . . . Oplysninger om radioblgeeksponering . . . . . . . . . Dutch . . . . . Estonian. . Finnish . . Informatie over blootstelling aan radiogolven. . . Raadiosagedusliku kiirguse teave . . . . . . . . Tietoja radiotaajuiselle steilylle altistumisesta . . . . . . . . 12

. 12

. 12

. 12

. . 12

. 10

. 10

. 10

. 10

. 11

. 11

. 11

. 11

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Polish. Italian . Greek. . . Latvian . German . French . Norwegian . Lithuanian . Hungarian . . . . . Informacija apie radijo dani poveik

. Informasjon om RF-eksponering . Informazioni sull'esposizione RF . Informationen zur HF-Exposition . . Informations sur l'exposition aux RF . . . . .

(RF). . . . RF-kitettsgre vonatkoz informcik . . . . Informcija par pakauanu RF starojumam . . . Informaes sobre exposio a RF . . . Informacje o ekspozycji na czstotliwoci

. radiowe . . Portuguese . . Informaii privind expunerea la frecvenele

. radio . Slovenian . Informacije o izpostavljenosti RF-sevanju . Informcie o vystaven rdiofrekvennmu

. iareniu . . . Information om exponering fr radiovgor. Informacin de exposicin a RF. RF maruz kalma bilgileri . . . . . Romanian . Slovakian . Spanish . Swedish. Turkish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

. 13

. 13

. 13

. 13

. 14

. 14

. 14

. 14

. 15

. 15

. 15

. 15

. 15

. 16

. 16

. 16

. 16

. 16

. 17

. 17

. 17

. 17

. 17

. 18

. 18

. 18

. 18

. 18

. 19

. 19

. 19

. . . Chapter 3. Regulatory notices for other countries. . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Notice for users in Argentina (Nota para uso en

. Argentina) . Modelo: Intel 3165NGW

. Modelo: Intel 7265NGW

. Modelo: Intel 8265NGW Modelo: Qualcomm QCNFA344A . Modelo: Qualcomm QCNFA364

. Modelo: Qualcomm QCNFA435 Modelo: Realtek RTL8821CE . 21

. 21

. 21

. 21

. 21

. 21

. 21

. 21

. . . . . . . . . . . . . Copyright Lenovo 2018 i

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modelo: Realtek RTL8822BE . Modelo: Intel 9260NGW . . Modelo: Intel 9560NGW . . Modelo: Intel 9462NGW . . . . For model: 3165NGW. . For model: 7265NGW. For model: 8265NGW. . For model: QCNFA344A. . For model: QCNFA364 . . For model: QCNFA435 . . For model: RTL8821CE . . For model: RTL8822BE . . For model: 9260NGW. . . For model: 9560NGW. . For model: 9462NGW. . Notice for users in India. . Modelo: 3165NGW

. . Modelo: 7265NGW

. . Modelo: 8265NGW

. . Modelo: QCNFA344A Modelo: QCNFA364 . . . Modelo: QCNFA435 . . Modelo: RTL8821CE . . Modelo: RTL8822BE . Modelo: 9260NGW

. . . Modelo: 9560NGW Modelo: 9462NGW

. . . . . . Notice for users in Brazil (Aviso para usuarios no

. . Brasil)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notice for users in Mexico (Nota para uso en Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notice for users in Morocco . . Modelo: 3165NGW

. Modelo: 7265NGW Modelo: 8265NGW

. Modelo: QCNFA344A Modelo: QCNFA364 . Modelo: QCNFA435 . Modelo: RTL8821CE . Modelo: RTL8822BE . Modelo: 9260NGW

. Modelo: 9560NGW Modelo: 9462NGW

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

. 22

. 22

. 22

. 22

. 22

. 22

. 23

. 23

. 23

. 23

. 23

. 23

. 24

. 24

. 24

. 24

. 24

. 24

. 24

. 24

. 24

. 25

. 25

. 25

. 25

. 25

. 25

. 25

. 25

. 25

. 25

. 25

. 26

. 26

. 26

. 26

. 26

. 26

. 26

. 26

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notice for users in Nigeria . . Notice for users in Saudi Arabia . . . . . . . For model: 3165NGW. . For model: 7265NGW. For model: 8265NGW. . For model: Qualcomm QCNFA344A . . For model: Qualcomm QCNFA364 . . For model: Qualcomm QCNFA435 . . . For model: RTL8821CE . For model: RTL8822BE . . . For model: 9260NGW. . For model: 9560NGW. . For model: 9462NGW. Notice for users in Serbia . . . Notice for users in South Africa

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

NCC

. . Notice for users in the UAE

. For model: 3165NGW. For model: 7265NGW. For model: 8265NGW. For model: QCNFA344A. For model: QCNFA364 . For model: QCNFA435 . For model: RTL8821CE . For model: RTL8822BE . For model: 9260NGW. For model: 9560NGW. For model: 9462NGW. . For model: 3165NGW. For model: 7265NGW. For model: 8265NGW. For model: QCNFA344A. For model: QCNFA364 . For model: QCNFA435 . For model: RTL8821CE . For model: RTL8822BE . For model: 9260NGW. For model: 9560NGW. For model: 9462NGW. Notice for users in Taiwan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trademarks . . . 27

. 28

. 28

. 29

. 30

. 31

. 32

. 33

. 34

. 35

. 36

. 37

. 38

. 39

. 39

. 39

. 39

. 39

. 39

. 39

. 39

. 40

. 40

. 40

. 40

. 40

. 40

. 40

. 41

. 41

. 41

. 41

. 41

. 41

. 41

. 42

. 42

. 42

. 42

. 42

. xliii ii Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules About this manual This publication contains regulatory information for wireless modules that may be included by Lenovo computers. Different wireless modules are supported by different computer products. The table below lists product names for Lenovo computers in rows. All supported wireless modules by a product are marked with a circle. Product Name QCNFA 344A QCNFA 435 QCNFA 364 7265 NGW 8265 NGW 3165 NGW RTL 8821CE RTL 8822BE 9260 NGW 9560 NGW 9462 NGW Lenovo 500e Chromebook Lenovo 100e Yoga 530-

14IKB Yoga 530-

15IKB ideapad 330-

15ICH ideapad 330-

17ICH Legion Y530-

15ICH ideapad FLEX 6-14IKB ideapad FLEX 6-14ARR Lenovo V330-

14ARR ideapad 530s-

14IKB ideapad 530s-

15IKB Lenovo V130-

15IKB Lenovo V130-

15IGM Lenovo V130-

14IGM ideapad 330S-

15IKB GTX1050

Product Name QCNFA 344A QCNFA 435 QCNFA 364 7265 NGW 8265 NGW 3165 NGW RTL 8821CE RTL 8822BE 9260 NGW 9560 NGW 9462 NGW ideapad 530s-

14ARR ideapad 330-

14IGM ideapad 330-

15IGM ideapad 330-

15ICN ideapad 330-

15ARR ideapadd 330-

15ARR Touch Lenovo B330-

15IGM Lenovo S130-

11IGM Lenovo S130-

14IGM Lenovo 130S-

11IGM Lenovo 130S-

14IGM Yoga 530-

14ARR Lenovo B330-

15IKBR Yoga C930-

13IKB Yoga C930-

13IKB Glass Legion Y7000P Yoga S730-

13IWL ideapad 730S-

13IWL Legion Y730-

15ICH

Product Name QCNFA 344A QCNFA 435 QCNFA 364 7265 NGW 8265 NGW 3165 NGW RTL 8821CE RTL 8822BE 9260 NGW 9560 NGW 9462 NGW

Legion Y730-

15ICHg Legion Y730-

17ICH Legion Y730-

17ICHg Yoga 730-

13IWL Yoga 730-

15IWL Legion Y530-

15ICH-1060 Legion Y7000P-1060 Lenovo S50 Scuderia Ferrari Edition ideapad S530-

13IWL Lenovo 100e Windows 2nd Gen Lenovo 300e Windows 2nd Gen Legion Y740-

15ICHg Legion Y740-

17ICHg Lenovo 100e Chromebook 2nd Gen Lenovo 300e Chromebook 2nd Gen Lenovo 500e Chromebook 2nd Gen IdeaPad S340-

14IWL

Product Name QCNFA 344A QCNFA 435 QCNFA 364 7265 NGW 8265 NGW 3165 NGW RTL 8821CE RTL 8822BE 9260 NGW 9560 NGW 9462 NGW IdeaPad S340-

15IWL IdeaPad S340-

15IWL Touch IdeaPad S340-

14API IdeaPad S340-

15API IdeaPad S340-

15API Touch IdeaPad S540-

14IWL IdeaPad S540-

14API IdeaPad C340-14IWL IdeaPad C340-15IWL IdeaPad C340-14IAPI IdeaPad FLEX-

14API Yoga S940-

14IWL IdeaPad S940-

14IWL IdeaPad FLEX-

14IWL IdeaPad FLEX-

15IWL

Chapter 1. Notice for users in USA and Canada Read this document before using your computer. This computer complies with the radio frequency and safety standards of any country or region in which it has been approved for wireless use. Install and use your computer according to the following instructions. The latest Regulatory Notice manual is available on the Lenovo Web site. To download the manual, go to http://www.lenovo.com/support and then follow the on-screen instructions. Lisez ce document avant d'utiliser votre ordinateur. Cet ordinateur est conforme aux normes de frquence radiolectrique et de scurit du pays ou de la rgion o son utilisation sans fil est autorise. Installez et utilisez votre ordinateur en vous conformant aux instructions ci-dessous. La dernire version du manuel Regulatory Notice est disponible sur le site Web de Lenovo. Pour tlcharger le document, rendez-vous sur http://www.lenovo.com/support et suivez les instructions l'cran. Approved wireless devices This system contains the following wireless devices and underwent the certification process of FCC CFR 47 Part 2 section 1093, Part 15 Subpart C and Subpart E, Part 27, Part 22 Subpart H, Part 24 Subpart E, and Part 90 under each respective FCC ID below. The FCC ID is indicated on the bottom cover of your system. Preinstalled wireless LAN modules with Bluetooth function FCC ID: PD97265NGU (Model: 7265NGW) FCC ID: PD93165NGU (Model: 3165NGW) FCC ID: PD98265NG (Model: 8265NGW ) FCC ID: PPD-QCNFA435 (Model: QCNFA435) FCC ID: PPD-QCNFA364AH (Model: QCNFA364) FCC ID: PPD-QCNFA344AH (Model: QCNFA344A) FCC ID: TX2-RTL8821CE (Model: RTL8821CE) FCC ID: TX2-RTL8822BE (Model: RTL8822BE) FCC ID: PD99260NG (Model: 9260NGW) FCC ID: PD99560NG (Model: 9560NGW) FCC ID: PD99462NG (Model: 9462NGW) Notes:

The wireless LAN, the Bluetooth, and the WiGig features operate at different frequencies exclusively, and transmit radio frequencies simultaneously. The following wireless LAN modules marketed in the USA and Canada do not support or function in the extended channels (12ch, 13ch):

Model: QCNFA344A Model: QCNFA435 Model: QCNFA364 Model: RTL8821CE Model: RTL8822BE Copyright Lenovo 2018 1 Preinstalled wireless LAN module The wireless LAN module in your computer is preinstalled by Lenovo, and you are prohibited to replace with other wireless adapter or remove it. If the device requires replacement due to some problem during warranty, it must be serviced by a Lenovo authorized servicer. 1. FCC ID location The FCC ID for the preinstalled wireless LAN module is shown on the enclosure of your computer. For the location of the FCC ID indicator and the slot, see FCC ID and IC Certification number label in User Guide. 2. FCC RF exposure compliance The radiated output power of the wireless LAN module authorized to use for your computer is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, it shall be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized as follows:

CAUTION:

The total radiated energy from the antennas connected to the installed wireless LAN module, conforms to the FCC limit of the SAR (Specific Absorption Rate) requirement, regarding 47 CFR Part 2 section 1093, when the computer was tested in either conventional notebook or tablet computer orientations. The transmission antennas for the wireless LAN module are located in the LCD cover. See Locating the UltraConnect wireless antennas in User Guide. 3. Radio Frequency interference requirements Each device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to FCC Part 15 Subpart B. Refer to "Electronic emission notices" on page 6. When you use a wireless LAN module in the 802.11 a/n transmission mode, note that high power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5250 to 5350 MHz and 5650 to 5850 MHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Simultaneous use of RF transmitters Your computer is approved for simultaneous use of one of the approved wireless LAN modules, the approved wireless WAN module, and the approved NFC module. Make sure of the following conditions when you use any other external RF option device:

When you use any other RF option device, you are requested to confirm that the device conforms to the RF Safety requirement and is approved to use for your computer. You must follow the RF Safety instructions of the RF option device that are included in the user manual of the RF option device. If the RF option device is prohibited to use in conjunction with another transmitters, you must turn off all other wireless features in your computer. Canada Industry Canada (IC) Approved wireless devices This system contains the following wireless devices and the IC certification number is as below. The IC certification number is indicated on the bottom cover of your system. 2 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules Preinstalled wireless LAN modules with Bluetooth function IC: 1000M-7265NG (Model: 7265NGW) IC: 1000M-3165NG (Model: 3165NGW) IC: 1000M-8265NG (Model: 8265NGW ) IC: 4104A-QCNFA435 (Model: QCNFA435) IC: 4104A-QCNFA364A (Model: QCNFA364) IC: 4104A-QCNFA344A (Model: QCNFA344A) IC: 6317A-RTL8821CE (Model: RTL8821CE) IC: 6317A-RTL8822BE (Model: RTL8822BE) IC: 1000M-9260NG (Model: 9260NGW) IC: 1000M-9560NG (Model: 9560NGW) IC: 1000M-9462NG (Model: 9462NGW) Notes:

The wireless LAN, the Bluetooth, and the WiGig features operate at different frequencies exclusively, and transmit radio frequencies simultaneously. The following wireless LAN modules marketed in the USA and Canada do not support or function in the extended channels (12ch, 13ch):

Model: QCNFA344A Model: QCNFA435 Model: QCNFA364 Model: RTL8821CE Model: RTL8822BE Preinstalled wireless LAN module The IC Certification number for the wireless LAN module is shown on the enclosure of your computer. For the location of the IC Certification number, see FCC ID and IC Certification information in User Guide . Attention: The wireless LAN module in your computer is preinstalled by Lenovo, and you are prohibited to replace with other wireless adapter nor remove it. If the device requires replacement due to some problem during warranty, it must be serviced by a Lenovo authorized servicer. Low power license-exempt radiocommunication devices (RSS-210, RSS-

247) Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference. 2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. When you use a wireless LAN module in the 802.11 a/n transmission mode, note the following:

The devices for the band 51505350 MHz are only for indoor usage to reduce potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems The devices for the band 51505350 MHz are only for indoor usage to reduce potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems Chapter 1. Notice for users in USA and Canada 3 High power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) of 52505350 MHz and 56505850 MHz and these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN (Licence-Exempt Local Area Network) devices. The maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the 5250-5350 MHz, 5470-5725 MHz, and 5725-5825 MHz bands complies with the e.i.r.p. limit. Exposure of humans to RF fields (RSS-102) The computers employ low gain integral antennas that do not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canada's Web site at http://

www.hc-sc.gc.ca/. The radiated energy from the antennas connected to the wireless modules conforms to the Canada Portable RF exposure limit regarding IC RSS-102, Issue 5, Section 4, set forth for an uncontrolled environment, and are safe for intended operation in the conventional setting. The further RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. Canada Industrie Canada (IC) Priphriques sans fil homologus Ce systme contient les priphriques sans fil suivants et le numro d'homologation IC indiqu ci-dessous. Le numro d'homologation IC figure sur la partie infrieure de votre systme. Modules de rseau local sans fil avec fonction Bluetooth prinstalls IC: 1000M-7265NG (modle: 7265NGW) IC: 1000M-3165NG (modle: 3165NGW) IC: 1000M-8265NG (modle: 8265NGW ) IC: 4104A-QCNFA435 (modle: QCNFA435) IC: 4104A-QCNFA364A (modle: QCNFA364) IC: 4104A-QCNFA344A (modle: QCNFA344A) IC: 6317A-RTL8821CE (modle: RTL8821CE) IC: 6317A-RTL8822BE (modle: RTL8822BE) IC: 1000M-9260NG (modle: 9260NGW) IC: 1000M-9560NG (modle: 9560NGW) IC: 1000M-9462NG (modle: 9462NGW) Notes:

Les fonctions de rseau local sans fil, Bluetooth et WiGig sont oprationnelles des frquences diffrentes exclusivement et mettent des frquences radio simultanment. Les modules de rseau local sans fil suivants commercialiss aux tats-Unis et au Canada ne prennent pas en charge les canaux tendus (12ch, 13ch):

Modle: QCNFA344A Modle: QCNFA435 Modle: QCNFA435 Modle: QCNFA364 4 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules Modle: RTL8821CE Modle: RTL8822BE Module rseau local sans fil prinstall Le numro de certification IC correspondant au module de rseau local sans fil figure sur le botier de votre ordinateur. Pour connatre l'emplacement du numro de certification IC, reportez-vous la section Informations sur l'identification FCC et la certification IC du . guide d'utilisation . Attention: Le module rseau local sans fil est prinstall sur votre ordinateur par Lenovo et il est interdit au client de le remplacer par un autre adaptateur sans fil ou de le supprimer. Si le priphrique doit tre remplac cause d'un problme survenu pendant la priode de garantie, l'opration doit tre effectue par un technicien agr Lenovo. Appareils de radio-communication basse tension sans licence d'utilisation (CNR-210, CNR-247) Le fonctionnement de ce type d'appareil est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. Cet appareil ne peut pas causer de perturbations lectromagntiques. 2. Cet appareil doit accepter toutes les perturbations reues, y compris celles susceptibles d'occasionner un fonctionnement indsirable. Lorsque vous utilisez un module de rseau local sans fil dans le mode de transmission 802.11 a/n, tenez compte des remarques suivantes:

Les appareils destins la bande 51505350 MHz devront tre exclusivement utiliss en intrieur afin de rduire les risques de perturbations lectromagntiques gnantes sur les systmes de satellite mobile dans un mme canal. otential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems Les radars forte puissance sont dsigns comme les utilisateurs principaux (c'est--dire qu'ils sont prioritaires) des bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5650-5850 MHz. Ils peuvent provoquer des perturbations lectromagntiques sur les appareils de type LE-LAN (rseau de communication local sans licence) ou les endommager. Le gain d'antenne maximal autoris pour les appareils dans les bandes de frquence 5250-5350 MHz, 5470-5725 MHz et 5725-5825 MHz est conforme la limite p.i.r.e (puissance isotrope rayonne quivalente). Conformit des appareils de radiocommunication aux limites d'exposition humaine aux radiofrquences (CNR-102) Lesordinateursutilisentdesantennesintgralesfaiblegainquin'mettentpasunchamplectromagntique suprieur aux normes imposes par Sant Canada pour la population. Consultez le Code de scurit 6 sur le site Web de Sant Canada l'adresse http://www.hc-sc.gc.ca/. L'nergie mise par les antennes relies aux modules sans fil respecte la limite d'exposition aux radiofrquences mises par les appareils portables au Canada telle que dfinie par Industrie Canada dans la section 4 du document CNR-102, version 5 pour un environnement non contrl et permet d'affecter sans danger le produit l'usage auquel il est destin. La rduction de l'exposition aux radiofrquences est possible si le produit peut tre conserv aussi loin que possible du corps de l'utilisateur ou en dfinissant une puissance de sortie plus faible si une telle fonction est disponible. Chapter 1. Notice for users in USA and Canada 5 Electronic emission notices Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Declaration of Conformity Models: QCNFA344A, QCNFA435, QCNFA364, 7265NGW, 8265NGW, 3165NGW, RTL8821CE, RTL8822BE, 9260NGW, 9560NGW, 9462NGW This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation Responsible Party:

Lenovo (United States) Incorporated 1009 Think Place-Building One Morrisville, NC 27560 Telephone: 1-919-294-5900 Usage environment and your health The wireless device installed in the computer operates within the guidelines identified by radio frequency (RF) safety standards and recommendations; therefore, Lenovo believes this product is safe for use by consumers. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the worldwide scientific community, and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists, who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of wireless devices might be restricted by the proprietor of a building or responsible representatives of an organization. For example, these situations and areas might include the following:

On board of airplanes, in hospitals, or near petrol stations, blasting areas (with electro-explosive devices), medical implants, or body-worn electronic medical devices, such as pace makers. 6 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules In any other environment where the risk of interference to other devices or services is perceived or identified as harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices in a specific area (such as an airport or hospital), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use a wireless device prior to turning on the computer. Chapter 1. Notice for users in USA and Canada 7 8 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules Chapter 2. Europe EU Declaration of Conformity (wireless module) Table 1. EU Directive 2014/53/EU Technology Frequency band [MHz]

Maximum transmit power [dBm]

(less than) WLAN 802.11b/g/n WLAN 802.11a/n/ac WLAN 802.11a/n/ac WiGig 802.11ad Bluetooth BR/EDR/LE WWAN UMTS WWAN LTE NFC 2400 - 2483.5 5150 - 5725 5725 - 5875 58210 - 62640 2400 - 2483.5 1/3/8 1/3/7/8/20/28 13.56 20 23 13.98 25 20 24.5 24

-38.11 English Hereby, Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., declares that the wireless equipment listed in this section is in compliance with the Radio Equipment Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the system EU declaration of conformity and the EU wireless module declarations are available at the following Internet addresses:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables EU Frequency band restriction for a wireless LAN Usage of this device is limited to indoor in the band 5150 MHz to 5350 MHz (channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). RF exposure information This device meets the EU requirements and the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) guidelines for general publics exposure to electromagnetic fields. To comply with the RF exposure requirements, refer to the Setup Guide for your product for the minimum safe-operating separation distance and SAR values. Copyright Lenovo 2018 9 Bulgarian Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. , ,

, 2014/53/E.

:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables LAN 5150 MHz 5350 MHz

( 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64).

(ICNIRP) . SAR. Croatian Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. ovime izjavljuje da je beina oprema navedena u ovom odjeljku usklaena s Direktivom o radijskoj opremi 2014/53/EU. Cjeloviti tekst EU izjave o sukladnosti sustava i EU izjave o beinim modulima dostupne su na sljedeoj web-adresi:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Ogranienje frekvencijskog pojasa za beini LAN u EU-u Upotreba ureaja ograniena je na zatvorene prostore unutar pojasa od 5150 MHz do 5350 MHz (kanali 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informacije o izlaganju radijskoj frekvenciji Ovaj ureaj zadovoljava zahtjeve EU-a i smjernice Meunarodne komisije za zatitu od neionizirajueg zraenja o izlaganju javnosti elektromagnetskim poljima. Da bi oprema bila usklaena sa zahtjevima o izlaganju radijskoj frekvenciji, u priruniku za postavljanje proizvoda potraite vrijednosti minimalne sigurne udaljenosti i specifine brzine apsorpcije. Czech Spolenost Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. tmto prohlauje, e bezdrtov zazen uveden v tto sti dokumentu spluj zkladn i dal relevantn poadavky smrnice o rdiovch zazench 2014/53/EU. Cel znn EU prohlen o shod systmu a EU prohlen o bezdrtovch modulech je k dispozici na tto internetov adrese:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks 10 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Omezen EU pro frekvenn psma bezdrtov st LAN Pouit tohoto zazen je omezeno na vnitn prostory a frekvenn psma 5150 a 5350 MHz (kanly 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informace o vystaven radiofrekvennmu zen Toto zazen spluje poadavky EU a pokyny ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection Mezinrodn komise pro ochranu ped neionizujcm zenm) tkajc se vystaven obecn veejnosti elektromagnetickm polm. Informace o minimln bezpen provozn vzdlenosti a hodnotch SAR pro v produkt, kter jsou v souladu s poadavky na ochranu ped radiofrekvennm zenm, najdete v Nvodu k nastaven. Danish Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. erklrer hermed, at det trdlse udstyr, der er angivet i dette afsnit, overholder direktivet om radioudstyr 2014/53/EU. Den fulde erklring vedrrende systemets overholdelse af EU-krav og erklringerne om de trdlse modulers overholdelse af EU-krav (hvis relevante) er tilgngelige via flgende internetadresse:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Restriktioner for frekvensbnd i EU for et trdlst LAN Brug af denne enhed er begrnset til indendrs brug i frekvensbndet 5150 MHz til 5350 MHz (kanal 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Oplysninger om radioblgeeksponering Denne enhed opfylder EU-kravene og ICNIRP-retningslinjerne ( International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) for eksponering for elektromagnetiske felter. For at overholde RF-

eksponeringskravene, kan du se Brugervejledningen for dit produkt for den minimale sikkerhedsafstandsafstand og SAR-vrdier. Dutch Hierbij verklaart Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. dat de draadloze apparatuur die in dit artikel is aangegeven voldoet aan de richtlijn 2014/53/EU voor radioapparatuur. De volledige tekst van de EU-conformiteitsverklaring betreffende systemen en van de EU-verklaringen betreffende draadloze modules is beschikbaar op het volgende internetadres:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables EU-beperking van frequentieband voor een draadloos LAN Gebruik van dit apparaat is beperkt tot gebruik binnenshuis in de band van 5150 MHz tot 5350 MHz (kanalen 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Chapter 2. Europe EU Declaration of Conformity (wireless module) 11 Informatie over blootstelling aan radiogolven Dit apparaat voldoet aan de vereisten van de EU en de richtlijnen van de ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) voor blootstelling van het algemene publiek aan elektromagnetische velden. Om te voldoen aan de vereisten voor blootstelling aan radiogolven, raadpleegt u de Installatiehandleiding voor uw product voor de minimale veilige afstand en de SAR-waarden. Estonian Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. kinnitab kesolevaga, et selles jaotises esitatud traadita side seadmed vastavad raadioseadmete direktiivile 2014/53/EL. Ssteemi EL-i vastavusdeklaratsiooni ja EL-i traadita side mooduli deklaratsioonide tielikud tekstid on saadaval jrgmisel Interneti-aadressil:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables EL-i sagedusvahemiku piirang traadita side LAN-ile Seda seadet vib kasutada siseruumides sagedusvahemikus 51505350 MHz (kanalid 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Raadiosagedusliku kiirguse teave Seade vastab EL-i nuetele ja Rahvusvahelise mitteioniseeriva kiirguse eest kaitsmise komisjoni (ICNIRP) juhistele elanikkonna elektromagnetiliste vljadega kokkupuute kohta. Raadiosageduslikule kiirgusele stestatud nuetele vastamiseks vt oma toote kohta kivat vhimat ohutut ttamiskaugust ja SAR-i vrtuseid seadistusjuhendist. Finnish Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. ilmoittaa tten, ett tss jaksossa mainitut langattomat laitteet ovat radiolaitedirektiivin 2014/53/EU mukaisia. Lausuma jrjestelmn EU-snnstenmukaisuudesta ja lausumat langattomien moduulien EU-

snnstenmukaisuudesta ovat saatavilla kokonaisuudessaan seuraavassa Internet-osoitteessa:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Langattoman lhiverkon taajuusalueen rajoitus EU:n alueella Tm laite on tarkoitettu kytettvksi sistiloissa taajuusalueella 5 1505 350 MHz (kanavat 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60 ja 64). Tietoja radiotaajuiselle steilylle altistumisesta Tm laite tytt Euroopan unionin vaatimukset ja kansainvlisen ionisoimattoman steilyn toimikunnan

(ICNIRP, International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) suositukset, jotka koskevat vestn altistumista shkmagneettisille kentille. Saat listietoja radiotaajuiselle steilylle altistumista koskevien vaatimusten noudattamisesta tutustumalla tuotteen asennusoppaassa ilmoitettuihin SAR-arvoihin ja turvallisen kytn edellyttmn vhimmisetisyyteen. 12 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules French Par la prsente, Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., dclare que les quipements sans fil lists dans cette section sont conformes la directive 2014/53/EU sur les quipements radio. Le texte complet de la dclaration europenne de conformit et des dclarations europennes concernant les modules sans fil, s'il y a lieu, sont disponibles l'adresse Internet suivante:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Restriction lie une bande de frquence pour un rseau local sans fil au sein de l'Union europenne Ce priphrique doit tre utilis exclusivement l'intrieur, dans la bande de frquence de 5150 5350 MHz

(canaux 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informations sur l'exposition aux RF Ce priphrique respecte les directives de l'UE et de la Commission internationale pour la protection contre les radiations non-ionisantes (ICNIRP) concernant l'exposition du public des champs lectromagntiques. Pour rpondre aux exigences en matire d'exposition aux RF, reportez-vous au Guide de configuration de votre produit afin de connatre la distance de sparation minimale pour une utilisation en toute scurit, ainsi que les valeurs de dbit d'absorption spcifique. German Hiermit erklrt Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., dass das in diesem Abschnitt aufgelistete drahtlose Gert die Funkanlagen-Richtlinie 2014/53/EU erfllt. Der vollstndige Text der EU-Konformittserklrung fr das System und der EU-Deklarationen zu drahtlosen Modulen kann unter der folgenden Internetadresse eingesehen werden:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables EU-Frequenzbandeinschrnkung fr drahtloses LAN Die Verwendung dieses Gertes ist im Frequenzband zwischen 5.150 und 5.350 MHz (Kanle 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64) auf die Verwendung im Innenbereich beschrnkt. Informationen zur HF-Exposition Dieses Gert erfllt die EU-Anforderungen sowie die Richtlinien der International Commission on Non-

Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) hinsichtlich der Exposition der Bevlkerung gegenber elektromagnetischen Feldern. Um die Anforderungen bezglich der HF-Exposition zu erfllen, lesen Sie die Einrichtungsanleitung zu Ihrem Produkt im Hinblick auf den Mindestabstand fr einen sicheren Betrieb und die SAR-Werte. Greek

, Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., 2014/53/. Internet:

Chapter 2. Europe EU Declaration of Conformity (wireless module) 13 https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables LAN 5150 MHz 5350 MHz ( 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64).

(RF)

(ICNIRP)

.

(RF), SAR. Hungarian A Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. ezennel kijelenti, hogy a fejezetben emltett vezetk nlkli kszlk megfelel az 2014/53/EU szm, Rdiberendezsekrl szl direktvban foglaltaknak. A berendezs Eurpai Uni-beli megfelelsgi nyilatkozata s a vezetk nlkli eszkzkkel kapcsolatos eurpai nyilatkozat (ha elrhet) a kvetkez weboldalon tekinthet meg:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Frekvenciatartomnyra vonatkoz eurpai unis korltozs vezetk nlkli LAN-hlzatokhoz Az eszkz hasznlata beltrre korltozdik az 51505350 MHz tartomnyban (csatornk: 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). RF-kitettsgre vonatkoz informcik Ez az eszkz megfelel a szemlyek elektromgneses mezknek val kitettsgre vonatkoz, az EU s az International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP Nemzetkzi Bizottsg a Nem-

ionizl Sugrzssal Szembeni Vdelemrl) ltal elrt kvetelmnyeknek. Az RF-kitettsgre vonatkoz kvetelmnyeknek val megfelelsrl (tbbek kztt a biztonsgos hasznlat minimlis tvolsgrl s a SAR-rtkekrl) az zembe helyezsi tmutatban tall tovbbi informcit. Italian Con la presente documentazione, Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. dichiara che l'apparecchiatura wireless indicata in questa sezione conforme alla direttiva 2014/53/EU sulle apparecchiature radio. Il testo integrale della dichiarazione di conformit europea del sistema e le dichiarazioni UE dei moduli wireless, se applicabili, sono disponibili al seguente indirizzo Internet:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Restrizioni UE sulla banda di frequenza per una WLAN (wireless LAN) L'utilizzo di questo dispositivo limitato ad ambienti chiusi in banda compresa tra 5150 MHz e 5350 MHz

(canali 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). 14 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules Informazioni sull'esposizione RF Questo dispositivo rispetta i requisiti EU e le linee guida ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) per l'esposizione generale ai campi elettromagnetici. Per rispettare i requisiti di conformit dell'esposizione RF, consultare la Guida di configurazione del prodotto per conoscere la distanza di sicurezza operativa minima e i valori SAR. Latvian Ar o uzmums Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. pazio, ka aj sada nordtais bezvadu aprkojums atbilst radioiekrtu Direktvai 2014/53/EK. Pilnais teksts par sistmas piemrotbu ES atbilstbas deklarcijai un ES bezvadu moduu deklarcijm ir pieejams d interneta adres:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables ES frekvenu joslu ierobeojums bezvadu LAN adapterim ierce ir paredzta izmantoanai iektelps josls no 5150 MHz ldz 5350 MHz (kanlos 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informcija par pakauanu RF starojumam ierce atbilst ES prasbm un vadlnijm, ko publicjusi Starptautisk komisija aizsardzbai pret nejonizjoo starojumu (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection ICNIRP), attiecb uz visprgu sabiedrbas pakauanu elektromagntiskajam laukam. Lai nodrointu prasbas par pakauanu RF starojumam, sk. jsu produkta Iestatanas pamcbu un mekljiet informciju par minimlo droo lietoanas attlumu un SAR vrtbas. Lithuanian iame dokumente Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. pareikia, kad belaid ranga, nurodyta iame skyriuje, atitinka Radijo rangos direktyvos 2014/53/ES reikalavimus. Vis sistemos ES atitikties deklaracijos ir ES belaidio ryio modulio deklaracij tekst galite rasti apsilank adresu internete:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Belaidio LAN ES dani diapazono apribojimas rengin patalpose galima naudoti 5 1505 350 MHz dani diapazonu (kanalai: 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informacija apie radijo dani poveik is renginys atitinka ES reikalavimus ir Tarptautins apsaugos nuo nejonizuojaniosios spinduliuots komisijos (ICNIRP) gaires dl elektromagnetini lauk poveikio plaiajai visuomenei. Kad laikytumts radijo dani poveikio apribojimo reikalavim, savo produkto Srankos vadove iekokite informacijos apie minimal saug naudojimo atstum ir SAR (savitosios sugerties sparta, angl. Specific Absorption Rate) vertes. Chapter 2. Europe EU Declaration of Conformity (wireless module) 15 Norwegian Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. erklrer herved at det trdlse utstyret som er oppfrt i dette kapittelet, er i samsvar med direktiv 2014/53/EU om radioutstyr. Den fullstendige teksten i EUs samsvarserklring for systemet og EUs samsvarserklringer for trdlse moduler, hvis aktuelt, er tilgjengelig p flgende Internett-adresser:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Begrensinger for frekvensbnd i EU for trdlst LAN Denne enheten er begrenset til innendrs bruk i frekvensbndet 5150 til 5350 MHz (kanal 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informasjon om RF-eksponering Denne enheten oppfyller EU-kravene og ICNIRP-retningslinjene (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation) for eksponering for elektromagnetiske felter ved generell bruk. Se produktets installasjonsveiledning for informasjon om minimumsavstand for trygg bruk og SAR-verdiene som overholder RF-eksponeringskravene. Polish Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., niniejszym owiadcza, e urzdzenie bezprzewodowe wymienione w tej sekcji spenia wymagania dyrektywy w sprawie sprztu radiowego 2014/53/UE. Peny tekst deklaracji zgodnoci systemw i moduw cznoci bezprzewodowej z przepisami UE mona znale na nastpujcej stronie internetowej:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Ograniczenia dotyczce pasm czstotliwoci w UE dla pocze bezprzewodowych LAN Urzdzenie jest przeznaczone do uywania wewntrz budynkw, w pasmach czstotliwoci 5150 do 5350 MHz (kanay 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60 i 64). Informacje o ekspozycji na czstotliwoci radiowe To urzdzenie spenia wymagania UE i wytyczne Midzynarodowej Komisji ds. Ochrony przed Promieniowaniem Niejonizujcym (ICNIRP) dotyczce wystawienia ludzi na dziaanie pl elektromagnetycznych. W celu spenienia wymaga dotyczcych wystawienia na dziaanie czstotliwoci radiowych zobacz Podrcznik konfiguracji do swojego produktu, aby sprawdzi minimaln bezpieczn odlego podczas obsugi i wartoci SAR. Portuguese A Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., declara por este meio que o equipamento sem fios listado nesta seco est em conformidade com a Diretiva de Equipamento de Rdio 2014/53/UE. O texto completo da declarao de conformidade da UE e das declaraes de mdulos sem fios da UE para o sistema encontram-se disponveis no seguinte endereo da Internet:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks 16 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Restrio da banda de frequncias na UE para uma LAN sem fios A utilizao deste dispositivo est limitada utilizao no interior, na banda 5150 a 5350 MHz (canais 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informaes sobre exposio a RF Este dispositivo cumpre os requisitos da UE e as diretrizes da International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) para exposio do pblico geral a campos eletromagnticos. Para estar em conformidade com os requisitos de exposio a RF, consulte o Manual de Configurao do produto para ficar a saber a distncia mnima de separao para uma operao segura e os valores SAR. Romanian Prin aceasta, Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. declar c echipamentul fr fir prezentat n aceast seciune este n conformitate cu Directiva privitoare la echipamentele radio 2014/53/UE. Textul complet al sistemului de declaraii de conformitate i declaraiile privind modulele fr fir UE sunt disponibile la urmtoarele adrese:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Restricia UE privind banda de frecven a unei reele LAN fr fir Utilizarea acestui dispozitiv este limitat la spaiile interioare, n banda de 5.150 5.350 MHz (canalele 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informaii privind expunerea la frecvenele radio Acest dispozitiv ndeplinete cerinele UE i instruciunile Comisiei internaionale pentru protecia mpotriva radiaiilor neionizante (ICNIRP) referitoare la expunerea persoanelor la cmpuri electromagnetice. Pentru a respecta cerinele privind expunerea la frecvenele radio, consultai Ghid de configurare al produsului, pentru distana minim de utilizare n siguran i pentru valorile SAR. Slovenian Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. s tem izjavlja, da je brezina oprema, navedena v tem razdelku, v skladu z direktivo o radijski opremi 2014/53/EU. Celotno besedilo izjave EU o skladnosti za sistem in morebitnih deklaracij EU za brezini modul je na voljo na tem spletnem naslovu:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Omejitve Evropske unije glede frekvennega pasu za brezina krajevna omreja Ta naprava je omejena na notranjo uporabo v pasu od 5150 do 5350 MHz (kanali 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informacije o izpostavljenosti RF-sevanju Ta naprava izpolnjuje zahteve EU in smernice Mednarodne komisije za varstvo pred neionizirnimi sevanji

(International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection ICNIRP) za izpostavljenost splone Chapter 2. Europe EU Declaration of Conformity (wireless module) 17 javnosti elektromagnetnim poljem. Informacije za izpolnjevanje zahtev glede izpostavljenosti RF-sevanju so v navodilih za uporabo za ustrezen izdelek, v katerih so navedene najmanje loitvene razdalje za varno uporabo in vrednosti SAR. Slovakian Spolonos Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. tmto vyhlasuje, e bezdrtov zariadenie uveden v tejto asti je v slade so smernicou o rdiovch zariadeniach 2014/53/E. pln texty vyhlsenia E o zhode pre systm a vyhlsen E pre bezdrtov moduly s dostupn na nasledujcej internetovej adrese:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Obmedzenie frekvennho psma E pre bezdrtov sie LAN Pouvanie tohto zariadenia je obmedzen na interir vo frekvennom psme 5 150 a 5 350 MHz (kanly 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informcie o vystaven rdiofrekvennmu iareniu Toto zariadenie vyhovuje poiadavkm E a smerniciam Medzinrodnej komisie pre ochranu pred neionizujcim iarenm (ICNIRP), ktor upravuj vystavenie irokej verejnosti elektromagnetickm poliam. Na zaistenie sladu s poiadavkami v oblasti vystavenia rdiofrekvennmu iareniu sa oboznmte s Prrukou o nastaven, ktor obsahuje informcie o minimlnej vzdialenosti vyadovanej na bezpen pouvanie a o hodnotch SAR. Spanish Mediante el presente documento, Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., declara que el equipo inalmbrico indicado en esta seccin cumple con la Directiva de Equipos de Radio 2014/53/UE. El texto completo del sistema Declaracin de conformidad UE y las declaraciones de los mdulos inalmbricos de la UE, si corresponde, estn disponibles en la siguiente direccin de Internet:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Restriccin de banda de frecuencia de la UE para LAN inalmbrica La utilizacin de este dispositivo est limitada a interiores en la banda de 5150 MHz a 5350 MHz (canales 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Informacin de exposicin a RF Este dispositivo satisface los requisitos de la UE y las directrices de la International Commission on Non-

Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) sobre la exposicin del pblico general a campos electromagnticos. Para cumplir los requisitos de exposicin a RF, consulte la Gua de instalacin del producto, donde encontrar la informacin acerca de la distancia de separacin mnima segura y los valores de SAR. Swedish Hrmed intygar Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. att den trdlsa utrustningen i det hr avsnittet verensstmmer med direktivet fr radioutrustning 2014/53/EU. 18 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules Den fullstndiga texten i EU-deklarationen om verensstmmelse och EU-deklarationen om trdlsa moduler fr systemet finns, om tillmpligt, p fljande webbadress:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Frekvensomrdesbegrnsning inom EU fr trdlst ntverk Enheten fr bara anvndas inomhus i frekvensomrdet 51505350 MHz (kanal 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Information om exponering fr radiovgor Denna enhet verensstmmer med EU:s krav och ICNIRP:s (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) riktlinjer avseende allmnhetens exponering fr elektromagnetiska flt. Fr att uppfylla kraven p exponering fr radiovgor, se information om minsta avstnd fr sker anvndning samt SAR-

vrden i installationshandboken. Turkish Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., bu blmde listelenen kablosuz cihazlarn temel gereksinimler ve Radyo Ekipmanlar Ynetmelii 2014/53/EC ile uyumlu olduunu beyan eder. Sisteme ait AB uyumluluk bildirimi ve ABD kablosuz modl bildirimlerinin tam metni u nternet adresinde sunulmaktadr:

https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-notebooks https://www.lenovo.com/eu-doc-tables Kablosuz LAN iin AB Frekans band kstlamas Bu cihazn kullanm i mekanlarda, 5150 - 5350 MHz bant aral (36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64 kanallar) ile snrldr. RF maruz kalma bilgileri Bu cihaz, kamunun elektromanyetik alanlara maruz kalmasna ilikin AB gereksinimlerine ve Uluslararas Non-

yonizan Radyasyondan Korunma Komitesi (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection-

ICNIRP) ynergelerine uygundur. RF maruz kalma gereksinimlerine uyum gerei, minimum gvenli altrma mesafesi ve SAR deerleri iin rnnzn Kurulum Klavuzu'na bakn. Chapter 2. Europe EU Declaration of Conformity (wireless module) 19 20 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules Chapter 3. Regulatory notices for other countries This chapter provides wireless information about the following countries. Notice for users in Argentina (Nota para uso en Argentina) Modelo: Intel 3165NGW Equipo: Acceso Inalambrico De Red CNC: C-14446 Modelo: Intel 7265NGW Equipo: Acceso Inalambrico De Red CNC: C-13275 Modelo: Intel 8265NGW Equipo:Transceptor CNC: C-16376 Modelo: Qualcomm QCNFA344A Equipo: Transceptor CNC: C-14869 Modelo: Qualcomm QCNFA364 Equipo: Acceso Inalambrico De Red CNC: C-14866 Modelo: Qualcomm QCNFA435 Equipo: Transceptor CNC: C-14476 Modelo: Realtek RTL8821CE Equipo: Transceptor CNC: C-17250 Copyright Lenovo 2018 21 Modelo: Realtek RTL8822BE Equipo: Transceptor CNC: C-16809 Modelo: Intel 9260NGW CNC: C-20821 Modelo: Intel 9560NGW CNC: C-20824 Modelo: Intel 9462NGW CNC: C-20987 Notice for users in Brazil (Aviso para usuarios no Brasil) For models: QCNFA344A, QCNFA435, QCNFA364, 7265NGW, 8265NGW, 3165NGW, RTL8821CE, RTL8822BE, 9260NGW, 9560NGW, 9462NGW Portuguese English Portuguese English Este equipamento no tem direito proteo contra interferncia prejudicial e no pode causar interferncia em sistemas devidamente autorizados. This equipment is not protected against harmful interference and may not cause interference with duly authorized systems. Este produto est homologado pela Anatel, de acordo com os procedimentos regulamentados pela Resoluo n 242/2000 e atende aos requisitos tcnicos aplicados, incluindo os limites de exposio da Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncia, de acordo com as Resoluos n 303/2002 This product meets the applicable technical requirements, including exposure limits on Specific Absorption Rate related to electric, magnetic and electromagnetic radiofrequency, in accordance with Resolutions No. 303/2002. For model: 3165NGW 0258-14-2198

(01)7898355950391 For model: 7265NGW 0258-14-2198

(01)7898355950353 22 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules For model: 8265NGW 03877-16-02198 For model: QCNFA344A 2544-15-6534

(01)07898931331217 For model: QCNFA364 2563-15-6534

(01)07898931331224 For model: QCNFA435 0784-15-6534

(01)07898931331200 For model: RTL8821CE 06446-16-04076 For model: RTL8822BE 03595-16-04076 Chapter 3. Regulatory notices for other countries 23 For model: 9260NGW 05831-17-04423 For model: 9560NGW 05788-17-04423 For model: 9462NGW 00595-18-04423 Notice for users in India Modelo: 3165NGW NR-EAT/1623 Modelo: 7265NGW ETA-1075/2014 Modelo: 8265NGW NR-ETA-14791 Modelo: QCNFA344A ETA-032/2015-RLO(SR)/2120r ETA-033/2015-RLO(SR)/2121 Modelo: QCNFA364 ETA-034/2015-RLO ETA-035/2015-RLO 24 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules Modelo: QCNFA435 ETA-010/2015-RLO Modelo: RTL8821CE NR-ETA/5229-RLO NR-ETA/5230-RLO Modelo: RTL8822BE NR-ETA-/4671 NR-ETA-/4670 Modelo: 9260NGW NR-EAT/6865-RLO Modelo: 9560NGW NR-EAT/6863-RLO Modelo: 9462NGW NR-ETA/7902-RLO(NR) Notice for users in Mexico (Nota para uso en Mexico) En Mexico la operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada Modelo: 3165NGW Adaptador Intel Dual Band Wireless AC 3165 IFT RCPIN3115-0385 Modelo: 7265NGW Adaptador Intel 7265NGW IFT RCPIN7214-0488 Modelo: 8265NGW Adaptador Intel Dual Band Wireless AC 8265 IFT RCPIN8216-0896 Modelo: QCNFA344A TARJETA TIPO M.2 2230 Chapter 3. Regulatory notices for other countries 25 802.11a/b/g/n/ac+BT 4.1 IFT RCPQUQC15-0890 Modelo: QCNFA364 TARJETA TIPO M.2230 802.11a/b/g/n/ac+BT 4.1 IFT RCPQUQC15-0928 Modelo: QCNFA435 802.11a/b/g/n/ac+BT 4.1 M.2 IFT RCPQUQC15-0323 Modelo: RTL8821CE Modulo combo 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac IFTRCPRERT17-0354 Modelo: RTL8822BE Modulo WI-FI RCPRERT16-1591 Modelo: 9260NGW Adaptador Intel Wireless AC 9260 IFT RCPIN9217-1585 Modelo: 9560NGW Adaptador Intel Wireless AC 9560 IFT RCPIN9517-1584 Modelo: 9462NGW Adaptador Intel Wireless AC 9462 IFT RCPIN9417-2005 Notice for users in Morocco Model: is approved for Morocco by ANRT. In addition, the following wireless modules used in this product are all approved for Morocco by ANRT:

QCNFA344A, QCNFA435, QCNFA364, 7265NGW, 8265NGW, 3165NGW, RTL8821CE, RTL8822BE, 9260NGW, 9560NGW, 9462NGW Notes:

26 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules The operation of this product in the radio channel 2 (2417 MHz) is not authorized in the following cities:

Agadir, Assa-Zag, Cabo Negro, Chaouen, Goulmima, Oujda, Tan Tan, Taourirt, Taroudant, and Taza. The operation of this product in the radio channels 4, 5, 6 and 7 (2425 - 2442 MHz) is not authorized in the following cities: Aroport Mohamed V, Agadir, Aguelmous, Anza, Benslimane, Bni Hafida, Cabo Negro, Casablanca, Fs, Lakbab, Marrakech, Merchich, Mohammdia, Rabat, Sal, Tanger, Tan Tan, Taounate, Tit Mellil, and Zag. Due to the channel restrictions above, the operation of this product using the fat channel mode (40 MHz of channel bandwidth) is not allowed at the 2.4 GHz frequency band. Notice for users in Nigeria For models: QCNFA344A, QCNFA435, QCNFA364, 7265NGW, 8265NGW, 3165NGW, RTL8821CE, RTL8822BE, 9260NGW, 9560NGW, 9462NGW Chapter 3. Regulatory notices for other countries 27 Notice for users in Saudi Arabia For model: 3165NGW Conformity Certificate Certificate No:

TA 14022017-12022019-19328 Applicant Information Applicant:

Certificate Details Issue Date:

Validity Period:

Device Details Product Name:

Product Model:

Manufacturer:

Additional Details Operating Frequency :

Maximum Output Power allowed (EIRP) :

Device comply with CITC technical Specification No.:

Additional Requirement Intel Mobile Communications SAS 12/02/2017 12/02/2019 1438/05/15 1440/06/07 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3165 Intel 3165NGW INTEL MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

2400-2483.5 MHZ:100 mW 5150-5350 MHZ:200 mW 5470-5825 MHZ:200 mW RI045

:

:

WLAN / WiFi) )

:

http://ers.citc.gov.sa

, 1422/03/12 (12/)

. ,1422/03/05 (74)

. ,

,

,

/ . 28 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules For model: 7265NGW Conformity Certificate Certificate No:

TA 23032017-23032019-19844 Applicant Information Applicant:

Certificate Details Issue Date:

Validity Period:

Device Details Product Name:

Product Model:

Manufacturer:

Additional Details Operating Frequency :

Maximum Output Power allowed (EIRP) :

Device comply with CITC technical Specification No.:

Additional Requirement Intel Mobile Communications SAS 23/03/2017 23/03/2019 1438/06/24 1440/07/16 INTEL WIRELESS 7265 7265NGW INTEL MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS 2400-2483 MHZ:100 mW 5150-5250 MHZ:200 mW 5250-5350 MHZ:200 mW 5470-5725 MHZ:200 mW RI103 , RI045

(WLAN - WiFi)

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

http://ers.citc.gov.sa

, 1422/03/12 (12/)

. ,1422/03/05 (74)

. ,

,

,

/ . Chapter 3. Regulatory notices for other countries 29 For model: 8265NGW Conformity Certificate Certificate No:

TA 04082016-04082018-17006 Applicant Information Applicant:

Certificate Details Issue Date:

Validity Period:

Device Details Product Name:

Product Model:

Manufacturer:

Additional Details Operating Frequency :

Maximum Output Power allowed (EIRP) :

Device comply with CITC technical Specification No.:

Additional Requirement Intel Mobile Communications SAS 04/08/2016 04/08/2018 1437/11/01 1439/11/22 INTEL 8265NGW 8265NGW INTEL MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS 2400-2483.5 MHZ:19.6 dBm 5150-5250 MHZ:22.3 dBm 5470-5725 MHZ:22.4 dBm 2400-2483.5 MHZ:9.5 dBm 2400-2483.5 MHZ:14.9 dBm 5250-5350 MHZ:22.2 dBm 5725-5850 MHZ:13.98 dBm RI045 , RI103

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

http://ers.citc.gov.sa

, 1422/03/12 (12/)

. ,1422/03/05 (74)

. ,

,

,

/ . 30 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules For model: Qualcomm QCNFA344A Chapter 3. Regulatory notices for other countries 31 For model: Qualcomm QCNFA364 32 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules For model: Qualcomm QCNFA435 Chapter 3. Regulatory notices for other countries 33 For model: RTL8821CE Conformity Certificate Certificate No:

TA 22012017-22012019-18919 Applicant Information Applicant:

Certificate Details Issue Date:

Validity Period:

Device Details Product Name:

Product Model:

Manufacturer:

Additional Details Operating Frequency :

Maximum Output Power allowed (EIRP) :

Device comply with CITC technical Specification No.:

Additional Requirement Aman for Modern Technologies 22/01/2017 22/01/2019 1438/04/24 1440/05/16 RTL8821CE RTL8821CE Realtek Semiconductor Corp. 2400-2483.5 MHZ:19.99 dBm 5150-5725 MHZ:22.73 dBm RI045 , RI103 , GEN001

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

(WLAN / WiFi)

:

http://ers.citc.gov.sa

, 1422/03/12 (12/)

. ,1422/03/05 (74)

. ,

,

,

/ . 34 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules For model: RTL8822BE Conformity Certificate Certificate No:

TA 11102016-11102018-17824 Applicant Information Applicant:

Certificate Details Issue Date:

Validity Period:

Device Details Product Name:

Product Model:

Manufacturer:

Additional Details Operating Frequency :

Maximum Output Power allowed (EIRP) :

Device comply with CITC technical Specification No.:

Additional Requirement SGS Taiwan Ltd. 11/10/2016 11/10/2018 1438/01/10 1440/02/02 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac RTL8822BE Combo module RTL8822BE Realtek Semiconductor Corp. 2400-2483.5 MHZ:19.98 dBm 5150-5250 MHZ:22.93 dBm 5250-5350 MHZ:22.97 dBm 5470-5725 MHZ:22.97 dBm 5725-5825 MHZ:29.11 dBm RI045 , RI103

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

(WLAN - WiFi)

:

http://ers.citc.gov.sa

, 1422/03/12 (12/)

. ,1422/03/05 (74)

. ,

,

,

/ . Chapter 3. Regulatory notices for other countries 35 For model: 9260NGW Conformity Certificate Certificate No:

07082017-07082019-20916 Applicant Information Applicant:

Certificate Details Issue Date:

Validity Period:

Device Details Product Name:

Product Model:

Manufacturer:

Additional Details Operating Frequency :

Maximum Output Power allowed (EIRP) :

Device comply with CITC technical Specification No.:

Additional Requirement Intel Mobile Communications SAS 07/08/2017 07/08/2019 1438/11/15 1440/12/06 9260NGW 9260NGW INTEL MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS 2400-2483.5 MHZ:19.9 dBm 5150-5250 MHZ:22.8 dBm 5250-5350 MHZ:22.8 dBm 5470-5725 MHZ:22.7 dBm 5725-5850 MHZ:13.76 dBm 2400-2483.5 MHZ:12.9 dBm 2400-5825 MHZ:9.8 dBm RI045 , RI103

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

(WLAN / WiFi)

:

http://ers.citc.gov.sa

, 1422/03/12 (12/)

. ,1422/03/05 (74)

. ,

,

,

/ . 36 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules For model: 9560NGW Conformity Certificate Certificate No:

TA 16082017-16082019-20980 Applicant Information Applicant:

Certificate Details Issue Date:

Validity Period:

Device Details Product Name:

Product Model:

Manufacturer:

Additional Details Operating Frequency :

Maximum Output Power allowed (EIRP) :

Device comply with CITC technical Specification No.:

Additional Requirement Intel Mobile Communications SAS 16/08/2017 16/08/2019 1438/11/24 1440/12/15 9560NGW 9560NGW INTEL MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS 2400-2483.5 MHZ:9.8 dBm 2400-2483.5 MHZ:13.5 dBm 2400-2483.5 MHZ:19.7 dBm 5150-5250 MHZ:22.5 dBm 5250-5350 MHZ:22.5 dBm 5470-5725 MHZ:20.7 dBm 5725-5825 MHZ:13.65 dBm RI103

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

http://ers.citc.gov.sa

, 1422/03/12 (12/)

. ,1422/03/05 (74)

. ,

,

,

/ . Chapter 3. Regulatory notices for other countries 37 For model: 9462NGW Conformity Certificate Certificate No:

TA 14122017-14122019-21795 Applicant Information Applicant:

Certificate Details Issue Date:

Validity Period:

Device Details Product Name:

Product Model:

Manufacturer:

Additional Details Operating Frequency :

Maximum Output Power allowed (EIRP) :

Device comply with CITC technical Specification No.:

Additional Requirement Intel Mobile Communications SAS 14/12/2017 14/12/2019 1439/03/26 1441/04/17 Intel Wireless-AC 9462 9462NGW INTEL MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS 2400-2483.5 MHZ:10 dBm 2400-2483.5 MHZ:13.3 dBm 2400-2483.5 MHZ:19.8 dBm 5150-5250 MHZ:22.8 dBm 5250-5350 MHZ:22.8 dBm 5470-5725 MHZ:22.8 dBm 5725-5825 MHZ:13.91 dBm RI045 , RI103

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

:

http://ers.citc.gov.sa

, 1422/03/12 (12/)

. ,1422/03/05 (74)

. ,

,

,

/ . 38 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules Notice for users in Serbia The following models have been approved by Ratel: QCNFA344A, QCNFA435, QCNFA364, 7265NGW, 8265NGW, 3165NGW, RTL8821CE, RTL8822BE, 9260NGW, 9560NGW, 9462NGW. Notice for users in South Africa For model: 3165NGW TA-2015/580 APPROVED For model: 7265NGW TA-2014/499 APPROVED For model: 8265NGW TA-20161468 APPROVED For model: QCNFA344A TA-2015/829 APPROVED For model: QCNFA364 TA-2015/831 APPROVED For model: QCNFA435 TA-2014/2507 APPROVED Chapter 3. Regulatory notices for other countries 39 For model: RTL8821CE TA-2016/2779 APPROVED For model: RTL8822BE TA-2016/2137 APPROVED For model: 9260NGW TA-2017/1348 A P P RO V E D For model: 9560NGW TA-2017/1347 A P P RO V E D For model: 9462NGW TA-2017/2772 A P P RO V E D Notice for users in Taiwan For models: QCNFA344A, QCNFA435, QCNFA364, 7265NGW, 8265NGW, 3165NGW, RTL8821CE, RTL8822BE, 9260NGW, 9560NGW, 9462NGW

NCC

40 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules

5.255.35 Notice for users in the UAE For model: 3165NGW TRA REGISTERED NO. ER37771/15 DEALER NO. 0018841/09 For model: 7265NGW TRA REGISTERED NO. ER0128120/14 DEALER NO. 0018841/09 For model: 8265NGW TRA REGISTERED NO. ER46868/16 DEALER NO. 0018841/09 For model: QCNFA344A TRA REGISTERED NO. ER38777/15 DEALER NO. DA0039119/10 For model: QCNFA364 TRA REGISTERED NO. ER38759/15 DEALER NO. 0014005/08 For model: QCNFA435 TRA REGISTERED NO. ER37623/15 DEALER NO. 0014005/08 Chapter 3. Regulatory notices for other countries 41 For model: RTL8821CE TRA REGISTERED NO. ER50849/16 DEALER NO. 0033451/10 For model: RTL8822BE TRA REGISTERED NO. ER48726/16 DEALER NO. 0033451/10 For model: 9260NGW TRA REGISTERED NO. ER57060/17 DEALER NO. 0018841/09 For model: 9560NGW TRA REGISTERED NO. ER57050/17 DEALER NO. 0018841/09 For model: 9462NGW TRA REGISTERED NO. ER60467/18 DEALER NO. 0018841/09 42 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN modules Trademarks LENOVO and the LENOVO logo are trademarks of Lenovo. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2018 Lenovo

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1. PHOTOGRAPHS OF EUT Photograph of the EUT Report No.: EP8N1304 EUT: 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac RTL8822BE Combo module

(Brand Name: Realtek / Model Name: RTL8822BE) TEL : 886-3-327-3456 FAX : 886-3-328-4978 Page Number

: 1 of 30 Issued Date

: Jan. 09, 2019 Report Version

: 01 PHOTOGRAPHS OF EUT Report No.: EP8N1304 EUT: 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac RTL8822BE Combo module

(Brand Name: Realtek / Model Name: RTL8822BE) TEL : 886-3-327-3456 FAX : 886-3-328-4978 Page Number

: 2 of 30 Issued Date

: Jan. 09, 2019 Report Version

: 01 2. 2. Photographs of EUT External Photograph of the Host External Photographs of the Host Report No.: EP8N1304 Sample 1 Host: Notebook PC (Brand Name: HP / Model Name: TPN-W139) TEL : 886-3-327-3456 FAX : 886-3-328-4978 Page Number

: 3 of 30 Issued Date

: Jan. 09, 2019 Report Version

: 01 Photographs of EUT Report No.: EP8N1304 Host: Notebook PC (Brand Name: HP / Model Name: TPN-W139) TEL : 886-3-327-3456 FAX : 886-3-328-4978 Page Number

: 4 of 30 Issued Date

: Jan. 09, 2019 Report Version

: 01 Photographs of EUT Report No.: EP8N1304 Host: Notebook PC (Brand Name: HP / Model Name: TPN-W139) TEL : 886-3-327-3456 FAX : 886-3-328-4978 Page Number

: 5 of 30 Issued Date

: Jan. 09, 2019 Report Version

: 01 Photographs of EUT Report No.: EP8N1304 Host: Notebook PC (Brand Name: HP / Model Name: TPN-W139) TEL : 886-3-327-3456 FAX : 886-3-328-4978 Page Number

: 6 of 30 Issued Date

: Jan. 09, 2019 Report Version

: 01 Photographs of EUT Report No.: EP8N1304 Host: Notebook PC (Brand Name: HP / Model Name: TPN-W139) TEL : 886-3-327-3456 FAX : 886-3-328-4978 Page Number

: 7 of 30 Issued Date

: Jan. 09, 2019 Report Version

: 01 Photographs of EUT Report No.: EP8N1304 Host: Notebook PC (Brand Name: HP / Model Name: TPN-W139) TEL : 886-3-327-3456 FAX : 886-3-328-4978 Page Number

: 8 of 30 Issued Date

: Jan. 09, 2019 Report Version

: 01 Photographs of EUT Report No.: EP8N1304 Host: Notebook PC (Brand Name: HP / Model Name: TPN-W139) TEL : 886-3-327-3456 FAX : 886-3-328-4978 Page Number

: 9 of 30 Issued Date

: Jan. 09, 2019 Report Version

: 01 Photographs of EUT Report No.: EP8N1304 Host: Notebook PC (Brand Name: HP / Model Name: TPN-W139) TEL : 886-3-327-3456 FAX : 886-3-328-4978 Page Number

: 10 of 30 Issued Date

: Jan. 09, 2019 Report Version

: 01 Photographs of EUT Report No.: EP8N1304 Sample 2 Host: Notebook PC (Brand Name: HP / Model Name: TPN-W139) TEL : 886-3-327-3456 FAX : 886-3-328-4978 Page Number

: 11 of 30 Issued Date

: Jan. 09, 2019 Report Version

: 01 Photographs of EUT Report No.: EP8N1304 Host: Notebook PC (Brand Name: HP / Model Name: TPN-W139) TEL : 886-3-327-3456 FAX : 886-3-328-4978 Page Number

: 12 of 30 Issued Date

: Jan. 09, 2019 Report Version

: 01 Photographs of EUT Report No.: EP8N1304 Host: Notebook PC (Brand Name: HP / Model Name: TPN-W139) TEL : 886-3-327-3456 FAX : 886-3-328-4978 Page Number

: 13 of 30 Issued Date

: Jan. 09, 2019 Report Version

: 01 Photographs of EUT Report No.: EP8N1304 Host: Notebook PC (Brand Name: HP / Model Name: TPN-W139) TEL : 886-3-327-3456 FAX : 886-3-328-4978 Page Number

: 14 of 30 Issued Date

: Jan. 09, 2019 Report Version

: 01 Photographs of EUT Report No.: EP8N1304 Host: Notebook PC (Brand Name: HP / Model Name: TPN-W139) TEL : 886-3-327-3456 FAX : 886-3-328-4978 Page Number

: 15 of 30 Issued Date

: Jan. 09, 2019 Report Version

: 01 Photographs of EUT Report No.: EP8N1304 Host: Notebook PC (Brand Name: HP / Model Name: TPN-W139) TEL : 886-3-327-3456 FAX : 886-3-328-4978 Page Number

: 16 of 30 Issued Date

: Jan. 09, 2019 Report Version

: 01 Photographs of EUT Report No.: EP8N1304 Host: Notebook PC (Brand Name: HP / Model Name: TPN-W139) TEL : 886-3-327-3456 FAX : 886-3-328-4978 Page Number

: 17 of 30 Issued Date

: Jan. 09, 2019 Report Version

: 01 Photographs of EUT Report No.: EP8N1304 Host: Notebook PC (Brand Name: HP / Model Name: TPN-W139) TEL : 886-3-327-3456 FAX : 886-3-328-4978 Page Number

: 18 of 30 Issued Date

: Jan. 09, 2019 Report Version

: 01 Photographs of EUT Photograph of Accessory for the Host Report No.: EP8N1304 Host: Notebook PC (Brand Name: HP / Model Name: TPN-W139) 3. List of Accessory for Host (Notebook PC):

Specification of Accessory AC Adapter Battery Brand Name Model Name Brand Name Model Name HP TPN-LA08 HP HSTNN-LB8M Remark: For accessories equipped with this EUT, please refer to the following photos. TEL : 886-3-327-3456 FAX : 886-3-328-4978 Page Number

: 19 of 30 Issued Date

: Jan. 09, 2019 Report Version

: 01 Photographs of EUT Report No.: EP8N1304 Sample 1 Host: Notebook PC (Brand Name: HP / Model Name: TPN-W139) TEL : 886-3-327-3456 FAX : 886-3-328-4978 Page Number

: 20 of 30 Issued Date

: Jan. 09, 2019 Report Version

: 01 Photographs of EUT Report No.: EP8N1304 Host: Notebook PC (Brand Name: HP / Model Name: TPN-W139) Sample 2 TEL : 886-3-327-3456 FAX : 886-3-328-4978 Page Number

: 21 of 30 Issued Date

: Jan. 09, 2019 Report Version

: 01 Photographs of EUT Report No.: EP8N1304 AC Adapter Host: Notebook PC (Brand Name: HP / Model Name: TPN-W139) TEL : 886-3-327-3456 FAX : 886-3-328-4978 Page Number

: 22 of 30 Issued Date

: Jan. 09, 2019 Report Version

: 01 Photographs of EUT Report No.: EP8N1304 Battery Host: Notebook PC (Brand Name: HP / Model Name: TPN-W139) TEL : 886-3-327-3456 FAX : 886-3-328-4978 Page Number

: 23 of 30 Issued Date

: Jan. 09, 2019 Report Version

: 01

 

 

 

 

 

 

Label & Location for HP tpn-w139 Contains Realtek Radio Model RTL8822BE Contains FCC ID:TX2-RTL8822BE Contains IC:6317A-RTL8822BE Laptop bottom

 

 

Label information ModelHSN-I31C 1. Images of the e-label screen are provided below:

RMN HSN-I31C Contains Realtek Radio Model:RTL8822BE Contains FCC ID:TX2-RTL8822BE Contains IC:6317A-RTL8822BE 2. The information that will be displayed on the e-label and information that will remain in the user manual is shown below:

FCC ID/IC number Information on E-label In Manual DoC logo Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.) Class A / B Digital Device user manual statements1 Yes Yes No No No Yes No Yes 3. Users are able to access the information in no more than three steps in a devices menu. The actual Steps are: Press esc or f10 > Advanced > Electronic Labels No special access codes or permissions are required to go through the above steps beyond entering a user-defined password to protect against unauthorized access to the device. 4. The information is stored on the device, no special accessories or supplemental plug-ins

(e.g., a SIM/USIM card) are required to access the information. No. 5. Users are provided specific instructions on how to access the information. Yes. 6. The above information must be programmed by the responsible party and the information must be secured in such a manner that third-parties cannot modify it. The e-label information is pre-programmed by the manufacturer. The user cannot modify the e-label formation. 7. When e-labeling is used, a physical temporary label is also required on the product, or a label on the packaging, at the time of importation, marketing, and sales. The physical label will be on the packaging box.

 

 

Label & Location for HP tPx-w143 Contains Realtek Radio Model RTL8822BE Contains FCC ID:TX2-RTL8822BE Contains IC:6317A-RTL8822BE Laptop bottom

 

 

Label information ModelHSN-I30C 1. Images of the e-label screen are provided below:

RMNHSN-I30C Contains Realtek Radio Model:RTL8822BE Contains FCC ID:TX2-RTL8822BE Contains IC:6317A-RTL8822BE 2. The information that will be displayed on the e-label and information that will remain in the user manual is shown below:

FCC ID/IC number Information on E-label In Manual DoC logo Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.) Class A / B Digital Device user manual statements1 Yes Yes No No No Yes No Yes 3. Users are able to access the information in no more than three steps in a devices menu. The actual Steps are: Press esc or f10 > Advanced > Electronic Labels No special access codes or permissions are required to go through the above steps beyond entering a user-defined password to protect against unauthorized access to the device. 4. The information is stored on the device, no special accessories or supplemental plug-ins

(e.g., a SIM/USIM card) are required to access the information. No. 5. Users are provided specific instructions on how to access the information. Yes. 6. The above information must be programmed by the responsible party and the information must be secured in such a manner that third-parties cannot modify it. The e-label information is pre-programmed by the manufacturer. The user cannot modify the e-label formation. 7. When e-labeling is used, a physical temporary label is also required on the product, or a label on the packaging, at the time of importation, marketing, and sales. The physical label will be on the packaging box.

 

 

NA & CA:

Lenovo IdeaPad S540-15IWL GTX Model Name: 81SW INPUT: 20V 4.5A Factory ID: HBDG MO: YNP0BYMDDXXX MTM: 81SWXXXXXX S/N:YNXXXXXX Mfg Date: YY/MM/DD Contains Transmitter Module: FCC ID: TX2-RTL8822BE IC: 6317A-RTL8822BE

 

 

Label & Label Location Lenovo Model: Lenovo IdeaPad S540-14IWL, Lenovo IdeaPad S540-14IWL Touch, Lenovo IdeaPad S540-14API,81ND,81QX,81NH WLAN laster etching is outside of bottom door Contains FCC ID: TX2-RTL8822BE IC: 6317A-RTL8822BE

 

 

RF_160, Issue 02 Declaration of Authorization We Name: Realtek Semiconductor Corp. Address: Innovation Road II, Hsinchu Science Park City: Hsinchu Country: Taiwan Declare that:

Name Representative of agent: Ms. Mandy Wang Agent Company name: BTL Inc. Address: No.3 Jinshagang 1st Road, Shixia, Dalang Town City: Dong Guan Country: China is authorized to apply for Certification and signing related documents of the following product(s), including 731 form(s):

Product description: 802.11a/b/g/n/ac RTL8822BE Combo module Type designation: RTL8822BE Trademark: REALTEK FCC ID : TX2-RTL8822BE on our behalf. Date: 2019/04/11 City: Hsinchu Name: Dana Liaw Function: Project Manager Signature: . Notes:

(1): Required for FCC application

(2): For FCC it must be the Grantee Code owner or the authorized agent.

 

 

Realtek Semiconductor Corp. Edisonstraat 12A Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 C.C.: Telefication B.V., Dept. FCC TCB 6902 PK ZEVENAAR The Netherlands Subject: Requesting Class II permissive change for FCC ID: TX2-RTL8822BE To Whom It May Concern:

The purpose of this letter is to request a Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: TX2-RTL8822BE, original granted on 08/29/ 2016. Type designation: RTL8822BE Trade mark: REALTEK The major change field under this application is:

1. The subject approved module is being used in a portable configuration- a Notebook Computer (Brand name/Model: see SAR test report), the distance between antenna and human body is 3.5mm and the original module report the distance is 20cm. SAR testing was performed to demonstrate RF compliance. 2. The difference compared with the original module design is antenna change. One group antennas are used for the subject approved module in the Notebook Computer as below listed. Original module:

Ant. Type 1 2 Dipole PIFA Brand PSA LYNwave Group 1 for Notebook Computer:

Ant. 1 2 Type PIFA PIFA Antenna Mfr. South Star South Star Antenna Gain

(dBi) 3.14 5 3.5 5 Antenna Gain

(dBi) 2.58 3.34 3.34 3.39 Note 2.4G 5G 2.4G 5G Note 2.4G 5G 2.4G 5G 3. For the Notebook Computer, since it is client without DFS radar detection capability, detection threshold as set to the module remains identical, and would deactivate the link as it is operated with AP only, DFS test can be excluded. Please contact me if you have any questions or need further information regarding this application. Best Regards Name: Dana Liaw Funtion: Project Manager Date: 2019/04/11 Signed:

 

 

Power Inconsistency Declaration Letter We, the undersigning company Company name: Realtek Semiconductor Corp. Address: Innovation Road II, Hsinchu Science Park, Hsinchu, Taiwan Hereby confirm that the following products:

Product description: 802.11a/b/g/n/ac RTL8822BE Combo module Type designation: RTL8822BE Trademark: REALTEK FCC ID : TX2-RTL8822BE That compared to the original modular report, power are observed to be much lower than what original test report has disclosed due to meeting of SAR. In order to meet the requirements of SAR testing in the condition of this time, the power have been lowered down by software updating which will be set by the factory only and shipment will be based on this lower power. FCC

(dBm) FCC

(w) Power setting 0.003 0.004 0.088 0.105 0.124 0.099 0.109 56/50 51/52 52/59 50/55 46/54 Module Original Cert

(w) 0.004 0.004 0.204 0.055 0.135 0.129 0.129 2480 2480 2472 5240 5320 5700 5825 4.37 5.47 19.44 20.22 20.93 19.97 20.38 2402 2402 2412 5180 5260 5500 5745 Date: 2019-04-29 Name: Dana Liaw Telephone: 886-3-5780211 Ext 3164 E-mail: danaliaw@realtek.com Signature:

 

 

FCC, Request for non-disclosure RF_501, Issue 5 Date: 10-Aug-09 Page 1 of 1 Company Name: Realtek Semiconductor Corp. Address:

City:

Country:

Innovation Road II, Hsinchu Science Park Hsinchu Taiwan To: Telefication B.V., Dept. FCC TCB Edisonstraat 12A 6902 PK ZEVENAAR The Netherlands Subject: Request for confidentiality FCC ID: TX2-RTL8822BE Reference number: ######

Dear FCC TCB, 1. Long-Term Confidentiality Pursuant to 47 CFR Section 0.459(a) & (b), we hereby requests non-disclosure and confidential treatment of the following materials submitted in support of FCC certification application:

Bill(s) of Material Block Diagrams Operational Description Schematic Diagrams Tune-up Procedure Above materials contain secrets, proprietary and technical information, which would customarily be guarded from competitors under 47 CFR, section 0.457(d)(2). Disclosure or publication or any portion of this company confidential material to other parties could cause substantial competitive harm and provide unjustified benefits for competitors. 2. Short-Term Confidentiality (STC) Pursuant to Public Notice DA 04-1705 of the Commissions policy, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47 CFR 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, applicant hereby requests Short-Term Confidential treatment of the following materials (note 1):

Internal Photos Users Manual Test Set-up Photos External Photos Justification: This document contains detailed system and equipment description are considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitor unfair advantage in the market. Planned Release Date STC: 180 days from date of grant (notes 2, 3, 4, 5) Date: 2019/04/11 Name and signature of applicant: Dana Liaw Notes:

1) A document or type of document can only have ONE type of confidentiality!

2) Short-Term confidentiality is in principle for 45 days from date of grant; it can be extended max 3 times (total time 180 days max.)!

3) FCC must be informed when marketing begins earlier. 4) Release takes place automatically thus extension must be requested in time. Telefication does not remind you of this!

FCC, Request for non-disclosure RF_501, Issue 5 Date: 10-Aug-09 Page 1 of 1 5) Request for extension or for release must be received by Telefication at least 7 days before date of actual marketing or before expiration of the STC period

 

 

Realtek Semiconductor Corp. Wi-Fi Channel 12 and 13 Declaration Letter Date: 2019-04-23 We, the undersigned company Company Name: Realtek Semiconductor Corp. Address: Innovation Road II, Hsinchu Science Park, Hsinchu, Taiwan Declare that:

Product description: 802.11a/b/g/n/ac RTL8822BE Combo module Type designation: RTL8822BE Brand: REALTEK FCC ID: TX2-RTL8822BE Only channels 1~11 will be used in USA. Country code selection is disabled. If you have any questions regarding the authorization, please do not hesitate to contact us, thank you~

Sincerely, Signature: ________________________ Name: Dana Liaw Tel: 886-3-5780211 Ext 3164 Email: danaliaw@realtek.com

 

 

Realtek Semiconductor Corp. No. 2, Innovation Road II, Hsinchu Science Park, Hsinchu 300, Taiwan Tel: 886-3-5780211 ; Fax: 886-3-5776598 Requesting Class II permissive change for FCC ID: TX2-RTL8822BE Date: Apr. 3, 2019 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 C.C.: SGS Taiwan Limited Subject:

To Whom It May Concern:

The purpose of this letter is to request a Class II Permissive change for FCC ID:

TX2-RTL8822BE Original grant date: 08/29/2016, Applicant: Realtek Semiconductor Corp. The major change filed under this application is 1. The subject approved module is being used in different host (Portable category Configuration, Host Brand/Model: See test report). 2. SAR Testing is performed to demonstrate RF Compliance. 3. The difference compared with the original design is adding 1 antenna to this EUT:

PIFA Antenna, Frequency (MHz) Peak Ant. Gain (dBi) Supplier INPAQ 2402~2480 Main / Aux 5150~5250 Main / Aux 5250~5350 Main / Aux 5470~5725 Main / Aux 5725~5850 Main / Aux

-1.23 / 1.14

-1.21 /-0.75

-0.42 /-0.75 0.45 /-0.19

-0.51 / 0.39 Best Regards Dana Liaw / Project Manager Realtek Semiconductor Corp.

 

 

Inquiry on 08/19/2016 :

Inquiry:

Dear Sir The device is a backpack with WLAN 2Tx only, the appearance/antenna location/surface definition is illustrated in the attached plot1. For the front side of the backpack, the form factor is like a pyramid, and it is flat for backside. About the use scenario, I drawn some pictures for your review. For plot 2, the backpack is behind the humans back, so SAR evaluation with the backpacks backside (surface 4) touching against the flat phantom is required. For plot 3, the backpack may be in front of the user whatever the user is stand or sit, also, the users hand may be near the antenna location. For SAR test configuration, whether we shall make the surfaces 2-1/2-2/3 touching against the flat phantom for body SAR and surface 1 touching against the flat phantom for extremity SAR?

For plot 4, the device may be rarely used like that since the pyramid may make the user uncomfortable, in this case, do we need to evaluate SAR with surface 1 touching against the flat phantom for body SAR?

Thank you FCC response on 08/19/2016 In order to provide you with appropriate guidance Please provide a diagram that includes the dimensions of the device Actual photographs of the device taken from several angles would also Thank you for you inquiry. more information is needed. 1.

(including the thickness of the backpack). Please also include the distances from the antennas to the edges/surfaces of the device. 2. be helpful. Please also show the straps/belts that will secure the device to the user. 3. Please confirm if simultaneous transmission is possible. Also, please provide information about the transmission frequency and conducted powers

(if available). 4. device. Expected duty cycle information would also be helpful. 5. Please provide information about the intended function of the Please provide a user manual, in English, if available.

---Reply from Customer on 08/25/2016---

Dear Sir Thanks for your comment. We reply them as below, thanks. To reply your response 1, you can refer to the attached plot 5/6, includingthe dimensional size and updated antenna location (include the distance fromthe antennas to the edges/surfaces). To reply your response 2, it is under the evaluation process/stage, sothere is no the actual photographs and the straps/belts presently. To reply your response 3, the simultaneous transmission is possible,such as WLAN MIMO. Also, the device supports WLAN2.4G/5G, and the maximum outputpower is 20.5dBm. To reply your response 4, the intended function of the device is to transmitthe data to the smart TV by WLAN. To reply your response 5, it is under the evaluation process/stage, sothere is no the user manual presently. FCC response on 08/31/2016 Thank you for your responses. actual device is available, to ensure all of the possible use cases are known. However, there is some preliminary guidance that can be given based It may be best to submit this inquiry when an on the information provided. Note this guidance may change if when the actual device is available the use cases change. For the plot 2 position, the device should be tested for 1-g SAR at 0 mm from the flat phantom filled with body-tissue simulating liquid. For plot 3, the device should be tested for 10-g extremity SAR at 0 mm from the flat phantom filled with body-tissue simulating liquid for sides/edges 1, 2-

1, and 2-2. Also, edge 3 should not be tested for extremity SAR but instead be tested 1-g SAR at 0 mm from the flat phantom filled with body-tissue simulating liquid. When the user is sitting, edge 3 will most likely be touching

(or in close proximity to) the users upper leg/thighs. The upper legs/thighs are not considered extremities. Therefore, edge 3 should be tested for 1-g SAR. For plot 4, it is difficult to provide exact testing guidance without seeing an actual photograph of the device to determine if its a viable use case. If you would like to cover that position, test surface 1 for 1-g SAR at 0 mm from the flat phantom filled with body-tissue simulating liquid. position, you can exclude the testing of surface 1 for extremity SAR as required for plot 3, since the 1-g SAR at 0 mm for this position is more conservative. If you test in this Once again, this is preliminary guidance and may be subject to change until an actual sample of the device is available. above guidance via this KDB Inquiry when an actual sample is available and the possible use cases are known. It is recommended to reconfirm the

---Reply from Customer on 12/07/2016---

Hello Sir Thanks for your preliminary guidance. We got the actual sample and took some photos for your reference, also, theantenna location of WLAN Tx2 is updated as attached plot 1/2. Besides, there is the protrusion on the backside (plot5) to mount thestrap, just like plot 4/9/10. Also, the manufacturer claimed that using the backpack reversely willnot be allowed, it means that the use scenario would be plot 9/10 only. In this case, for SAR test configuration, if we make the back surfacetouch against the flat phantom with body tissue (1g-SAR<1.6), do you acceptthis?

Thank you FCC response on 12/13/2016 I am assuming this means the backpack cannot be worn on the You state the manufacturer claimed the backpack cannot be used Also, even though the manufacturer claims the backpack cannot be worn Thank you for the clarifying information. Please address the following items. 1. Please provide information about the distance of the TX 2 antenna from the edges and surfaces of the device. 2. reversely. front of the users body. However, this could also mean the backpack is not intended to be worn upside down. Please clarify. 3. reversely there is a possibility this may happen. However, if the distance between the TX 1 antenna and the lower edge of the backpack is large enough, the exposure concerns may be minimized. Please provide the distance between the TX 1 antenna and the lower edge of the backpack. 4. mm in one diagram and 2 mm in another diagram. Please clarify. I am assuming this is for TX 1 antenna. As requested above please provide information about TX 2 antenna. 5. TX 1 antenna) and the bottom case is 35 mm. Does this take into account the protrusions on the back of the device? If not how big are the protrusions?

6. You state the distance between the antenna (assuming this means the You state the distance between the gap of antenna and top case is 4 Once again, please provide a User Manual, in English if available.

---Reply from Customer on 01/04/2017---

Hi Sir Thanks for your comments. To reply your response 1, you may refer to the attached plot 11, TX2 to top surface(2) is 3.7mm, TX2 to back surface(3) is 36.6mm (without taking into account the protrusions on the backside). To reply your response 2, yes, the manufacturer claimed the backpack cannot be used reversely, including the backpack cannot be worn on the front of the users body, and the backpack cannot be worn upside down. To reply your response 3, you may refer to plot 12, the smallest distance between the TX 1 antenna and the lower edge of the backpack is 37.6mm. To reply your response 4, To reply your response 5, you may refer to plot 13, the distance between the gap of TX1 and top surface is 2mm, TX1 to side is 4mm. it doesnt take into account the protrusions on the back of the device, the protrusion height is 6.5mm. To reply your response 6, you may refer to the attached user manual. Thank you

---Reply from Customer on 01/16/2017---

Hello Sir Do you have further comment for this?

Thank you FCC response on 01/30/2017 The user manual provided appears to be for an HP computer, not the equipment mentioned in this inquiry. Please provide the correct user manual. The user manual should include diagrams of how to properly wear the device, specifically showing the user not to wear the device upside down or with the front (the surface labelled surface 1 and 2 in the most recent attachment) surface against their body. Based on the antenna diagrams, due to the large distance between the antennas and the users back when worn in the normal use conditions, SAR testing for the surface that faces the users back may be excluded from SAR testing. Please apply the standalone SAR test exclusion found in FCC KDB Publication 447498 D01 General RF Exposure Guidance v06 to see if you qualify for SAR test exclusion. As for the various edges, if those edges do not qualify for SAR test exclusion based on the formula found in FCC KDB Publication 447498 D01 General RF Exposure Guidance v06, please test for 10-g extremity SAR at 0 mm against the flat phantom filled with body tissue simulating liquid for all edges and surfaces with a transmitting antenna located at 25 mm from that surface or edge to address hand exposure.

---Reply from Customer on 02/13/2017---

Hello Sir Thanks for yourcomment. For the usermanual, the manufacturer will provide it later. For the surfacethat faces the users back, SAR testing cant be excluded based on the maximumspecified output power (20.5dBm for 2.4/5GHz) and the min. distance between theantenna and the users back (41.5mm, including the protrusion height), you mayrefer to plot 15 table. Since the surfacethat faces the users back cant be excluded from SAR testing, and theprotrusions are flat (plot 14), for SAR measurement on that surface, I supposedthat whether we can make the protrusion touch against the flat phantom for1g-SAR<1.6 (body SAR)? (like plot 16 shown) Thank you FCC response on 02/13/2017 Once the correct user manual is available, please respond to this inquiry with it as an attachment. We want to ensure, as mentioned in the previous FCC response on 01/30/2017, the user manual includes diagrams of how to properly wear the device, specifically showing the user not to wear the device upside down or with the front (the surface labelled surface 1 and 2 in the most recent attachment) surface against their body. Since the back surface (labelled as surface 3 in the most recent attachment) does not qualify for SAR test exclusion, please test this surface at 0 mm, with the protrusions touching the flat phantom, similar to what you propose in plot 16.

---Reply from Customer on 02/14/2017---

Hello Sir Thanks for your comment. For the user manual, if it include the diagrams of how to wear the backpackcorrectly, but it doesnt specifically showing the user not to wear the deviceupside down or with the front surface against their body, is this acceptable?

Thank you FCC response on 02/15/2017 It would be preferable if the user manual shows the user not to wear the device upside down or backwards in addition to showing the user how it should be worn correctly (so there is no ambiguity).

---Reply from Customer on 05/17/2017---

Hello Sir Thanks a lot. Please refer to the attached user manual. FCC response on 05/19/2017 Thank you for the updated user manual. As mentioned in the previous FCC response on 02/15/2017, it would be preferable if the user manual shows the user not to wear the device upside down or backwards in addition to showing the user how it should be worn correctly (so there is no ambiguity). However, after reviewing the attached user manual, the diagram provided is sufficient and the proper use condition is clear. That being said, the user manual contains no FCC regulatory information, only EU regulatory information. Please update the user manual to include the appropriate FCC regulatory information.

---Reply from Customer on 05/25/2017---

Please referto the attachment for FCC regulatory information Hello Sir Thanks foryour comment. Thankyou FCC response on 05/26/2017 Thank you for the FCC regulatory information document. The information is acceptable. If you have any additional questions please do not hesitate to ask.

---Reply from Customer on 07/05/2018---

Hello Sir Thankyou Is the inquiry still applicable?

FCC response on 07/10/2018 I am not sure exactly what you are asking. Do you have a new device? The previously issued guidance including the user manual statement requirements is still applicable unless there have been changes made to the device.

---Reply from Customer on 07/11/2018---

Hello Sir No, this is the same device. There are no any changes made to the device except WLAN module is changed. It is still WLAN 802.11a/b/g/n/ac but just change to another model number. In this case, is the inquiry still applicable?

(SAR will be measured fully based on the previously issued guidance including the user manual statement requirements.) Thank you FCC response on 07/18/2018 Yes, the previous guidance still applies. used please ensure the grant conditions grant notes permit the new WLAN module to be used in this context (i.e. it is classified as portable, it can be co-

located with other transmitters if needed, etc.) If a different WLAN module is being

---Reply from Customer on 03/18/2019---

Hello Sir Thanks, we will follow the previous guidance to proceed SAR testing. Thank you FCC response on 03/20/2019 You're welcome. This inquiry is now closed. Attachment Details:

Do not reply to this message. Please select the Reply to an Inquiry Response link from the OET Inquiry System to add any additional information pertaining to this inquiry.

 

 

Realtek Semiconductor Corp. No. 2, Innovation Road II, Hsinchu Science Park, Hsinchu 300, Taiwan Tel: 886-3-5780211 ; Fax: 886-3-5776598 Date: Mar 28, 2019 TO:

Federal Communication Commission Equipment Authorization Branch 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MID 21046 Regarding: FCC ID- TX2-RTL8822BE To whom it may concern:

We, the undersigned, hereby authorize SGS Taiwan Ltd. to act on our behalf in all manners relating to application for equipment authorization with respect to the FCC ID above, including signing of all documents relating to these matters. Any and all acts carried out by the agent on our behalf shall have the same effect as acts of our own. We, the undersigned, hereby certify that we are not subject to a denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S.C. 862. Where our agent signs the application for certification on our behalf, I acknowledge that all responsibility for complying with the terms and conditions for Certification, as specified by Telefication B.V., still resides with << Realtek Semiconductor Corp.>>. This authorization is valid until further written notice from the applicant. Name (Printed): Dana Liaw Title: Project Manager Signature:

On behalf of Company: Realtek Semiconductor Corp. Telephone: 886-3-5780211

 

 

Realtek Semiconductor Corp. No. 2, Innovation Road II, Hsinchu Science Park, Hsinchu 300, Taiwan Tel: 886-3-5780211 ; Fax: 886-3-5776598 Date: March 12, 2019 Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division 7435 Oakland Mills Rd Columbia MD 21046-1609 Subject: Request for Confidentiality FCC ID: TX2-RTL8822BE To Whom It May Concern, Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of Commissions rules (47CFR0.457, 0.459), we are requesting the Commission to withhold the following attachment(s) as confidential document from public disclosure indefinitely. Operational Description Tune up procedure Above mentioned document contains detailed system and equipment description are considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitor an unfair advantage in the market. In additional to above mentioned documents, pursuant to Public Notice DA 04-1705 of the Commission s policy, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47 CFT 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, while ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual marketing of newly authorized devices. We are requesting the commission to grant short-term confidentiality request on the following attachment(s) for 180 days after the grant as outlined in Public Notice DA 04-1705. External Photos Internal Photos Test Setup Photos User Manual It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued. Best Regards, ______________________ Dana Liaw danaliaw@realtek.com

 

 

Realtek Semiconductor Corp. No. 2, Innovation Road II, Hsinchu Science Park, Hsinchu 300, Taiwan Tel: 886-3-5780211 ; Fax: 886-3-5776598 Date: March 12, 2019 To whom it may concern, Please be notified that I, Dana Liaw, have designated Jones Tsai in Sporton International Inc. as the person being responsible for this project and to sign the form 731 and other documentation. Any and all acts carried out by Jones Tsai in Sporton International Inc. on the matters of relating to all processes required in the FCC approval and any communication needed with the national authority, shall have the same legal authority as acts on our own behalf. We further certifies that neither the applicant nor any party to this application, as defined in 47 CFR Ch. 1.2002 (b), is subject to a denial to Federal benefits, that include FCC benefits, pursuant to section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1998, 21 U.S.C. 862. This authorization is limited to the product of as following:

FCC ID: TX2-RTL8822BE Sincerely yours, Dana Liaw danaliaw@realtek.com

 

 

Realtek Semiconductor Corp. No. 2, Innovation Road II, Hsinchu Science Park, Hsinchu 300, Taiwan Tel: 886-3-5780211 ; Fax: 886-3-5776598 Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division 7435 Oakland Mills Rd Columbia MD 21046-1609 SUBJECT: Class II Permissive Change for FCC ID: TX2-RTL8822BE The intension of this application is to enable the modular FCC ID: TX2-RTL8822BE, granted on 08/29/2016 to be integrated in HP Notebook Computer, Model:

HSN-I30C. The module installed into host platform mentioned above is electronically and mechanically identical to the original certified module. The Original FCC testing on module under FCC ID: TX2-RTL8822BE was performed with an antenna of higher gain, and the antenna was connected to the module in an open environment. The current host platform under application uses an antenna of the same type but of lower gain and is installed inside the host platform enclosure. The physical restraints introduced by the host platform should have resulted in equal or lower level of radiated emission. Therefore, additional Radiated emission testing is not necessary. Software security remains unchanged from the original application. Sincerely yours, Dana Liaw danaliaw@realtek.com

 

 

Realtek Semiconductor Corp. No. 2, Innovation Road II, Hsinchu Science Park, Hsinchu 300, Taiwan Tel: 886-3-5780211 ; Fax: 886-3-5776598 Date: March 12, 2019 Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division 7435 Oakland Mills Rd Columbia MD 21046-1609 Subject: Request for Confidentiality FCC ID: TX2-RTL8822BE To Whom It May Concern, Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of Commissions rules (47CFR0.457, 0.459), we are requesting the Commission to withhold the following attachment(s) as confidential document from public disclosure indefinitely. Operational Description Tune up procedure Above mentioned document contains detailed system and equipment description are considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitor an unfair advantage in the market. In additional to above mentioned documents, pursuant to Public Notice DA 04-1705 of the Commission s policy, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47 CFT 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, while ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual marketing of newly authorized devices. We are requesting the commission to grant short-term confidentiality request on the following attachment(s) for 180 days after the grant as outlined in Public Notice DA 04-1705. External Photos Internal Photos Test Setup Photos User Manual It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued. Best Regards, ______________________ Dana Liaw danaliaw@realtek.com

 

 

Power Inconsistency Declaration Letter We, the undersigning company Company name: Realtek Semiconductor Corp. Address: Innovation Road II, Hsinchu Science Park, Hsinchu, Taiwan Hereby confirm that the following products:

Product description: 802.11a/b/g/n/ac RTL8822BE Combo module Type designation: RTL8822BE Trademark: REALTEK FCC ID : TX2-RTL8822BE That compared to the original modular report, power are observed to be much lower than what original test report has disclosed due to meeting of SAR. In order to meet the requirements of SAR testing in the condition of this time, the power have been lowered down by software updating which will be set by the factory only and shipment will be based on this lower power. Date: 2019-01-10 Name: Dana Liaw Telephone: 886-3-5780211 Ext 3164 E-mail: danaliaw@realtek.com Signature:

 

 

Realtek Semiconductor Corp. No. 2, Innovation Road II, Hsinchu Science Park Hsinchu 300, Taiwan Date: December 28, 2018 SUBJECT: FCC Class II Permissive Change We, Realtek Semiconductor Corp. hereby declare that the intention of this Class II Permissive Change is to add a host: Notebook Computer (Model: Lenovo IdeaPad S540-14IWL********, 81ND********, Lenovo IdeaPad S540-14IWL Touch********, 81QX********, Lenovo IdeaPad S540-14API********, 81NH******** (*=0~9, A~Z, a~z, - or blank, for marketing use only, with no impact on RF compliance of the product)/ Brand: Lenovo) to the certified module which was originally granted on 08/29/2016 under FCC ID: TX2-RTL8822BE. The modules mentioned above have been approved and are electronically and mechanically identical to the original instructions and requirements. Therefore, we, Realtek Semiconductor Corp., take the responsibility to ensure each module complied with all requirements after integration in the host and when modules are transmitting simultaneously. Should you have any comments, please have my best attention. Thank you. Sincerely Yours, Dana Liaw / Project Manager Realtek Semiconductor Corp. Tel: 886-3-5780211 Fax: 886-3-5776598 E-mail: danaliaw@realtek.com

 

 

Realtek Semiconductor Corp. No. 2, Innovation Road II, Hsinchu Science Park Hsinchu 300, Taiwan Dec 26, 2018 RSE Justification Letter We, Realtek Semiconductor Corp., declare that the device without RSE testing due to the following:

The end product (Brand: Lenovo, Model: Lenovo IdeaPad S540-14IWL********, 81ND********, Lenovo IdeaPad S540-14IWL Touch********, 81QX********, Lenovo IdeaPad S540-14API********, 81NH******** (*=0~9, A~Z, a~z, - or blank, for marketing use only, with no impact on RF compliance of the product)) with module under FCC ID:

TX2-RTL8822BE was assessed compliant to radiated emission limits per 15.247 in its initial approvals. Original FCC testing was performing with higher gain of antenna. The end product under this application uses same type antenna with lower gain across the emission bands. Hence it is apparent that the current platform yields lower level of radiated emission. The original FCC testing on module under FCC ID: TX2-RTL8822BE was performed when the antenna was connected to the module in an open environment. The current platform under application has the antenna installed inside the laptop enclosure. The physical restraints introduced by laptop enclosure should have resulted in equal or lower level of radiated emission. Should you have any question or comment regarding this matter, please have my best attention. Sincerely yours, Dana Liaw / Project Manager Realtek Semiconductor Corp. Tel: 886-3-5780211 Fax: 886-3-5776598 E-mail: danaliaw@realtek.com

 

 

Realtek Semiconductor Corp. No. 2, Innovation Road II, Hsinchu Science Park Hsinchu 300, Taiwan Date: December 28, 2018 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road - Gate A Columbia, Maryland 21046 Subject: Request for Confidentiality FCC ID: TX2-RTL8822BE To Whom It May Concern, Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of Commissions rules (47CFR0.457, 0.459) and Public Notice DA 04-1705 of the Commission s policy, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47 CFT 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, while ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual marketing of newly authorized devices. We are requesting the commission to grant short-term confidentiality request on the following attachments until 180 days after the Grant Date of Equipment Authorizations. It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued. Best Regards, External Photos Internal Photos Test Setup Photos Users Manual Dana Liaw / Project Manager Realtek Semiconductor Corp. Tel: 886-3-5780211 Fax: 886-3-5776598 E-mail: danaliaw@realtek.com

 

 

Realtek Semiconductor Corp. No. 2, Innovation Road II, Hsinchu Science Park, Hsinchu 300, Taiwan Tel: 886-3-5780211 ; Fax: 886-3-5776598 Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division 7435 Oakland Mills Rd Columbia MD 21046-1609 SUBJECT: Class II Permissive Change for FCC ID: TX2-RTL8822BE The intension of this application is to enable the modular FCC ID: TX2-RTL8822BE, granted on 08/29/2016 to be integrated in HP Notebook PC, Model: TPN-W143. The module installed into host platform mentioned above is electronically and mechanically identical to the original certified module. The Original FCC testing on module under FCC ID: TX2-RTL8822BE was performed with an antenna of higher gain, and the antenna was connected to the module in an open environment. The current host platform under application uses an antenna of the same type but of lower gain and is installed inside the host platform enclosure. The physical restraints introduced by the host platform should have resulted in equal or lower level of radiated emission. Therefore, additional Radiated emission testing is not necessary. Software security remains unchanged from the original application. Except for the change above, the design, hardware and implementation are exactly If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. same with original. Sincerely yours, Dana Liaw danaliaw@realtek.com

 

 

Realtek Semiconductor Corp. No. 2, Innovation Road II, Hsinchu Science Park, Hsinchu 300, Taiwan Tel: 886-3-5780211 ; Fax: 886-3-5776598 Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division 7435 Oakland Mills Rd Columbia MD 21046-1609 SUBJECT: Class II Permissive Change for FCC ID: TX2-RTL8822BE The intension of this application is to enable the modular FCC ID: TX2-RTL8822BE, granted on 08/29/2016 to be integrated in HP Convertible Notebook, Model:

TPN-W139. The module installed into host platform mentioned above is electronically and mechanically identical to the original certified module. The Original FCC testing on module under FCC ID: TX2-RTL8822BE was performed with an antenna of higher gain, and the antenna was connected to the module in an open environment. The current host platform under application uses an antenna of the same type but of lower gain and is installed inside the host platform enclosure. The physical restraints introduced by the host platform should have resulted in equal or lower level of radiated emission. Therefore, additional Radiated emission testing is not necessary. Software security remains unchanged from the original application. Except for the change above, the design, hardware and implementation are exactly If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. same with original. Sincerely yours, Dana Liaw danaliaw@realtek.com

 

 

Realtek Semiconductor Corp. No. 2, Innovation Road II, Hsinchu Science Park, Hsinchu 300, Taiwan Tel: 886-3-5780211 ; Fax: 886-3-5776598 Date: December 18, 2018 Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division 7435 Oakland Mills Rd Columbia MD 21046-1609 Subject: Request for Confidentiality FCC ID: TX2-RTL8822BE To Whom It May Concern, Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of Commissions rules (47CFR0.457, 0.459), we are requesting the Commission to withhold the following attachment(s) as confidential document from public disclosure indefinitely. Operational Description Tune-up Procedure Above mentioned document contains detailed system and equipment description are considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitor an unfair advantage in the market. In additional to above mentioned documents, pursuant to Public Notice DA 04-1705 of the Commission s policy, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47 CFT 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, while ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual marketing of newly authorized devices. We are requesting the commission to grant short-term confidentiality request on the following attachment(s) for 180 days after the grant as outlined in Public Notice DA 04-1705. External Photos Internal Photos Test Setup Photos User Manual It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued. Best Regards, Dana Liaw danaliaw@realtek.com